diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src')
21 files changed, 17085 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/misc.c b/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/misc.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4f0047c --- /dev/null +++ b/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/misc.c @@ -0,0 +1,251 @@ +/** + ****************************************************************************** + * @file misc.c + * @author MCD Application Team + * @version V1.1.1 + * @date 05-March-2012 + * @brief This file provides all the miscellaneous firmware functions (add-on + * to CMSIS functions). + ****************************************************************************** + * @attention + * + * <h2><center>© COPYRIGHT 2012 STMicroelectronics</center></h2> + * + * Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License"); + * You may not use this file except in compliance with the License. + * You may obtain a copy of the License at: + * + * http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2 + * + * Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software + * distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS, + * WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. + * See the License for the specific language governing permissions and + * limitations under the License. + * + ****************************************************************************** + */ + +/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#include "misc.h" + +/** @addtogroup STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver + * @{ + */ + +/** @defgroup MISC + * @brief MISC driver modules + * @{ + */ + +/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#define AIRCR_VECTKEY_MASK ((uint32_t)0x05FA0000) + +/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/ + +/** @defgroup MISC_Private_Functions + * @{ + */ +/** + * +@verbatim + ******************************************************************************* + ##### Interrupts configuration functions ##### + ******************************************************************************* + [..] This section provide functions allowing to configure the NVIC interrupts + (IRQ).The Cortex-M3 exceptions are managed by CMSIS functions. + (#) Configure the NVIC Priority Grouping using NVIC_PriorityGroupConfig() + function according to the following table. + The table below gives the allowed values of the preemption priority + and subpriority according to the Priority Grouping configuration + performed by NVIC_PriorityGroupConfig function. + ============================================================================================================================ + NVIC_PriorityGroup | NVIC_IRQChannelPreemptionPriority | NVIC_IRQChannelSubPriority | Description + ============================================================================================================================ + NVIC_PriorityGroup_0 | 0 | 0-15 | 0 bits for preemption priority + | | | 4 bits for subpriority + ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + NVIC_PriorityGroup_1 | 0-1 | 0-7 | 1 bits for preemption priority + | | | 3 bits for subpriority + ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + NVIC_PriorityGroup_2 | 0-3 | 0-3 | 2 bits for preemption priority + | | | 2 bits for subpriority + ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + NVIC_PriorityGroup_3 | 0-7 | 0-1 | 3 bits for preemption priority + | | | 1 bits for subpriority + ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + NVIC_PriorityGroup_4 | 0-15 | 0 | 4 bits for preemption priority + | | | 0 bits for subpriority + ============================================================================================================================ + + + (#) Enable and Configure the priority of the selected IRQ Channels. + + -@- When the NVIC_PriorityGroup_0 is selected, it will no any nested interrupt, + the IRQ priority will be managed only by subpriority. + The sub-priority is only used to sort pending exception priorities, + and does not affect active exceptions. + -@- Lower priority values gives higher priority. + -@- Priority Order: + (#@) Lowest Preemption priority. + (#@) Lowest Subpriority. + (#@) Lowest hardware priority (IRQn position). + +@endverbatim +*/ + +/** + * @brief Configures the priority grouping: preemption priority and subpriority. + * @param NVIC_PriorityGroup: specifies the priority grouping bits length. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg NVIC_PriorityGroup_0: 0 bits for preemption priority + * 4 bits for subpriority. + * @note When NVIC_PriorityGroup_0 is selected, it will no be any nested + * interrupt. This interrupts priority is managed only with subpriority. + * @arg NVIC_PriorityGroup_1: 1 bits for preemption priority. + * 3 bits for subpriority. + * @arg NVIC_PriorityGroup_2: 2 bits for preemption priority. + * 2 bits for subpriority. + * @arg NVIC_PriorityGroup_3: 3 bits for preemption priority. + * 1 bits for subpriority. + * @arg NVIC_PriorityGroup_4: 4 bits for preemption priority. + * 0 bits for subpriority. + * @retval None + */ +void NVIC_PriorityGroupConfig(uint32_t NVIC_PriorityGroup) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_NVIC_PRIORITY_GROUP(NVIC_PriorityGroup)); + + /* Set the PRIGROUP[10:8] bits according to NVIC_PriorityGroup value */ + SCB->AIRCR = AIRCR_VECTKEY_MASK | NVIC_PriorityGroup; +} + +/** + * @brief Initializes the NVIC peripheral according to the specified + * parameters in the NVIC_InitStruct. + * @note To configure interrupts priority correctly, the NVIC_PriorityGroupConfig() + * function should be called before. + * @param NVIC_InitStruct: pointer to a NVIC_InitTypeDef structure that contains + * the configuration information for the specified NVIC peripheral. + * @retval None + */ +void NVIC_Init(NVIC_InitTypeDef* NVIC_InitStruct) +{ + uint8_t tmppriority = 0x00, tmppre = 0x00, tmpsub = 0x0F; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NVIC_InitStruct->NVIC_IRQChannelCmd)); + assert_param(IS_NVIC_PREEMPTION_PRIORITY(NVIC_InitStruct->NVIC_IRQChannelPreemptionPriority)); + assert_param(IS_NVIC_SUB_PRIORITY(NVIC_InitStruct->NVIC_IRQChannelSubPriority)); + + if (NVIC_InitStruct->NVIC_IRQChannelCmd != DISABLE) + { + /* Compute the Corresponding IRQ Priority --------------------------------*/ + tmppriority = (0x700 - ((SCB->AIRCR) & (uint32_t)0x700))>> 0x08; + tmppre = (0x4 - tmppriority); + tmpsub = tmpsub >> tmppriority; + + tmppriority = (uint32_t)NVIC_InitStruct->NVIC_IRQChannelPreemptionPriority << tmppre; + tmppriority |= (uint8_t)(NVIC_InitStruct->NVIC_IRQChannelSubPriority & tmpsub); + tmppriority = tmppriority << 0x04; + + NVIC->IP[NVIC_InitStruct->NVIC_IRQChannel] = tmppriority; + + /* Enable the Selected IRQ Channels --------------------------------------*/ + NVIC->ISER[NVIC_InitStruct->NVIC_IRQChannel >> 0x05] = + (uint32_t)0x01 << (NVIC_InitStruct->NVIC_IRQChannel & (uint8_t)0x1F); + } + else + { + /* Disable the Selected IRQ Channels -------------------------------------*/ + NVIC->ICER[NVIC_InitStruct->NVIC_IRQChannel >> 0x05] = + (uint32_t)0x01 << (NVIC_InitStruct->NVIC_IRQChannel & (uint8_t)0x1F); + } +} + +/** + * @brief Sets the vector table location and Offset. + * @param NVIC_VectTab: specifies if the vector table is in RAM or FLASH memory. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg NVIC_VectTab_RAM: Vector Table in internal SRAM. + * @arg NVIC_VectTab_FLASH: Vector Table in internal FLASH. + * @param Offset: Vector Table base offset field. This value must be a multiple of 0x200. + * @retval None + */ +void NVIC_SetVectorTable(uint32_t NVIC_VectTab, uint32_t Offset) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_NVIC_VECTTAB(NVIC_VectTab)); + assert_param(IS_NVIC_OFFSET(Offset)); + + SCB->VTOR = NVIC_VectTab | (Offset & (uint32_t)0x1FFFFF80); +} + +/** + * @brief Selects the condition for the system to enter low power mode. + * @param LowPowerMode: Specifies the new mode for the system to enter low power mode. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg NVIC_LP_SEVONPEND: Low Power SEV on Pend. + * @arg NVIC_LP_SLEEPDEEP: Low Power DEEPSLEEP request. + * @arg NVIC_LP_SLEEPONEXIT: Low Power Sleep on Exit. + * @param NewState: new state of LP condition. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void NVIC_SystemLPConfig(uint8_t LowPowerMode, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_NVIC_LP(LowPowerMode)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + SCB->SCR |= LowPowerMode; + } + else + { + SCB->SCR &= (uint32_t)(~(uint32_t)LowPowerMode); + } +} + +/** + * @brief Configures the SysTick clock source. + * @param SysTick_CLKSource: specifies the SysTick clock source. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg SysTick_CLKSource_HCLK_Div8: AHB clock divided by 8 selected as SysTick clock source. + * @arg SysTick_CLKSource_HCLK: AHB clock selected as SysTick clock source. + * @retval None + */ +void SysTick_CLKSourceConfig(uint32_t SysTick_CLKSource) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_SYSTICK_CLK_SOURCE(SysTick_CLKSource)); + + if (SysTick_CLKSource == SysTick_CLKSource_HCLK) + { + SysTick->CTRL |= SysTick_CLKSource_HCLK; + } + else + { + SysTick->CTRL &= SysTick_CLKSource_HCLK_Div8; + } +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/ diff --git a/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32l1xx_adc.c b/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32l1xx_adc.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..25bb499 --- /dev/null +++ b/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32l1xx_adc.c @@ -0,0 +1,1909 @@ +/** + ****************************************************************************** + * @file stm32l1xx_adc.c + * @author MCD Application Team + * @version V1.1.1 + * @date 05-March-2012 + * @brief This file provides firmware functions to manage the following + * functionalities of the Analog to Digital Convertor (ADC) peripheral: + * + Initialization and Configuration + * + Power saving + * + Analog Watchdog configuration + * + Temperature Sensor & Vrefint (Voltage Reference internal) management + * + Regular Channels Configuration + * + Regular Channels DMA Configuration + * + Injected channels Configuration + * + Interrupts and flags management + * + * @verbatim +================================================================================ + ##### How to use this driver ##### +================================================================================ + [..] + (#) Configure the ADC Prescaler, conversion resolution and data alignment + using the ADC_Init() function. + (#) Activate the ADC peripheral using ADC_Cmd() function. + + *** Regular channels group configuration *** + ============================================ + [..] + (+) To configure the ADC regular channels group features, use + ADC_Init() and ADC_RegularChannelConfig() functions. + (+) To activate the continuous mode, use the ADC_continuousModeCmd() + function. + (+) To configurate and activate the Discontinuous mode, use the + ADC_DiscModeChannelCountConfig() and ADC_DiscModeCmd() functions. + (+) To read the ADC converted values, use the ADC_GetConversionValue() + function. + + *** DMA for Regular channels group features configuration *** + ============================================================= + [..] + (+) To enable the DMA mode for regular channels group, use the + ADC_DMACmd() function. + (+) To enable the generation of DMA requests continuously at the end + of the last DMA transfer, use the ADC_DMARequestAfterLastTransferCmd() + function. + + *** Injected channels group configuration *** + ============================================= + [..] + (+) To configure the ADC Injected channels group features, use + ADC_InjectedChannelConfig() and ADC_InjectedSequencerLengthConfig() + functions. + (+) To activate the continuous mode, use the ADC_continuousModeCmd() + function. + (+) To activate the Injected Discontinuous mode, use the + ADC_InjectedDiscModeCmd() function. + (+) To activate the AutoInjected mode, use the ADC_AutoInjectedConvCmd() + function. + (+) To read the ADC converted values, use the ADC_GetInjectedConversionValue() + function. + + @endverbatim + * + ****************************************************************************** + * @attention + * + * <h2><center>© COPYRIGHT 2012 STMicroelectronics</center></h2> + * + * Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License"); + * You may not use this file except in compliance with the License. + * You may obtain a copy of the License at: + * + * http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2 + * + * Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software + * distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS, + * WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. + * See the License for the specific language governing permissions and + * limitations under the License. + * + ****************************************************************************** + */ + +/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#include "stm32l1xx_adc.h" +#include "stm32l1xx_rcc.h" + +/** @addtogroup STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver + * @{ + */ + +/** @defgroup ADC + * @brief ADC driver modules + * @{ + */ + +/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* ADC DISCNUM mask */ +#define CR1_DISCNUM_RESET ((uint32_t)0xFFFF1FFF) + +/* ADC AWDCH mask */ +#define CR1_AWDCH_RESET ((uint32_t)0xFFFFFFE0) + +/* ADC Analog watchdog enable mode mask */ +#define CR1_AWDMODE_RESET ((uint32_t)0xFF3FFDFF) + +/* CR1 register Mask */ +#define CR1_CLEAR_MASK ((uint32_t)0xFCFFFEFF) + +/* ADC DELAY mask */ +#define CR2_DELS_RESET ((uint32_t)0xFFFFFF0F) + +/* ADC JEXTEN mask */ +#define CR2_JEXTEN_RESET ((uint32_t)0xFFCFFFFF) + +/* ADC JEXTSEL mask */ +#define CR2_JEXTSEL_RESET ((uint32_t)0xFFF0FFFF) + +/* CR2 register Mask */ +#define CR2_CLEAR_MASK ((uint32_t)0xC0FFF7FD) + +/* ADC SQx mask */ +#define SQR5_SQ_SET ((uint32_t)0x0000001F) +#define SQR4_SQ_SET ((uint32_t)0x0000001F) +#define SQR3_SQ_SET ((uint32_t)0x0000001F) +#define SQR2_SQ_SET ((uint32_t)0x0000001F) +#define SQR1_SQ_SET ((uint32_t)0x0000001F) + +/* ADC L Mask */ +#define SQR1_L_RESET ((uint32_t)0xFE0FFFFF) + +/* ADC JSQx mask */ +#define JSQR_JSQ_SET ((uint32_t)0x0000001F) + +/* ADC JL mask */ +#define JSQR_JL_SET ((uint32_t)0x00300000) +#define JSQR_JL_RESET ((uint32_t)0xFFCFFFFF) + +/* ADC SMPx mask */ +#define SMPR1_SMP_SET ((uint32_t)0x00000007) +#define SMPR2_SMP_SET ((uint32_t)0x00000007) +#define SMPR3_SMP_SET ((uint32_t)0x00000007) +#define SMPR0_SMP_SET ((uint32_t)0x00000007) + +/* ADC JDRx registers offset */ +#define JDR_OFFSET ((uint8_t)0x30) + +/* ADC CCR register Mask */ +#define CR_CLEAR_MASK ((uint32_t)0xFFFCFFFF) + +/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/ + +/** @defgroup ADC_Private_Functions + * @{ + */ + +/** @defgroup ADC_Group1 Initialization and Configuration functions + * @brief Initialization and Configuration functions. + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### Initialization and Configuration functions ##### + =============================================================================== + [..] This section provides functions allowing to: + (+) Initialize and configure the ADC Prescaler. + (+) ADC Conversion Resolution (12bit..6bit). + (+) Scan Conversion Mode (multichannel or one channel) for regular group. + (+) ADC Continuous Conversion Mode (Continuous or Single conversion) for + regular group. + (+) External trigger Edge and source of regular group. + (+) Converted data alignment (left or right). + (+) The number of ADC conversions that will be done using the sequencer + for regular channel group. + (+) Enable or disable the ADC peripheral. + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Deinitializes ADC1 peripheral registers to their default reset values. + * @param None + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_DeInit(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + + if(ADCx == ADC1) + { + /* Enable ADC1 reset state */ + RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_ADC1, ENABLE); + /* Release ADC1 from reset state */ + RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_ADC1, DISABLE); + } +} + +/** + * @brief Initializes the ADCx peripheral according to the specified parameters + * in the ADC_InitStruct. + * @note This function is used to configure the global features of the ADC ( + * Resolution and Data Alignment), however, the rest of the configuration + * parameters are specific to the regular channels group (scan mode + * activation, continuous mode activation, External trigger source and + * edge, number of conversion in the regular channels group sequencer). + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1 to select the ADC peripheral. + * @param ADC_InitStruct: pointer to an ADC_InitTypeDef structure that contains + * the configuration information for the specified ADC peripheral. + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_Init(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, ADC_InitTypeDef* ADC_InitStruct) +{ + uint32_t tmpreg1 = 0; + uint8_t tmpreg2 = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_RESOLUTION(ADC_InitStruct->ADC_Resolution)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(ADC_InitStruct->ADC_ScanConvMode)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(ADC_InitStruct->ADC_ContinuousConvMode)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_EXT_TRIG_EDGE(ADC_InitStruct->ADC_ExternalTrigConvEdge)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_EXT_TRIG(ADC_InitStruct->ADC_ExternalTrigConv)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_DATA_ALIGN(ADC_InitStruct->ADC_DataAlign)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_REGULAR_LENGTH(ADC_InitStruct->ADC_NbrOfConversion)); + + /*---------------------------- ADCx CR1 Configuration -----------------*/ + /* Get the ADCx CR1 value */ + tmpreg1 = ADCx->CR1; + /* Clear RES and SCAN bits */ + tmpreg1 &= CR1_CLEAR_MASK; + /* Configure ADCx: scan conversion mode and resolution */ + /* Set SCAN bit according to ADC_ScanConvMode value */ + /* Set RES bit according to ADC_Resolution value */ + tmpreg1 |= (uint32_t)(((uint32_t)ADC_InitStruct->ADC_ScanConvMode << 8) | ADC_InitStruct->ADC_Resolution); + /* Write to ADCx CR1 */ + ADCx->CR1 = tmpreg1; + + /*---------------------------- ADCx CR2 Configuration -----------------*/ + /* Get the ADCx CR2 value */ + tmpreg1 = ADCx->CR2; + /* Clear CONT, ALIGN, EXTEN and EXTSEL bits */ + tmpreg1 &= CR2_CLEAR_MASK; + /* Configure ADCx: external trigger event and edge, data alignment and continuous conversion mode */ + /* Set ALIGN bit according to ADC_DataAlign value */ + /* Set EXTEN bits according to ADC_ExternalTrigConvEdge value */ + /* Set EXTSEL bits according to ADC_ExternalTrigConv value */ + /* Set CONT bit according to ADC_ContinuousConvMode value */ + tmpreg1 |= (uint32_t)(ADC_InitStruct->ADC_DataAlign | ADC_InitStruct->ADC_ExternalTrigConv | + ADC_InitStruct->ADC_ExternalTrigConvEdge | ((uint32_t)ADC_InitStruct->ADC_ContinuousConvMode << 1)); + /* Write to ADCx CR2 */ + ADCx->CR2 = tmpreg1; + + /*---------------------------- ADCx SQR1 Configuration -----------------*/ + /* Get the ADCx SQR1 value */ + tmpreg1 = ADCx->SQR1; + /* Clear L bits */ + tmpreg1 &= SQR1_L_RESET; + /* Configure ADCx: regular channel sequence length */ + /* Set L bits according to ADC_NbrOfConversion value */ + tmpreg2 |= (uint8_t)(ADC_InitStruct->ADC_NbrOfConversion - (uint8_t)1); + tmpreg1 |= ((uint32_t)tmpreg2 << 20); + /* Write to ADCx SQR1 */ + ADCx->SQR1 = tmpreg1; +} + +/** + * @brief Fills each ADC_InitStruct member with its default value. + * @note This function is used to initialize the global features of the ADC ( + * Resolution and Data Alignment), however, the rest of the configuration + * parameters are specific to the regular channels group (scan mode + * activation, continuous mode activation, External trigger source and + * edge, number of conversion in the regular channels group sequencer). + * @param ADC_InitStruct: pointer to an ADC_InitTypeDef structure which will + * be initialized. + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_StructInit(ADC_InitTypeDef* ADC_InitStruct) +{ + /* Reset ADC init structure parameters values */ + /* Initialize the ADC_Resolution member */ + ADC_InitStruct->ADC_Resolution = ADC_Resolution_12b; + + /* Initialize the ADC_ScanConvMode member */ + ADC_InitStruct->ADC_ScanConvMode = DISABLE; + + /* Initialize the ADC_ContinuousConvMode member */ + ADC_InitStruct->ADC_ContinuousConvMode = DISABLE; + + /* Initialize the ADC_ExternalTrigConvEdge member */ + ADC_InitStruct->ADC_ExternalTrigConvEdge = ADC_ExternalTrigConvEdge_None; + + /* Initialize the ADC_ExternalTrigConv member */ + ADC_InitStruct->ADC_ExternalTrigConv = ADC_ExternalTrigConv_T2_CC2; + + /* Initialize the ADC_DataAlign member */ + ADC_InitStruct->ADC_DataAlign = ADC_DataAlign_Right; + + /* Initialize the ADC_NbrOfConversion member */ + ADC_InitStruct->ADC_NbrOfConversion = 1; +} + +/** + * @brief Initializes the ADCs peripherals according to the specified parameters + * in the ADC_CommonInitStruct. + * @param ADC_CommonInitStruct: pointer to an ADC_CommonInitTypeDef structure + * that contains the configuration information (Prescaler) for ADC1 peripheral. + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_CommonInit(ADC_CommonInitTypeDef* ADC_CommonInitStruct) +{ + uint32_t tmpreg = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_PRESCALER(ADC_CommonInitStruct->ADC_Prescaler)); + + /*---------------------------- ADC CCR Configuration -----------------*/ + /* Get the ADC CCR value */ + tmpreg = ADC->CCR; + + /* Clear ADCPRE bit */ + tmpreg &= CR_CLEAR_MASK; + + /* Configure ADCx: ADC prescaler according to ADC_Prescaler */ + tmpreg |= (uint32_t)(ADC_CommonInitStruct->ADC_Prescaler); + + /* Write to ADC CCR */ + ADC->CCR = tmpreg; +} + +/** + * @brief Fills each ADC_CommonInitStruct member with its default value. + * @param ADC_CommonInitStruct: pointer to an ADC_CommonInitTypeDef structure + * which will be initialized. + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_CommonStructInit(ADC_CommonInitTypeDef* ADC_CommonInitStruct) +{ + /* Reset ADC init structure parameters values */ + /* Initialize the ADC_Prescaler member */ + ADC_CommonInitStruct->ADC_Prescaler = ADC_Prescaler_Div1; +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the specified ADC peripheral. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1 to select the ADC1 peripheral. + * @param NewState: new state of the ADCx peripheral. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_Cmd(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Set the ADON bit to wake up the ADC from power down mode */ + ADCx->CR2 |= (uint32_t)ADC_CR2_ADON; + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected ADC peripheral */ + ADCx->CR2 &= (uint32_t)(~ADC_CR2_ADON); + } +} + +/** + * @brief Selects the specified ADC Channels Bank. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1 to select the ADC1 peripheral. + * @param ADC_Bank: ADC Channels Bank. + * @arg ADC_Bank_A: ADC Channels Bank A. + * @arg ADC_Bank_B: ADC Channels Bank B. + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_BankSelection(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, uint8_t ADC_Bank) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_BANK(ADC_Bank)); + + if (ADC_Bank != ADC_Bank_A) + { + /* Set the ADC_CFG bit to select the ADC Bank B channels */ + ADCx->CR2 |= (uint32_t)ADC_CR2_CFG; + } + else + { + /* Reset the ADC_CFG bit to select the ADC Bank A channels */ + ADCx->CR2 &= (uint32_t)(~ADC_CR2_CFG); + } +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup ADC_Group2 Power saving functions + * @brief Power saving functions + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### Power saving functions ##### + =============================================================================== + [..] This section provides functions allowing to reduce power consumption. + [..] The two function must be combined to get the maximal benefits: + When the ADC frequency is higher than the CPU one, it is recommended to: + (#) Insert a freeze delay : + ==> using ADC_DelaySelectionConfig(ADC1, ADC_DelayLength_Freeze). + (#) Enable the power down in Idle and Delay phases : + ==> using ADC_PowerDownCmd(ADC1, ADC_PowerDown_Idle_Delay, ENABLE). + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the ADC Power Down during Delay and/or Idle phase. + * @note ADC power-on and power-off can be managed by hardware to cut the + * consumption when the ADC is not converting. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1 to select the ADC1 peripheral. + * @param ADC_PowerDown: The ADC power down configuration. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg ADC_PowerDown_Delay: ADC is powered down during delay phase. + * @arg ADC_PowerDown_Idle: ADC is powered down during Idle phase. + * @arg ADC_PowerDown_Idle_Delay: ADC is powered down during Delay and Idle phases. + * @note The ADC can be powered down: + * @note During the hardware delay insertion (using the ADC_PowerDown_Delay + * parameter). + * => The ADC is powered up again at the end of the delay. + * @note During the ADC is waiting for a trigger event ( using the + * ADC_PowerDown_Idle parameter). + * => The ADC is powered up at the next trigger event. + * @note During the hardware delay insertion or the ADC is waiting for a + * trigger event (using the ADC_PowerDown_Idle_Delay parameter). + * => The ADC is powered up only at the end of the delay and at the + * next trigger event. + * @param NewState: new state of the ADCx power down. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_PowerDownCmd(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, uint32_t ADC_PowerDown, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_POWER_DOWN(ADC_PowerDown)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the ADC power-down during Delay and/or Idle phase */ + ADCx->CR1 |= ADC_PowerDown; + } + else + { + /* Disable The ADC power-down during Delay and/or Idle phase */ + ADCx->CR1 &= (uint32_t)~ADC_PowerDown; + } +} + +/** + * @brief Defines the length of the delay which is applied after a conversion + * or a sequence of conversion. + * @note When the CPU clock is not fast enough to manage the data rate, a + * Hardware delay can be introduced between ADC conversions to reduce + * this data rate. + * @note The Hardware delay is inserted after : + * - each regular conversion. + * - after each sequence of injected conversions. + * @note No Hardware delay is inserted between conversions of different groups. + * @note When the hardware delay is not enough, the Freeze Delay Mode can be + * selected and a new conversion can start only if all the previous data + * of the same group have been treated: + * - for a regular conversion: once the ADC conversion data register has + * been read (using ADC_GetConversionValue() function) or if the EOC + * Flag has been cleared (using ADC_ClearFlag() function). + * - for an injected conversion: when the JEOC bit has been cleared + * (using ADC_ClearFlag() function). + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1 to select the ADC1 peripheral. + * @param ADC_DelayLength: The length of delay which is applied after a + * conversion or a sequence of conversion. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg ADC_DelayLength_None: No delay. + * @arg ADC_DelayLength_Freeze: Delay until the converted data has been read. + * @arg ADC_DelayLength_7Cycles: Delay length equal to 7 APB clock cycles. + * @arg ADC_DelayLength_15Cycles: Delay length equal to 15 APB clock cycles + * @arg ADC_DelayLength_31Cycles: Delay length equal to 31 APB clock cycles + * @arg ADC_DelayLength_63Cycles: Delay length equal to 63 APB clock cycles + * @arg ADC_DelayLength_127Cycles: Delay length equal to 127 APB clock cycles + * @arg ADC_DelayLength_255Cycles: Delay length equal to 255 APB clock cycles + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_DelaySelectionConfig(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, uint8_t ADC_DelayLength) +{ + uint32_t tmpreg = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_DELAY_LENGTH(ADC_DelayLength)); + + /* Get the old register value */ + tmpreg = ADCx->CR2; + /* Clear the old delay length */ + tmpreg &= CR2_DELS_RESET; + /* Set the delay length */ + tmpreg |= ADC_DelayLength; + /* Store the new register value */ + ADCx->CR2 = tmpreg; + +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup ADC_Group3 Analog Watchdog configuration functions + * @brief Analog Watchdog configuration functions. + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### Analog Watchdog configuration functions ##### + =============================================================================== + [..] This section provides functions allowing to configure the Analog Watchdog + (AWD) feature in the ADC. + [..] A typical configuration Analog Watchdog is done following these steps : + (#) the ADC guarded channel(s) is (are) selected using the + ADC_AnalogWatchdogSingleChannelConfig() function. + (#) The Analog watchdog lower and higher threshold are configured using + the ADC_AnalogWatchdogThresholdsConfig() function. + (#) The Analog watchdog is enabled and configured to enable the check, + on one or more channels, using the ADC_AnalogWatchdogCmd() function. + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the analog watchdog on single/all regular + * or injected channels. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1 to select the ADC1 peripheral. + * @param ADC_AnalogWatchdog: the ADC analog watchdog configuration. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg ADC_AnalogWatchdog_SingleRegEnable: Analog watchdog on a single + * regular channel. + * @arg ADC_AnalogWatchdog_SingleInjecEnable: Analog watchdog on a single + * injected channel. + * @arg ADC_AnalogWatchdog_SingleRegOrInjecEnable: Analog watchdog on a + * single regular or injected channel. + * @arg ADC_AnalogWatchdog_AllRegEnable: Analog watchdog on all regular + * channel. + * @arg ADC_AnalogWatchdog_AllInjecEnable: Analog watchdog on all injected + * channel. + * @arg ADC_AnalogWatchdog_AllRegAllInjecEnable: Analog watchdog on all + * regular and injected channels. + * @arg ADC_AnalogWatchdog_None: No channel guarded by the analog watchdog. + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_AnalogWatchdogCmd(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, uint32_t ADC_AnalogWatchdog) +{ + uint32_t tmpreg = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_ANALOG_WATCHDOG(ADC_AnalogWatchdog)); + + /* Get the old register value */ + tmpreg = ADCx->CR1; + /* Clear AWDEN, JAWDEN and AWDSGL bits */ + tmpreg &= CR1_AWDMODE_RESET; + /* Set the analog watchdog enable mode */ + tmpreg |= ADC_AnalogWatchdog; + /* Store the new register value */ + ADCx->CR1 = tmpreg; +} + +/** + * @brief Configures the high and low thresholds of the analog watchdog. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1 to select the ADC1 peripheral. + * @param HighThreshold: the ADC analog watchdog High threshold value. + * This parameter must be a 12bit value. + * @param LowThreshold: the ADC analog watchdog Low threshold value. + * This parameter must be a 12bit value. + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_AnalogWatchdogThresholdsConfig(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, uint16_t HighThreshold, + uint16_t LowThreshold) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_THRESHOLD(HighThreshold)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_THRESHOLD(LowThreshold)); + + /* Set the ADCx high threshold */ + ADCx->HTR = HighThreshold; + /* Set the ADCx low threshold */ + ADCx->LTR = LowThreshold; +} + +/** + * @brief Configures the analog watchdog guarded single channel. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1 to select the ADC1 peripheral. + * @param ADC_Channel: the ADC channel to configure for the analog watchdog. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg ADC_Channel_0: ADC Channel0 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_1: ADC Channel1 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_2: ADC Channel2 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_3: ADC Channel3 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_4: ADC Channel4 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_5: ADC Channel5 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_6: ADC Channel6 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_7: ADC Channel7 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_8: ADC Channel8 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_9: ADC Channel9 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_10: ADC Channel10 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_11: ADC Channel11 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_12: ADC Channel12 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_13: ADC Channel13 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_14: ADC Channel14 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_15: ADC Channel15 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_16: ADC Channel16 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_17: ADC Channel17 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_18: ADC Channel18 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_19: ADC Channel19 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_20: ADC Channel20 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_21: ADC Channel21 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_22: ADC Channel22 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_23: ADC Channel23 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_24: ADC Channel24 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_25: ADC Channel25 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_27: ADC Channel27 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_28: ADC Channel28 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_29: ADC Channel29 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_30: ADC Channel30 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_31: ADC Channel31 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_0b: ADC Channel0b selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_1b: ADC Channel1b selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_2b: ADC Channel2b selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_3b: ADC Channel3b selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_6b: ADC Channel6b selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_7b: ADC Channel7b selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_8b: ADC Channel8b selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_9b: ADC Channel9b selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_10b: ADC Channel10b selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_11b: ADC Channel11b selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_12b: ADC Channel12b selected + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_AnalogWatchdogSingleChannelConfig(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, uint8_t ADC_Channel) +{ + uint32_t tmpreg = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_CHANNEL(ADC_Channel)); + + /* Get the old register value */ + tmpreg = ADCx->CR1; + /* Clear the Analog watchdog channel select bits */ + tmpreg &= CR1_AWDCH_RESET; + /* Set the Analog watchdog channel */ + tmpreg |= ADC_Channel; + /* Store the new register value */ + ADCx->CR1 = tmpreg; +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup ADC_Group4 Temperature Sensor & Vrefint (Voltage Reference internal) management function + * @brief Temperature Sensor & Vrefint (Voltage Reference internal) management function. + * +@verbatim + ========================================================================================= + ##### Temperature Sensor and Vrefint (Voltage Reference internal) management function ##### + ========================================================================================= + [..] This section provides a function allowing to enable/ disable the internal + connections between the ADC and the Temperature Sensor and the Vrefint + source. + [..] A typical configuration to get the Temperature sensor and Vrefint channels + voltages is done following these steps : + (#) Enable the internal connection of Temperature sensor and Vrefint sources + with the ADC channels using ADC_TempSensorVrefintCmd() function. + (#) select the ADC_Channel_TempSensor and/or ADC_Channel_Vrefint using + ADC_RegularChannelConfig() or ADC_InjectedChannelConfig() functions. + (#) Get the voltage values, using ADC_GetConversionValue() or + ADC_GetInjectedConversionValue(). +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the temperature sensor and Vrefint channel. + * @param NewState: new state of the temperature sensor and Vref int channels. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_TempSensorVrefintCmd(FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the temperature sensor and Vrefint channel*/ + ADC->CCR |= (uint32_t)ADC_CCR_TSVREFE; + } + else + { + /* Disable the temperature sensor and Vrefint channel*/ + ADC->CCR &= (uint32_t)(~ADC_CCR_TSVREFE); + } +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup ADC_Group5 Regular Channels Configuration functions + * @brief Regular Channels Configuration functions. + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### Regular Channels Configuration functions ##### + =============================================================================== + [..] This section provides functions allowing to manage the ADC regular channels, + it is composed of 2 sub sections : + (#) Configuration and management functions for regular channels: This + subsection provides functions allowing to configure the ADC regular + channels : + (++) Configure the rank in the regular group sequencer for each channel. + (++) Configure the sampling time for each channel. + (++) select the conversion Trigger for regular channels. + (++) select the desired EOC event behavior configuration. + (++) Activate the continuous Mode (*). + (++) Activate the Discontinuous Mode. + -@@- Please Note that the following features for regular channels are + configurated using the ADC_Init() function : + (+@@) scan mode activation. + (+@@) continuous mode activation (**). + (+@@) External trigger source. + (+@@) External trigger edge. + (+@@) number of conversion in the regular channels group sequencer. + -@@- (*) and (**) are performing the same configuration. + (#) Get the conversion data: This subsection provides an important function + in the ADC peripheral since it returns the converted data of the current + regular channel. When the Conversion value is read, the EOC Flag is + automatically cleared. +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Configures for the selected ADC regular channel its corresponding + * rank in the sequencer and its sampling time. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1 to select the ADC peripheral. + * @param ADC_Channel: the ADC channel to configure. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg ADC_Channel_0: ADC Channel0 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_1: ADC Channel1 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_2: ADC Channel2 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_3: ADC Channel3 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_4: ADC Channel4 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_5: ADC Channel5 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_6: ADC Channel6 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_7: ADC Channel7 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_8: ADC Channel8 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_9: ADC Channel9 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_10: ADC Channel10 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_11: ADC Channel11 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_12: ADC Channel12 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_13: ADC Channel13 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_14: ADC Channel14 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_15: ADC Channel15 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_16: ADC Channel16 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_17: ADC Channel17 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_18: ADC Channel18 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_19: ADC Channel19 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_20: ADC Channel20 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_21: ADC Channel21 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_22: ADC Channel22 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_23: ADC Channel23 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_24: ADC Channel24 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_25: ADC Channel25 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_27: ADC Channel27 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_28: ADC Channel28 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_29: ADC Channel29 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_30: ADC Channel30 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_31: ADC Channel31 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_0b: ADC Channel0b selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_1b: ADC Channel1b selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_2b: ADC Channel2b selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_3b: ADC Channel3b selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_6b: ADC Channel6b selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_7b: ADC Channel7b selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_8b: ADC Channel8b selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_9b: ADC Channel9b selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_10b: ADC Channel10b selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_11b: ADC Channel11b selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_12b: ADC Channel12b selected + * @param Rank: The rank in the regular group sequencer. This parameter + * must be between 1 to 28. + * @param ADC_SampleTime: The sample time value to be set for the selected + * channel. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg ADC_SampleTime_4Cycles: Sample time equal to 4 cycles + * @arg ADC_SampleTime_9Cycles: Sample time equal to 9 cycles + * @arg ADC_SampleTime_16Cycles: Sample time equal to 16 cycles + * @arg ADC_SampleTime_24Cycles: Sample time equal to 24 cycles + * @arg ADC_SampleTime_48Cycles: Sample time equal to 48 cycles + * @arg ADC_SampleTime_96Cycles: Sample time equal to 96 cycles + * @arg ADC_SampleTime_192Cycles: Sample time equal to 192 cycles + * @arg ADC_SampleTime_384Cycles: Sample time equal to 384 cycles + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_RegularChannelConfig(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, uint8_t ADC_Channel, uint8_t Rank, uint8_t ADC_SampleTime) +{ + uint32_t tmpreg1 = 0, tmpreg2 = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_CHANNEL(ADC_Channel)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_REGULAR_RANK(Rank)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_SAMPLE_TIME(ADC_SampleTime)); + + /* If ADC_Channel_30 or ADC_Channel_31 is selected */ + if (ADC_Channel > ADC_Channel_29) + { + /* Get the old register value */ + tmpreg1 = ADCx->SMPR0; + /* Calculate the mask to clear */ + tmpreg2 = SMPR0_SMP_SET << (3 * (ADC_Channel - 30)); + /* Clear the old sample time */ + tmpreg1 &= ~tmpreg2; + /* Calculate the mask to set */ + tmpreg2 = (uint32_t)ADC_SampleTime << (3 * (ADC_Channel - 30)); + /* Set the new sample time */ + tmpreg1 |= tmpreg2; + /* Store the new register value */ + ADCx->SMPR0 = tmpreg1; + } + /* If ADC_Channel_20 ... ADC_Channel_29 is selected */ + else if (ADC_Channel > ADC_Channel_19) + { + /* Get the old register value */ + tmpreg1 = ADCx->SMPR1; + /* Calculate the mask to clear */ + tmpreg2 = SMPR1_SMP_SET << (3 * (ADC_Channel - 20)); + /* Clear the old sample time */ + tmpreg1 &= ~tmpreg2; + /* Calculate the mask to set */ + tmpreg2 = (uint32_t)ADC_SampleTime << (3 * (ADC_Channel - 20)); + /* Set the new sample time */ + tmpreg1 |= tmpreg2; + /* Store the new register value */ + ADCx->SMPR1 = tmpreg1; + } + /* If ADC_Channel_10 ... ADC_Channel_19 is selected */ + else if (ADC_Channel > ADC_Channel_9) + { + /* Get the old register value */ + tmpreg1 = ADCx->SMPR2; + /* Calculate the mask to clear */ + tmpreg2 = SMPR2_SMP_SET << (3 * (ADC_Channel - 10)); + /* Clear the old sample time */ + tmpreg1 &= ~tmpreg2; + /* Calculate the mask to set */ + tmpreg2 = (uint32_t)ADC_SampleTime << (3 * (ADC_Channel - 10)); + /* Set the new sample time */ + tmpreg1 |= tmpreg2; + /* Store the new register value */ + ADCx->SMPR2 = tmpreg1; + } + else /* ADC_Channel include in ADC_Channel_[0..9] */ + { + /* Get the old register value */ + tmpreg1 = ADCx->SMPR3; + /* Calculate the mask to clear */ + tmpreg2 = SMPR3_SMP_SET << (3 * ADC_Channel); + /* Clear the old sample time */ + tmpreg1 &= ~tmpreg2; + /* Calculate the mask to set */ + tmpreg2 = (uint32_t)ADC_SampleTime << (3 * ADC_Channel); + /* Set the new sample time */ + tmpreg1 |= tmpreg2; + /* Store the new register value */ + ADCx->SMPR3 = tmpreg1; + } + /* For Rank 1 to 6 */ + if (Rank < 7) + { + /* Get the old register value */ + tmpreg1 = ADCx->SQR5; + /* Calculate the mask to clear */ + tmpreg2 = SQR5_SQ_SET << (5 * (Rank - 1)); + /* Clear the old SQx bits for the selected rank */ + tmpreg1 &= ~tmpreg2; + /* Calculate the mask to set */ + tmpreg2 = (uint32_t)ADC_Channel << (5 * (Rank - 1)); + /* Set the SQx bits for the selected rank */ + tmpreg1 |= tmpreg2; + /* Store the new register value */ + ADCx->SQR5 = tmpreg1; + } + /* For Rank 7 to 12 */ + else if (Rank < 13) + { + /* Get the old register value */ + tmpreg1 = ADCx->SQR4; + /* Calculate the mask to clear */ + tmpreg2 = SQR4_SQ_SET << (5 * (Rank - 7)); + /* Clear the old SQx bits for the selected rank */ + tmpreg1 &= ~tmpreg2; + /* Calculate the mask to set */ + tmpreg2 = (uint32_t)ADC_Channel << (5 * (Rank - 7)); + /* Set the SQx bits for the selected rank */ + tmpreg1 |= tmpreg2; + /* Store the new register value */ + ADCx->SQR4 = tmpreg1; + } + /* For Rank 13 to 18 */ + else if (Rank < 19) + { + /* Get the old register value */ + tmpreg1 = ADCx->SQR3; + /* Calculate the mask to clear */ + tmpreg2 = SQR3_SQ_SET << (5 * (Rank - 13)); + /* Clear the old SQx bits for the selected rank */ + tmpreg1 &= ~tmpreg2; + /* Calculate the mask to set */ + tmpreg2 = (uint32_t)ADC_Channel << (5 * (Rank - 13)); + /* Set the SQx bits for the selected rank */ + tmpreg1 |= tmpreg2; + /* Store the new register value */ + ADCx->SQR3 = tmpreg1; + } + + /* For Rank 19 to 24 */ + else if (Rank < 25) + { + /* Get the old register value */ + tmpreg1 = ADCx->SQR2; + /* Calculate the mask to clear */ + tmpreg2 = SQR2_SQ_SET << (5 * (Rank - 19)); + /* Clear the old SQx bits for the selected rank */ + tmpreg1 &= ~tmpreg2; + /* Calculate the mask to set */ + tmpreg2 = (uint32_t)ADC_Channel << (5 * (Rank - 19)); + /* Set the SQx bits for the selected rank */ + tmpreg1 |= tmpreg2; + /* Store the new register value */ + ADCx->SQR2 = tmpreg1; + } + + /* For Rank 25 to 28 */ + else + { + /* Get the old register value */ + tmpreg1 = ADCx->SQR1; + /* Calculate the mask to clear */ + tmpreg2 = SQR1_SQ_SET << (5 * (Rank - 25)); + /* Clear the old SQx bits for the selected rank */ + tmpreg1 &= ~tmpreg2; + /* Calculate the mask to set */ + tmpreg2 = (uint32_t)ADC_Channel << (5 * (Rank - 25)); + /* Set the SQx bits for the selected rank */ + tmpreg1 |= tmpreg2; + /* Store the new register value */ + ADCx->SQR1 = tmpreg1; + } +} + +/** + * @brief Enables the selected ADC software start conversion of the regular channels. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1 to select the ADC1 peripheral. + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_SoftwareStartConv(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + + /* Enable the selected ADC conversion for regular group */ + ADCx->CR2 |= (uint32_t)ADC_CR2_SWSTART; +} + +/** + * @brief Gets the selected ADC Software start regular conversion Status. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1 to select the ADC1 peripheral. + * @retval The new state of ADC software start conversion (SET or RESET). + */ +FlagStatus ADC_GetSoftwareStartConvStatus(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx) +{ + FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + + /* Check the status of SWSTART bit */ + if ((ADCx->CR2 & ADC_CR2_SWSTART) != (uint32_t)RESET) + { + /* SWSTART bit is set */ + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + /* SWSTART bit is reset */ + bitstatus = RESET; + } + /* Return the SWSTART bit status */ + return bitstatus; +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the EOC on each regular channel conversion. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1 to select the ADC1 peripheral. + * @param NewState: new state of the selected ADC EOC flag rising + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_EOCOnEachRegularChannelCmd(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the selected ADC EOC rising on each regular channel conversion */ + ADCx->CR2 |= ADC_CR2_EOCS; + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected ADC EOC rising on each regular channel conversion */ + ADCx->CR2 &= (uint32_t)~ADC_CR2_EOCS; + } +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the ADC continuous conversion mode. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1 to select the ADC1 peripheral. + * @param NewState: new state of the selected ADC continuous conversion mode. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_ContinuousModeCmd(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the selected ADC continuous conversion mode */ + ADCx->CR2 |= (uint32_t)ADC_CR2_CONT; + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected ADC continuous conversion mode */ + ADCx->CR2 &= (uint32_t)(~ADC_CR2_CONT); + } +} + +/** + * @brief Configures the discontinuous mode for the selected ADC regular + * group channel. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1 to select the ADC1 peripheral. + * @param Number: specifies the discontinuous mode regular channel count value. + * This number must be between 1 and 8. + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_DiscModeChannelCountConfig(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, uint8_t Number) +{ + uint32_t tmpreg1 = 0; + uint32_t tmpreg2 = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_REGULAR_DISC_NUMBER(Number)); + + /* Get the old register value */ + tmpreg1 = ADCx->CR1; + /* Clear the old discontinuous mode channel count */ + tmpreg1 &= CR1_DISCNUM_RESET; + /* Set the discontinuous mode channel count */ + tmpreg2 = Number - 1; + tmpreg1 |= tmpreg2 << 13; + /* Store the new register value */ + ADCx->CR1 = tmpreg1; +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the discontinuous mode on regular group + * channel for the specified ADC. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1 to select the ADC1 peripheral. + * @param NewState: new state of the selected ADC discontinuous mode on regular + * group channel. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_DiscModeCmd(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the selected ADC regular discontinuous mode */ + ADCx->CR1 |= (uint32_t)ADC_CR1_DISCEN; + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected ADC regular discontinuous mode */ + ADCx->CR1 &= (uint32_t)(~ADC_CR1_DISCEN); + } +} + +/** + * @brief Returns the last ADCx conversion result data for regular channel. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1 to select the ADC1 peripheral. + * @retval The Data conversion value. + */ +uint16_t ADC_GetConversionValue(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + + /* Return the selected ADC conversion value */ + return (uint16_t) ADCx->DR; +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup ADC_Group6 Regular Channels DMA Configuration functions + * @brief Regular Channels DMA Configuration functions. + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### Regular Channels DMA Configuration functions ##### + =============================================================================== + [..] This section provides functions allowing to configure the DMA for ADC regular + channels.Since converted regular channel values are stored into a unique + data register, it is useful to use DMA for conversion of more than one + regular channel. This avoids the loss of the data already stored in the + ADC Data register. + When the DMA mode is enabled (using the ADC_DMACmd() function), after each + conversion of a regular channel, a DMA request is generated. + [..] Depending on the "DMA disable selection" configuration (using the + ADC_DMARequestAfterLastTransferCmd() function), at the end of the last DMA + transfer, two possibilities are allowed: + (+) No new DMA request is issued to the DMA controller (feature DISABLED). + (+) Requests can continue to be generated (feature ENABLED). + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the specified ADC DMA request. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1 to select the ADC1 peripheral. + * @param NewState: new state of the selected ADC DMA transfer. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_DMACmd(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_DMA_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the selected ADC DMA request */ + ADCx->CR2 |= (uint32_t)ADC_CR2_DMA; + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected ADC DMA request */ + ADCx->CR2 &= (uint32_t)(~ADC_CR2_DMA); + } +} + + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the ADC DMA request after last transfer (Single-ADC mode). + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1 to select the ADC1 peripheral. + * @param NewState: new state of the selected ADC EOC flag rising + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_DMARequestAfterLastTransferCmd(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the selected ADC DMA request after last transfer */ + ADCx->CR2 |= ADC_CR2_DDS; + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected ADC DMA request after last transfer */ + ADCx->CR2 &= (uint32_t)~ADC_CR2_DDS; + } +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup ADC_Group7 Injected channels Configuration functions + * @brief Injected channels Configuration functions. + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### Injected channels Configuration functions ##### + =============================================================================== + [..] This section provide functions allowing to configure the ADC Injected channels, + it is composed of 2 sub sections : + (#) Configuration functions for Injected channels: This subsection provides + functions allowing to configure the ADC injected channels : + (++) Configure the rank in the injected group sequencer for each channel. + (++) Configure the sampling time for each channel. + (++) Activate the Auto injected Mode. + (++) Activate the Discontinuous Mode. + (++) scan mode activation. + (++) External/software trigger source. + (++) External trigger edge. + (++) injected channels sequencer. + + (#) Get the Specified Injected channel conversion data: This subsection + provides an important function in the ADC peripheral since it returns + the converted data of the specific injected channel. + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Configures for the selected ADC injected channel its corresponding + * rank in the sequencer and its sample time. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1 to select the ADC1 peripheral. + * @param ADC_Channel: the ADC channel to configure. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg ADC_Channel_0: ADC Channel0 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_1: ADC Channel1 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_2: ADC Channel2 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_3: ADC Channel3 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_4: ADC Channel4 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_5: ADC Channel5 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_6: ADC Channel6 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_7: ADC Channel7 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_8: ADC Channel8 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_9: ADC Channel9 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_10: ADC Channel10 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_11: ADC Channel11 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_12: ADC Channel12 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_13: ADC Channel13 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_14: ADC Channel14 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_15: ADC Channel15 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_16: ADC Channel16 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_17: ADC Channel17 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_18: ADC Channel18 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_19: ADC Channel19 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_20: ADC Channel20 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_21: ADC Channel21 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_22: ADC Channel22 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_23: ADC Channel23 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_24: ADC Channel24 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_25: ADC Channel25 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_27: ADC Channel27 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_28: ADC Channel28 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_29: ADC Channel29 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_30: ADC Channel30 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_31: ADC Channel31 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_0b: ADC Channel0b selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_1b: ADC Channel1b selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_2b: ADC Channel2b selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_3b: ADC Channel3b selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_6b: ADC Channel6b selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_7b: ADC Channel7b selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_8b: ADC Channel8b selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_9b: ADC Channel9b selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_10b: ADC Channel10b selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_11b: ADC Channel11b selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_12b: ADC Channel12b selected + * @param Rank: The rank in the injected group sequencer. This parameter + * must be between 1 to 4. + * @param ADC_SampleTime: The sample time value to be set for the selected + * channel. This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg ADC_SampleTime_4Cycles: Sample time equal to 4 cycles + * @arg ADC_SampleTime_9Cycles: Sample time equal to 9 cycles + * @arg ADC_SampleTime_16Cycles: Sample time equal to 16 cycles + * @arg ADC_SampleTime_24Cycles: Sample time equal to 24 cycles + * @arg ADC_SampleTime_48Cycles: Sample time equal to 48 cycles + * @arg ADC_SampleTime_96Cycles: Sample time equal to 96 cycles + * @arg ADC_SampleTime_192Cycles: Sample time equal to 192 cycles + * @arg ADC_SampleTime_384Cycles: Sample time equal to 384 cycles + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_InjectedChannelConfig(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, uint8_t ADC_Channel, uint8_t Rank, uint8_t ADC_SampleTime) +{ + uint32_t tmpreg1 = 0, tmpreg2 = 0, tmpreg3 = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_CHANNEL(ADC_Channel)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_INJECTED_RANK(Rank)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_SAMPLE_TIME(ADC_SampleTime)); + + /* If ADC_Channel_30 or ADC_Channel_31 is selected */ + if (ADC_Channel > ADC_Channel_29) + { + /* Get the old register value */ + tmpreg1 = ADCx->SMPR0; + /* Calculate the mask to clear */ + tmpreg2 = SMPR0_SMP_SET << (3 * (ADC_Channel - 30)); + /* Clear the old sample time */ + tmpreg1 &= ~tmpreg2; + /* Calculate the mask to set */ + tmpreg2 = (uint32_t)ADC_SampleTime << (3 * (ADC_Channel - 30)); + /* Set the new sample time */ + tmpreg1 |= tmpreg2; + /* Store the new register value */ + ADCx->SMPR0 = tmpreg1; + } + /* If ADC_Channel_20 ... ADC_Channel_29 is selected */ + else if (ADC_Channel > ADC_Channel_19) + { + /* Get the old register value */ + tmpreg1 = ADCx->SMPR1; + /* Calculate the mask to clear */ + tmpreg2 = SMPR1_SMP_SET << (3 * (ADC_Channel - 20)); + /* Clear the old sample time */ + tmpreg1 &= ~tmpreg2; + /* Calculate the mask to set */ + tmpreg2 = (uint32_t)ADC_SampleTime << (3 * (ADC_Channel - 20)); + /* Set the new sample time */ + tmpreg1 |= tmpreg2; + /* Store the new register value */ + ADCx->SMPR1 = tmpreg1; + } + /* If ADC_Channel_10 ... ADC_Channel_19 is selected */ + else if (ADC_Channel > ADC_Channel_9) + { + /* Get the old register value */ + tmpreg1 = ADCx->SMPR2; + /* Calculate the mask to clear */ + tmpreg2 = SMPR2_SMP_SET << (3 * (ADC_Channel - 10)); + /* Clear the old sample time */ + tmpreg1 &= ~tmpreg2; + /* Calculate the mask to set */ + tmpreg2 = (uint32_t)ADC_SampleTime << (3 * (ADC_Channel - 10)); + /* Set the new sample time */ + tmpreg1 |= tmpreg2; + /* Store the new register value */ + ADCx->SMPR2 = tmpreg1; + } + else /* ADC_Channel include in ADC_Channel_[0..9] */ + { + /* Get the old register value */ + tmpreg1 = ADCx->SMPR3; + /* Calculate the mask to clear */ + tmpreg2 = SMPR3_SMP_SET << (3 * ADC_Channel); + /* Clear the old sample time */ + tmpreg1 &= ~tmpreg2; + /* Calculate the mask to set */ + tmpreg2 = (uint32_t)ADC_SampleTime << (3 * ADC_Channel); + /* Set the new sample time */ + tmpreg1 |= tmpreg2; + /* Store the new register value */ + ADCx->SMPR3 = tmpreg1; + } + + /* Rank configuration */ + /* Get the old register value */ + tmpreg1 = ADCx->JSQR; + /* Get JL value: Number = JL+1 */ + tmpreg3 = (tmpreg1 & JSQR_JL_SET)>> 20; + /* Calculate the mask to clear: ((Rank-1)+(4- (JL+1))) */ + tmpreg2 = (uint32_t)(JSQR_JSQ_SET << (5 * (uint8_t)((Rank + 3) - (tmpreg3 + 1)))); + /* Clear the old JSQx bits for the selected rank */ + tmpreg1 &= ~tmpreg2; + /* Calculate the mask to set: ((Rank-1)+(4- (JL+1))) */ + tmpreg2 = (uint32_t)(((uint32_t)(ADC_Channel)) << (5 * (uint8_t)((Rank + 3) - (tmpreg3 + 1)))); + /* Set the JSQx bits for the selected rank */ + tmpreg1 |= tmpreg2; + /* Store the new register value */ + ADCx->JSQR = tmpreg1; +} + +/** + * @brief Configures the sequencer length for injected channels. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1 to select the ADC1 peripheral. + * @param Length: The sequencer length. + * This parameter must be a number between 1 to 4. + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_InjectedSequencerLengthConfig(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, uint8_t Length) +{ + uint32_t tmpreg1 = 0; + uint32_t tmpreg2 = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_INJECTED_LENGTH(Length)); + + /* Get the old register value */ + tmpreg1 = ADCx->JSQR; + /* Clear the old injected sequence length JL bits */ + tmpreg1 &= JSQR_JL_RESET; + /* Set the injected sequence length JL bits */ + tmpreg2 = Length - 1; + tmpreg1 |= tmpreg2 << 20; + /* Store the new register value */ + ADCx->JSQR = tmpreg1; +} + +/** + * @brief Set the injected channels conversion value offset. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1 to select the ADC1 peripheral. + * @param ADC_InjectedChannel: the ADC injected channel to set its offset. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg ADC_InjectedChannel_1: Injected Channel1 selected. + * @arg ADC_InjectedChannel_2: Injected Channel2 selected. + * @arg ADC_InjectedChannel_3: Injected Channel3 selected. + * @arg ADC_InjectedChannel_4: Injected Channel4 selected. + * @param Offset: the offset value for the selected ADC injected channel + * This parameter must be a 12bit value. + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_SetInjectedOffset(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, uint8_t ADC_InjectedChannel, uint16_t Offset) +{ + __IO uint32_t tmp = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_INJECTED_CHANNEL(ADC_InjectedChannel)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_OFFSET(Offset)); + + tmp = (uint32_t)ADCx; + tmp += ADC_InjectedChannel; + + /* Set the selected injected channel data offset */ + *(__IO uint32_t *) tmp = (uint32_t)Offset; +} + +/** + * @brief Configures the ADCx external trigger for injected channels conversion. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1 to select the ADC1 peripheral. + * @param ADC_ExternalTrigInjecConv: specifies the ADC trigger to start injected + * conversion. This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg ADC_ExternalTrigInjecConv_T9_CC1: Timer9 capture compare1 selected + * @arg ADC_ExternalTrigInjecConv_T9_TRGO: Timer9 TRGO event selected + * @arg ADC_ExternalTrigInjecConv_T2_TRGO: Timer2 TRGO event selected + * @arg ADC_ExternalTrigInjecConv_T2_CC1: Timer2 capture compare1 selected + * @arg ADC_ExternalTrigInjecConv_T3_CC4: Timer3 capture compare4 selected + * @arg ADC_ExternalTrigInjecConv_T4_TRGO: Timer4 TRGO event selected + * @arg ADC_ExternalTrigInjecConv_T4_CC1: Timer4 capture compare1 selected + * @arg ADC_ExternalTrigInjecConv_T4_CC2: Timer4 capture compare2 selected + * @arg ADC_ExternalTrigInjecConv_T4_CC3: Timer4 capture compare3 selected + * @arg ADC_ExternalTrigInjecConv_T10_CC1: Timer10 capture compare1 selected + * @arg ADC_ExternalTrigInjecConv_T7_TRGO: Timer7 TRGO event selected + * @arg ADC_ExternalTrigInjecConv_Ext_IT15: External interrupt line 15 event selected + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_ExternalTrigInjectedConvConfig(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, uint32_t ADC_ExternalTrigInjecConv) +{ + uint32_t tmpreg = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_EXT_INJEC_TRIG(ADC_ExternalTrigInjecConv)); + + /* Get the old register value */ + tmpreg = ADCx->CR2; + /* Clear the old external event selection for injected group */ + tmpreg &= CR2_JEXTSEL_RESET; + /* Set the external event selection for injected group */ + tmpreg |= ADC_ExternalTrigInjecConv; + /* Store the new register value */ + ADCx->CR2 = tmpreg; +} + +/** + * @brief Configures the ADCx external trigger edge for injected channels conversion. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1 to select the ADC1 peripheral. + * @param ADC_ExternalTrigInjecConvEdge: specifies the ADC external trigger + * edge to start injected conversion. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg ADC_ExternalTrigConvEdge_None: external trigger disabled for + * injected conversion. + * @arg ADC_ExternalTrigConvEdge_Rising: detection on rising edge + * @arg ADC_ExternalTrigConvEdge_Falling: detection on falling edge + * @arg ADC_ExternalTrigConvEdge_RisingFalling: detection on + * both rising and falling edge + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_ExternalTrigInjectedConvEdgeConfig(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, uint32_t ADC_ExternalTrigInjecConvEdge) +{ + uint32_t tmpreg = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_EXT_INJEC_TRIG_EDGE(ADC_ExternalTrigInjecConvEdge)); + + /* Get the old register value */ + tmpreg = ADCx->CR2; + /* Clear the old external trigger edge for injected group */ + tmpreg &= CR2_JEXTEN_RESET; + /* Set the new external trigger edge for injected group */ + tmpreg |= ADC_ExternalTrigInjecConvEdge; + /* Store the new register value */ + ADCx->CR2 = tmpreg; +} + +/** + * @brief Enables the selected ADC software start conversion of the injected + * channels. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1 to select the ADC1 peripheral. + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_SoftwareStartInjectedConv(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + /* Enable the selected ADC conversion for injected group */ + ADCx->CR2 |= (uint32_t)ADC_CR2_JSWSTART; +} + +/** + * @brief Gets the selected ADC Software start injected conversion Status. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1 to select the ADC1 peripheral. + * @retval The new state of ADC software start injected conversion (SET or RESET). + */ +FlagStatus ADC_GetSoftwareStartInjectedConvCmdStatus(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx) +{ + FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + + /* Check the status of JSWSTART bit */ + if ((ADCx->CR2 & ADC_CR2_JSWSTART) != (uint32_t)RESET) + { + /* JSWSTART bit is set */ + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + /* JSWSTART bit is reset */ + bitstatus = RESET; + } + /* Return the JSWSTART bit status */ + return bitstatus; +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the selected ADC automatic injected group + * conversion after regular one. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1 to select the ADC1 peripheral. + * @param NewState: new state of the selected ADC auto injected + * conversion. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_AutoInjectedConvCmd(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the selected ADC automatic injected group conversion */ + ADCx->CR1 |= (uint32_t)ADC_CR1_JAUTO; + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected ADC automatic injected group conversion */ + ADCx->CR1 &= (uint32_t)(~ADC_CR1_JAUTO); + } +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the discontinuous mode for injected group + * channel for the specified ADC. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1 to select the ADC1 peripheral. + * @param NewState: new state of the selected ADC discontinuous mode + * on injected group channel. This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_InjectedDiscModeCmd(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the selected ADC injected discontinuous mode */ + ADCx->CR1 |= (uint32_t)ADC_CR1_JDISCEN; + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected ADC injected discontinuous mode */ + ADCx->CR1 &= (uint32_t)(~ADC_CR1_JDISCEN); + } +} + +/** + * @brief Returns the ADC injected channel conversion result. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1 to select the ADC1 peripheral. + * @param ADC_InjectedChannel: the converted ADC injected channel. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg ADC_InjectedChannel_1: Injected Channel1 selected + * @arg ADC_InjectedChannel_2: Injected Channel2 selected + * @arg ADC_InjectedChannel_3: Injected Channel3 selected + * @arg ADC_InjectedChannel_4: Injected Channel4 selected + * @retval The Data conversion value. + */ +uint16_t ADC_GetInjectedConversionValue(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, uint8_t ADC_InjectedChannel) +{ + __IO uint32_t tmp = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_INJECTED_CHANNEL(ADC_InjectedChannel)); + + tmp = (uint32_t)ADCx; + tmp += ADC_InjectedChannel + JDR_OFFSET; + + /* Returns the selected injected channel conversion data value */ + return (uint16_t) (*(__IO uint32_t*) tmp); +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup ADC_Group8 Interrupts and flags management functions + * @brief Interrupts and flags management functions. + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### Interrupts and flags management functions ##### + =============================================================================== + [..] This section provides functions allowing to configure the ADC Interrupts + and get the status and clear flags and Interrupts pending bits. + + [..] The ADC provide 4 Interrupts sources and 9 Flags which can be divided into + 3 groups: + *** Flags and Interrupts for ADC regular channels *** + ===================================================== + [..] + (+)Flags : + (##) ADC_FLAG_OVR : Overrun detection when regular converted data are + lost. + (##) ADC_FLAG_EOC : Regular channel end of conversion + to indicate + (depending on EOCS bit, managed by ADC_EOCOnEachRegularChannelCmd() ) + the end of : + (+++) a regular CHANNEL conversion. + (+++) sequence of regular GROUP conversions. + + + (##) ADC_FLAG_STRT: Regular channel start + to indicate when regular + CHANNEL conversion starts. + (##) ADC_FLAG_RCNR: Regular channel not ready + to indicate if a new + regular conversion can be launched. + (+)Interrupts : + (##) ADC_IT_OVR : specifies the interrupt source for Overrun detection + event. + (##) ADC_IT_EOC : specifies the interrupt source for Regular channel + end of conversion event. + + *** Flags and Interrupts for ADC Injected channels *** + ====================================================== + (+)Flags : + (##) ADC_FLAG_JEOC : Injected channel end of conversion+ to indicate at + the end of injected GROUP conversion. + (##) ADC_FLAG_JSTRT: Injected channel start + to indicate hardware when + injected GROUP conversion starts. + (##) ADC_FLAG_JCNR: Injected channel not ready + to indicate if a new + injected conversion can be launched. + (+)Interrupts + (##) ADC_IT_JEOC : specifies the interrupt source for Injected channel + end of conversion event. + *** General Flags and Interrupts for the ADC *** + ================================================ + (+)Flags : + (##) ADC_FLAG_AWD: Analog watchdog + to indicate if the converted voltage + crosses the programmed thresholds values. + (##) ADC_FLAG_ADONS: ADC ON status + to indicate if the ADC is ready + to convert. + (+)Interrupts : + (##) ADC_IT_AWD : specifies the interrupt source for Analog watchdog + event. + + [..] The user should identify which mode will be used in his application to + manage the ADC controller events: Polling mode or Interrupt mode. + + [..] In the Polling Mode it is advised to use the following functions: + (+) ADC_GetFlagStatus() : to check if flags events occur. + (+) ADC_ClearFlag() : to clear the flags events. + + [..] In the Interrupt Mode it is advised to use the following functions: + (+) ADC_ITConfig() : to enable or disable the interrupt source. + (+) ADC_GetITStatus() : to check if Interrupt occurs. + (+) ADC_ClearITPendingBit() : to clear the Interrupt pending Bit + (corresponding Flag). +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the specified ADC interrupts. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1 to select the ADC peripheral. + * @param ADC_IT: specifies the ADC interrupt sources to be enabled or disabled. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg ADC_IT_EOC: End of conversion interrupt + * @arg ADC_IT_AWD: Analog watchdog interrupt + * @arg ADC_IT_JEOC: End of injected conversion interrupt + * @arg ADC_IT_OVR: overrun interrupt + * @param NewState: new state of the specified ADC interrupts. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_ITConfig(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, uint16_t ADC_IT, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + uint32_t itmask = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_IT(ADC_IT)); + + /* Get the ADC IT index */ + itmask = (uint8_t)ADC_IT; + itmask = (uint32_t)0x01 << itmask; + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the selected ADC interrupts */ + ADCx->CR1 |= itmask; + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected ADC interrupts */ + ADCx->CR1 &= (~(uint32_t)itmask); + } +} + +/** + * @brief Checks whether the specified ADC flag is set or not. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1 to select the ADC1 peripheral. + * @param ADC_FLAG: specifies the flag to check. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg ADC_FLAG_AWD: Analog watchdog flag + * @arg ADC_FLAG_EOC: End of conversion flag + * @arg ADC_FLAG_JEOC: End of injected group conversion flag + * @arg ADC_FLAG_JSTRT: Start of injected group conversion flag + * @arg ADC_FLAG_STRT: Start of regular group conversion flag + * @arg ADC_FLAG_OVR: Overrun flag + * @arg ADC_FLAG_ADONS: ADC ON status + * @arg ADC_FLAG_RCNR: Regular channel not ready + * @arg ADC_FLAG_JCNR: Injected channel not ready + * @retval The new state of ADC_FLAG (SET or RESET). + */ +FlagStatus ADC_GetFlagStatus(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, uint16_t ADC_FLAG) +{ + FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_GET_FLAG(ADC_FLAG)); + + /* Check the status of the specified ADC flag */ + if ((ADCx->SR & ADC_FLAG) != (uint8_t)RESET) + { + /* ADC_FLAG is set */ + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + /* ADC_FLAG is reset */ + bitstatus = RESET; + } + /* Return the ADC_FLAG status */ + return bitstatus; +} + +/** + * @brief Clears the ADCx's pending flags. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1 to select the ADC1 peripheral. + * @param ADC_FLAG: specifies the flag to clear. + * This parameter can be any combination of the following values: + * @arg ADC_FLAG_AWD: Analog watchdog flag + * @arg ADC_FLAG_EOC: End of conversion flag + * @arg ADC_FLAG_JEOC: End of injected group conversion flag + * @arg ADC_FLAG_JSTRT: Start of injected group conversion flag + * @arg ADC_FLAG_STRT: Start of regular group conversion flag + * @arg ADC_FLAG_OVR: overrun flag + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_ClearFlag(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, uint16_t ADC_FLAG) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_CLEAR_FLAG(ADC_FLAG)); + + /* Clear the selected ADC flags */ + ADCx->SR = ~(uint32_t)ADC_FLAG; +} + +/** + * @brief Checks whether the specified ADC interrupt has occurred or not. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1 to select the ADC1 peripheral. + * @param ADC_IT: specifies the ADC interrupt source to check. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg ADC_IT_EOC: End of conversion interrupt + * @arg ADC_IT_AWD: Analog watchdog interrupt + * @arg ADC_IT_JEOC: End of injected conversion interrupt + * @arg ADC_IT_OVR: Overrun interrupt + * @retval The new state of ADC_IT (SET or RESET). + */ +ITStatus ADC_GetITStatus(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, uint16_t ADC_IT) +{ + ITStatus bitstatus = RESET; + uint32_t itmask = 0, enablestatus = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_IT(ADC_IT)); + + /* Get the ADC IT index */ + itmask = (uint32_t)((uint32_t)ADC_IT >> 8); + + /* Get the ADC_IT enable bit status */ + enablestatus = (ADCx->CR1 & ((uint32_t)0x01 << (uint8_t)ADC_IT)); + + /* Check the status of the specified ADC interrupt */ + if (((uint32_t)(ADCx->SR & (uint32_t)itmask) != (uint32_t)RESET) && (enablestatus != (uint32_t)RESET)) + { + /* ADC_IT is set */ + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + /* ADC_IT is reset */ + bitstatus = RESET; + } + /* Return the ADC_IT status */ + return bitstatus; +} + +/** + * @brief Clears the ADCx's interrupt pending bits. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1 to select the ADC1 peripheral. + * @param ADC_IT: specifies the ADC interrupt pending bit to clear. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg ADC_IT_EOC: End of conversion interrupt + * @arg ADC_IT_AWD: Analog watchdog interrupt + * @arg ADC_IT_JEOC: End of injected conversion interrupt + * @arg ADC_IT_OVR: Overrun interrupt + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_ClearITPendingBit(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, uint16_t ADC_IT) +{ + uint8_t itmask = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_IT(ADC_IT)); + + /* Get the ADC IT index */ + itmask = (uint8_t)(ADC_IT >> 8); + + /* Clear the selected ADC interrupt pending bits */ + ADCx->SR = ~(uint32_t)itmask; +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/ diff --git a/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32l1xx_aes.c b/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32l1xx_aes.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7728543 --- /dev/null +++ b/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32l1xx_aes.c @@ -0,0 +1,599 @@ +/** + ****************************************************************************** + * @file stm32l1xx_aes.c + * @author MCD Application Team + * @version V1.1.1 + * @date 05-March-2012 + * @brief This file provides firmware functions to manage the following + * functionalities of the AES peripheral: + * + Configuration + * + Read/Write operations + * + DMA transfers management + * + Interrupts and flags management + * + * @verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### AES Peripheral features ##### + =============================================================================== +....[..] + (#) The Advanced Encryption Standard hardware accelerator (AES) can be used + to both encipher and decipher data using AES algorithm. + (#) The AES supports 4 operation modes: + (++) Encryption: It consumes 214 clock cycle when processing one 128-bit block + (++) Decryption: It consumes 214 clock cycle when processing one 128-bit block + (++) Key derivation for decryption: It consumes 80 clock cycle when processing one 128-bit block + (++) Key Derivation and decryption: It consumes 288 clock cycle when processing one 128-bit blobk + (#) Moreover 3 chaining modes are supported: + (++) Electronic codebook (ECB): Each plain text is encrypted/decrypted separately + (++) Cipher block chaining (CBC): Each block is XORed with the previous block + (++) Counter mode (CTR): A 128-bit counter is encrypted and then XORed with the + plain text to give the cipher text + (#) The AES peripheral supports data swapping: 1-bit, 8-bit, 16-bit and 32-bit. + (#) The AES peripheral supports write/read error handling with interrupt capability. + (#) Automatic data flow control with support of direct memory access (DMA) using + 2 channels, one for incoming data (DMA2 Channel5), and one for outcoming data + (DMA2 Channel3). + + ##### How to use this driver ##### + =============================================================================== + [..] + (#) AES AHB clock must be enabled to get write access to AES registers + using RCC_AHBPeriphClockCmd(RCC_AHBPeriph_AES, ENABLE). + (#) Initialize the key using AES_KeyInit(). + (#) Configure the AES operation mode using AES_Init(). + (#) If required, enable interrupt source using AES_ITConfig() and + enable the AES interrupt vector using NVIC_Init(). + (#) If required, when using the DMA mode. + (##) Configure the DMA using DMA_Init(). + (##) Enable DMA requests using AES_DMAConfig(). + (#) Enable the AES peripheral using AES_Cmd(). + @endverbatim + + ****************************************************************************** + * @attention + * + * <h2><center>© COPYRIGHT 2012 STMicroelectronics</center></h2> + * + * Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License"); + * You may not use this file except in compliance with the License. + * You may obtain a copy of the License at: + * + * http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2 + * + * Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software + * distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS, + * WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. + * See the License for the specific language governing permissions and + * limitations under the License. + * + ****************************************************************************** + */ + +/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#include "stm32l1xx_aes.h" +#include "stm32l1xx_rcc.h" + +/** @addtogroup STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver + * @{ + */ + +/** @defgroup AES + * @brief AES driver modules + * @{ + */ + +/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#define CR_CLEAR_MASK ((uint32_t)0xFFFFFF81) + +/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/ + +/** @defgroup AES_Private_Functions + * @{ + */ + +/** @defgroup AES_Group1 Initialization and configuration + * @brief Initialization and configuration. + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### Initialization and configuration ##### + =============================================================================== + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + + /** + * @brief Deinitializes AES peripheral registers to their default reset values. + * @param None + * @retval None + */ +void AES_DeInit(void) +{ + /* Enable AES reset state */ + RCC_AHBPeriphResetCmd(RCC_AHBPeriph_AES, ENABLE); + /* Release AES from reset state */ + RCC_AHBPeriphResetCmd(RCC_AHBPeriph_AES, DISABLE); +} + +/** + * @brief Initializes the AES peripheral according to the specified parameters + * in the AES_InitStruct: + * - AES_Operation: specifies the operation mode (encryption, decryption...). + * - AES_Chaining: specifies the chaining mode (ECB, CBC or CTR). + * - AES_DataType: specifies the data swapping type: 32-bit, 16-bit, 8-bit or 1-bit. + * @note If AES is already enabled, use AES_Cmd(DISABLE) before setting the new + * configuration (When AES is enabled, setting configuration is forbidden). + * @param AES_InitStruct: pointer to an AES_InitTypeDef structure that contains + * the configuration information for AES peripheral. + * @retval None + */ +void AES_Init(AES_InitTypeDef* AES_InitStruct) +{ + uint32_t tmpreg = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_AES_MODE(AES_InitStruct->AES_Operation)); + assert_param(IS_AES_CHAINING(AES_InitStruct->AES_Chaining)); + assert_param(IS_AES_DATATYPE(AES_InitStruct->AES_DataType)); + + /* Get AES CR register value */ + tmpreg = AES->CR; + + /* Clear DATATYPE[1:0], MODE[1:0] and CHMOD[1:0] bits */ + tmpreg &= (uint32_t)CR_CLEAR_MASK; + + tmpreg |= (AES_InitStruct->AES_Operation | AES_InitStruct->AES_Chaining | AES_InitStruct->AES_DataType); + + AES->CR = (uint32_t) tmpreg; +} + +/** + * @brief Initializes the AES Keys according to the specified parameters in the AES_KeyInitStruct. + * @param AES_KeyInitStruct: pointer to an AES_KeyInitTypeDef structure that + * contains the configuration information for the specified AES Keys. + * @note This function must be called while the AES is disabled. + * @note In encryption, key derivation and key derivation + decryption modes, + * AES_KeyInitStruct must contain the encryption key. + * In decryption mode, AES_KeyInitStruct must contain the decryption key. + * @retval None + */ +void AES_KeyInit(AES_KeyInitTypeDef* AES_KeyInitStruct) +{ + AES->KEYR0 = AES_KeyInitStruct->AES_Key0; + AES->KEYR1 = AES_KeyInitStruct->AES_Key1; + AES->KEYR2 = AES_KeyInitStruct->AES_Key2; + AES->KEYR3 = AES_KeyInitStruct->AES_Key3; +} + +/** + * @brief Initializes the AES Initialization Vector IV according to + * the specified parameters in the AES_IVInitStruct. + * @param AES_KeyInitStruct: pointer to an AES_IVInitTypeDef structure that + * contains the configuration information for the specified AES IV. + * @note When ECB chaining mode is selected, Initialization Vector IV has no + * meaning. + * When CTR chaining mode is selected, AES_IV0 contains the CTR value. + * AES_IV1, AES_IV2 and AES_IV3 contains nonce value. + * @retval None + */ +void AES_IVInit(AES_IVInitTypeDef* AES_IVInitStruct) +{ + AES->IVR0 = AES_IVInitStruct->AES_IV0; + AES->IVR1 = AES_IVInitStruct->AES_IV1; + AES->IVR2 = AES_IVInitStruct->AES_IV2; + AES->IVR3 = AES_IVInitStruct->AES_IV3; +} + +/** + * @brief Enable or disable the AES peripheral. + * @param NewState: new state of the AES peripheral. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @note The key must be written while AES is disabled. + * @retval None + */ +void AES_Cmd(FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameter */ + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the AES peripheral */ + AES->CR |= (uint32_t) AES_CR_EN; /**< AES Enable */ + } + else + { + /* Disable the AES peripheral */ + AES->CR &= (uint32_t)(~AES_CR_EN); /**< AES Disable */ + } +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup AES_Group2 Structures initialization functions + * @brief Structures initialization. + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### Structures initialization functions ##### + =============================================================================== + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Fills each AES_InitStruct member with its default value. + * @param AES_InitStruct: pointer to an AES_InitTypeDef structure which will + * be initialized. + * @retval None + */ +void AES_StructInit(AES_InitTypeDef* AES_InitStruct) +{ + AES_InitStruct->AES_Operation = AES_Operation_Encryp; + AES_InitStruct->AES_Chaining = AES_Chaining_ECB; + AES_InitStruct->AES_DataType = AES_DataType_32b; +} + +/** + * @brief Fills each AES_KeyInitStruct member with its default value. + * @param AES_KeyInitStruct: pointer to an AES_KeyInitStruct structure which + * will be initialized. + * @retval None + */ +void AES_KeyStructInit(AES_KeyInitTypeDef* AES_KeyInitStruct) +{ + AES_KeyInitStruct->AES_Key0 = 0x00000000; + AES_KeyInitStruct->AES_Key1 = 0x00000000; + AES_KeyInitStruct->AES_Key2 = 0x00000000; + AES_KeyInitStruct->AES_Key3 = 0x00000000; +} + +/** + * @brief Fills each AES_IVInitStruct member with its default value. + * @param AES_IVInitStruct: pointer to an AES_IVInitTypeDef structure which + * will be initialized. + * @retval None + */ +void AES_IVStructInit(AES_IVInitTypeDef* AES_IVInitStruct) +{ + AES_IVInitStruct->AES_IV0 = 0x00000000; + AES_IVInitStruct->AES_IV1 = 0x00000000; + AES_IVInitStruct->AES_IV2 = 0x00000000; + AES_IVInitStruct->AES_IV3 = 0x00000000; +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup AES_Group3 AES Read and Write + * @brief AES Read and Write. + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### AES Read and Write functions ##### + =============================================================================== + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Write data in DINR register to be processed by AES peripheral. + * @note To process 128-bit data (4 * 32-bit), this function must be called + * four times to write the 128-bit data in the 32-bit register DINR. + * @note When an unexpected write to DOUTR register is detected, WRERR flag is + * set. + * @param Data: The data to be processed. + * @retval None + */ +void AES_WriteSubData(uint32_t Data) +{ + /* Write Data */ + AES->DINR = Data; +} + +/** + * @brief Returns the data in DOUTR register processed by AES peripheral. + * @note This function must be called four times to get the 128-bit data. + * @note When an unexpected read of DINR register is detected, RDERR flag is + * set. + * @retval The processed data. + */ +uint32_t AES_ReadSubData(void) +{ + /* Read Data */ + return AES->DOUTR; +} + +/** + * @brief Read the Key value. + * @param AES_KeyInitStruct: pointer to an AES_KeyInitTypeDef structure which + * will contain the key. + * @note When the key derivation mode is selected, AES must be disabled + * (AES_Cmd(DISABLE)) before reading the decryption key. + * Reading the key while the AES is enabled will return unpredictable + * value. + * @retval None + */ +void AES_ReadKey(AES_KeyInitTypeDef* AES_KeyInitStruct) +{ + AES_KeyInitStruct->AES_Key0 = AES->KEYR0; + AES_KeyInitStruct->AES_Key1 = AES->KEYR1; + AES_KeyInitStruct->AES_Key2 = AES->KEYR2; + AES_KeyInitStruct->AES_Key3 = AES->KEYR3; +} + +/** + * @brief Read the Initialization Vector IV value. + * @param AES_IVInitStruct: pointer to an AES_IVInitTypeDef structure which + * will contain the Initialization Vector IV. + * @note When the AES is enabled Reading the Initialization Vector IV value + * will return 0. The AES must be disabled using AES_Cmd(DISABLE) + * to get the right value. + * @note When ECB chaining mode is selected, Initialization Vector IV has no + * meaning. + * When CTR chaining mode is selected, AES_IV0 contains 32-bit Counter value. + * AES_IV1, AES_IV2 and AES_IV3 contains nonce value. + * @retval None + */ +void AES_ReadIV(AES_IVInitTypeDef* AES_IVInitStruct) +{ + AES_IVInitStruct->AES_IV0 = AES->IVR0; + AES_IVInitStruct->AES_IV1 = AES->IVR1; + AES_IVInitStruct->AES_IV2 = AES->IVR2; + AES_IVInitStruct->AES_IV3 = AES->IVR3; +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup AES_Group4 DMA transfers management functions + * @brief DMA transfers management function. + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### DMA transfers management functions ##### + =============================================================================== + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Configures the AES DMA interface. + * @param AES_DMATransfer: Specifies the AES DMA transfer. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg AES_DMATransfer_In: When selected, DMA manages the data input phase. + * @arg AES_DMATransfer_Out: When selected, DMA manages the data output phase. + * @arg AES_DMATransfer_InOut: When selected, DMA manages both the data input/output phases. + * @param NewState Indicates the new state of the AES DMA interface. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @note The DMA has no action in key derivation mode. + * @retval None + */ +void AES_DMAConfig(uint32_t AES_DMATransfer, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameter */ + assert_param(IS_AES_DMA_TRANSFER(AES_DMATransfer)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the DMA transfer */ + AES->CR |= (uint32_t) AES_DMATransfer; + } + else + { + /* Disable the DMA transfer */ + AES->CR &= (uint32_t)(~AES_DMATransfer); + } +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup AES_Group5 Interrupts and flags management functions + * @brief Interrupts and flags management functions. + * +@verbatim + + =============================================================================== + ##### Interrupts and flags management functions ##### + =============================================================================== +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the specified AES interrupt. + * @param AES_IT: Specifies the AES interrupt source to enable/disable. + * This parameter can be any combinations of the following values: + * @arg AES_IT_CC: Computation Complete Interrupt. If enabled, once CCF + * flag is set an interrupt is generated. + * @arg AES_IT_ERR: Error Interrupt. If enabled, once a read error + * flags (RDERR) or write error flag (WRERR) is set, + * an interrupt is generated. + * @param NewState: The new state of the AES interrupt source. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void AES_ITConfig(uint32_t AES_IT, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + assert_param(IS_AES_IT(AES_IT)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + AES->CR |= (uint32_t) AES_IT; /**< AES_IT Enable */ + } + else + { + AES->CR &= (uint32_t)(~AES_IT); /**< AES_IT Disable */ + } +} + +/** + * @brief Checks whether the specified AES flag is set or not. + * @param AES_FLAG specifies the flag to check. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg AES_FLAG_CCF: Computation Complete Flag is set by hardware when + * he computation phase is completed. + * @arg AES_FLAG_RDERR: Read Error Flag is set when an unexpected read + * operation of DOUTR register is detected. + * @arg AES_FLAG_WRERR: Write Error Flag is set when an unexpected write + * operation in DINR is detected. + * @retval FlagStatus (SET or RESET) + */ +FlagStatus AES_GetFlagStatus(uint32_t AES_FLAG) +{ + FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET; + + /* Check parameters */ + assert_param(IS_AES_FLAG(AES_FLAG)); + + if ((AES->SR & AES_FLAG) != (uint32_t)RESET) + { + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + bitstatus = RESET; + } + + /* Return the AES_FLAG status */ + return bitstatus; +} + +/** + * @brief Clears the AES flags. + * @param AES_FLAG: specifies the flag to clear. + * This parameter can be: + * @arg AES_FLAG_CCF: Computation Complete Flag is cleared by setting CCFC + * bit in CR register. + * @arg AES_FLAG_RDERR: Read Error is cleared by setting ERRC bit in + * CR register. + * @arg AES_FLAG_WRERR: Write Error is cleared by setting ERRC bit in + * CR register. + * @retval None + */ +void AES_ClearFlag(uint32_t AES_FLAG) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_AES_FLAG(AES_FLAG)); + + /* Check if AES_FLAG is AES_FLAG_CCF */ + if (AES_FLAG == AES_FLAG_CCF) + { + /* Clear CCF flag by setting CCFC bit */ + AES->CR |= (uint32_t) AES_CR_CCFC; + } + else /* AES_FLAG is AES_FLAG_RDERR or AES_FLAG_WRERR */ + { + /* Clear RDERR and WRERR flags by setting ERRC bit */ + AES->CR |= (uint32_t) AES_CR_ERRC; + } +} + +/** + * @brief Checks whether the specified AES interrupt has occurred or not. + * @param AES_IT: Specifies the AES interrupt pending bit to check. + * This parameter can be: + * @arg AES_IT_CC: Computation Complete Interrupt. + * @arg AES_IT_ERR: Error Interrupt. + * @retval ITStatus The new state of AES_IT (SET or RESET). + */ +ITStatus AES_GetITStatus(uint32_t AES_IT) +{ + ITStatus itstatus = RESET; + uint32_t cciebitstatus = RESET, ccfbitstatus = RESET; + + /* Check parameters */ + assert_param(IS_AES_GET_IT(AES_IT)); + + cciebitstatus = AES->CR & AES_CR_CCIE; + ccfbitstatus = AES->SR & AES_SR_CCF; + + /* Check if AES_IT is AES_IT_CC */ + if (AES_IT == AES_IT_CC) + { + /* Check the status of the specified AES interrupt */ + if (((cciebitstatus) != (uint32_t)RESET) && ((ccfbitstatus) != (uint32_t)RESET)) + { + /* Interrupt occurred */ + itstatus = SET; + } + else + { + /* Interrupt didn't occur */ + itstatus = RESET; + } + } + else /* AES_IT is AES_IT_ERR */ + { + /* Check the status of the specified AES interrupt */ + if ((AES->CR & AES_CR_ERRIE) != RESET) + { + /* Check if WRERR or RDERR flags are set */ + if ((AES->SR & (uint32_t)(AES_SR_WRERR | AES_SR_RDERR)) != (uint16_t)RESET) + { + /* Interrupt occurred */ + itstatus = SET; + } + else + { + /* Interrupt didn't occur */ + itstatus = RESET; + } + } + else + { + /* Interrupt didn't occur */ + itstatus = (ITStatus) RESET; + } + } + + /* Return the AES_IT status */ + return itstatus; +} + +/** + * @brief Clears the AES's interrupt pending bits. + * @param AES_IT: specifies the interrupt pending bit to clear. + * This parameter can be any combinations of the following values: + * @arg AES_IT_CC: Computation Complete Interrupt. + * @arg AES_IT_ERR: Error Interrupt. + * @retval None + */ +void AES_ClearITPendingBit(uint32_t AES_IT) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_AES_IT(AES_IT)); + + /* Clear the interrupt pending bit */ + AES->CR |= (uint32_t) (AES_IT >> (uint32_t) 0x00000002); +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/ diff --git a/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32l1xx_aes_util.c b/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32l1xx_aes_util.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f7dd9a7 --- /dev/null +++ b/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32l1xx_aes_util.c @@ -0,0 +1,679 @@ +/** + ****************************************************************************** + * @file stm32l1xx_aes_util.c + * @author MCD Application Team + * @version V1.1.1 + * @date 05-March-2012 + * @brief This file provides high level functions to encrypt and decrypt an + * input message using AES in ECB/CBC/CTR modes. + * + * @verbatim + +================================================================================ + ##### How to use this driver ##### +================================================================================ + [..] + (#) Enable The AES controller clock using + RCC_AHBPeriphClockCmd(RCC_AHBPeriph_AES, ENABLE); function. + + (#) Use AES_ECB_Encrypt() function to encrypt an input message in ECB mode. + (#) Use AES_ECB_Decrypt() function to decrypt an input message in ECB mode. + + (#) Use AES_CBC_Encrypt() function to encrypt an input message in CBC mode. + (#) Use AES_CBC_Decrypt() function to decrypt an input message in CBC mode. + + (#) Use AES_CTR_Encrypt() function to encrypt an input message in CTR mode. + (#) Use AES_CTR_Decrypt() function to decrypt an input message in CTR mode. + + * @endverbatim + * + ****************************************************************************** + * @attention + * + * <h2><center>© COPYRIGHT 2012 STMicroelectronics</center></h2> + * + * Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License"); + * You may not use this file except in compliance with the License. + * You may obtain a copy of the License at: + * + * http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2 + * + * Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software + * distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS, + * WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. + * See the License for the specific language governing permissions and + * limitations under the License. + * + ****************************************************************************** + */ + +/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#include "stm32l1xx_aes.h" + +/** @addtogroup STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver + * @{ + */ + +/** @addtogroup AES + * @brief AES driver modules + * @{ + */ + +/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#define AES_CC_TIMEOUT ((uint32_t) 0x00010000) + +/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/ + +/** @defgroup AES_Private_Functions + * @{ + */ + +/** @defgroup AES_Group6 High Level AES functions + * @brief High Level AES functions + * +@verbatim +================================================================================ + ##### High Level AES functions ##### +================================================================================ + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Encrypt using AES in ECB Mode + * @param Key: Key used for AES algorithm. + * @param Input: pointer to the Input buffer. + * @param Ilength: length of the Input buffer, must be a multiple of 16 bytes. + * @param Output: pointer to the returned buffer. + * @retval An ErrorStatus enumeration value: + * - SUCCESS: Operation done + * - ERROR: Operation failed + */ +ErrorStatus AES_ECB_Encrypt(uint8_t* Key, uint8_t* Input, uint32_t Ilength, uint8_t* Output) +{ + AES_InitTypeDef AES_InitStructure; + AES_KeyInitTypeDef AES_KeyInitStructure; + ErrorStatus status = SUCCESS; + uint32_t keyaddr = (uint32_t)Key; + uint32_t inputaddr = (uint32_t)Input; + uint32_t outputaddr = (uint32_t)Output; + __IO uint32_t counter = 0; + uint32_t ccstatus = 0; + uint32_t i = 0; + + /* AES Key initialisation */ + AES_KeyInitStructure.AES_Key3 = __REV(*(uint32_t*)(keyaddr)); + keyaddr += 4; + AES_KeyInitStructure.AES_Key2 = __REV(*(uint32_t*)(keyaddr)); + keyaddr += 4; + AES_KeyInitStructure.AES_Key1 = __REV(*(uint32_t*)(keyaddr)); + keyaddr += 4; + AES_KeyInitStructure.AES_Key0 = __REV(*(uint32_t*)(keyaddr)); + AES_KeyInit(&AES_KeyInitStructure); + + /* AES configuration */ + AES_InitStructure.AES_Operation = AES_Operation_Encryp; + AES_InitStructure.AES_Chaining = AES_Chaining_ECB; + AES_InitStructure.AES_DataType = AES_DataType_8b; + AES_Init(&AES_InitStructure); + + /* Enable AES */ + AES_Cmd(ENABLE); + + for(i = 0; ((i < Ilength) && (status != ERROR)); i += 16) + { + AES_WriteSubData(*(uint32_t*)(inputaddr)); + inputaddr += 4; + AES_WriteSubData(*(uint32_t*)(inputaddr)); + inputaddr += 4; + AES_WriteSubData(*(uint32_t*)(inputaddr)); + inputaddr += 4; + AES_WriteSubData(*(uint32_t*)(inputaddr)); + inputaddr += 4; + + /* Wait for CCF flag to be set */ + counter = 0; + do + { + ccstatus = AES_GetFlagStatus(AES_FLAG_CCF); + counter++; + }while((counter != AES_CC_TIMEOUT) && (ccstatus == RESET)); + + if (ccstatus == RESET) + { + status = ERROR; + } + else + { + /* Clear CCF flag */ + AES_ClearFlag(AES_FLAG_CCF); + /* Read cipher text */ + *(uint32_t*)(outputaddr) = AES_ReadSubData(); + outputaddr += 4; + *(uint32_t*)(outputaddr) = AES_ReadSubData(); + outputaddr += 4; + *(uint32_t*)(outputaddr) = AES_ReadSubData(); + outputaddr += 4; + *(uint32_t*)(outputaddr) = AES_ReadSubData(); + outputaddr += 4; + } + } + + /* Disable AES before starting new processing */ + AES_Cmd(DISABLE); + + return status; +} + +/** + * @brief Decrypt using AES in ECB Mode + * @param Key: Key used for AES algorithm. + * @param Input: pointer to the Input buffer. + * @param Ilength: length of the Input buffer, must be a multiple of 16 bytes. + * @param Output: pointer to the returned buffer. + * @retval An ErrorStatus enumeration value: + * - SUCCESS: Operation done + * - ERROR: Operation failed + */ +ErrorStatus AES_ECB_Decrypt(uint8_t* Key, uint8_t* Input, uint32_t Ilength, uint8_t* Output) +{ + AES_InitTypeDef AES_InitStructure; + AES_KeyInitTypeDef AES_KeyInitStructure; + ErrorStatus status = SUCCESS; + uint32_t keyaddr = (uint32_t)Key; + uint32_t inputaddr = (uint32_t)Input; + uint32_t outputaddr = (uint32_t)Output; + __IO uint32_t counter = 0; + uint32_t ccstatus = 0; + uint32_t i = 0; + + /* AES Key initialisation */ + AES_KeyInitStructure.AES_Key3 = __REV(*(uint32_t*)(keyaddr)); + keyaddr += 4; + AES_KeyInitStructure.AES_Key2 = __REV(*(uint32_t*)(keyaddr)); + keyaddr += 4; + AES_KeyInitStructure.AES_Key1 = __REV(*(uint32_t*)(keyaddr)); + keyaddr += 4; + AES_KeyInitStructure.AES_Key0 = __REV(*(uint32_t*)(keyaddr)); + AES_KeyInit(&AES_KeyInitStructure); + + /* AES configuration */ + AES_InitStructure.AES_Operation = AES_Operation_KeyDerivAndDecryp; + AES_InitStructure.AES_Chaining = AES_Chaining_ECB; + AES_InitStructure.AES_DataType = AES_DataType_8b; + AES_Init(&AES_InitStructure); + + /* Enable AES */ + AES_Cmd(ENABLE); + + for(i = 0; ((i < Ilength) && (status != ERROR)); i += 16) + { + AES_WriteSubData(*(uint32_t*)(inputaddr)); + inputaddr += 4; + AES_WriteSubData(*(uint32_t*)(inputaddr)); + inputaddr += 4; + AES_WriteSubData(*(uint32_t*)(inputaddr)); + inputaddr += 4; + AES_WriteSubData(*(uint32_t*)(inputaddr)); + inputaddr += 4; + + /* Wait for CCF flag to be set */ + counter = 0; + do + { + ccstatus = AES_GetFlagStatus(AES_FLAG_CCF); + counter++; + }while((counter != AES_CC_TIMEOUT) && (ccstatus == RESET)); + + if (ccstatus == RESET) + { + status = ERROR; + } + else + { + /* Clear CCF flag */ + AES_ClearFlag(AES_FLAG_CCF); + + /* Read cipher text */ + *(uint32_t*)(outputaddr) = AES_ReadSubData(); + outputaddr += 4; + *(uint32_t*)(outputaddr) = AES_ReadSubData(); + outputaddr += 4; + *(uint32_t*)(outputaddr) = AES_ReadSubData(); + outputaddr += 4; + *(uint32_t*)(outputaddr) = AES_ReadSubData(); + outputaddr += 4; + } + } + + /* Disable AES before starting new processing */ + AES_Cmd(DISABLE); + + return status; +} + +/** + * @brief Encrypt using AES in CBC Mode + * @param InitVectors: Initialisation Vectors used for AES algorithm. + * @param Key: Key used for AES algorithm. + * @param Input: pointer to the Input buffer. + * @param Ilength: length of the Input buffer, must be a multiple of 16 bytes. + * @param Output: pointer to the returned buffer. + * @retval An ErrorStatus enumeration value: + * - SUCCESS: Operation done + * - ERROR: Operation failed + */ +ErrorStatus AES_CBC_Encrypt(uint8_t* Key, uint8_t InitVectors[16], uint8_t* Input, uint32_t Ilength, uint8_t* Output) +{ + AES_InitTypeDef AES_InitStructure; + AES_KeyInitTypeDef AES_KeyInitStructure; + AES_IVInitTypeDef AES_IVInitStructure; + ErrorStatus status = SUCCESS; + uint32_t keyaddr = (uint32_t)Key; + uint32_t inputaddr = (uint32_t)Input; + uint32_t outputaddr = (uint32_t)Output; + uint32_t ivaddr = (uint32_t)InitVectors; + __IO uint32_t counter = 0; + uint32_t ccstatus = 0; + uint32_t i = 0; + + /* AES Key initialisation*/ + AES_KeyInitStructure.AES_Key3 = __REV(*(uint32_t*)(keyaddr)); + keyaddr += 4; + AES_KeyInitStructure.AES_Key2 = __REV(*(uint32_t*)(keyaddr)); + keyaddr += 4; + AES_KeyInitStructure.AES_Key1 = __REV(*(uint32_t*)(keyaddr)); + keyaddr += 4; + AES_KeyInitStructure.AES_Key0 = __REV(*(uint32_t*)(keyaddr)); + AES_KeyInit(&AES_KeyInitStructure); + + /* AES Initialization Vectors */ + AES_IVInitStructure.AES_IV3 = __REV(*(uint32_t*)(ivaddr)); + ivaddr += 4; + AES_IVInitStructure.AES_IV2 = __REV(*(uint32_t*)(ivaddr)); + ivaddr += 4; + AES_IVInitStructure.AES_IV1 = __REV(*(uint32_t*)(ivaddr)); + ivaddr += 4; + AES_IVInitStructure.AES_IV0 = __REV(*(uint32_t*)(ivaddr)); + AES_IVInit(&AES_IVInitStructure); + + /* AES configuration */ + AES_InitStructure.AES_Operation = AES_Operation_Encryp; + AES_InitStructure.AES_Chaining = AES_Chaining_CBC; + AES_InitStructure.AES_DataType = AES_DataType_8b; + AES_Init(&AES_InitStructure); + + /* Enable AES */ + AES_Cmd(ENABLE); + + for(i = 0; ((i < Ilength) && (status != ERROR)); i += 16) + { + AES_WriteSubData(*(uint32_t*)(inputaddr)); + inputaddr += 4; + AES_WriteSubData(*(uint32_t*)(inputaddr)); + inputaddr += 4; + AES_WriteSubData(*(uint32_t*)(inputaddr)); + inputaddr += 4; + AES_WriteSubData(*(uint32_t*)(inputaddr)); + inputaddr += 4; + + /* Wait for CCF flag to be set */ + counter = 0; + do + { + ccstatus = AES_GetFlagStatus(AES_FLAG_CCF); + counter++; + }while((counter != AES_CC_TIMEOUT) && (ccstatus == RESET)); + + if (ccstatus == RESET) + { + status = ERROR; + } + else + { + /* Clear CCF flag */ + AES_ClearFlag(AES_FLAG_CCF); + + /* Read cipher text */ + *(uint32_t*)(outputaddr) = AES_ReadSubData(); + outputaddr += 4; + *(uint32_t*)(outputaddr) = AES_ReadSubData(); + outputaddr += 4; + *(uint32_t*)(outputaddr) = AES_ReadSubData(); + outputaddr += 4; + *(uint32_t*)(outputaddr) = AES_ReadSubData(); + outputaddr += 4; + } + } + + /* Disable AES before starting new processing */ + AES_Cmd(DISABLE); + + return status; +} + +/** + * @brief Decrypt using AES in CBC Mode + * @param InitVectors: Initialisation Vectors used for AES algorithm. + * @param Key: Key used for AES algorithm. + * @param Input: pointer to the Input buffer. + * @param Ilength: length of the Input buffer, must be a multiple of 16 bytes. + * @param Output: pointer to the returned buffer. + * @retval An ErrorStatus enumeration value: + * - SUCCESS: Operation done + * - ERROR: Operation failed + */ +ErrorStatus AES_CBC_Decrypt(uint8_t* Key, uint8_t InitVectors[16], uint8_t* Input, uint32_t Ilength, uint8_t* Output) +{ + AES_InitTypeDef AES_InitStructure; + AES_KeyInitTypeDef AES_KeyInitStructure; + AES_IVInitTypeDef AES_IVInitStructure; + ErrorStatus status = SUCCESS; + uint32_t keyaddr = (uint32_t)Key; + uint32_t inputaddr = (uint32_t)Input; + uint32_t outputaddr = (uint32_t)Output; + uint32_t ivaddr = (uint32_t)InitVectors; + __IO uint32_t counter = 0; + uint32_t ccstatus = 0; + uint32_t i = 0; + + /* AES Key initialisation*/ + AES_KeyInitStructure.AES_Key3 = __REV(*(uint32_t*)(keyaddr)); + keyaddr += 4; + AES_KeyInitStructure.AES_Key2 = __REV(*(uint32_t*)(keyaddr)); + keyaddr += 4; + AES_KeyInitStructure.AES_Key1 = __REV(*(uint32_t*)(keyaddr)); + keyaddr += 4; + AES_KeyInitStructure.AES_Key0 = __REV(*(uint32_t*)(keyaddr)); + AES_KeyInit(&AES_KeyInitStructure); + + /* AES Initialization Vectors */ + AES_IVInitStructure.AES_IV3 = __REV(*(uint32_t*)(ivaddr)); + ivaddr += 4; + AES_IVInitStructure.AES_IV2 = __REV(*(uint32_t*)(ivaddr)); + ivaddr += 4; + AES_IVInitStructure.AES_IV1 = __REV(*(uint32_t*)(ivaddr)); + ivaddr += 4; + AES_IVInitStructure.AES_IV0 = __REV(*(uint32_t*)(ivaddr)); + AES_IVInit(&AES_IVInitStructure); + + /* AES configuration */ + AES_InitStructure.AES_Operation = AES_Operation_KeyDerivAndDecryp; + AES_InitStructure.AES_Chaining = AES_Chaining_CBC; + AES_InitStructure.AES_DataType = AES_DataType_8b; + AES_Init(&AES_InitStructure); + + /* Enable AES */ + AES_Cmd(ENABLE); + + for(i = 0; ((i < Ilength) && (status != ERROR)); i += 16) + { + AES_WriteSubData(*(uint32_t*)(inputaddr)); + inputaddr += 4; + AES_WriteSubData(*(uint32_t*)(inputaddr)); + inputaddr += 4; + AES_WriteSubData(*(uint32_t*)(inputaddr)); + inputaddr += 4; + AES_WriteSubData(*(uint32_t*)(inputaddr)); + inputaddr += 4; + + /* Wait for CCF flag to be set */ + counter = 0; + do + { + ccstatus = AES_GetFlagStatus(AES_FLAG_CCF); + counter++; + }while((counter != AES_CC_TIMEOUT) && (ccstatus == RESET)); + + if (ccstatus == RESET) + { + status = ERROR; + } + else + { + /* Clear CCF flag */ + AES_ClearFlag(AES_FLAG_CCF); + + /* Read cipher text */ + *(uint32_t*)(outputaddr) = AES_ReadSubData(); + outputaddr += 4; + *(uint32_t*)(outputaddr) = AES_ReadSubData(); + outputaddr += 4; + *(uint32_t*)(outputaddr) = AES_ReadSubData(); + outputaddr += 4; + *(uint32_t*)(outputaddr) = AES_ReadSubData(); + outputaddr += 4; + } + } + + /* Disable AES before starting new processing */ + AES_Cmd(DISABLE); + + return status; +} + +/** + * @brief Encrypt using AES in CTR Mode + * @param InitVectors: Initialisation Vectors used for AES algorithm. + * @param Key: Key used for AES algorithm. + * @param Input: pointer to the Input buffer. + * @param Ilength: length of the Input buffer, must be a multiple of 16 bytes. + * @param Output: pointer to the returned buffer. + * @retval An ErrorStatus enumeration value: + * - SUCCESS: Operation done + * - ERROR: Operation failed + */ +ErrorStatus AES_CTR_Encrypt(uint8_t* Key, uint8_t InitVectors[16], uint8_t* Input, uint32_t Ilength, uint8_t* Output) +{ + AES_InitTypeDef AES_InitStructure; + AES_KeyInitTypeDef AES_KeyInitStructure; + AES_IVInitTypeDef AES_IVInitStructure; + + ErrorStatus status = SUCCESS; + uint32_t keyaddr = (uint32_t)Key; + uint32_t inputaddr = (uint32_t)Input; + uint32_t outputaddr = (uint32_t)Output; + uint32_t ivaddr = (uint32_t)InitVectors; + __IO uint32_t counter = 0; + uint32_t ccstatus = 0; + uint32_t i = 0; + + /* AES key initialisation*/ + AES_KeyInitStructure.AES_Key3 = __REV(*(uint32_t*)(keyaddr)); + keyaddr += 4; + AES_KeyInitStructure.AES_Key2 = __REV(*(uint32_t*)(keyaddr)); + keyaddr += 4; + AES_KeyInitStructure.AES_Key1 = __REV(*(uint32_t*)(keyaddr)); + keyaddr += 4; + AES_KeyInitStructure.AES_Key0 = __REV(*(uint32_t*)(keyaddr)); + AES_KeyInit(&AES_KeyInitStructure); + + /* AES Initialization Vectors */ + AES_IVInitStructure.AES_IV3 = __REV(*(uint32_t*)(ivaddr)); + ivaddr += 4; + AES_IVInitStructure.AES_IV2= __REV(*(uint32_t*)(ivaddr)); + ivaddr += 4; + AES_IVInitStructure.AES_IV1 = __REV(*(uint32_t*)(ivaddr)); + ivaddr += 4; + AES_IVInitStructure.AES_IV0= __REV(*(uint32_t*)(ivaddr)); + AES_IVInit(&AES_IVInitStructure); + + /* AES configuration */ + AES_InitStructure.AES_Operation = AES_Operation_Encryp; + AES_InitStructure.AES_Chaining = AES_Chaining_CTR; + AES_InitStructure.AES_DataType = AES_DataType_8b; + AES_Init(&AES_InitStructure); + + /* Enable AES */ + AES_Cmd(ENABLE); + + for(i = 0; ((i < Ilength) && (status != ERROR)); i += 16) + { + AES_WriteSubData(*(uint32_t*)(inputaddr)); + inputaddr += 4; + AES_WriteSubData(*(uint32_t*)(inputaddr)); + inputaddr += 4; + AES_WriteSubData(*(uint32_t*)(inputaddr)); + inputaddr += 4; + AES_WriteSubData(*(uint32_t*)(inputaddr)); + inputaddr += 4; + + /* Wait for CCF flag to be set */ + counter = 0; + do + { + ccstatus = AES_GetFlagStatus(AES_FLAG_CCF); + counter++; + }while((counter != AES_CC_TIMEOUT) && (ccstatus == RESET)); + + if (ccstatus == RESET) + { + status = ERROR; + } + else + { + /* Clear CCF flag */ + AES_ClearFlag(AES_FLAG_CCF); + + /* Read cipher text */ + *(uint32_t*)(outputaddr) = AES_ReadSubData(); + outputaddr += 4; + *(uint32_t*)(outputaddr) = AES_ReadSubData(); + outputaddr += 4; + *(uint32_t*)(outputaddr) = AES_ReadSubData(); + outputaddr += 4; + *(uint32_t*)(outputaddr) = AES_ReadSubData(); + outputaddr += 4; + } + } + + /* Disable AES before starting new processing */ + AES_Cmd(DISABLE); + + return status; +} + +/** + * @brief Decrypt using AES in CTR Mode + * @param InitVectors: Initialisation Vectors used for AES algorithm. + * @param Key: Key used for AES algorithm. + * @param Input: pointer to the Input buffer. + * @param Ilength: length of the Input buffer, must be a multiple of 16 bytes. + * @param Output: pointer to the returned buffer. + * @retval An ErrorStatus enumeration value: + * - SUCCESS: Operation done + * - ERROR: Operation failed + */ +ErrorStatus AES_CTR_Decrypt(uint8_t* Key, uint8_t InitVectors[16], uint8_t* Input, uint32_t Ilength, uint8_t* Output) +{ + AES_InitTypeDef AES_InitStructure; + AES_KeyInitTypeDef AES_KeyInitStructure; + AES_IVInitTypeDef AES_IVInitStructure; + + ErrorStatus status = SUCCESS; + uint32_t keyaddr = (uint32_t)Key; + uint32_t inputaddr = (uint32_t)Input; + uint32_t outputaddr = (uint32_t)Output; + uint32_t ivaddr = (uint32_t)InitVectors; + __IO uint32_t counter = 0; + uint32_t ccstatus = 0; + uint32_t i = 0; + + /* AES Key initialisation*/ + AES_KeyInitStructure.AES_Key3 = __REV(*(uint32_t*)(keyaddr)); + keyaddr += 4; + AES_KeyInitStructure.AES_Key2 = __REV(*(uint32_t*)(keyaddr)); + keyaddr += 4; + AES_KeyInitStructure.AES_Key1 = __REV(*(uint32_t*)(keyaddr)); + keyaddr += 4; + AES_KeyInitStructure.AES_Key0 = __REV(*(uint32_t*)(keyaddr)); + AES_KeyInit(&AES_KeyInitStructure); + + /* AES Initialization Vectors */ + AES_IVInitStructure.AES_IV3 = __REV(*(uint32_t*)(ivaddr)); + ivaddr += 4; + AES_IVInitStructure.AES_IV2 = __REV(*(uint32_t*)(ivaddr)); + ivaddr += 4; + AES_IVInitStructure.AES_IV1 = __REV(*(uint32_t*)(ivaddr)); + ivaddr += 4; + AES_IVInitStructure.AES_IV0 = __REV(*(uint32_t*)(ivaddr)); + AES_IVInit(&AES_IVInitStructure); + + /* AES configuration */ + AES_InitStructure.AES_Operation = AES_Operation_KeyDerivAndDecryp; + AES_InitStructure.AES_Chaining = AES_Chaining_CTR; + AES_InitStructure.AES_DataType = AES_DataType_8b; + AES_Init(&AES_InitStructure); + + /* Enable AES */ + AES_Cmd(ENABLE); + + for(i = 0; ((i < Ilength) && (status != ERROR)); i += 16) + { + AES_WriteSubData(*(uint32_t*)(inputaddr)); + inputaddr += 4; + AES_WriteSubData(*(uint32_t*)(inputaddr)); + inputaddr += 4; + AES_WriteSubData(*(uint32_t*)(inputaddr)); + inputaddr += 4; + AES_WriteSubData(*(uint32_t*)(inputaddr)); + inputaddr += 4; + + /* Wait for CCF flag to be set */ + counter = 0; + do + { + ccstatus = AES_GetFlagStatus(AES_FLAG_CCF); + counter++; + }while((counter != AES_CC_TIMEOUT) && (ccstatus == RESET)); + + if (ccstatus == RESET) + { + status = ERROR; + } + else + { + /* Clear CCF flag */ + AES_ClearFlag(AES_FLAG_CCF); + + /* Read cipher text */ + *(uint32_t*)(outputaddr) = AES_ReadSubData(); + outputaddr += 4; + *(uint32_t*)(outputaddr) = AES_ReadSubData(); + outputaddr += 4; + *(uint32_t*)(outputaddr) = AES_ReadSubData(); + outputaddr += 4; + *(uint32_t*)(outputaddr) = AES_ReadSubData(); + outputaddr += 4; + } + } + + /* Disable AES before starting new processing */ + AES_Cmd(DISABLE); + + return status; +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/ + diff --git a/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32l1xx_crc.c b/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32l1xx_crc.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..66170d3 --- /dev/null +++ b/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32l1xx_crc.c @@ -0,0 +1,133 @@ +/** + ****************************************************************************** + * @file stm32l1xx_crc.c + * @author MCD Application Team + * @version V1.1.1 + * @date 05-March-2012 + * @brief This file provides all the CRC firmware functions. + ****************************************************************************** + * @attention + * + * <h2><center>© COPYRIGHT 2012 STMicroelectronics</center></h2> + * + * Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License"); + * You may not use this file except in compliance with the License. + * You may obtain a copy of the License at: + * + * http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2 + * + * Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software + * distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS, + * WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. + * See the License for the specific language governing permissions and + * limitations under the License. + * + ****************************************************************************** + */ + +/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#include "stm32l1xx_crc.h" + +/** @addtogroup STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver + * @{ + */ + +/** @defgroup CRC + * @brief CRC driver modules + * @{ + */ + +/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/ + +/** @defgroup CRC_Private_Functions + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Resets the CRC Data register (DR). + * @param None + * @retval None + */ +void CRC_ResetDR(void) +{ + /* Reset CRC generator */ + CRC->CR = CRC_CR_RESET; +} + +/** + * @brief Computes the 32-bit CRC of a given data word(32-bit). + * @param Data: data word(32-bit) to compute its CRC. + * @retval 32-bit CRC + */ +uint32_t CRC_CalcCRC(uint32_t Data) +{ + CRC->DR = Data; + + return (CRC->DR); +} + +/** + * @brief Computes the 32-bit CRC of a given buffer of data word(32-bit). + * @param pBuffer: pointer to the buffer containing the data to be computed. + * @param BufferLength: length of the buffer to be computed + * @retval 32-bit CRC + */ +uint32_t CRC_CalcBlockCRC(uint32_t pBuffer[], uint32_t BufferLength) +{ + uint32_t index = 0; + + for(index = 0; index < BufferLength; index++) + { + CRC->DR = pBuffer[index]; + } + return (CRC->DR); +} + +/** + * @brief Returns the current CRC value. + * @param None + * @retval 32-bit CRC + */ +uint32_t CRC_GetCRC(void) +{ + return (CRC->DR); +} + +/** + * @brief Stores a 8-bit data in the Independent Data(ID) register. + * @param IDValue: 8-bit value to be stored in the ID register + * @retval None + */ +void CRC_SetIDRegister(uint8_t IDValue) +{ + CRC->IDR = IDValue; +} + +/** + * @brief Returns the 8-bit data stored in the Independent Data(ID) register. + * @param None + * @retval 8-bit value of the ID register + */ +uint8_t CRC_GetIDRegister(void) +{ + return (CRC->IDR); +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/ diff --git a/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32l1xx_dac.c b/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32l1xx_dac.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..233bfad --- /dev/null +++ b/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32l1xx_dac.c @@ -0,0 +1,687 @@ +/** + ****************************************************************************** + * @file stm32l1xx_dac.c + * @author MCD Application Team + * @version V1.1.1 + * @date 05-March-2012 + * @brief This file provides firmware functions to manage the following + * functionalities of the Digital-to-Analog Converter (DAC) peripheral: + * + DAC channels configuration: trigger, output buffer, data format + * + DMA management + * + Interrupts and flags management + + * @verbatim + * + =============================================================================== + ##### DAC Peripheral features ##### + =============================================================================== + [..] The device integrates two 12-bit Digital Analog Converters that can + be used independently or simultaneously (dual mode): + (#) DAC channel1 with DAC_OUT1 (PA4) as output. + (#) DAC channel2 with DAC_OUT2 (PA5) as output. + + [..] Digital to Analog conversion can be non-triggered using DAC_Trigger_None + and DAC_OUT1/DAC_OUT2 is available once writing to DHRx register using + DAC_SetChannel1Data()/DAC_SetChannel2Data. + + [..] Digital to Analog conversion can be triggered by: + (#) External event: EXTI Line 9 (any GPIOx_Pin9) using DAC_Trigger_Ext_IT9. + The used pin (GPIOx_Pin9) must be configured in input mode. + (#) Timers TRGO: TIM2, TIM4, TIM6, TIM7 and TIM9 + (DAC_Trigger_T2_TRGO, DAC_Trigger_T4_TRGO...). + The timer TRGO event should be selected using TIM_SelectOutputTrigger() + (#) Software using DAC_Trigger_Software. + + [..] Each DAC channel integrates an output buffer that can be used to + reduce the output impedance, and to drive external loads directly + without having to add an external operational amplifier. + To enable, the output buffer use + DAC_InitStructure.DAC_OutputBuffer = DAC_OutputBuffer_Enable; + + [..] Refer to the device datasheet for more details about output impedance + value with and without output buffer. + + [..] Both DAC channels can be used to generate: + (#) Noise wave using DAC_WaveGeneration_Noise + (#) Triangle wave using DAC_WaveGeneration_Triangle + + [..] Wave generation can be disabled using DAC_WaveGeneration_None. + + [..] The DAC data format can be: + (#) 8-bit right alignment using DAC_Align_8b_R + (#) 12-bit left alignment using DAC_Align_12b_L + (#) 12-bit right alignment using DAC_Align_12b_R + + [..] The analog output voltage on each DAC channel pin is determined + by the following equation: DAC_OUTx = VREF+ * DOR / 4095 + with DOR is the Data Output Register. + VEF+ is the input voltage reference (refer to the device datasheet) + e.g. To set DAC_OUT1 to 0.7V, use + DAC_SetChannel1Data(DAC_Align_12b_R, 868); + Assuming that VREF+ = 3.3, DAC_OUT1 = (3.3 * 868) / 4095 = 0.7V. + + [..] A DMA1 request can be generated when an external trigger (but not + a software trigger) occurs if DMA1 requests are enabled using + DAC_DMACmd() + [..] DMA1 requests are mapped as following: + (#) DAC channel1 is mapped on DMA1 channel3 which must be already + configured. + (#) DAC channel2 is mapped on DMA1 channel4 which must be already + configured. + + ##### How to use this driver ##### + =============================================================================== + [..] + (+) DAC APB clock must be enabled to get write access to DAC registers using + RCC_APB1PeriphClockCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_DAC, ENABLE) + (+) Configure DAC_OUTx (DAC_OUT1: PA4, DAC_OUT2: PA5) in analog mode. + (+) Configure the DAC channel using DAC_Init() + (+) Enable the DAC channel using DAC_Cmd() + + @endverbatim + * + ****************************************************************************** + * @attention + * + * <h2><center>© COPYRIGHT 2012 STMicroelectronics</center></h2> + * + * Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License"); + * You may not use this file except in compliance with the License. + * You may obtain a copy of the License at: + * + * http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2 + * + * Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software + * distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS, + * WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. + * See the License for the specific language governing permissions and + * limitations under the License. + * + ****************************************************************************** + */ + +/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#include "stm32l1xx_dac.h" +#include "stm32l1xx_rcc.h" + +/** @addtogroup STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver + * @{ + */ + +/** @defgroup DAC + * @brief DAC driver modules + * @{ + */ + +/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* CR register Mask */ +#define CR_CLEAR_MASK ((uint32_t)0x00000FFE) + +/* DAC Dual Channels SWTRIG masks */ +#define DUAL_SWTRIG_SET ((uint32_t)0x00000003) +#define DUAL_SWTRIG_RESET ((uint32_t)0xFFFFFFFC) + +/* DHR registers offsets */ +#define DHR12R1_OFFSET ((uint32_t)0x00000008) +#define DHR12R2_OFFSET ((uint32_t)0x00000014) +#define DHR12RD_OFFSET ((uint32_t)0x00000020) + +/* DOR register offset */ +#define DOR_OFFSET ((uint32_t)0x0000002C) + +/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/ + +/** @defgroup DAC_Private_Functions + * @{ + */ + +/** @defgroup DAC_Group1 DAC channels configuration + * @brief DAC channels configuration: trigger, output buffer, data format. + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### DAC channels configuration: trigger, output buffer, data format ##### + =============================================================================== + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Deinitializes the DAC peripheral registers to their default reset values. + * @param None + * @retval None + */ +void DAC_DeInit(void) +{ + /* Enable DAC reset state */ + RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_DAC, ENABLE); + /* Release DAC from reset state */ + RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_DAC, DISABLE); +} + +/** + * @brief Initializes the DAC peripheral according to the specified + * parameters in the DAC_InitStruct. + * @param DAC_Channel: the selected DAC channel. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg DAC_Channel_1: DAC Channel1 selected. + * @arg DAC_Channel_2: DAC Channel2 selected. + * @param DAC_InitStruct: pointer to a DAC_InitTypeDef structure that + * contains the configuration information for the specified DAC channel. + * @retval None + */ +void DAC_Init(uint32_t DAC_Channel, DAC_InitTypeDef* DAC_InitStruct) +{ + uint32_t tmpreg1 = 0, tmpreg2 = 0; + + /* Check the DAC parameters */ + assert_param(IS_DAC_CHANNEL(DAC_Channel)); + assert_param(IS_DAC_TRIGGER(DAC_InitStruct->DAC_Trigger)); + assert_param(IS_DAC_GENERATE_WAVE(DAC_InitStruct->DAC_WaveGeneration)); + assert_param(IS_DAC_LFSR_UNMASK_TRIANGLE_AMPLITUDE(DAC_InitStruct->DAC_LFSRUnmask_TriangleAmplitude)); + assert_param(IS_DAC_OUTPUT_BUFFER_STATE(DAC_InitStruct->DAC_OutputBuffer)); + +/*---------------------------- DAC CR Configuration --------------------------*/ + /* Get the DAC CR value */ + tmpreg1 = DAC->CR; + /* Clear BOFFx, TENx, TSELx, WAVEx and MAMPx bits */ + tmpreg1 &= ~(CR_CLEAR_MASK << DAC_Channel); + /* Configure for the selected DAC channel: buffer output, trigger, wave generation, + mask/amplitude for wave generation */ + /* Set TSELx and TENx bits according to DAC_Trigger value */ + /* Set WAVEx bits according to DAC_WaveGeneration value */ + /* Set MAMPx bits according to DAC_LFSRUnmask_TriangleAmplitude value */ + /* Set BOFFx bit according to DAC_OutputBuffer value */ + tmpreg2 = (DAC_InitStruct->DAC_Trigger | DAC_InitStruct->DAC_WaveGeneration | + DAC_InitStruct->DAC_LFSRUnmask_TriangleAmplitude | DAC_InitStruct->DAC_OutputBuffer); + /* Calculate CR register value depending on DAC_Channel */ + tmpreg1 |= tmpreg2 << DAC_Channel; + /* Write to DAC CR */ + DAC->CR = tmpreg1; +} + +/** + * @brief Fills each DAC_InitStruct member with its default value. + * @param DAC_InitStruct: pointer to a DAC_InitTypeDef structure which will + * be initialized. + * @retval None + */ +void DAC_StructInit(DAC_InitTypeDef* DAC_InitStruct) +{ +/*--------------- Reset DAC init structure parameters values -----------------*/ + /* Initialize the DAC_Trigger member */ + DAC_InitStruct->DAC_Trigger = DAC_Trigger_None; + /* Initialize the DAC_WaveGeneration member */ + DAC_InitStruct->DAC_WaveGeneration = DAC_WaveGeneration_None; + /* Initialize the DAC_LFSRUnmask_TriangleAmplitude member */ + DAC_InitStruct->DAC_LFSRUnmask_TriangleAmplitude = DAC_LFSRUnmask_Bit0; + /* Initialize the DAC_OutputBuffer member */ + DAC_InitStruct->DAC_OutputBuffer = DAC_OutputBuffer_Enable; +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the specified DAC channel. + * @param DAC_Channel: The selected DAC channel. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg DAC_Channel_1: DAC Channel1 selected + * @arg DAC_Channel_2: DAC Channel2 selected + * @param NewState: new state of the DAC channel. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @note When the DAC channel is enabled the trigger source can no more + * be modified. + * @retval None + */ +void DAC_Cmd(uint32_t DAC_Channel, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_DAC_CHANNEL(DAC_Channel)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the selected DAC channel */ + DAC->CR |= (DAC_CR_EN1 << DAC_Channel); + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected DAC channel */ + DAC->CR &= (~(DAC_CR_EN1 << DAC_Channel)); + } +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the selected DAC channel software trigger. + * @param DAC_Channel: the selected DAC channel. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg DAC_Channel_1: DAC Channel1 selected + * @arg DAC_Channel_2: DAC Channel2 selected + * @param NewState: new state of the selected DAC channel software trigger. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void DAC_SoftwareTriggerCmd(uint32_t DAC_Channel, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_DAC_CHANNEL(DAC_Channel)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable software trigger for the selected DAC channel */ + DAC->SWTRIGR |= (uint32_t)DAC_SWTRIGR_SWTRIG1 << (DAC_Channel >> 4); + } + else + { + /* Disable software trigger for the selected DAC channel */ + DAC->SWTRIGR &= ~((uint32_t)DAC_SWTRIGR_SWTRIG1 << (DAC_Channel >> 4)); + } +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables simultaneously the two DAC channels software + * triggers. + * @param NewState: new state of the DAC channels software triggers. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void DAC_DualSoftwareTriggerCmd(FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable software trigger for both DAC channels */ + DAC->SWTRIGR |= DUAL_SWTRIG_SET; + } + else + { + /* Disable software trigger for both DAC channels */ + DAC->SWTRIGR &= DUAL_SWTRIG_RESET; + } +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the selected DAC channel wave generation. + * @param DAC_Channel: the selected DAC channel. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg DAC_Channel_1: DAC Channel1 selected + * @arg DAC_Channel_2: DAC Channel2 selected + * @param DAC_Wave: Specifies the wave type to enable or disable. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg DAC_Wave_Noise: noise wave generation + * @arg DAC_Wave_Triangle: triangle wave generation + * @param NewState: new state of the selected DAC channel wave generation. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @note + * @retval None + */ +void DAC_WaveGenerationCmd(uint32_t DAC_Channel, uint32_t DAC_Wave, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_DAC_CHANNEL(DAC_Channel)); + assert_param(IS_DAC_WAVE(DAC_Wave)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the selected wave generation for the selected DAC channel */ + DAC->CR |= DAC_Wave << DAC_Channel; + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected wave generation for the selected DAC channel */ + DAC->CR &= ~(DAC_Wave << DAC_Channel); + } +} + +/** + * @brief Set the specified data holding register value for DAC channel1. + * @param DAC_Align: Specifies the data alignment for DAC channel1. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg DAC_Align_8b_R: 8bit right data alignment selected + * @arg DAC_Align_12b_L: 12bit left data alignment selected + * @arg DAC_Align_12b_R: 12bit right data alignment selected + * @param Data : Data to be loaded in the selected data holding register. + * @retval None + */ +void DAC_SetChannel1Data(uint32_t DAC_Align, uint16_t Data) +{ + __IO uint32_t tmp = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_DAC_ALIGN(DAC_Align)); + assert_param(IS_DAC_DATA(Data)); + + tmp = (uint32_t)DAC_BASE; + tmp += DHR12R1_OFFSET + DAC_Align; + + /* Set the DAC channel1 selected data holding register */ + *(__IO uint32_t *) tmp = Data; +} + +/** + * @brief Set the specified data holding register value for DAC channel2. + * @param DAC_Align: Specifies the data alignment for DAC channel2. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg DAC_Align_8b_R: 8bit right data alignment selected + * @arg DAC_Align_12b_L: 12bit left data alignment selected + * @arg DAC_Align_12b_R: 12bit right data alignment selected + * @param Data : Data to be loaded in the selected data holding register. + * @retval None + */ +void DAC_SetChannel2Data(uint32_t DAC_Align, uint16_t Data) +{ + __IO uint32_t tmp = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_DAC_ALIGN(DAC_Align)); + assert_param(IS_DAC_DATA(Data)); + + tmp = (uint32_t)DAC_BASE; + tmp += DHR12R2_OFFSET + DAC_Align; + + /* Set the DAC channel2 selected data holding register */ + *(__IO uint32_t *)tmp = Data; +} + +/** + * @brief Set the specified data holding register value for dual channel DAC. + * @param DAC_Align: Specifies the data alignment for dual channel DAC. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg DAC_Align_8b_R: 8bit right data alignment selected + * @arg DAC_Align_12b_L: 12bit left data alignment selected + * @arg DAC_Align_12b_R: 12bit right data alignment selected + * @param Data2: Data for DAC Channel2 to be loaded in the selected data + * holding register. + * @param Data1: Data for DAC Channel1 to be loaded in the selected data + * holding register. + * @note In dual mode, a unique register access is required to write in both + * DAC channels at the same time. + * @retval None + */ +void DAC_SetDualChannelData(uint32_t DAC_Align, uint16_t Data2, uint16_t Data1) +{ + uint32_t data = 0, tmp = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_DAC_ALIGN(DAC_Align)); + assert_param(IS_DAC_DATA(Data1)); + assert_param(IS_DAC_DATA(Data2)); + + /* Calculate and set dual DAC data holding register value */ + if (DAC_Align == DAC_Align_8b_R) + { + data = ((uint32_t)Data2 << 8) | Data1; + } + else + { + data = ((uint32_t)Data2 << 16) | Data1; + } + + tmp = (uint32_t)DAC_BASE; + tmp += DHR12RD_OFFSET + DAC_Align; + + /* Set the dual DAC selected data holding register */ + *(__IO uint32_t *)tmp = data; +} + +/** + * @brief Returns the last data output value of the selected DAC channel. + * @param DAC_Channel: the selected DAC channel. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg DAC_Channel_1: DAC Channel1 selected + * @arg DAC_Channel_2: DAC Channel2 selected + * @retval The selected DAC channel data output value. + */ +uint16_t DAC_GetDataOutputValue(uint32_t DAC_Channel) +{ + __IO uint32_t tmp = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_DAC_CHANNEL(DAC_Channel)); + + tmp = (uint32_t) DAC_BASE ; + tmp += DOR_OFFSET + ((uint32_t)DAC_Channel >> 2); + + /* Returns the DAC channel data output register value */ + return (uint16_t) (*(__IO uint32_t*) tmp); +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup DAC_Group2 DMA management functions + * @brief DMA management functions + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### DMA management functions ##### + =============================================================================== + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the specified DAC channel DMA request. + * When enabled DMA1 is generated when an external trigger (EXTI Line9, + * TIM2, TIM4, TIM6, TIM7 or TIM9 but not a software trigger) occurs. + * @param DAC_Channel: the selected DAC channel. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg DAC_Channel_1: DAC Channel1 selected + * @arg DAC_Channel_2: DAC Channel2 selected + * @param NewState: new state of the selected DAC channel DMA request. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @note The DAC channel1 (channel2) is mapped on DMA1 channel3 (channel4) which + * must be already configured. + * @retval None + */ +void DAC_DMACmd(uint32_t DAC_Channel, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_DAC_CHANNEL(DAC_Channel)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the selected DAC channel DMA request */ + DAC->CR |= (DAC_CR_DMAEN1 << DAC_Channel); + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected DAC channel DMA request */ + DAC->CR &= (~(DAC_CR_DMAEN1 << DAC_Channel)); + } +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup DAC_Group3 Interrupts and flags management functions + * @brief Interrupts and flags management functions + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### Interrupts and flags management functions ##### + =============================================================================== + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the specified DAC interrupts. + * @param DAC_Channel: the selected DAC channel. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg DAC_Channel_1: DAC Channel1 selected + * @arg DAC_Channel_2: DAC Channel2 selected + * @param DAC_IT: specifies the DAC interrupt sources to be enabled or disabled. + * This parameter can be the following value: + * @arg DAC_IT_DMAUDR: DMA underrun interrupt mask + * @note The DMA underrun occurs when a second external trigger arrives before + * the acknowledgement for the first external trigger is received (first request). + * @param NewState: new state of the specified DAC interrupts. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void DAC_ITConfig(uint32_t DAC_Channel, uint32_t DAC_IT, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_DAC_CHANNEL(DAC_Channel)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + assert_param(IS_DAC_IT(DAC_IT)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the selected DAC interrupts */ + DAC->CR |= (DAC_IT << DAC_Channel); + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected DAC interrupts */ + DAC->CR &= (~(uint32_t)(DAC_IT << DAC_Channel)); + } +} + +/** + * @brief Checks whether the specified DAC flag is set or not. + * @param DAC_Channel: thee selected DAC channel. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg DAC_Channel_1: DAC Channel1 selected + * @arg DAC_Channel_2: DAC Channel2 selected + * @param DAC_FLAG: specifies the flag to check. + * This parameter can be only of the following value: + * @arg DAC_FLAG_DMAUDR: DMA underrun flag + * @note The DMA underrun occurs when a second external trigger arrives before + * the acknowledgement for the first external trigger is received (first request). + * @retval The new state of DAC_FLAG (SET or RESET). + */ +FlagStatus DAC_GetFlagStatus(uint32_t DAC_Channel, uint32_t DAC_FLAG) +{ + FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET; + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_DAC_CHANNEL(DAC_Channel)); + assert_param(IS_DAC_FLAG(DAC_FLAG)); + + /* Check the status of the specified DAC flag */ + if ((DAC->SR & (DAC_FLAG << DAC_Channel)) != (uint8_t)RESET) + { + /* DAC_FLAG is set */ + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + /* DAC_FLAG is reset */ + bitstatus = RESET; + } + /* Return the DAC_FLAG status */ + return bitstatus; +} + +/** + * @brief Clears the DAC channel's pending flags. + * @param DAC_Channel: the selected DAC channel. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg DAC_Channel_1: DAC Channel1 selected + * @arg DAC_Channel_2: DAC Channel2 selected + * @param DAC_FLAG: specifies the flag to clear. + * This parameter can be the following value: + * @arg DAC_FLAG_DMAUDR: DMA underrun flag + * @retval None + */ +void DAC_ClearFlag(uint32_t DAC_Channel, uint32_t DAC_FLAG) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_DAC_CHANNEL(DAC_Channel)); + assert_param(IS_DAC_FLAG(DAC_FLAG)); + + /* Clear the selected DAC flags */ + DAC->SR = (DAC_FLAG << DAC_Channel); +} + +/** + * @brief Checks whether the specified DAC interrupt has occurred or not. + * @param DAC_Channel: the selected DAC channel. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg DAC_Channel_1: DAC Channel1 selected + * @arg DAC_Channel_2: DAC Channel2 selected + * @param DAC_IT: specifies the DAC interrupt source to check. + * This parameter can be the following values: + * @arg DAC_IT_DMAUDR: DMA underrun interrupt mask + * @note The DMA underrun occurs when a second external trigger arrives before + * the acknowledgement for the first external trigger is received (first request). + * @retval The new state of DAC_IT (SET or RESET). + */ +ITStatus DAC_GetITStatus(uint32_t DAC_Channel, uint32_t DAC_IT) +{ + ITStatus bitstatus = RESET; + uint32_t enablestatus = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_DAC_CHANNEL(DAC_Channel)); + assert_param(IS_DAC_IT(DAC_IT)); + + /* Get the DAC_IT enable bit status */ + enablestatus = (DAC->CR & (DAC_IT << DAC_Channel)) ; + + /* Check the status of the specified DAC interrupt */ + if (((DAC->SR & (DAC_IT << DAC_Channel)) != (uint32_t)RESET) && enablestatus) + { + /* DAC_IT is set */ + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + /* DAC_IT is reset */ + bitstatus = RESET; + } + /* Return the DAC_IT status */ + return bitstatus; +} + +/** + * @brief Clears the DAC channel's interrupt pending bits. + * @param DAC_Channel: the selected DAC channel. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg DAC_Channel_1: DAC Channel1 selected + * @arg DAC_Channel_2: DAC Channel2 selected + * @param DAC_IT: specifies the DAC interrupt pending bit to clear. + * This parameter can be the following values: + * @arg DAC_IT_DMAUDR: DMA underrun interrupt mask + * @retval None + */ +void DAC_ClearITPendingBit(uint32_t DAC_Channel, uint32_t DAC_IT) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_DAC_CHANNEL(DAC_Channel)); + assert_param(IS_DAC_IT(DAC_IT)); + + /* Clear the selected DAC interrupt pending bits */ + DAC->SR = (DAC_IT << DAC_Channel); +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/ diff --git a/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32l1xx_dbgmcu.c b/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32l1xx_dbgmcu.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b38918b --- /dev/null +++ b/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32l1xx_dbgmcu.c @@ -0,0 +1,181 @@ +/** + ****************************************************************************** + * @file stm32l1xx_dbgmcu.c + * @author MCD Application Team + * @version V1.1.1 + * @date 05-March-2012 + * @brief This file provides all the DBGMCU firmware functions. + ****************************************************************************** + * @attention + * + * <h2><center>© COPYRIGHT 2012 STMicroelectronics</center></h2> + * + * Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License"); + * You may not use this file except in compliance with the License. + * You may obtain a copy of the License at: + * + * http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2 + * + * Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software + * distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS, + * WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. + * See the License for the specific language governing permissions and + * limitations under the License. + * + ****************************************************************************** + */ + +/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#include "stm32l1xx_dbgmcu.h" + +/** @addtogroup STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver + * @{ + */ + +/** @defgroup DBGMCU + * @brief DBGMCU driver modules + * @{ + */ + +/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#define IDCODE_DEVID_MASK ((uint32_t)0x00000FFF) + +/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/ + +/** @defgroup DBGMCU_Private_Functions + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Returns the device revision identifier. + * @param None + * @retval Device revision identifier + */ +uint32_t DBGMCU_GetREVID(void) +{ + return(DBGMCU->IDCODE >> 16); +} + +/** + * @brief Returns the device identifier. + * @param None + * @retval Device identifier + */ +uint32_t DBGMCU_GetDEVID(void) +{ + return(DBGMCU->IDCODE & IDCODE_DEVID_MASK); +} + +/** + * @brief Configures low power mode behavior when the MCU is in Debug mode. + * @param DBGMCU_Periph: specifies the low power mode. + * This parameter can be any combination of the following values: + * @arg DBGMCU_SLEEP: Keep debugger connection during SLEEP mode + * @arg DBGMCU_STOP: Keep debugger connection during STOP mode + * @arg DBGMCU_STANDBY: Keep debugger connection during STANDBY mode + * @param NewState: new state of the specified low power mode in Debug mode. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void DBGMCU_Config(uint32_t DBGMCU_Periph, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_DBGMCU_PERIPH(DBGMCU_Periph)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + DBGMCU->CR |= DBGMCU_Periph; + } + else + { + DBGMCU->CR &= ~DBGMCU_Periph; + } +} + + +/** + * @brief Configures APB1 peripheral behavior when the MCU is in Debug mode. + * @param DBGMCU_Periph: specifies the APB1 peripheral. + * This parameter can be any combination of the following values: + * @arg DBGMCU_TIM2_STOP: TIM2 counter stopped when Core is halted + * @arg DBGMCU_TIM3_STOP: TIM3 counter stopped when Core is halted + * @arg DBGMCU_TIM4_STOP: TIM4 counter stopped when Core is halted + * @arg DBGMCU_TIM5_STOP: TIM5 counter stopped when Core is halted + * @arg DBGMCU_TIM6_STOP: TIM6 counter stopped when Core is halted + * @arg DBGMCU_TIM7_STOP: TIM7 counter stopped when Core is halted + * @arg DBGMCU_RTC_STOP: + * + On STM32L1xx Medium-density devices: RTC Wakeup counter stopped when + * Core is halted. + * + On STM32L1xx High-density and Medium-density Plus devices: RTC Calendar + * and Wakeup counter stopped when Core is halted. + * @arg DBGMCU_WWDG_STOP: Debug WWDG stopped when Core is halted + * @arg DBGMCU_IWDG_STOP: Debug IWDG stopped when Core is halted + * @arg DBGMCU_I2C1_SMBUS_TIMEOUT: I2C1 SMBUS timeout mode stopped when Core is + * halted + * @arg DBGMCU_I2C2_SMBUS_TIMEOUT: I2C2 SMBUS timeout mode stopped when Core is + * halted + * @param NewState: new state of the specified APB1 peripheral in Debug mode. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void DBGMCU_APB1PeriphConfig(uint32_t DBGMCU_Periph, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_DBGMCU_APB1PERIPH(DBGMCU_Periph)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + DBGMCU->APB1FZ |= DBGMCU_Periph; + } + else + { + DBGMCU->APB1FZ &= ~DBGMCU_Periph; + } +} + +/** + * @brief Configures APB2 peripheral behavior when the MCU is in Debug mode. + * @param DBGMCU_Periph: specifies the APB2 peripheral. + * This parameter can be any combination of the following values: + * @arg DBGMCU_TIM9_STOP: TIM9 counter stopped when Core is halted + * @arg DBGMCU_TIM10_STOP: TIM10 counter stopped when Core is halted + * @arg DBGMCU_TIM11_STOP: TIM11 counter stopped when Core is halted + * @param NewState: new state of the specified APB2 peripheral in Debug mode. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void DBGMCU_APB2PeriphConfig(uint32_t DBGMCU_Periph, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_DBGMCU_APB2PERIPH(DBGMCU_Periph)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + DBGMCU->APB2FZ |= DBGMCU_Periph; + } + else + { + DBGMCU->APB2FZ &= ~DBGMCU_Periph; + } +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/ diff --git a/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32l1xx_exti.c b/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32l1xx_exti.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d9ee18d --- /dev/null +++ b/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32l1xx_exti.c @@ -0,0 +1,317 @@ +/** + ****************************************************************************** + * @file stm32l1xx_exti.c + * @author MCD Application Team + * @version V1.1.1 + * @date 05-March-2012 + * @brief This file provides firmware functions to manage the following + * functionalities of the EXTI peripheral: + * + Initialization and Configuration + * + Interrupts and flags management + * + * @verbatim + ============================================================================== + ##### EXTI features ##### + ============================================================================== + [..] External interrupt/event lines are mapped as following: + (#) All available GPIO pins are connected to the 16 external + interrupt/event lines from EXTI0 to EXTI15. + (#) EXTI line 16 is connected to the PVD output. + (#) EXTI line 17 is connected to the RTC Alarm event. + (#) EXTI line 18 is connected to the USB Device FS wakeup event. + (#) EXTI line 19 is connected to the RTC Tamper and TimeStamp events. + (#) EXTI line 20 is connected to the RTC Wakeup event. + (#) EXTI line 21 is connected to the Comparator 1 wakeup event. + (#) EXTI line 22 is connected to the Comparator 2 wakeup event. + (#) EXTI line 23 is connected to the Comparator channel acquisition wakeup event. + + + ##### How to use this driver ##### + ============================================================================== + [..] In order to use an I/O pin as an external interrupt source, follow + steps below: + (#) Configure the I/O in input mode using GPIO_Init() + (#) Select the input source pin for the EXTI line using + SYSCFG_EXTILineConfig() + (#) Select the mode(interrupt, event) and configure the trigger + selection (Rising, falling or both) using EXTI_Init() + (#) Configure NVIC IRQ channel mapped to the EXTI line using NVIC_Init() + [..] + (@) SYSCFG APB clock must be enabled to get write access to SYSCFG_EXTICRx + registers using RCC_APB2PeriphClockCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_SYSCFG, ENABLE); + + * @endverbatim + * + ****************************************************************************** + * @attention + * + * <h2><center>© COPYRIGHT 2012 STMicroelectronics</center></h2> + * + * Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License"); + * You may not use this file except in compliance with the License. + * You may obtain a copy of the License at: + * + * http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2 + * + * Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software + * distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS, + * WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. + * See the License for the specific language governing permissions and + * limitations under the License. + * + ****************************************************************************** + */ + +/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#include "stm32l1xx_exti.h" + +/** @addtogroup STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver + * @{ + */ + +/** @defgroup EXTI + * @brief EXTI driver modules + * @{ + */ + +/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#define EXTI_LINENONE ((uint32_t)0x00000) /* No interrupt selected */ + +/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/ + +/** @defgroup EXTI_Private_Functions + * @{ + */ + +/** @defgroup EXTI_Group1 Initialization and Configuration functions + * @brief Initialization and Configuration functions + * +@verbatim + ============================================================================== + ##### Initialization and Configuration functions ##### + ============================================================================== + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Deinitializes the EXTI peripheral registers to their default reset values. + * @param None + * @retval None + */ +void EXTI_DeInit(void) +{ + EXTI->IMR = 0x00000000; + EXTI->EMR = 0x00000000; + EXTI->RTSR = 0x00000000; + EXTI->FTSR = 0x00000000; + EXTI->PR = 0x00FFFFFF; +} + +/** + * @brief Initializes the EXTI peripheral according to the specified + * parameters in the EXTI_InitStruct. + * EXTI_Line specifies the EXTI line (EXTI0....EXTI23). + * EXTI_Mode specifies which EXTI line is used as interrupt or an event. + * EXTI_Trigger selects the trigger. When the trigger occurs, interrupt + * pending bit will be set. + * EXTI_LineCmd controls (Enable/Disable) the EXTI line. + * @param EXTI_InitStruct: pointer to a EXTI_InitTypeDef structure + * that contains the configuration information for the EXTI peripheral. + * @retval None + */ +void EXTI_Init(EXTI_InitTypeDef* EXTI_InitStruct) +{ + uint32_t tmp = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_EXTI_MODE(EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Mode)); + assert_param(IS_EXTI_TRIGGER(EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Trigger)); + assert_param(IS_EXTI_LINE(EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Line)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_LineCmd)); + + tmp = (uint32_t)EXTI_BASE; + + if (EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_LineCmd != DISABLE) + { + /* Clear EXTI line configuration */ + EXTI->IMR &= ~EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Line; + EXTI->EMR &= ~EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Line; + + tmp += EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Mode; + + *(__IO uint32_t *) tmp |= EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Line; + + /* Clear Rising Falling edge configuration */ + EXTI->RTSR &= ~EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Line; + EXTI->FTSR &= ~EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Line; + + /* Select the trigger for the selected external interrupts */ + if (EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Trigger == EXTI_Trigger_Rising_Falling) + { + /* Rising Falling edge */ + EXTI->RTSR |= EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Line; + EXTI->FTSR |= EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Line; + } + else + { + tmp = (uint32_t)EXTI_BASE; + tmp += EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Trigger; + + *(__IO uint32_t *) tmp |= EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Line; + } + } + else + { + tmp += EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Mode; + + /* Disable the selected external lines */ + *(__IO uint32_t *) tmp &= ~EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Line; + } +} + +/** + * @brief Fills each EXTI_InitStruct member with its reset value. + * @param EXTI_InitStruct: pointer to a EXTI_InitTypeDef structure which will + * be initialized. + * @retval None + */ +void EXTI_StructInit(EXTI_InitTypeDef* EXTI_InitStruct) +{ + EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Line = EXTI_LINENONE; + EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Mode = EXTI_Mode_Interrupt; + EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Trigger = EXTI_Trigger_Falling; + EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_LineCmd = DISABLE; +} + +/** + * @brief Generates a Software interrupt on selected EXTI line. + * @param EXTI_Line: specifies the EXTI line on which the software interrupt + * will be generated. + * This parameter can be any combination of EXTI_Linex where x can be (0..23). + * @retval None + */ +void EXTI_GenerateSWInterrupt(uint32_t EXTI_Line) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_EXTI_LINE(EXTI_Line)); + + EXTI->SWIER |= EXTI_Line; +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup EXTI_Group2 Interrupts and flags management functions + * @brief Interrupts and flags management functions + * +@verbatim + ============================================================================== + ##### Interrupts and flags management functions ##### + ============================================================================== + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Checks whether the specified EXTI line flag is set or not. + * @param EXTI_Line: specifies the EXTI line flag to check. + * This parameter can be: + * EXTI_Linex: External interrupt line x where x(0..23). + * @retval The new state of EXTI_Line (SET or RESET). + */ +FlagStatus EXTI_GetFlagStatus(uint32_t EXTI_Line) +{ + FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET; + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_GET_EXTI_LINE(EXTI_Line)); + + if ((EXTI->PR & EXTI_Line) != (uint32_t)RESET) + { + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + bitstatus = RESET; + } + return bitstatus; +} + +/** + * @brief Clears the EXTI's line pending flags. + * @param EXTI_Line: specifies the EXTI lines flags to clear. + * This parameter can be any combination of EXTI_Linex where x can be (0..23). + * @retval None + */ +void EXTI_ClearFlag(uint32_t EXTI_Line) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_EXTI_LINE(EXTI_Line)); + + EXTI->PR = EXTI_Line; +} + +/** + * @brief Checks whether the specified EXTI line is asserted or not. + * @param EXTI_Line: specifies the EXTI line to check. + * This parameter can be: + * EXTI_Linex: External interrupt line x where x(0..23). + * @retval The new state of EXTI_Line (SET or RESET). + */ +ITStatus EXTI_GetITStatus(uint32_t EXTI_Line) +{ + ITStatus bitstatus = RESET; + uint32_t enablestatus = 0; + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_GET_EXTI_LINE(EXTI_Line)); + + enablestatus = EXTI->IMR & EXTI_Line; + if (((EXTI->PR & EXTI_Line) != (uint32_t)RESET) && (enablestatus != (uint32_t)RESET)) + { + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + bitstatus = RESET; + } + return bitstatus; +} + +/** + * @brief Clears the EXTI's line pending bits. + * @param EXTI_Line: specifies the EXTI lines to clear. + * This parameter can be any combination of EXTI_Linex where x can be (0..23). + * @retval None + */ +void EXTI_ClearITPendingBit(uint32_t EXTI_Line) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_EXTI_LINE(EXTI_Line)); + + EXTI->PR = EXTI_Line; +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/ diff --git a/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32l1xx_flash.c b/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32l1xx_flash.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9bd1e86 --- /dev/null +++ b/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32l1xx_flash.c @@ -0,0 +1,1652 @@ +/** + ****************************************************************************** + * @file stm32l1xx_flash.c + * @author MCD Application Team + * @version V1.1.1 + * @date 05-March-2012 + * @brief This file provides all the Flash firmware functions. These functions + * can be executed from Internal FLASH or Internal SRAM memories. + * The functions that should be called from SRAM are defined inside + * the "stm32l1xx_flash_ramfunc.c" file. + * This file provides firmware functions to manage the following + * functionalities of the FLASH peripheral: + * + FLASH Interface configuration + * + FLASH Memory Programming + * + DATA EEPROM Programming + * + Option Bytes Programming + * + Interrupts and flags management + * + * @verbatim + + ============================================================================== + ##### How to use this driver ##### + ============================================================================== + [..] This driver provides functions to configure and program the Flash + memory of all STM32L1xx devices. + [..] These functions are split in 5 groups: + (#) FLASH Interface configuration functions: this group includes + the management of following features: + (++) Set the latency. + (++) Enable/Disable the prefetch buffer. + (++) Enable/Disable the 64 bit Read Access. + (++) Enable/Disable the RUN PowerDown mode. + (++) Enable/Disable the SLEEP PowerDown mode. + + (#) FLASH Memory Programming functions: this group includes all + needed functions to erase and program the main memory: + (++) Lock and Unlock the Flash interface. + (++) Erase function: Erase Page. + (++) Program functions: Fast Word and Half Page(should be + executed from internal SRAM). + + (#) DATA EEPROM Programming functions: this group includes all + needed functions to erase and program the DATA EEPROM memory: + (++) Lock and Unlock the DATA EEPROM interface. + (++) Erase function: Erase Byte, erase HalfWord, erase Word, erase + (++) Double Word (should be executed from internal SRAM). + (++) Program functions: Fast Program Byte, Fast Program Half-Word, + FastProgramWord, Program Byte, Program Half-Word, + Program Word and Program Double-Word (should be executed + from internal SRAM). + + (#) FLASH Option Bytes Programming functions: this group includes + all needed functions to: + (++) Lock and Unlock the Flash Option bytes. + (++) Set/Reset the write protection. + (++) Set the Read protection Level. + (++) Set the BOR level. + (++) rogram the user option Bytes. + (++) Launch the Option Bytes loader. + (++) Get the Write protection. + (++) Get the read protection status. + (++) Get the BOR level. + (++) Get the user option bytes. + + (#) FLASH Interrupts and flag management functions: this group + includes all needed functions to: + (++) Enable/Disable the flash interrupt sources. + (++) Get flags status. + (++) Clear flags. + (++) Get Flash operation status. + (++) Wait for last flash operation. + + * @endverbatim + * + ****************************************************************************** + * @attention + * + * <h2><center>© COPYRIGHT 2012 STMicroelectronics</center></h2> + * + * Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License"); + * You may not use this file except in compliance with the License. + * You may obtain a copy of the License at: + * + * http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2 + * + * Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software + * distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS, + * WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. + * See the License for the specific language governing permissions and + * limitations under the License. + * + ****************************************************************************** + */ + +/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#include "stm32l1xx_flash.h" + +/** @addtogroup STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver + * @{ + */ + +/** @defgroup FLASH + * @brief FLASH driver modules + * @{ + */ + +/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +/* FLASH Mask */ +#define WRP01_MASK ((uint32_t)0x0000FFFF) +#define WRP23_MASK ((uint32_t)0xFFFF0000) +#define WRP45_MASK ((uint32_t)0x0000FFFF) +#define WRP67_MASK ((uint32_t)0xFFFF0000) +#define WRP89_MASK ((uint32_t)0x0000FFFF) +#define WRP1011_MASK ((uint32_t)0xFFFF0000) + +/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/ + +/** @defgroup FLASH_Private_Functions + * @{ + */ + +/** @defgroup FLASH_Group1 FLASH Interface configuration functions + * @brief FLASH Interface configuration functions + * +@verbatim + ============================================================================== + ##### FLASH Interface configuration functions ##### + ============================================================================== + + [..] FLASH_Interface configuration_Functions, includes the following functions: + (+) void FLASH_SetLatency(uint32_t FLASH_Latency): + [..] To correctly read data from Flash memory, the number of wait states (LATENCY) + must be correctly programmed according to the frequency of the CPU clock + (HCLK) and the supply voltage of the device. + [..] + ---------------------------------------------------------------- + | Wait states | HCLK clock frequency (MHz) | + | |------------------------------------------------| + | (Latency) | voltage range | voltage range | + | | 1.65 V - 3.6 V | 2.0 V - 3.6 V | + | |----------------|---------------|---------------| + | | VCORE = 1.2 V | VCORE = 1.5 V | VCORE = 1.8 V | + |-------------- |----------------|---------------|---------------| + |0WS(1CPU cycle)|0 < HCLK <= 2 |0 < HCLK <= 8 |0 < HCLK <= 16 | + |---------------|----------------|---------------|---------------| + |1WS(2CPU cycle)|2 < HCLK <= 4 |8 < HCLK <= 16 |16 < HCLK <= 32| + ---------------------------------------------------------------- + [..] + (+) void FLASH_PrefetchBufferCmd(FunctionalState NewState); + (+) void FLASH_ReadAccess64Cmd(FunctionalState NewState); + (+) void FLASH_RUNPowerDownCmd(FunctionalState NewState); + (+) void FLASH_SLEEPPowerDownCmd(FunctionalState NewState); + (+) void FLASH_ITConfig(uint32_t FLASH_IT, FunctionalState NewState); + [..] + Here below the allowed configuration of Latency, 64Bit access and prefetch buffer + [..] + -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + | | ACC64 = 0 | ACC64 = 1 | + | Latency |----------------|---------------|---------------|---------------| + | | PRFTEN = 0 | PRFTEN = 1 | PRFTEN = 0 | PRFTEN = 1 | + |---------------|----------------|---------------|---------------|---------------| + |0WS(1CPU cycle)| YES | NO | YES | YES | + |---------------|----------------|---------------|---------------|---------------| + |1WS(2CPU cycle)| NO | NO | YES | YES | + -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + [..] + All these functions don't need the unlock sequence. + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Sets the code latency value. + * @param FLASH_Latency: specifies the FLASH Latency value. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg FLASH_Latency_0: FLASH Zero Latency cycle. + * @arg FLASH_Latency_1: FLASH One Latency cycle. + * @retval None + */ +void FLASH_SetLatency(uint32_t FLASH_Latency) +{ + uint32_t tmpreg = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FLASH_LATENCY(FLASH_Latency)); + + /* Read the ACR register */ + tmpreg = FLASH->ACR; + + /* Sets the Latency value */ + tmpreg &= (uint32_t) (~((uint32_t)FLASH_ACR_LATENCY)); + tmpreg |= FLASH_Latency; + + /* Write the ACR register */ + FLASH->ACR = tmpreg; +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the Prefetch Buffer. + * @param NewState: new state of the FLASH prefetch buffer. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void FLASH_PrefetchBufferCmd(FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if(NewState != DISABLE) + { + FLASH->ACR |= FLASH_ACR_PRFTEN; + } + else + { + FLASH->ACR &= (uint32_t)(~((uint32_t)FLASH_ACR_PRFTEN)); + } +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables read access to flash by 64 bits. + * @param NewState: new state of the FLASH read access mode. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @note If this bit is set, the Read access 64 bit is used. + * If this bit is reset, the Read access 32 bit is used. + * @note This bit cannot be written at the same time as the LATENCY and + * PRFTEN bits. + * To reset this bit, the LATENCY should be zero wait state and the + * prefetch off. + * @retval None + */ +void FLASH_ReadAccess64Cmd(FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if(NewState != DISABLE) + { + FLASH->ACR |= FLASH_ACR_ACC64; + } + else + { + FLASH->ACR &= (uint32_t)(~((uint32_t)FLASH_ACR_ACC64)); + } +} + +/** + * @brief Enable or disable the power down mode during Sleep mode. + * @note This function is used to power down the FLASH when the system is in SLEEP LP mode. + * @param NewState: new state of the power down mode during sleep mode. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void FLASH_SLEEPPowerDownCmd(FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Set the SLEEP_PD bit to put Flash in power down mode during sleep mode */ + FLASH->ACR |= FLASH_ACR_SLEEP_PD; + } + else + { + /* Clear the SLEEP_PD bit in to put Flash in idle mode during sleep mode */ + FLASH->ACR &= (uint32_t)(~((uint32_t)FLASH_ACR_SLEEP_PD)); + } +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup FLASH_Group2 FLASH Memory Programming functions + * @brief FLASH Memory Programming functions + * +@verbatim + ============================================================================== + ##### FLASH Memory Programming functions ##### + ============================================================================== + + [..] The FLASH Memory Programming functions, includes the following functions: + (+) void FLASH_Unlock(void); + (+) void FLASH_Lock(void); + (+) FLASH_Status FLASH_ErasePage(uint32_t Page_Address); + (+) FLASH_Status FLASH_FastProgramWord(uint32_t Address, uint32_t Data); + + [..] Any operation of erase or program should follow these steps: + (#) Call the FLASH_Unlock() function to enable the flash control register and + program memory access. + (#) Call the desired function to erase page or program data. + (#) Call the FLASH_Lock() to disable the flash program memory access + (recommended to protect the FLASH memory against possible unwanted operation). + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Unlocks the FLASH control register and program memory access. + * @param None + * @retval None + */ +void FLASH_Unlock(void) +{ + if((FLASH->PECR & FLASH_PECR_PRGLOCK) != RESET) + { + /* Unlocking the data memory and FLASH_PECR register access */ + DATA_EEPROM_Unlock(); + + /* Unlocking the program memory access */ + FLASH->PRGKEYR = FLASH_PRGKEY1; + FLASH->PRGKEYR = FLASH_PRGKEY2; + } +} + +/** + * @brief Locks the Program memory access. + * @param None + * @retval None + */ +void FLASH_Lock(void) +{ + /* Set the PRGLOCK Bit to lock the program memory access */ + FLASH->PECR |= FLASH_PECR_PRGLOCK; +} + +/** + * @brief Erases a specified page in program memory. + * @note To correctly run this function, the FLASH_Unlock() function + * must be called before. + * Call the FLASH_Lock() to disable the flash memory access + * (recommended to protect the FLASH memory against possible unwanted operation) + * @param Page_Address: The page address in program memory to be erased. + * @note A Page is erased in the Program memory only if the address to load + * is the start address of a page (multiple of 256 bytes). + * @retval FLASH Status: The returned value can be: + * FLASH_ERROR_PROGRAM, FLASH_ERROR_WRP, FLASH_COMPLETE or FLASH_TIMEOUT. + */ +FLASH_Status FLASH_ErasePage(uint32_t Page_Address) +{ + FLASH_Status status = FLASH_COMPLETE; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FLASH_PROGRAM_ADDRESS(Page_Address)); + + /* Wait for last operation to be completed */ + status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_ER_PRG_TIMEOUT); + + if(status == FLASH_COMPLETE) + { + /* If the previous operation is completed, proceed to erase the page */ + + /* Set the ERASE bit */ + FLASH->PECR |= FLASH_PECR_ERASE; + + /* Set PROG bit */ + FLASH->PECR |= FLASH_PECR_PROG; + + /* Write 00000000h to the first word of the program page to erase */ + *(__IO uint32_t *)Page_Address = 0x00000000; + + /* Wait for last operation to be completed */ + status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_ER_PRG_TIMEOUT); + + /* If the erase operation is completed, disable the ERASE and PROG bits */ + FLASH->PECR &= (uint32_t)(~FLASH_PECR_PROG); + FLASH->PECR &= (uint32_t)(~FLASH_PECR_ERASE); + } + /* Return the Erase Status */ + return status; +} + +/** + * @brief Programs a word at a specified address in program memory. + * @note To correctly run this function, the FLASH_Unlock() function + * must be called before. + * Call the FLASH_Lock() to disable the flash memory access + * (recommended to protect the FLASH memory against possible unwanted operation). + * @param Address: specifies the address to be written. + * @param Data: specifies the data to be written. + * @retval FLASH Status: The returned value can be: + * FLASH_ERROR_PROGRAM, FLASH_ERROR_WRP, FLASH_COMPLETE or FLASH_TIMEOUT. + */ +FLASH_Status FLASH_FastProgramWord(uint32_t Address, uint32_t Data) +{ + FLASH_Status status = FLASH_COMPLETE; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FLASH_PROGRAM_ADDRESS(Address)); + + /* Wait for last operation to be completed */ + status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_ER_PRG_TIMEOUT); + + if(status == FLASH_COMPLETE) + { + /* If the previous operation is completed, proceed to program the new word */ + *(__IO uint32_t *)Address = Data; + + /* Wait for last operation to be completed */ + status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_ER_PRG_TIMEOUT); + } + /* Return the Write Status */ + return status; +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup FLASH_Group3 DATA EEPROM Programming functions + * @brief DATA EEPROM Programming functions + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### DATA EEPROM Programming functions ##### + =============================================================================== + + [..] The DATA_EEPROM Programming_Functions, includes the following functions: + (+) void DATA_EEPROM_Unlock(void); + (+) void DATA_EEPROM_Lock(void); + (+) FLASH_Status DATA_EEPROM_EraseByte(uint32_t Address); + (+) FLASH_Status DATA_EEPROM_EraseHalfWord(uint32_t Address); + (+) FLASH_Status DATA_EEPROM_EraseWord(uint32_t Address); + (+) FLASH_Status DATA_EEPROM_FastProgramByte(uint32_t Address, uint8_t Data); + (+) FLASH_Status DATA_EEPROM_FastProgramHalfWord(uint32_t Address, uint16_t Data); + (+) FLASH_Status DATA_EEPROM_FastProgramWord(uint32_t Address, uint32_t Data); + (+) FLASH_Status DATA_EEPROM_ProgramByte(uint32_t Address, uint8_t Data); + (+) FLASH_Status DATA_EEPROM_ProgramHalfWord(uint32_t Address, uint16_t Data); + (+) FLASH_Status DATA_EEPROM_ProgramWord(uint32_t Address, uint32_t Data); + + [..] Any operation of erase or program should follow these steps: + (#) Call the DATA_EEPROM_Unlock() function to enable the data EEPROM access + and Flash program erase control register access. + (#) Call the desired function to erase or program data. + (#) Call the DATA_EEPROM_Lock() to disable the data EEPROM access + and Flash program erase control register access(recommended + to protect the DATA_EEPROM against possible unwanted operation). + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Unlocks the data memory and FLASH_PECR register access. + * @param None + * @retval None + */ +void DATA_EEPROM_Unlock(void) +{ + if((FLASH->PECR & FLASH_PECR_PELOCK) != RESET) + { + /* Unlocking the Data memory and FLASH_PECR register access*/ + FLASH->PEKEYR = FLASH_PEKEY1; + FLASH->PEKEYR = FLASH_PEKEY2; + } +} + +/** + * @brief Locks the Data memory and FLASH_PECR register access. + * @param None + * @retval None + */ +void DATA_EEPROM_Lock(void) +{ + /* Set the PELOCK Bit to lock the data memory and FLASH_PECR register access */ + FLASH->PECR |= FLASH_PECR_PELOCK; +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables DATA EEPROM fixed Time programming (2*Tprog). + * @param NewState: new state of the DATA EEPROM fixed Time programming mode. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void DATA_EEPROM_FixedTimeProgramCmd(FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if(NewState != DISABLE) + { + FLASH->PECR |= (uint32_t)FLASH_PECR_FTDW; + } + else + { + FLASH->PECR &= (uint32_t)(~((uint32_t)FLASH_PECR_FTDW)); + } +} + +/** + * @brief Erase a byte in data memory. + * @param Address: specifies the address to be erased. + * @note This function can be used only for STM32L1XX_HD and STM32L1XX_MDP + * density devices. + * @note To correctly run this function, the DATA_EEPROM_Unlock() function + * must be called before. + * Call the DATA_EEPROM_Lock() to he data EEPROM access + * and Flash program erase control register access(recommended to protect + * the DATA_EEPROM against possible unwanted operation). + * @retval FLASH Status: The returned value can be: + * FLASH_ERROR_PROGRAM, FLASH_ERROR_WRP, FLASH_COMPLETE or FLASH_TIMEOUT. + */ +FLASH_Status DATA_EEPROM_EraseByte(uint32_t Address) +{ + FLASH_Status status = FLASH_COMPLETE; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FLASH_DATA_ADDRESS(Address)); + + /* Wait for last operation to be completed */ + status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_ER_PRG_TIMEOUT); + + if(status == FLASH_COMPLETE) + { + /* Write "00h" to valid address in the data memory" */ + *(__IO uint8_t *) Address = (uint8_t)0x00; + } + + /* Return the erase status */ + return status; +} + +/** + * @brief Erase a halfword in data memory. + * @param Address: specifies the address to be erased. + * @note This function can be used only for STM32L1XX_HD and STM32L1XX_MDP + * density devices. + * @note To correctly run this function, the DATA_EEPROM_Unlock() function + * must be called before. + * Call the DATA_EEPROM_Lock() to he data EEPROM access + * and Flash program erase control register access(recommended to protect + * the DATA_EEPROM against possible unwanted operation). + * @retval FLASH Status: The returned value can be: + * FLASH_ERROR_PROGRAM, FLASH_ERROR_WRP, FLASH_COMPLETE or FLASH_TIMEOUT. + */ +FLASH_Status DATA_EEPROM_EraseHalfWord(uint32_t Address) +{ + FLASH_Status status = FLASH_COMPLETE; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FLASH_DATA_ADDRESS(Address)); + + /* Wait for last operation to be completed */ + status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_ER_PRG_TIMEOUT); + + if(status == FLASH_COMPLETE) + { + /* Write "0000h" to valid address in the data memory" */ + *(__IO uint16_t *) Address = (uint16_t)0x0000; + } + + /* Return the erase status */ + return status; +} + +/** + * @brief Erase a word in data memory. + * @param Address: specifies the address to be erased. + * @note For STM32L1XX_MD, A data memory word is erased in the data memory only + * if the address to load is the start address of a word (multiple of a word). + * @note To correctly run this function, the DATA_EEPROM_Unlock() function + * must be called before. + * Call the DATA_EEPROM_Lock() to he data EEPROM access + * and Flash program erase control register access(recommended to protect + * the DATA_EEPROM against possible unwanted operation). + * @retval FLASH Status: The returned value can be: + * FLASH_ERROR_PROGRAM, FLASH_ERROR_WRP, FLASH_COMPLETE or FLASH_TIMEOUT. + */ +FLASH_Status DATA_EEPROM_EraseWord(uint32_t Address) +{ + FLASH_Status status = FLASH_COMPLETE; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FLASH_DATA_ADDRESS(Address)); + + /* Wait for last operation to be completed */ + status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_ER_PRG_TIMEOUT); + + if(status == FLASH_COMPLETE) + { + /* Write "00000000h" to valid address in the data memory" */ + *(__IO uint32_t *) Address = 0x00000000; + } + + /* Return the erase status */ + return status; +} + +/** + * @brief Write a Byte at a specified address in data memory. + * @note To correctly run this function, the DATA_EEPROM_Unlock() function + * must be called before. + * Call the DATA_EEPROM_Lock() to he data EEPROM access + * and Flash program erase control register access(recommended to protect + * the DATA_EEPROM against possible unwanted operation). + * @param Address: specifies the address to be written. + * @param Data: specifies the data to be written. + * @note This function assumes that the is data word is already erased. + * @retval FLASH Status: The returned value can be: + * FLASH_ERROR_PROGRAM, FLASH_ERROR_WRP, FLASH_COMPLETE or FLASH_TIMEOUT. + */ +FLASH_Status DATA_EEPROM_FastProgramByte(uint32_t Address, uint8_t Data) +{ + FLASH_Status status = FLASH_COMPLETE; +#if !defined (STM32L1XX_HD) && !defined (STM32L1XX_MDP) + uint32_t tmp = 0, tmpaddr = 0; +#endif + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FLASH_DATA_ADDRESS(Address)); + + /* Wait for last operation to be completed */ + status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_ER_PRG_TIMEOUT); + + if(status == FLASH_COMPLETE) + { + /* Clear the FTDW bit */ + FLASH->PECR &= (uint32_t)(~((uint32_t)FLASH_PECR_FTDW)); + +#if !defined (STM32L1XX_HD) && !defined (STM32L1XX_MDP) + if(Data != (uint8_t)0x00) + { + /* If the previous operation is completed, proceed to write the new Data */ + *(__IO uint8_t *)Address = Data; + + /* Wait for last operation to be completed */ + status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_ER_PRG_TIMEOUT); + } + else + { + tmpaddr = Address & 0xFFFFFFFC; + tmp = * (__IO uint32_t *) tmpaddr; + tmpaddr = 0xFF << ((uint32_t) (0x8 * (Address & 0x3))); + tmp &= ~tmpaddr; + status = DATA_EEPROM_EraseWord(Address & 0xFFFFFFFC); + status = DATA_EEPROM_FastProgramWord((Address & 0xFFFFFFFC), tmp); + } +#elif defined (STM32L1XX_HD) || defined (STM32L1XX_MDP) + /* If the previous operation is completed, proceed to write the new Data */ + *(__IO uint8_t *)Address = Data; + + /* Wait for last operation to be completed */ + status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_ER_PRG_TIMEOUT); +#endif + } + /* Return the Write Status */ + return status; +} + +/** + * @brief Writes a half word at a specified address in data memory. + * @note To correctly run this function, the DATA_EEPROM_Unlock() function + * must be called before. + * Call the DATA_EEPROM_Lock() to he data EEPROM access + * and Flash program erase control register access(recommended to protect + * the DATA_EEPROM against possible unwanted operation). + * @param Address: specifies the address to be written. + * @param Data: specifies the data to be written. + * @note This function assumes that the is data word is already erased. + * @retval FLASH Status: The returned value can be: + * FLASH_ERROR_PROGRAM, FLASH_ERROR_WRP, FLASH_COMPLETE or FLASH_TIMEOUT. + */ +FLASH_Status DATA_EEPROM_FastProgramHalfWord(uint32_t Address, uint16_t Data) +{ + FLASH_Status status = FLASH_COMPLETE; +#if !defined (STM32L1XX_HD) && !defined (STM32L1XX_MDP) + uint32_t tmp = 0, tmpaddr = 0; +#endif + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FLASH_DATA_ADDRESS(Address)); + + /* Wait for last operation to be completed */ + status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_ER_PRG_TIMEOUT); + + if(status == FLASH_COMPLETE) + { + /* Clear the FTDW bit */ + FLASH->PECR &= (uint32_t)(~((uint32_t)FLASH_PECR_FTDW)); + +#if !defined (STM32L1XX_HD) && !defined (STM32L1XX_MDP) + if(Data != (uint16_t)0x0000) + { + /* If the previous operation is completed, proceed to write the new data */ + *(__IO uint16_t *)Address = Data; + + /* Wait for last operation to be completed */ + status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_ER_PRG_TIMEOUT); + } + else + { + if((Address & 0x3) != 0x3) + { + tmpaddr = Address & 0xFFFFFFFC; + tmp = * (__IO uint32_t *) tmpaddr; + tmpaddr = 0xFFFF << ((uint32_t) (0x8 * (Address & 0x3))); + tmp &= ~tmpaddr; + status = DATA_EEPROM_EraseWord(Address & 0xFFFFFFFC); + status = DATA_EEPROM_FastProgramWord((Address & 0xFFFFFFFC), tmp); + } + else + { + DATA_EEPROM_FastProgramByte(Address, 0x00); + DATA_EEPROM_FastProgramByte(Address + 1, 0x00); + } + } +#elif defined (STM32L1XX_HD) || defined (STM32L1XX_MDP) + /* If the previous operation is completed, proceed to write the new data */ + *(__IO uint16_t *)Address = Data; + + /* Wait for last operation to be completed */ + status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_ER_PRG_TIMEOUT); +#endif + } + /* Return the Write Status */ + return status; +} + +/** + * @brief Programs a word at a specified address in data memory. + * @note To correctly run this function, the DATA_EEPROM_Unlock() function + * must be called before. + * Call the DATA_EEPROM_Lock() to the data EEPROM access + * and Flash program erase control register access(recommended to protect + * the DATA_EEPROM against possible unwanted operation). + * @param Address: specifies the address to be written. + * @param Data: specifies the data to be written. + * @note This function assumes that the is data word is already erased. + * @retval FLASH Status: The returned value can be: + * FLASH_ERROR_PROGRAM, FLASH_ERROR_WRP, FLASH_COMPLETE or FLASH_TIMEOUT. + */ +FLASH_Status DATA_EEPROM_FastProgramWord(uint32_t Address, uint32_t Data) +{ + FLASH_Status status = FLASH_COMPLETE; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FLASH_DATA_ADDRESS(Address)); + + /* Wait for last operation to be completed */ + status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_ER_PRG_TIMEOUT); + + if(status == FLASH_COMPLETE) + { + /* Clear the FTDW bit */ + FLASH->PECR &= (uint32_t)(~((uint32_t)FLASH_PECR_FTDW)); + + /* If the previous operation is completed, proceed to program the new data */ + *(__IO uint32_t *)Address = Data; + + /* Wait for last operation to be completed */ + status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_ER_PRG_TIMEOUT); + } + /* Return the Write Status */ + return status; +} + +/** + * @brief Write a Byte at a specified address in data memory without erase. + * @note To correctly run this function, the DATA_EEPROM_Unlock() function + * must be called before. + * Call the DATA_EEPROM_Lock() to he data EEPROM access + * and Flash program erase control register access(recommended to protect + * the DATA_EEPROM against possible unwanted operation). + * @note The function DATA_EEPROM_FixedTimeProgramCmd() can be called before + * this function to configure the Fixed Time Programming. + * @param Address: specifies the address to be written. + * @param Data: specifies the data to be written. + * @retval FLASH Status: The returned value can be: + * FLASH_ERROR_PROGRAM, FLASH_ERROR_WRP, FLASH_COMPLETE or FLASH_TIMEOUT. + */ +FLASH_Status DATA_EEPROM_ProgramByte(uint32_t Address, uint8_t Data) +{ + FLASH_Status status = FLASH_COMPLETE; +#if !defined (STM32L1XX_HD) && !defined (STM32L1XX_MDP) + uint32_t tmp = 0, tmpaddr = 0; +#endif + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FLASH_DATA_ADDRESS(Address)); + + /* Wait for last operation to be completed */ + status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_ER_PRG_TIMEOUT); + + if(status == FLASH_COMPLETE) + { +#if !defined (STM32L1XX_HD) && !defined (STM32L1XX_MDP) + if(Data != (uint8_t) 0x00) + { + *(__IO uint8_t *)Address = Data; + + /* Wait for last operation to be completed */ + status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_ER_PRG_TIMEOUT); + + } + else + { + tmpaddr = Address & 0xFFFFFFFC; + tmp = * (__IO uint32_t *) tmpaddr; + tmpaddr = 0xFF << ((uint32_t) (0x8 * (Address & 0x3))); + tmp &= ~tmpaddr; + status = DATA_EEPROM_EraseWord(Address & 0xFFFFFFFC); + status = DATA_EEPROM_FastProgramWord((Address & 0xFFFFFFFC), tmp); + } +#elif defined (STM32L1XX_HD) || defined (STM32L1XX_MDP) + *(__IO uint8_t *)Address = Data; + + /* Wait for last operation to be completed */ + status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_ER_PRG_TIMEOUT); +#endif + } + /* Return the Write Status */ + return status; +} + +/** + * @brief Writes a half word at a specified address in data memory without erase. + * @note To correctly run this function, the DATA_EEPROM_Unlock() function + * must be called before. + * Call the DATA_EEPROM_Lock() to he data EEPROM access + * and Flash program erase control register access(recommended to protect + * the DATA_EEPROM against possible unwanted operation). + * @note The function DATA_EEPROM_FixedTimeProgramCmd() can be called before + * this function to configure the Fixed Time Programming + * @param Address: specifies the address to be written. + * @param Data: specifies the data to be written. + * @retval FLASH Status: The returned value can be: + * FLASH_ERROR_PROGRAM, FLASH_ERROR_WRP, FLASH_COMPLETE or FLASH_TIMEOUT. + */ +FLASH_Status DATA_EEPROM_ProgramHalfWord(uint32_t Address, uint16_t Data) +{ + FLASH_Status status = FLASH_COMPLETE; +#if !defined (STM32L1XX_HD) && !defined (STM32L1XX_MDP) + uint32_t tmp = 0, tmpaddr = 0; +#endif + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FLASH_DATA_ADDRESS(Address)); + + /* Wait for last operation to be completed */ + status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_ER_PRG_TIMEOUT); + + if(status == FLASH_COMPLETE) + { +#if !defined (STM32L1XX_HD) && !defined (STM32L1XX_MDP) + if(Data != (uint16_t)0x0000) + { + *(__IO uint16_t *)Address = Data; + + /* Wait for last operation to be completed */ + status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_ER_PRG_TIMEOUT); + } + else + { + if((Address & 0x3) != 0x3) + { + tmpaddr = Address & 0xFFFFFFFC; + tmp = * (__IO uint32_t *) tmpaddr; + tmpaddr = 0xFFFF << ((uint32_t) (0x8 * (Address & 0x3))); + tmp &= ~tmpaddr; + status = DATA_EEPROM_EraseWord(Address & 0xFFFFFFFC); + status = DATA_EEPROM_FastProgramWord((Address & 0xFFFFFFFC), tmp); + } + else + { + DATA_EEPROM_FastProgramByte(Address, 0x00); + DATA_EEPROM_FastProgramByte(Address + 1, 0x00); + } + } +#elif defined (STM32L1XX_HD) || defined (STM32L1XX_MDP) + *(__IO uint16_t *)Address = Data; + + /* Wait for last operation to be completed */ + status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_ER_PRG_TIMEOUT); +#endif + } + /* Return the Write Status */ + return status; +} + +/** + * @brief Programs a word at a specified address in data memory without erase. + * @note To correctly run this function, the DATA_EEPROM_Unlock() function + * must be called before. + * Call the DATA_EEPROM_Lock() to he data EEPROM access + * and Flash program erase control register access(recommended to protect + * the DATA_EEPROM against possible unwanted operation). + * @note The function DATA_EEPROM_FixedTimeProgramCmd() can be called before + * this function to configure the Fixed Time Programming. + * @param Address: specifies the address to be written. + * @param Data: specifies the data to be written. + * @retval FLASH Status: The returned value can be: + * FLASH_ERROR_PROGRAM, FLASH_ERROR_WRP, FLASH_COMPLETE or FLASH_TIMEOUT. + */ +FLASH_Status DATA_EEPROM_ProgramWord(uint32_t Address, uint32_t Data) +{ + FLASH_Status status = FLASH_COMPLETE; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FLASH_DATA_ADDRESS(Address)); + + /* Wait for last operation to be completed */ + status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_ER_PRG_TIMEOUT); + + if(status == FLASH_COMPLETE) + { + *(__IO uint32_t *)Address = Data; + + /* Wait for last operation to be completed */ + status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_ER_PRG_TIMEOUT); + } + /* Return the Write Status */ + return status; +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup FLASH_Group4 Option Bytes Programming functions + * @brief Option Bytes Programming functions + * +@verbatim + ============================================================================== + ##### Option Bytes Programming functions ##### + ============================================================================== + + [..] The FLASH_Option Bytes Programming_functions, includes the following functions: + (+) void FLASH_OB_Unlock(void); + (+) void FLASH_OB_Lock(void); + (+) void FLASH_OB_Launch(void); + (+) FLASH_Status FLASH_OB_WRPConfig(uint32_t OB_WRP, FunctionalState NewState); + (+) FLASH_Status FLASH_OB_WRP1Config(uint32_t OB_WRP1, FunctionalState NewState); + (+) FLASH_Status FLASH_OB_WRP2Config(uint32_t OB_WRP2, FunctionalState NewState); + (+) FLASH_Status FLASH_OB_RDPConfig(uint8_t OB_RDP); + (+) FLASH_Status FLASH_OB_UserConfig(uint8_t OB_IWDG, uint8_t OB_STOP, uint8_t OB_STDBY); + (+) FLASH_Status FLASH_OB_BORConfig(uint8_t OB_BOR); + (+) uint8_t FLASH_OB_GetUser(void); + (+) uint32_t FLASH_OB_GetWRP(void); + (+) uint32_t FLASH_OB_GetWRP1(void); + (+) uint32_t FLASH_OB_GetWRP2(void); + (+) FlagStatus FLASH_OB_GetRDP(void); + (+) uint8_t FLASH_OB_GetBOR(void); + (+) FLASH_Status FLASH_OB_BootConfig(uint16_t OB_BOOT); + + [..] Any operation of erase or program should follow these steps: + (#) Call the FLASH_OB_Unlock() function to enable the Flash option control + register access. + (#) Call one or several functions to program the desired option bytes. + (++) void FLASH_OB_WRPConfig(uint32_t OB_WRP, FunctionalState NewState) => to Enable/Disable + the desired sector write protection. + (++) void FLASH_OB_RDPConfig(uint8_t OB_RDP) => to set the desired read Protection Level. + (++) void FLASH_OB_UserConfig(uint8_t OB_IWDG, uint8_t OB_STOP, uint8_t OB_STDBY) => to configure + the user option Bytes: IWDG, STOP and the Standby. + (++) void FLASH_OB_BORConfig(uint8_t OB_BOR) => to Set the BOR level. + (++) FLASH_Status FLASH_ProgramOTP(uint32_t Address, uint32_t Data) => to program the OTP bytes . + (#) Once all needed option bytes to be programmed are correctly written, call the + FLASH_OB_Launch(void) function to launch the Option Bytes programming process. + (#) Call the FLASH_OB_Lock() to disable the Flash option control register access (recommended + to protect the option Bytes against possible unwanted operations). + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Unlocks the option bytes block access. + * @param None + * @retval None + */ +void FLASH_OB_Unlock(void) +{ + if((FLASH->PECR & FLASH_PECR_OPTLOCK) != RESET) + { + /* Unlocking the data memory and FLASH_PECR register access */ + DATA_EEPROM_Unlock(); + + /* Unlocking the option bytes block access */ + FLASH->OPTKEYR = FLASH_OPTKEY1; + FLASH->OPTKEYR = FLASH_OPTKEY2; + } +} + +/** + * @brief Locks the option bytes block access. + * @param None + * @retval None + */ +void FLASH_OB_Lock(void) +{ + /* Set the OPTLOCK Bit to lock the option bytes block access */ + FLASH->PECR |= FLASH_PECR_OPTLOCK; +} + +/** + * @brief Launch the option byte loading. + * @param None + * @retval None + */ +void FLASH_OB_Launch(void) +{ + /* Set the OBL_Launch bit to lauch the option byte loading */ + FLASH->PECR |= FLASH_PECR_OBL_LAUNCH; +} + +/** + * @brief Write protects the desired pages. + * @note To correctly run this function, the FLASH_OB_Unlock() function + * must be called before. + * Call the FLASH_OB_Lock() to disable the flash control register access and the option bytes + * (recommended to protect the FLASH memory against possible unwanted operation). + * @param OB_WRP: specifies the address of the pages to be write protected. + * This parameter can be: + * @param value between OB_WRP_Pages0to15 and OB_WRP_Pages496to511 + * @param OB_WRP_AllPages + * @param NewState: new state of the specified FLASH Pages Wtite protection. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval FLASH Status: The returned value can be: + * FLASH_ERROR_PROGRAM, FLASH_ERROR_WRP, FLASH_COMPLETE or FLASH_TIMEOUT. + */ +FLASH_Status FLASH_OB_WRPConfig(uint32_t OB_WRP, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + uint32_t WRP01_Data = 0, WRP23_Data = 0; + + FLASH_Status status = FLASH_COMPLETE; + uint32_t tmp1 = 0, tmp2 = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_OB_WRP(OB_WRP)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + /* Wait for last operation to be completed */ + status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_ER_PRG_TIMEOUT); + + if(status == FLASH_COMPLETE) + { + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + WRP01_Data = (uint16_t)(((OB_WRP & WRP01_MASK) | OB->WRP01)); + WRP23_Data = (uint16_t)((((OB_WRP & WRP23_MASK)>>16 | OB->WRP23))); + tmp1 = (uint32_t)(~(WRP01_Data) << 16)|(WRP01_Data); + OB->WRP01 = tmp1; + + tmp2 = (uint32_t)(~(WRP23_Data) << 16)|(WRP23_Data); + OB->WRP23 = tmp2; + } + + else + { + WRP01_Data = (uint16_t)(~OB_WRP & (WRP01_MASK & OB->WRP01)); + WRP23_Data = (uint16_t)((((~OB_WRP & WRP23_MASK)>>16 & OB->WRP23))); + + tmp1 = (uint32_t)((~WRP01_Data) << 16)|(WRP01_Data); + OB->WRP01 = tmp1; + + tmp2 = (uint32_t)((~WRP23_Data) << 16)|(WRP23_Data); + OB->WRP23 = tmp2; + } + /* Wait for last operation to be completed */ + status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_ER_PRG_TIMEOUT); + } + + /* Return the write protection operation Status */ + return status; +} + +/** + * @brief Write protects the desired pages. + * @note This function can be used only for STM32L1XX_HD and STM32L1XX_MDP + * density devices. + * To correctly run this function, the FLASH_OB_Unlock() function + * must be called before. + * Call the FLASH_OB_Lock() to disable the flash control register access and the option bytes + * (recommended to protect the FLASH memory against possible unwanted operation). + * @param OB_WRP1: specifies the address of the pages to be write protected. + * This parameter can be: + * @arg value between OB_WRP_Pages512to527 and OB_WRP_Pages1008to1023 + * @arg OB_WRP_AllPages + * @param NewState: new state of the specified FLASH Pages Wtite protection. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval FLASH Status: The returned value can be: + * FLASH_ERROR_PROGRAM, FLASH_ERROR_WRP, FLASH_COMPLETE or FLASH_TIMEOUT. + */ +FLASH_Status FLASH_OB_WRP1Config(uint32_t OB_WRP1, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + uint32_t WRP45_Data = 0, WRP67_Data = 0; + + FLASH_Status status = FLASH_COMPLETE; + uint32_t tmp1 = 0, tmp2 = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_OB_WRP(OB_WRP1)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + /* Wait for last operation to be completed */ + status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_ER_PRG_TIMEOUT); + + if(status == FLASH_COMPLETE) + { + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + WRP45_Data = (uint16_t)(((OB_WRP1 & WRP45_MASK) | OB->WRP45)); + WRP67_Data = (uint16_t)((((OB_WRP1 & WRP67_MASK)>>16 | OB->WRP67))); + tmp1 = (uint32_t)(~(WRP45_Data) << 16)|(WRP45_Data); + OB->WRP45 = tmp1; + + tmp2 = (uint32_t)(~(WRP67_Data) << 16)|(WRP67_Data); + OB->WRP67 = tmp2; + } + + else + { + WRP45_Data = (uint16_t)(~OB_WRP1 & (WRP45_MASK & OB->WRP45)); + WRP67_Data = (uint16_t)((((~OB_WRP1 & WRP67_MASK)>>16 & OB->WRP67))); + + tmp1 = (uint32_t)((~WRP45_Data) << 16)|(WRP45_Data); + OB->WRP45 = tmp1; + + tmp2 = (uint32_t)((~WRP67_Data) << 16)|(WRP67_Data); + OB->WRP67 = tmp2; + } + /* Wait for last operation to be completed */ + status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_ER_PRG_TIMEOUT); + } + + /* Return the write protection operation Status */ + return status; +} + +/** + * @brief Write protects the desired pages. + * @note This function can be used only for STM32L1XX_HD density devices. + * To correctly run this function, the FLASH_OB_Unlock() function + * must be called before. + * Call the FLASH_OB_Lock() to disable the flash control register access and the option bytes + * (recommended to protect the FLASH memory against possible unwanted operation). + * @param OB_WRP2: specifies the address of the pages to be write protected. + * This parameter can be: + * @arg value between OB_WRP_Pages1024to1039 and OB_WRP_Pages1520to1535 + * @arg OB_WRP_AllPages + * @param NewState: new state of the specified FLASH Pages Wtite protection. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval FLASH Status: The returned value can be: + * FLASH_ERROR_PROGRAM, FLASH_ERROR_WRP, FLASH_COMPLETE or FLASH_TIMEOUT. + */ +FLASH_Status FLASH_OB_WRP2Config(uint32_t OB_WRP2, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + uint32_t WRP89_Data = 0, WRP1011_Data = 0; + + FLASH_Status status = FLASH_COMPLETE; + uint32_t tmp1 = 0, tmp2 = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_OB_WRP(OB_WRP2)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + /* Wait for last operation to be completed */ + status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_ER_PRG_TIMEOUT); + + if(status == FLASH_COMPLETE) + { + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + WRP89_Data = (uint16_t)(((OB_WRP2 & WRP89_MASK) | OB->WRP89)); + WRP1011_Data = (uint16_t)((((OB_WRP2 & WRP1011_MASK)>>16 | OB->WRP1011))); + tmp1 = (uint32_t)(~(WRP89_Data) << 16)|(WRP89_Data); + OB->WRP89 = tmp1; + + tmp2 = (uint32_t)(~(WRP1011_Data) << 16)|(WRP1011_Data); + OB->WRP1011 = tmp2; + } + + else + { + WRP89_Data = (uint16_t)(~OB_WRP2 & (WRP89_MASK & OB->WRP89)); + WRP1011_Data = (uint16_t)((((~OB_WRP2 & WRP1011_MASK)>>16 & OB->WRP1011))); + + tmp1 = (uint32_t)((~WRP89_Data) << 16)|(WRP89_Data); + OB->WRP89 = tmp1; + + tmp2 = (uint32_t)((~WRP1011_Data) << 16)|(WRP1011_Data); + OB->WRP1011 = tmp2; + } + /* Wait for last operation to be completed */ + status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_ER_PRG_TIMEOUT); + } + + /* Return the write protection operation Status */ + return status; +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the read out protection. + * @note To correctly run this function, the FLASH_OB_Unlock() function + * must be called before. + * Call the FLASH_OB_Lock() to disable the flash control register access and the option bytes + * (recommended to protect the FLASH memory against possible unwanted operation). + * @param FLASH_ReadProtection_Level: specifies the read protection level. + * This parameter can be: + * @arg OB_RDP_Level_0: No protection + * @arg OB_RDP_Level_1: Read protection of the memory + * @arg OB_RDP_Level_2: Chip protection + * @retval FLASH Status: The returned value can be: + * FLASH_ERROR_PROGRAM, FLASH_ERROR_WRP, FLASH_COMPLETE or FLASH_TIMEOUT. + */ +FLASH_Status FLASH_OB_RDPConfig(uint8_t OB_RDP) +{ + FLASH_Status status = FLASH_COMPLETE; + uint8_t tmp1 = 0; + uint32_t tmp2 = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_OB_RDP(OB_RDP)); + status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_ER_PRG_TIMEOUT); + + /* calculate the option byte to write */ + tmp1 = (uint8_t)(~(OB_RDP )); + tmp2 = (uint32_t)(((uint32_t)((uint32_t)(tmp1) << 16)) | ((uint32_t)OB_RDP)); + + if(status == FLASH_COMPLETE) + { + /* program read protection level */ + OB->RDP = tmp2; + } + + /* Wait for last operation to be completed */ + status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_ER_PRG_TIMEOUT); + + /* Return the Read protection operation Status */ + return status; +} + +/** + * @brief Programs the FLASH User Option Byte: IWDG_SW / RST_STOP / RST_STDBY. + * @note To correctly run this function, the FLASH_OB_Unlock() function + * must be called before. + * Call the FLASH_OB_Lock() to disable the flash control register access and the option bytes + * (recommended to protect the FLASH memory against possible unwanted operation). + * @param OB_IWDG: Selects the WDG mode. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg OB_IWDG_SW: Software WDG selected + * @arg OB_IWDG_HW: Hardware WDG selected + * @param OB_STOP: Reset event when entering STOP mode. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg OB_STOP_NoRST: No reset generated when entering in STOP + * @arg OB_STOP_RST: Reset generated when entering in STOP + * @param OB_STDBY: Reset event when entering Standby mode. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg OB_STDBY_NoRST: No reset generated when entering in STANDBY + * @arg OB_STDBY_RST: Reset generated when entering in STANDBY + * @retval FLASH Status: The returned value can be: + * FLASH_ERROR_PROGRAM, FLASH_ERROR_WRP, FLASH_COMPLETE or FLASH_TIMEOUT. + */ +FLASH_Status FLASH_OB_UserConfig(uint8_t OB_IWDG, uint8_t OB_STOP, uint8_t OB_STDBY) +{ + FLASH_Status status = FLASH_COMPLETE; + uint32_t tmp = 0, tmp1 = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_OB_IWDG_SOURCE(OB_IWDG)); + assert_param(IS_OB_STOP_SOURCE(OB_STOP)); + assert_param(IS_OB_STDBY_SOURCE(OB_STDBY)); + + /* Get the User Option byte register */ + tmp1 = (FLASH->OBR & 0x000F0000) >> 16; + + /* Calculate the user option byte to write */ + tmp = (uint32_t)(((uint32_t)~((uint32_t)((uint32_t)(OB_IWDG) | (uint32_t)(OB_STOP) | (uint32_t)(OB_STDBY) | tmp1))) << ((uint32_t)0x10)); + tmp |= ((uint32_t)(OB_IWDG) | ((uint32_t)OB_STOP) | (uint32_t)(OB_STDBY) | tmp1); + + /* Wait for last operation to be completed */ + status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_ER_PRG_TIMEOUT); + + if(status == FLASH_COMPLETE) + { + /* Write the User Option Byte */ + OB->USER = tmp; + } + + /* Wait for last operation to be completed */ + status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_ER_PRG_TIMEOUT); + + /* Return the Option Byte program Status */ + return status; +} + +/** + * @brief Programs the FLASH brownout reset threshold level Option Byte. + * @note To correctly run this function, the FLASH_OB_Unlock() function + * must be called before. + * Call the FLASH_OB_Lock() to disable the flash control register access and the option bytes + * (recommended to protect the FLASH memory against possible unwanted operation). + * @param OB_BOR: Selects the brownout reset threshold level. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg OB_BOR_OFF: BOR is disabled at power down, the reset is asserted when the VDD + * power supply reaches the PDR(Power Down Reset) threshold (1.5V) + * @arg OB_BOR_LEVEL1: BOR Reset threshold levels for 1.7V - 1.8V VDD power supply + * @arg OB_BOR_LEVEL2: BOR Reset threshold levels for 1.9V - 2.0V VDD power supply + * @arg OB_BOR_LEVEL3: BOR Reset threshold levels for 2.3V - 2.4V VDD power supply + * @arg OB_BOR_LEVEL4: BOR Reset threshold levels for 2.55V - 2.65V VDD power supply + * @arg OB_BOR_LEVEL5: BOR Reset threshold levels for 2.8V - 2.9V VDD power supply + * @retval FLASH Status: The returned value can be: + * FLASH_ERROR_PROGRAM, FLASH_ERROR_WRP, FLASH_COMPLETE or FLASH_TIMEOUT. + */ +FLASH_Status FLASH_OB_BORConfig(uint8_t OB_BOR) +{ + FLASH_Status status = FLASH_COMPLETE; + uint32_t tmp = 0, tmp1 = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_OB_BOR_LEVEL(OB_BOR)); + + /* Get the User Option byte register */ + tmp1 = (FLASH->OBR & 0x00F00000) >> 16; + + /* Calculate the option byte to write */ + tmp = (uint32_t)~(OB_BOR | tmp1)<<16; + tmp |= (OB_BOR | tmp1); + + /* Wait for last operation to be completed */ + status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_ER_PRG_TIMEOUT); + + if(status == FLASH_COMPLETE) + { + /* Write the BOR Option Byte */ + OB->USER = tmp; + } + + /* Wait for last operation to be completed */ + status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_ER_PRG_TIMEOUT); + + /* Return the Option Byte program Status */ + return status; +} + +/** + * @brief Configures to boot from Bank1 or Bank2. + * @note This function can be used only for STM32L1XX_HD density devices. + * To correctly run this function, the FLASH_OB_Unlock() function + * must be called before. + * Call the FLASH_OB_Lock() to disable the flash control register access and the option bytes + * (recommended to protect the FLASH memory against possible unwanted operation). + * @param OB_BOOT: select the FLASH Bank to boot from. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg OB_BOOT_BANK2: At startup, if boot pins are set in boot from user Flash + * position and this parameter is selected the device will boot from Bank2 or Bank1, + * depending on the activation of the bank. The active banks are checked in + * the following order: Bank2, followed by Bank1. + * The active bank is recognized by the value programmed at the base address + * of the respective bank (corresponding to the initial stack pointer value + * in the interrupt vector table). + * @arg OB_BOOT_BANK1: At startup, if boot pins are set in boot from user Flash + * position and this parameter is selected the device will boot from Bank1(Default). + * For more information, please refer to AN2606 from www.st.com. + * @retval FLASH Status: The returned value can be: + * FLASH_ERROR_PROGRAM, FLASH_ERROR_WRP, FLASH_COMPLETE or FLASH_TIMEOUT. + */ +FLASH_Status FLASH_OB_BootConfig(uint8_t OB_BOOT) +{ + FLASH_Status status = FLASH_COMPLETE; + uint32_t tmp = 0, tmp1 = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_OB_BOOT_BANK(OB_BOOT)); + + /* Get the User Option byte register */ + tmp1 = (FLASH->OBR & 0x007F0000) >> 16; + + /* Calculate the option byte to write */ + tmp = (uint32_t)~(OB_BOOT | tmp1)<<16; + tmp |= (OB_BOOT | tmp1); + + /* Wait for last operation to be completed */ + status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_ER_PRG_TIMEOUT); + + if(status == FLASH_COMPLETE) + { + /* Write the BOOT Option Byte */ + OB->USER = tmp; + } + + /* Wait for last operation to be completed */ + status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_ER_PRG_TIMEOUT); + + /* Return the Option Byte program Status */ + return status; +} + +/** + * @brief Returns the FLASH User Option Bytes values. + * @param None + * @retval The FLASH User Option Bytes. + */ +uint8_t FLASH_OB_GetUser(void) +{ + /* Return the User Option Byte */ + return (uint8_t)(FLASH->OBR >> 20); +} + +/** + * @brief Returns the FLASH Write Protection Option Bytes value. + * @param None + * @retval The FLASH Write Protection Option Bytes value. + */ +uint32_t FLASH_OB_GetWRP(void) +{ + /* Return the FLASH write protection Register value */ + return (uint32_t)(FLASH->WRPR); +} + +/** + * @brief Returns the FLASH Write Protection Option Bytes value. + * @note This function can be used only for STM32L1XX_HD and STM32L1XX_MDP + * density devices. + * @param None + * @retval The FLASH Write Protection Option Bytes value. + */ +uint32_t FLASH_OB_GetWRP1(void) +{ + /* Return the FLASH write protection Register value */ + return (uint32_t)(FLASH->WRPR1); +} + +/** + * @brief Returns the FLASH Write Protection Option Bytes value. + * @note This function can be used only for STM32L1XX_HD density devices. + * @param None + * @retval The FLASH Write Protection Option Bytes value. + */ +uint32_t FLASH_OB_GetWRP2(void) +{ + /* Return the FLASH write protection Register value */ + return (uint32_t)(FLASH->WRPR2); +} + +/** + * @brief Checks whether the FLASH Read out Protection Status is set or not. + * @param None + * @retval FLASH ReadOut Protection Status(SET or RESET). + */ +FlagStatus FLASH_OB_GetRDP(void) +{ + FlagStatus readstatus = RESET; + + if ((uint8_t)(FLASH->OBR) != (uint8_t)OB_RDP_Level_0) + { + readstatus = SET; + } + else + { + readstatus = RESET; + } + return readstatus; +} + +/** + * @brief Returns the FLASH BOR level. + * @param None + * @retval The FLASH User Option Bytes. + */ +uint8_t FLASH_OB_GetBOR(void) +{ + /* Return the BOR level */ + return (uint8_t)((FLASH->OBR & (uint32_t)0x000F0000) >> 16); +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup FLASH_Group5 Interrupts and flags management functions + * @brief Interrupts and flags management functions + * +@verbatim + ============================================================================== + ##### Interrupts and flags management functions ##### + ============================================================================== + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the specified FLASH interrupts. + * @param FLASH_IT: specifies the FLASH interrupt sources to be enabled or + * disabled. + * This parameter can be any combination of the following values: + * @arg FLASH_IT_EOP: FLASH end of programming Interrupt + * @arg FLASH_IT_ERR: FLASH Error Interrupt + * @retval None + */ +void FLASH_ITConfig(uint32_t FLASH_IT, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FLASH_IT(FLASH_IT)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if(NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the interrupt sources */ + FLASH->PECR |= FLASH_IT; + } + else + { + /* Disable the interrupt sources */ + FLASH->PECR &= ~(uint32_t)FLASH_IT; + } +} + +/** + * @brief Checks whether the specified FLASH flag is set or not. + * @param FLASH_FLAG: specifies the FLASH flag to check. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg FLASH_FLAG_BSY: FLASH write/erase operations in progress flag + * @arg FLASH_FLAG_EOP: FLASH End of Operation flag + * @arg FLASH_FLAG_READY: FLASH Ready flag after low power mode + * @arg FLASH_FLAG_ENDHV: FLASH End of high voltage flag + * @arg FLASH_FLAG_WRPERR: FLASH Write protected error flag + * @arg FLASH_FLAG_PGAERR: FLASH Programming Alignment error flag + * @arg FLASH_FLAG_SIZERR: FLASH size error flag + * @arg FLASH_FLAG_OPTVERR: FLASH Option validity error flag + * @arg FLASH_FLAG_OPTVERRUSR: FLASH Option User validity error flag + * @retval The new state of FLASH_FLAG (SET or RESET). + */ +FlagStatus FLASH_GetFlagStatus(uint32_t FLASH_FLAG) +{ + FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FLASH_GET_FLAG(FLASH_FLAG)); + + if((FLASH->SR & FLASH_FLAG) != (uint32_t)RESET) + { + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + bitstatus = RESET; + } + /* Return the new state of FLASH_FLAG (SET or RESET) */ + return bitstatus; +} + +/** + * @brief Clears the FLASH's pending flags. + * @param FLASH_FLAG: specifies the FLASH flags to clear. + * This parameter can be any combination of the following values: + * @arg FLASH_FLAG_EOP: FLASH End of Operation flag + * @arg FLASH_FLAG_WRPERR: FLASH Write protected error flag + * @arg FLASH_FLAG_PGAERR: FLASH Programming Alignment error flag + * @arg FLASH_FLAG_SIZERR: FLASH size error flag + * @arg FLASH_FLAG_OPTVERR: FLASH Option validity error flag + * @arg FLASH_FLAG_OPTVERRUSR: FLASH Option User validity error flag + * @retval None + */ +void FLASH_ClearFlag(uint32_t FLASH_FLAG) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FLASH_CLEAR_FLAG(FLASH_FLAG)); + + /* Clear the flags */ + FLASH->SR = FLASH_FLAG; +} + +/** + * @brief Returns the FLASH Status. + * @param None + * @retval FLASH Status: The returned value can be: + * FLASH_BUSY, FLASH_ERROR_PROGRAM, FLASH_ERROR_WRP or FLASH_COMPLETE. + */ +FLASH_Status FLASH_GetStatus(void) +{ + FLASH_Status FLASHstatus = FLASH_COMPLETE; + + if((FLASH->SR & FLASH_FLAG_BSY) == FLASH_FLAG_BSY) + { + FLASHstatus = FLASH_BUSY; + } + else + { + if((FLASH->SR & (uint32_t)FLASH_FLAG_WRPERR)!= (uint32_t)0x00) + { + FLASHstatus = FLASH_ERROR_WRP; + } + else + { + if((FLASH->SR & (uint32_t)0x1E00) != (uint32_t)0x00) + { + FLASHstatus = FLASH_ERROR_PROGRAM; + } + else + { + FLASHstatus = FLASH_COMPLETE; + } + } + } + /* Return the FLASH Status */ + return FLASHstatus; +} + + +/** + * @brief Waits for a FLASH operation to complete or a TIMEOUT to occur. + * @param Timeout: FLASH programming Timeout. + * @retval FLASH Status: The returned value can be: FLASH_BUSY, + * FLASH_ERROR_PROGRAM, FLASH_ERROR_WRP, FLASH_COMPLETE or FLASH_TIMEOUT. + */ +FLASH_Status FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(uint32_t Timeout) +{ + __IO FLASH_Status status = FLASH_COMPLETE; + + /* Check for the FLASH Status */ + status = FLASH_GetStatus(); + + /* Wait for a FLASH operation to complete or a TIMEOUT to occur */ + while((status == FLASH_BUSY) && (Timeout != 0x00)) + { + status = FLASH_GetStatus(); + Timeout--; + } + + if(Timeout == 0x00 ) + { + status = FLASH_TIMEOUT; + } + /* Return the operation status */ + return status; +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + + /** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/ diff --git a/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32l1xx_fsmc.c b/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32l1xx_fsmc.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..989b87a --- /dev/null +++ b/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32l1xx_fsmc.c @@ -0,0 +1,285 @@ +/** + ****************************************************************************** + * @file stm32l1xx_fsmc.c + * @author MCD Application Team + * @version V1.1.1 + * @date 05-March-2012 + * @brief This file provides firmware functions to manage the following + * functionalities of the FSMC peripheral: + * + Initialization + * + Interrupts and flags management + * + ****************************************************************************** + * @attention + * + * <h2><center>© COPYRIGHT 2012 STMicroelectronics</center></h2> + * + * Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License"); + * You may not use this file except in compliance with the License. + * You may obtain a copy of the License at: + * + * http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2 + * + * Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software + * distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS, + * WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. + * See the License for the specific language governing permissions and + * limitations under the License. + * + ****************************************************************************** + */ + +/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#include "stm32l1xx_fsmc.h" +#include "stm32l1xx_rcc.h" + +/** @addtogroup STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver + * @{ + */ + +/** @defgroup FSMC + * @brief FSMC driver modules + * @{ + */ + +/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/ + +/** @defgroup FSMC_Private_Functions + * @{ + */ + +/** @defgroup FSMC_Group1 NOR/SRAM Controller functions + * @brief NOR/SRAM Controller functions + * + @verbatim + ============================================================================== + ##### NOR-SRAM Controller functions ##### + ============================================================================== + [..] The following sequence should be followed to configure the FSMC to + interface with SRAM, PSRAM, NOR or OneNAND memory connected to the + NOR/SRAM Bank: + (#) Enable the clock for the FSMC and associated GPIOs using the following + functions: + (++)RCC_AHBPeriphClockCmd(RCC_AHBPeriph_FSMC, ENABLE); + (++)RCC_AHBPeriphClockCmd(RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOx, ENABLE); + (#) FSMC pins configuration + (++) Connect the involved FSMC pins to AF12 using the following function + GPIO_PinAFConfig(GPIOx, GPIO_PinSourcex, GPIO_AF_FSMC); + (++) Configure these FSMC pins in alternate function mode by calling the + function GPIO_Init(); + (#) Declare a FSMC_NORSRAMInitTypeDef structure, for example: + FSMC_NORSRAMInitTypeDef FSMC_NORSRAMInitStructure; and fill the + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStructure variable with the allowed values of the + structure member. + (#) Initialize the NOR/SRAM Controller by calling the function + FSMC_NORSRAMInit(&FSMC_NORSRAMInitStructure); + (#) Then enable the NOR/SRAM Bank, for example: + FSMC_NORSRAMCmd(FSMC_Bank1_NORSRAM2, ENABLE); + (#) At this stage you can read/write from/to the memory connected to the + NOR/SRAM Bank. + +@endverbatim + + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Deinitializes the FSMC NOR/SRAM Banks registers to their default + * reset values. + * @param FSMC_Bank: specifies the FSMC Bank to be used + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg FSMC_Bank1_NORSRAM1: FSMC Bank1 NOR/SRAM1 + * @arg FSMC_Bank1_NORSRAM2: FSMC Bank1 NOR/SRAM2 + * @arg FSMC_Bank1_NORSRAM3: FSMC Bank1 NOR/SRAM3 + * @arg FSMC_Bank1_NORSRAM4: FSMC Bank1 NOR/SRAM4 + * @retval None + */ +void FSMC_NORSRAMDeInit(uint32_t FSMC_Bank) +{ + /* Check the parameter */ + assert_param(IS_FSMC_NORSRAM_BANK(FSMC_Bank)); + + /* FSMC_Bank1_NORSRAM1 */ + if(FSMC_Bank == FSMC_Bank1_NORSRAM1) + { + FSMC_Bank1->BTCR[FSMC_Bank] = 0x000030DB; + } + /* FSMC_Bank1_NORSRAM2, FSMC_Bank1_NORSRAM3 or FSMC_Bank1_NORSRAM4 */ + else + { + FSMC_Bank1->BTCR[FSMC_Bank] = 0x000030D2; + } + FSMC_Bank1->BTCR[FSMC_Bank + 1] = 0x0FFFFFFF; + FSMC_Bank1E->BWTR[FSMC_Bank] = 0x0FFFFFFF; +} + +/** + * @brief Initializes the FSMC NOR/SRAM Banks according to the specified + * parameters in the FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct. + * @param FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct : pointer to a FSMC_NORSRAMInitTypeDef + * structure that contains the configuration information for + * the FSMC NOR/SRAM specified Banks. + * @retval None + */ +void FSMC_NORSRAMInit(FSMC_NORSRAMInitTypeDef* FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FSMC_NORSRAM_BANK(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_Bank)); + assert_param(IS_FSMC_MUX(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_DataAddressMux)); + assert_param(IS_FSMC_MEMORY(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_MemoryType)); + assert_param(IS_FSMC_MEMORY_WIDTH(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_MemoryDataWidth)); + assert_param(IS_FSMC_BURSTMODE(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_BurstAccessMode)); + assert_param(IS_FSMC_ASYNWAIT(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_AsynchronousWait)); + assert_param(IS_FSMC_WAIT_POLARITY(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WaitSignalPolarity)); + assert_param(IS_FSMC_WRAP_MODE(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WrapMode)); + assert_param(IS_FSMC_WAIT_SIGNAL_ACTIVE(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WaitSignalActive)); + assert_param(IS_FSMC_WRITE_OPERATION(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteOperation)); + assert_param(IS_FSMC_WAITE_SIGNAL(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WaitSignal)); + assert_param(IS_FSMC_EXTENDED_MODE(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_ExtendedMode)); + assert_param(IS_FSMC_WRITE_BURST(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteBurst)); + assert_param(IS_FSMC_ADDRESS_SETUP_TIME(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_ReadWriteTimingStruct->FSMC_AddressSetupTime)); + assert_param(IS_FSMC_ADDRESS_HOLD_TIME(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_ReadWriteTimingStruct->FSMC_AddressHoldTime)); + assert_param(IS_FSMC_DATASETUP_TIME(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_ReadWriteTimingStruct->FSMC_DataSetupTime)); + assert_param(IS_FSMC_TURNAROUND_TIME(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_ReadWriteTimingStruct->FSMC_BusTurnAroundDuration)); + assert_param(IS_FSMC_CLK_DIV(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_ReadWriteTimingStruct->FSMC_CLKDivision)); + assert_param(IS_FSMC_DATA_LATENCY(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_ReadWriteTimingStruct->FSMC_DataLatency)); + assert_param(IS_FSMC_ACCESS_MODE(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_ReadWriteTimingStruct->FSMC_AccessMode)); + + /* Bank1 NOR/SRAM control register configuration */ + FSMC_Bank1->BTCR[FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_Bank] = + (uint32_t)FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_DataAddressMux | + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_MemoryType | + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_MemoryDataWidth | + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_BurstAccessMode | + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_AsynchronousWait | + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WaitSignalPolarity | + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WrapMode | + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WaitSignalActive | + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteOperation | + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WaitSignal | + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_ExtendedMode | + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteBurst; + + if(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_MemoryType == FSMC_MemoryType_NOR) + { + FSMC_Bank1->BTCR[FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_Bank] |= (uint32_t)FSMC_BCR1_FACCEN; + } + + /* Bank1 NOR/SRAM timing register configuration */ + FSMC_Bank1->BTCR[FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_Bank+1] = + (uint32_t)FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_ReadWriteTimingStruct->FSMC_AddressSetupTime | + (FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_ReadWriteTimingStruct->FSMC_AddressHoldTime << 4) | + (FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_ReadWriteTimingStruct->FSMC_DataSetupTime << 8) | + (FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_ReadWriteTimingStruct->FSMC_BusTurnAroundDuration << 16) | + (FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_ReadWriteTimingStruct->FSMC_CLKDivision << 20) | + (FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_ReadWriteTimingStruct->FSMC_DataLatency << 24) | + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_ReadWriteTimingStruct->FSMC_AccessMode; + + + /* Bank1 NOR/SRAM timing register for write configuration, if extended mode is used */ + if(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_ExtendedMode == FSMC_ExtendedMode_Enable) + { + assert_param(IS_FSMC_ADDRESS_SETUP_TIME(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteTimingStruct->FSMC_AddressSetupTime)); + assert_param(IS_FSMC_ADDRESS_HOLD_TIME(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteTimingStruct->FSMC_AddressHoldTime)); + assert_param(IS_FSMC_DATASETUP_TIME(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteTimingStruct->FSMC_DataSetupTime)); + assert_param(IS_FSMC_CLK_DIV(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteTimingStruct->FSMC_CLKDivision)); + assert_param(IS_FSMC_DATA_LATENCY(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteTimingStruct->FSMC_DataLatency)); + assert_param(IS_FSMC_ACCESS_MODE(FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteTimingStruct->FSMC_AccessMode)); + FSMC_Bank1E->BWTR[FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_Bank] = + (uint32_t)FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteTimingStruct->FSMC_AddressSetupTime | + (FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteTimingStruct->FSMC_AddressHoldTime << 4 )| + (FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteTimingStruct->FSMC_DataSetupTime << 8) | + (FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteTimingStruct->FSMC_CLKDivision << 20) | + (FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteTimingStruct->FSMC_DataLatency << 24) | + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteTimingStruct->FSMC_AccessMode; + } + else + { + FSMC_Bank1E->BWTR[FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_Bank] = 0x0FFFFFFF; + } +} + +/** + * @brief Fills each FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct member with its default value. + * @param FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct: pointer to a FSMC_NORSRAMInitTypeDef + * structure which will be initialized. + * @retval None + */ +void FSMC_NORSRAMStructInit(FSMC_NORSRAMInitTypeDef* FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct) +{ + /* Reset NOR/SRAM Init structure parameters values */ + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_Bank = FSMC_Bank1_NORSRAM1; + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_DataAddressMux = FSMC_DataAddressMux_Enable; + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_MemoryType = FSMC_MemoryType_SRAM; + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_MemoryDataWidth = FSMC_MemoryDataWidth_8b; + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_BurstAccessMode = FSMC_BurstAccessMode_Disable; + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_AsynchronousWait = FSMC_AsynchronousWait_Disable; + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WaitSignalPolarity = FSMC_WaitSignalPolarity_Low; + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WrapMode = FSMC_WrapMode_Disable; + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WaitSignalActive = FSMC_WaitSignalActive_BeforeWaitState; + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteOperation = FSMC_WriteOperation_Enable; + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WaitSignal = FSMC_WaitSignal_Enable; + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_ExtendedMode = FSMC_ExtendedMode_Disable; + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteBurst = FSMC_WriteBurst_Disable; + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_ReadWriteTimingStruct->FSMC_AddressSetupTime = 0xF; + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_ReadWriteTimingStruct->FSMC_AddressHoldTime = 0xF; + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_ReadWriteTimingStruct->FSMC_DataSetupTime = 0xFF; + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_ReadWriteTimingStruct->FSMC_BusTurnAroundDuration = 0xF; + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_ReadWriteTimingStruct->FSMC_CLKDivision = 0xF; + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_ReadWriteTimingStruct->FSMC_DataLatency = 0xF; + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_ReadWriteTimingStruct->FSMC_AccessMode = FSMC_AccessMode_A; + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteTimingStruct->FSMC_AddressSetupTime = 0xF; + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteTimingStruct->FSMC_AddressHoldTime = 0xF; + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteTimingStruct->FSMC_DataSetupTime = 0xFF; + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteTimingStruct->FSMC_BusTurnAroundDuration = 0xF; + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteTimingStruct->FSMC_CLKDivision = 0xF; + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteTimingStruct->FSMC_DataLatency = 0xF; + FSMC_NORSRAMInitStruct->FSMC_WriteTimingStruct->FSMC_AccessMode = FSMC_AccessMode_A; +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the specified NOR/SRAM Memory Bank. + * @param FSMC_Bank: specifies the FSMC Bank to be used + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg FSMC_Bank1_NORSRAM1: FSMC Bank1 NOR/SRAM1 + * @arg FSMC_Bank1_NORSRAM2: FSMC Bank1 NOR/SRAM2 + * @arg FSMC_Bank1_NORSRAM3: FSMC Bank1 NOR/SRAM3 + * @arg FSMC_Bank1_NORSRAM4: FSMC Bank1 NOR/SRAM4 + * @param NewState: new state of the FSMC_Bank. This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void FSMC_NORSRAMCmd(uint32_t FSMC_Bank, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + assert_param(IS_FSMC_NORSRAM_BANK(FSMC_Bank)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the selected NOR/SRAM Bank by setting the MBKEN bit in the BCRx register */ + FSMC_Bank1->BTCR[FSMC_Bank] |= FSMC_BCR1_MBKEN; + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected NOR/SRAM Bank by clearing the MBKEN bit in the BCRx register */ + FSMC_Bank1->BTCR[FSMC_Bank] &= (uint32_t)(~FSMC_BCR1_MBKEN); + } +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/ diff --git a/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32l1xx_gpio.c b/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32l1xx_gpio.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c0aa121 --- /dev/null +++ b/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32l1xx_gpio.c @@ -0,0 +1,557 @@ +/** + ****************************************************************************** + * @file stm32l1xx_gpio.c + * @author MCD Application Team + * @version V1.1.1 + * @date 05-March-2012 + * @brief This file provides firmware functions to manage the following + * functionalities of the GPIO peripheral: + * + Initialization and Configuration + * + GPIO Read and Write + * + GPIO Alternate functions configuration + * + * @verbatim + =========================================================================== + ##### How to use this driver ##### + =========================================================================== + [..] + (#) Enable the GPIO AHB clock using RCC_AHBPeriphClockCmd() + (#) Configure the GPIO pin(s) using GPIO_Init() + Four possible configuration are available for each pin: + (++) Input: Floating, Pull-up, Pull-down. + (++) Output: Push-Pull (Pull-up, Pull-down or no Pull) + Open Drain (Pull-up, Pull-down or no Pull). + In output mode, the speed is configurable: Very Low, Low, + Medium or High. + (++) Alternate Function: Push-Pull (Pull-up, Pull-down or no Pull) + Open Drain (Pull-up, Pull-down or no Pull). + (++) Analog: required mode when a pin is to be used as ADC channel, + DAC output or comparator input. + (#) Peripherals alternate function: + (++) For ADC, DAC and comparators, configure the desired pin in + analog mode using GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Mode = GPIO_Mode_AN + (++) For other peripherals (TIM, USART...): + (+++) Connect the pin to the desired peripherals' Alternate + Function (AF) using GPIO_PinAFConfig() function. + (+++) Configure the desired pin in alternate function mode using + GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Mode = GPIO_Mode_AF + (+++) Select the type, pull-up/pull-down and output speed via + GPIO_PuPd, GPIO_OType and GPIO_Speed members. + (+++) Call GPIO_Init() function. + (#) To get the level of a pin configured in input mode use GPIO_ReadInputDataBit() + (#) To set/reset the level of a pin configured in output mode use + GPIO_SetBits()/GPIO_ResetBits() + (#) During and just after reset, the alternate functions are not + active and the GPIO pins are configured in input floating mode + (except JTAG pins). + (#) The LSE oscillator pins OSC32_IN and OSC32_OUT can be used as + general-purpose (PC14 and PC15, respectively) when the LSE + oscillator is off. The LSE has priority over the GPIO function. + (#) The HSE oscillator pins OSC_IN/OSC_OUT can be used as + general-purpose PH0 and PH1, respectively, when the HSE + oscillator is off. The HSE has priority over the GPIO function. + @endverbatim + * + ****************************************************************************** + * @attention + * + * <h2><center>© COPYRIGHT 2012 STMicroelectronics</center></h2> + * + * Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License"); + * You may not use this file except in compliance with the License. + * You may obtain a copy of the License at: + * + * http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2 + * + * Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software + * distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS, + * WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. + * See the License for the specific language governing permissions and + * limitations under the License. + * + ****************************************************************************** + */ + +/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#include "stm32l1xx_gpio.h" +#include "stm32l1xx_rcc.h" + +/** @addtogroup STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver + * @{ + */ + +/** @defgroup GPIO + * @brief GPIO driver modules + * @{ + */ + +/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/ + +/** @defgroup GPIO_Private_Functions + * @{ + */ + +/** @defgroup GPIO_Group1 Initialization and Configuration + * @brief Initialization and Configuration + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### Initialization and Configuration ##### + =============================================================================== + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Deinitializes the GPIOx peripheral registers to their default reset + * values. + * By default, The GPIO pins are configured in input floating mode + * (except JTAG pins). + * @param GPIOx: where x can be (A..H) to select the GPIO peripheral. + * @retval None + */ +void GPIO_DeInit(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_GPIO_ALL_PERIPH(GPIOx)); + + if(GPIOx == GPIOA) + { + RCC_AHBPeriphResetCmd(RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOA, ENABLE); + RCC_AHBPeriphResetCmd(RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOA, DISABLE); + } + else if(GPIOx == GPIOB) + { + RCC_AHBPeriphResetCmd(RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOB, ENABLE); + RCC_AHBPeriphResetCmd(RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOB, DISABLE); + } + else if(GPIOx == GPIOC) + { + RCC_AHBPeriphResetCmd(RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOC, ENABLE); + RCC_AHBPeriphResetCmd(RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOC, DISABLE); + } + else if(GPIOx == GPIOD) + { + RCC_AHBPeriphResetCmd(RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOD, ENABLE); + RCC_AHBPeriphResetCmd(RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOD, DISABLE); + } + else if(GPIOx == GPIOE) + { + RCC_AHBPeriphResetCmd(RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOE, ENABLE); + RCC_AHBPeriphResetCmd(RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOE, DISABLE); + } + else if(GPIOx == GPIOF) + { + RCC_AHBPeriphResetCmd(RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOF, ENABLE); + RCC_AHBPeriphResetCmd(RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOF, DISABLE); + } + else if(GPIOx == GPIOG) + { + RCC_AHBPeriphResetCmd(RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOG, ENABLE); + RCC_AHBPeriphResetCmd(RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOG, DISABLE); + } + else + { + if(GPIOx == GPIOH) + { + RCC_AHBPeriphResetCmd(RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOH, ENABLE); + RCC_AHBPeriphResetCmd(RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOH, DISABLE); + } + } +} + +/** + * @brief Initializes the GPIOx peripheral according to the specified + * parameters in the GPIO_InitStruct. + * @param GPIOx: where x can be (A..H) to select the GPIO peripheral. + * @param GPIO_InitStruct: pointer to a GPIO_InitTypeDef structure that + * contains the configuration information for the specified GPIO + * peripheral. + + * @retval None + */ +void GPIO_Init(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx, GPIO_InitTypeDef* GPIO_InitStruct) +{ + uint32_t pinpos = 0x00, pos = 0x00 , currentpin = 0x00; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_GPIO_ALL_PERIPH(GPIOx)); + assert_param(IS_GPIO_PIN(GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Pin)); + assert_param(IS_GPIO_MODE(GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Mode)); + assert_param(IS_GPIO_PUPD(GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_PuPd)); + + /* -------------------------Configure the port pins---------------- */ + /*-- GPIO Mode Configuration --*/ + for (pinpos = 0x00; pinpos < 0x10; pinpos++) + { + pos = ((uint32_t)0x01) << pinpos; + + /* Get the port pins position */ + currentpin = (GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Pin) & pos; + + if (currentpin == pos) + { + GPIOx->MODER &= ~(GPIO_MODER_MODER0 << (pinpos * 2)); + + GPIOx->MODER |= (((uint32_t)GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Mode) << (pinpos * 2)); + + if ((GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Mode == GPIO_Mode_OUT) || (GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Mode == GPIO_Mode_AF)) + { + /* Check Speed mode parameters */ + assert_param(IS_GPIO_SPEED(GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Speed)); + + /* Speed mode configuration */ + GPIOx->OSPEEDR &= ~(GPIO_OSPEEDER_OSPEEDR0 << (pinpos * 2)); + GPIOx->OSPEEDR |= ((uint32_t)(GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Speed) << (pinpos * 2)); + + /*Check Output mode parameters */ + assert_param(IS_GPIO_OTYPE(GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_OType)); + + /* Output mode configuration */ + GPIOx->OTYPER &= ~((GPIO_OTYPER_OT_0) << ((uint16_t)pinpos)) ; + GPIOx->OTYPER |= (uint16_t)(((uint16_t)GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_OType) << ((uint16_t)pinpos)); + } + + /* Pull-up Pull down resistor configuration */ + GPIOx->PUPDR &= ~(GPIO_PUPDR_PUPDR0 << ((uint16_t)pinpos * 2)); + GPIOx->PUPDR |= (((uint32_t)GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_PuPd) << (pinpos * 2)); + } + } +} + +/** + * @brief Fills each GPIO_InitStruct member with its default value. + * @param GPIO_InitStruct : pointer to a GPIO_InitTypeDef structure which will + * be initialized. + * @retval None + */ +void GPIO_StructInit(GPIO_InitTypeDef* GPIO_InitStruct) +{ + /* Reset GPIO init structure parameters values */ + GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Pin = GPIO_Pin_All; + GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Mode = GPIO_Mode_IN; + GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Speed = GPIO_Speed_400KHz; + GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_OType = GPIO_OType_PP; + GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_PuPd = GPIO_PuPd_NOPULL; +} + +/** + * @brief Locks GPIO Pins configuration registers. + * The locked registers are GPIOx_MODER, GPIOx_OTYPER, GPIOx_OSPEEDR, + * GPIOx_PUPDR, GPIOx_AFRL and GPIOx_AFRH. + * The configuration of the locked GPIO pins can no longer be modified + * until the next reset. + * @param GPIOx: where x can be (A..H) to select the GPIO peripheral. + * @param GPIO_Pin: specifies the port bit to be written. + * This parameter can be any combination of GPIO_Pin_x where x can be (0..15). + * @retval None + */ +void GPIO_PinLockConfig(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx, uint16_t GPIO_Pin) +{ + __IO uint32_t tmp = 0x00010000; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_GPIO_ALL_PERIPH(GPIOx)); + assert_param(IS_GPIO_PIN(GPIO_Pin)); + + tmp |= GPIO_Pin; + /* Set LCKK bit */ + GPIOx->LCKR = tmp; + /* Reset LCKK bit */ + GPIOx->LCKR = GPIO_Pin; + /* Set LCKK bit */ + GPIOx->LCKR = tmp; + /* Read LCKK bit*/ + tmp = GPIOx->LCKR; + /* Read LCKK bit*/ + tmp = GPIOx->LCKR; +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup GPIO_Group2 GPIO Read and Write + * @brief GPIO Read and Write + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### GPIO Read and Write ##### + =============================================================================== + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Reads the specified input port pin. + * @param GPIOx: where x can be (A..H) to select the GPIO peripheral. + * @param GPIO_Pin: specifies the port bit to read. + * This parameter can be GPIO_Pin_x where x can be (0..15). + * @retval The input port pin value. + */ +uint8_t GPIO_ReadInputDataBit(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx, uint16_t GPIO_Pin) +{ + uint8_t bitstatus = 0x00; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_GPIO_ALL_PERIPH(GPIOx)); + assert_param(IS_GET_GPIO_PIN(GPIO_Pin)); + + if ((GPIOx->IDR & GPIO_Pin) != (uint32_t)Bit_RESET) + { + bitstatus = (uint8_t)Bit_SET; + } + else + { + bitstatus = (uint8_t)Bit_RESET; + } + return bitstatus; +} + +/** + * @brief Reads the specified GPIO input data port. + * @param GPIOx: where x can be (A..H) to select the GPIO peripheral. + * @retval GPIO input data port value. + */ +uint16_t GPIO_ReadInputData(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_GPIO_ALL_PERIPH(GPIOx)); + + return ((uint16_t)GPIOx->IDR); +} + +/** + * @brief Reads the specified output data port bit. + * @param GPIOx: where x can be (A..H) to select the GPIO peripheral. + * @param GPIO_Pin: Specifies the port bit to read. + * This parameter can be GPIO_Pin_x where x can be (0..15). + * @retval The output port pin value. + */ +uint8_t GPIO_ReadOutputDataBit(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx, uint16_t GPIO_Pin) +{ + uint8_t bitstatus = 0x00; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_GPIO_ALL_PERIPH(GPIOx)); + assert_param(IS_GET_GPIO_PIN(GPIO_Pin)); + + if ((GPIOx->ODR & GPIO_Pin) != (uint32_t)Bit_RESET) + { + bitstatus = (uint8_t)Bit_SET; + } + else + { + bitstatus = (uint8_t)Bit_RESET; + } + return bitstatus; +} + +/** + * @brief Reads the specified GPIO output data port. + * @param GPIOx: where x can be (A..H) to select the GPIO peripheral. + * @retval GPIO output data port value. + */ +uint16_t GPIO_ReadOutputData(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_GPIO_ALL_PERIPH(GPIOx)); + + return ((uint16_t)GPIOx->ODR); +} + +/** + * @brief Sets the selected data port bits. + * @param GPIOx: where x can be (A..H) to select the GPIO peripheral. + * @param GPIO_Pin: specifies the port bits to be written. + * This parameter can be any combination of GPIO_Pin_x where x can be (0..15). + * @note This functions uses GPIOx_BSRR register to allow atomic read/modify + * accesses. In this way, there is no risk of an IRQ occurring between + * the read and the modify access. + * @retval None + */ +void GPIO_SetBits(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx, uint16_t GPIO_Pin) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_GPIO_ALL_PERIPH(GPIOx)); + assert_param(IS_GPIO_PIN(GPIO_Pin)); + + GPIOx->BSRRL = GPIO_Pin; +} + +/** + * @brief Clears the selected data port bits. + * @param GPIOx: where x can be (A..H) to select the GPIO peripheral. + * @param GPIO_Pin: specifies the port bits to be written. + * This parameter can be any combination of GPIO_Pin_x where x can be (0..15). + * @note This functions uses GPIOx_BSRR register to allow atomic read/modify + * accesses. In this way, there is no risk of an IRQ occurring between + * the read and the modify access. + * @retval None + */ +void GPIO_ResetBits(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx, uint16_t GPIO_Pin) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_GPIO_ALL_PERIPH(GPIOx)); + assert_param(IS_GPIO_PIN(GPIO_Pin)); + + GPIOx->BSRRH = GPIO_Pin; +} + +/** + * @brief Sets or clears the selected data port bit. + * @param GPIOx: where x can be (A..H) to select the GPIO peripheral. + * @param GPIO_Pin: specifies the port bit to be written. + * This parameter can be one of GPIO_Pin_x where x can be (0..15). + * @param BitVal: specifies the value to be written to the selected bit. + * This parameter can be one of the BitAction enum values: + * @arg Bit_RESET: to clear the port pin + * @arg Bit_SET: to set the port pin + * @retval None + */ +void GPIO_WriteBit(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx, uint16_t GPIO_Pin, BitAction BitVal) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_GPIO_ALL_PERIPH(GPIOx)); + assert_param(IS_GET_GPIO_PIN(GPIO_Pin)); + assert_param(IS_GPIO_BIT_ACTION(BitVal)); + + if (BitVal != Bit_RESET) + { + GPIOx->BSRRL = GPIO_Pin; + } + else + { + GPIOx->BSRRH = GPIO_Pin ; + } +} + +/** + * @brief Writes data to the specified GPIO data port. + * @param GPIOx: where x can be (A..H) to select the GPIO peripheral. + * @param PortVal: specifies the value to be written to the port output data + * register. + * @retval None + */ +void GPIO_Write(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx, uint16_t PortVal) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_GPIO_ALL_PERIPH(GPIOx)); + + GPIOx->ODR = PortVal; +} + +/** + * @brief Toggles the specified GPIO pins.. + * @param GPIOx: where x can be (A..H) to select the GPIO peripheral. + * @param GPIO_Pin: Specifies the pins to be toggled. + * @retval None + */ +void GPIO_ToggleBits(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx, uint16_t GPIO_Pin) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_GPIO_ALL_PERIPH(GPIOx)); + + GPIOx->ODR ^= GPIO_Pin; +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup GPIO_Group3 GPIO Alternate functions configuration functions + * @brief GPIO Alternate functions configuration functions + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### GPIO Alternate functions configuration functions ##### + =============================================================================== + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Changes the mapping of the specified pin. + * @param GPIOx: where x can be (A..H) to select the GPIO peripheral. + * @param GPIO_PinSource: specifies the pin for the Alternate function. + * This parameter can be GPIO_PinSourcex where x can be (0..15). + * @param GPIO_AFSelection: selects the pin to used as Alternat function. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg GPIO_AF_RTC_50Hz: RTC 50/60 Hz synchronization + * @arg GPIO_AF_MCO: Microcontroller clock output + * @arg GPIO_AF_RTC_AF1: Time stamp, Tamper, Alarm A out, Alarm B out, + * 512 Hz clock output (with an LSE oscillator of 32.768 kHz) + * @arg GPIO_AF_WKUP: wakeup + * @arg GPIO_AF_SWJ: SWJ (SW and JTAG) + * @arg GPIO_AF_TRACE: Connect TRACE pins to AF0 (default after reset) + * @arg GPIO_AF_TIM2c: Connect TIM2 pins to AF1 + * @arg GPIO_AF_TIM3: Connect TIM3 pins to AF2 + * @arg GPIO_AF_TIM4: Connect TIM4 pins to AF2 + * @arg GPIO_AF_TIM5: Connect TIM5 pins to AF2 + * @arg GPIO_AF_TIM9: Connect TIM9 pins to AF3 + * @arg GPIO_AF_TIM10: Connect TIM10 pins to AF3 + * @arg GPIO_AF_TIM11: Connect TIM11 pins to AF3 + * @arg GPIO_AF_I2C1: Connect I2C1 pins to AF4 + * @arg GPIO_AF_I2C2: Connect I2C2 pins to AF4 + * @arg GPIO_AF_SPI1: Connect SPI1 pins to AF5 + * @arg GPIO_AF_SPI2: Connect SPI2/I2S2 pins to AF5 + * @arg GPIO_AF_SPI3: Connect SPI3/I2S3 pins to AF6 + * @arg GPIO_AF_USART1: Connect USART1 pins to AF7 + * @arg GPIO_AF_USART2: Connect USART2 pins to AF7 + * @arg GPIO_AF_USART3: Connect USART3 pins to AF7 + * @arg GPIO_AF_UART4: Connect UART4 pins to AF8 + * @arg GPIO_AF_UART5: Connect UART5 pins to AF8 + * @arg GPIO_AF_USB: Connect USB pins to AF10 + * @arg GPIO_AF_LCD: Connect LCD pins to AF11 + * @arg GPIO_AF_FSMC: Connect FSMC pins to AF12 + * @arg GPIO_AF_SDIO: Connect SDIO pins to AF12 + * @arg GPIO_AF_RI: Connect RI pins to AF14 + * @arg GPIO_AF_EVENTOUT: Cortex-M3 EVENTOUT signal + * @note The pin should already been configured in Alternate Function mode(AF) + * using GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Mode = GPIO_Mode_AF + * @note Please refer to the Alternate function mapping table in the device + * datasheet for the detailed mapping of the system and peripherals' + * alternate function I/O pins. + * @note EVENTOUT is not mapped on PH0, PH1 and PH2. + * @retval None + */ +void GPIO_PinAFConfig(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx, uint16_t GPIO_PinSource, uint8_t GPIO_AF) +{ + uint32_t temp = 0x00; + uint32_t temp_2 = 0x00; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_GPIO_ALL_PERIPH(GPIOx)); + assert_param(IS_GPIO_PIN_SOURCE(GPIO_PinSource)); + assert_param(IS_GPIO_AF(GPIO_AF)); + + temp = ((uint32_t)(GPIO_AF) << ((uint32_t)((uint32_t)GPIO_PinSource & (uint32_t)0x07) * 4)) ; + GPIOx->AFR[GPIO_PinSource >> 0x03] &= ~((uint32_t)0xF << ((uint32_t)((uint32_t)GPIO_PinSource & (uint32_t)0x07) * 4)) ; + temp_2 = GPIOx->AFR[GPIO_PinSource >> 0x03] | temp; + GPIOx->AFR[GPIO_PinSource >> 0x03] = temp_2; +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ +/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/ diff --git a/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32l1xx_i2c.c b/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32l1xx_i2c.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c356696 --- /dev/null +++ b/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32l1xx_i2c.c @@ -0,0 +1,1364 @@ +/** + ****************************************************************************** + * @file stm32l1xx_i2c.c + * @author MCD Application Team + * @version V1.1.1 + * @date 05-March-2012 + * @brief This file provides firmware functions to manage the following + * functionalities of the Inter-integrated circuit (I2C) + * + Initialization and Configuration + * + Data transfers + * + PEC management + * + DMA transfers management + * + Interrupts, events and flags management + * + * @verbatim + * + * ============================================================================ + * ##### How to use this driver ##### + * ============================================================================ + [..] + (#) Enable peripheral clock using RCC_APB1PeriphClockCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_I2Cx, ENABLE) + function for I2C1 or I2C2. + (#) Enable SDA, SCL and SMBA (when used) GPIO clocks using + RCC_AHBPeriphClockCmd() function. + (#) Peripherals alternate function: + (++) Connect the pin to the desired peripherals' Alternate + Function (AF) using GPIO_PinAFConfig() function. + (++) Configure the desired pin in alternate function by: + GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Mode = GPIO_Mode_AF + (++) Select the type, pull-up/pull-down and output speed via + GPIO_PuPd, GPIO_OType and GPIO_Speed members + (++) Call GPIO_Init() function. + (#) Program the Mode, duty cycle , Own address, Ack, Speed and Acknowledged + Address using the I2C_Init() function. + (#) Optionally you can enable/configure the following parameters without + re-initialization (i.e there is no need to call again I2C_Init() function): + (++) Enable the acknowledge feature using I2C_AcknowledgeConfig() function. + (++) Enable the dual addressing mode using I2C_DualAddressCmd() function. + (++) Enable the general call using the I2C_GeneralCallCmd() function. + (++) Enable the clock stretching using I2C_StretchClockCmd() function. + (++) Enable the fast mode duty cycle using the I2C_FastModeDutyCycleConfig() + function. + (++) Enable the PEC Calculation using I2C_CalculatePEC() function. + (++) For SMBus Mode: + (+++) Enable the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) using I2C_ARPCmd() function. + (+++) Configure the SMBusAlert pin using I2C_SMBusAlertConfig() function. + (#) Enable the NVIC and the corresponding interrupt using the function + I2C_ITConfig() if you need to use interrupt mode. + (#) When using the DMA mode + (++) Configure the DMA using DMA_Init() function. + (++) Active the needed channel Request using I2C_DMACmd() or + I2C_DMALastTransferCmd() function. + (#) Enable the I2C using the I2C_Cmd() function. + (#) Enable the DMA using the DMA_Cmd() function when using DMA mode in the + transfers. + @endverbatim + ****************************************************************************** + * @attention + * + * <h2><center>© COPYRIGHT 2012 STMicroelectronics</center></h2> + * + * Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License"); + * You may not use this file except in compliance with the License. + * You may obtain a copy of the License at: + * + * http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2 + * + * Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software + * distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS, + * WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. + * See the License for the specific language governing permissions and + * limitations under the License. + * + ****************************************************************************** + */ + +/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#include "stm32l1xx_i2c.h" +#include "stm32l1xx_rcc.h" + + +/** @addtogroup STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver + * @{ + */ + +/** @defgroup I2C + * @brief I2C driver modules + * @{ + */ + +/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +#define CR1_CLEAR_MASK ((uint16_t)0xFBF5) /*<! I2C registers Masks */ +#define FLAG_MASK ((uint32_t)0x00FFFFFF) /*<! I2C FLAG mask */ +#define ITEN_MASK ((uint32_t)0x07000000) /*<! I2C Interrupt Enable mask */ + +/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/ + +/** @defgroup I2C_Private_Functions + * @{ + */ + +/** @defgroup I2C_Group1 Initialization and Configuration functions + * @brief Initialization and Configuration functions + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### Initialization and Configuration functions ##### + =============================================================================== + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Deinitializes the I2Cx peripheral registers to their default reset values. + * @param I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral. + * @retval None + */ +void I2C_DeInit(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx)); + + if (I2Cx == I2C1) + { + /* Enable I2C1 reset state */ + RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_I2C1, ENABLE); + /* Release I2C1 from reset state */ + RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_I2C1, DISABLE); + } + else + { + /* Enable I2C2 reset state */ + RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_I2C2, ENABLE); + /* Release I2C2 from reset state */ + RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_I2C2, DISABLE); + } +} + +/** + * @brief Initializes the I2Cx peripheral according to the specified + * parameters in the I2C_InitStruct. + * @note To use the I2C at 400 KHz (in fast mode), the PCLK1 frequency + * (I2C peripheral input clock) must be a multiple of 10 MHz. + * @param I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral. + * @param I2C_InitStruct: pointer to a I2C_InitTypeDef structure that + * contains the configuration information for the specified I2C peripheral. + * @retval None + */ +void I2C_Init(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, I2C_InitTypeDef* I2C_InitStruct) +{ + uint16_t tmpreg = 0, freqrange = 0; + uint16_t result = 0x04; + uint32_t pclk1 = 8000000; + RCC_ClocksTypeDef rcc_clocks; + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx)); + assert_param(IS_I2C_CLOCK_SPEED(I2C_InitStruct->I2C_ClockSpeed)); + assert_param(IS_I2C_MODE(I2C_InitStruct->I2C_Mode)); + assert_param(IS_I2C_DUTY_CYCLE(I2C_InitStruct->I2C_DutyCycle)); + assert_param(IS_I2C_OWN_ADDRESS1(I2C_InitStruct->I2C_OwnAddress1)); + assert_param(IS_I2C_ACK_STATE(I2C_InitStruct->I2C_Ack)); + assert_param(IS_I2C_ACKNOWLEDGE_ADDRESS(I2C_InitStruct->I2C_AcknowledgedAddress)); + +/*---------------------------- I2Cx CR2 Configuration ------------------------*/ + /* Get the I2Cx CR2 value */ + tmpreg = I2Cx->CR2; + /* Clear frequency FREQ[5:0] bits */ + tmpreg &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)I2C_CR2_FREQ); + /* Get pclk1 frequency value */ + RCC_GetClocksFreq(&rcc_clocks); + pclk1 = rcc_clocks.PCLK1_Frequency; + /* Set frequency bits depending on pclk1 value */ + freqrange = (uint16_t)(pclk1 / 1000000); + tmpreg |= freqrange; + /* Write to I2Cx CR2 */ + I2Cx->CR2 = tmpreg; + +/*---------------------------- I2Cx CCR Configuration ------------------------*/ + /* Disable the selected I2C peripheral to configure TRISE */ + I2Cx->CR1 &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)I2C_CR1_PE); + /* Reset tmpreg value */ + /* Clear F/S, DUTY and CCR[11:0] bits */ + tmpreg = 0; + + /* Configure speed in standard mode */ + if (I2C_InitStruct->I2C_ClockSpeed <= 100000) + { + /* Standard mode speed calculate */ + result = (uint16_t)(pclk1 / (I2C_InitStruct->I2C_ClockSpeed << 1)); + /* Test if CCR value is under 0x4*/ + if (result < 0x04) + { + /* Set minimum allowed value */ + result = 0x04; + } + /* Set speed value for standard mode */ + tmpreg |= result; + /* Set Maximum Rise Time for standard mode */ + I2Cx->TRISE = freqrange + 1; + } + /* Configure speed in fast mode */ + /* To use the I2C at 400 KHz (in fast mode), the PCLK1 frequency (I2C peripheral + input clock) must be a multiple of 10 MHz */ + else /*(I2C_InitStruct->I2C_ClockSpeed <= 400000)*/ + { + if (I2C_InitStruct->I2C_DutyCycle == I2C_DutyCycle_2) + { + /* Fast mode speed calculate: Tlow/Thigh = 2 */ + result = (uint16_t)(pclk1 / (I2C_InitStruct->I2C_ClockSpeed * 3)); + } + else /*I2C_InitStruct->I2C_DutyCycle == I2C_DutyCycle_16_9*/ + { + /* Fast mode speed calculate: Tlow/Thigh = 16/9 */ + result = (uint16_t)(pclk1 / (I2C_InitStruct->I2C_ClockSpeed * 25)); + /* Set DUTY bit */ + result |= I2C_DutyCycle_16_9; + } + + /* Test if CCR value is under 0x1*/ + if ((result & I2C_CCR_CCR) == 0) + { + /* Set minimum allowed value */ + result |= (uint16_t)0x0001; + } + /* Set speed value and set F/S bit for fast mode */ + tmpreg |= (uint16_t)(result | I2C_CCR_FS); + /* Set Maximum Rise Time for fast mode */ + I2Cx->TRISE = (uint16_t)(((freqrange * (uint16_t)300) / (uint16_t)1000) + (uint16_t)1); + } + + /* Write to I2Cx CCR */ + I2Cx->CCR = tmpreg; + /* Enable the selected I2C peripheral */ + I2Cx->CR1 |= I2C_CR1_PE; + +/*---------------------------- I2Cx CR1 Configuration ------------------------*/ + /* Get the I2Cx CR1 value */ + tmpreg = I2Cx->CR1; + /* Clear ACK, SMBTYPE and SMBUS bits */ + tmpreg &= CR1_CLEAR_MASK; + /* Configure I2Cx: mode and acknowledgement */ + /* Set SMBTYPE and SMBUS bits according to I2C_Mode value */ + /* Set ACK bit according to I2C_Ack value */ + tmpreg |= (uint16_t)((uint32_t)I2C_InitStruct->I2C_Mode | I2C_InitStruct->I2C_Ack); + /* Write to I2Cx CR1 */ + I2Cx->CR1 = tmpreg; + +/*---------------------------- I2Cx OAR1 Configuration -----------------------*/ + /* Set I2Cx Own Address1 and acknowledged address */ + I2Cx->OAR1 = (I2C_InitStruct->I2C_AcknowledgedAddress | I2C_InitStruct->I2C_OwnAddress1); +} + +/** + * @brief Fills each I2C_InitStruct member with its default value. + * @param I2C_InitStruct: pointer to an I2C_InitTypeDef structure which will be initialized. + * @retval None + */ +void I2C_StructInit(I2C_InitTypeDef* I2C_InitStruct) +{ +/*---------------- Reset I2C init structure parameters values ----------------*/ + /* initialize the I2C_ClockSpeed member */ + I2C_InitStruct->I2C_ClockSpeed = 5000; + /* Initialize the I2C_Mode member */ + I2C_InitStruct->I2C_Mode = I2C_Mode_I2C; + /* Initialize the I2C_DutyCycle member */ + I2C_InitStruct->I2C_DutyCycle = I2C_DutyCycle_2; + /* Initialize the I2C_OwnAddress1 member */ + I2C_InitStruct->I2C_OwnAddress1 = 0; + /* Initialize the I2C_Ack member */ + I2C_InitStruct->I2C_Ack = I2C_Ack_Disable; + /* Initialize the I2C_AcknowledgedAddress member */ + I2C_InitStruct->I2C_AcknowledgedAddress = I2C_AcknowledgedAddress_7bit; +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the specified I2C peripheral. + * @param I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral. + * @param NewState: new state of the I2Cx peripheral. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void I2C_Cmd(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the selected I2C peripheral */ + I2Cx->CR1 |= I2C_CR1_PE; + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected I2C peripheral */ + I2Cx->CR1 &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)I2C_CR1_PE); + } +} + +/** + * @brief Generates I2Cx communication START condition. + * @param I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral. + * @param NewState: new state of the I2C START condition generation. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None. + */ +void I2C_GenerateSTART(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Generate a START condition */ + I2Cx->CR1 |= I2C_CR1_START; + } + else + { + /* Disable the START condition generation */ + I2Cx->CR1 &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)I2C_CR1_START); + } +} + +/** + * @brief Generates I2Cx communication STOP condition. + * @param I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral. + * @param NewState: new state of the I2C STOP condition generation. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None. + */ +void I2C_GenerateSTOP(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Generate a STOP condition */ + I2Cx->CR1 |= I2C_CR1_STOP; + } + else + { + /* Disable the STOP condition generation */ + I2Cx->CR1 &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)I2C_CR1_STOP); + } +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the specified I2C acknowledge feature. + * @param I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral. + * @param NewState: new state of the I2C Acknowledgement. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None. + */ +void I2C_AcknowledgeConfig(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the acknowledgement */ + I2Cx->CR1 |= I2C_CR1_ACK; + } + else + { + /* Disable the acknowledgement */ + I2Cx->CR1 &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)I2C_CR1_ACK); + } +} + +/** + * @brief Configures the specified I2C own address2. + * @param I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral. + * @param Address: specifies the 7bit I2C own address2. + * @retval None. + */ +void I2C_OwnAddress2Config(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, uint8_t Address) +{ + uint16_t tmpreg = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx)); + + /* Get the old register value */ + tmpreg = I2Cx->OAR2; + + /* Reset I2Cx Own address2 bit [7:1] */ + tmpreg &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)I2C_OAR2_ADD2); + + /* Set I2Cx Own address2 */ + tmpreg |= (uint16_t)((uint16_t)Address & (uint16_t)0x00FE); + + /* Store the new register value */ + I2Cx->OAR2 = tmpreg; +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the specified I2C dual addressing mode. + * @param I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral. + * @param NewState: new state of the I2C dual addressing mode. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void I2C_DualAddressCmd(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable dual addressing mode */ + I2Cx->OAR2 |= I2C_OAR2_ENDUAL; + } + else + { + /* Disable dual addressing mode */ + I2Cx->OAR2 &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)I2C_OAR2_ENDUAL); + } +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the specified I2C general call feature. + * @param I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral. + * @param NewState: new state of the I2C General call. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void I2C_GeneralCallCmd(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable generall call */ + I2Cx->CR1 |= I2C_CR1_ENGC; + } + else + { + /* Disable generall call */ + I2Cx->CR1 &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)I2C_CR1_ENGC); + } +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the specified I2C software reset. + * @param I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral. + * @param NewState: new state of the I2C software reset. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void I2C_SoftwareResetCmd(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Peripheral under reset */ + I2Cx->CR1 |= I2C_CR1_SWRST; + } + else + { + /* Peripheral not under reset */ + I2Cx->CR1 &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)I2C_CR1_SWRST); + } +} + +/** + * @brief Drives the SMBusAlert pin high or low for the specified I2C. + * @param I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral. + * @param I2C_SMBusAlert: specifies SMBAlert pin level. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg I2C_SMBusAlert_Low: SMBAlert pin driven low + * @arg I2C_SMBusAlert_High: SMBAlert pin driven high + * @retval None + */ +void I2C_SMBusAlertConfig(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, uint16_t I2C_SMBusAlert) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx)); + assert_param(IS_I2C_SMBUS_ALERT(I2C_SMBusAlert)); + if (I2C_SMBusAlert == I2C_SMBusAlert_Low) + { + /* Drive the SMBusAlert pin Low */ + I2Cx->CR1 |= I2C_SMBusAlert_Low; + } + else + { + /* Drive the SMBusAlert pin High */ + I2Cx->CR1 &= I2C_SMBusAlert_High; + } +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the specified I2C ARP. + * @param I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral. + * @param NewState: new state of the I2Cx ARP. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void I2C_ARPCmd(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the selected I2C ARP */ + I2Cx->CR1 |= I2C_CR1_ENARP; + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected I2C ARP */ + I2Cx->CR1 &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)I2C_CR1_ENARP); + } +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the specified I2C Clock stretching. + * @param I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral. + * @param NewState: new state of the I2Cx Clock stretching. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void I2C_StretchClockCmd(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + if (NewState == DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the selected I2C Clock stretching */ + I2Cx->CR1 |= I2C_CR1_NOSTRETCH; + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected I2C Clock stretching */ + I2Cx->CR1 &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)I2C_CR1_NOSTRETCH); + } +} + +/** + * @brief Selects the specified I2C fast mode duty cycle. + * @param I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral. + * @param I2C_DutyCycle: specifies the fast mode duty cycle. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg I2C_DutyCycle_2: I2C fast mode Tlow/Thigh = 2 + * @arg I2C_DutyCycle_16_9: I2C fast mode Tlow/Thigh = 16/9 + * @retval None + */ +void I2C_FastModeDutyCycleConfig(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, uint16_t I2C_DutyCycle) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx)); + assert_param(IS_I2C_DUTY_CYCLE(I2C_DutyCycle)); + if (I2C_DutyCycle != I2C_DutyCycle_16_9) + { + /* I2C fast mode Tlow/Thigh=2 */ + I2Cx->CCR &= I2C_DutyCycle_2; + } + else + { + /* I2C fast mode Tlow/Thigh=16/9 */ + I2Cx->CCR |= I2C_DutyCycle_16_9; + } +} + +/** + * @brief Transmits the address byte to select the slave device. + * @param I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral. + * @param Address: specifies the slave address which will be transmitted. + * @param I2C_Direction: specifies whether the I2C device will be a + * Transmitter or a Receiver. This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg I2C_Direction_Transmitter: Transmitter mode + * @arg I2C_Direction_Receiver: Receiver mode + * @retval None. + */ +void I2C_Send7bitAddress(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, uint8_t Address, uint8_t I2C_Direction) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx)); + assert_param(IS_I2C_DIRECTION(I2C_Direction)); + /* Test on the direction to set/reset the read/write bit */ + if (I2C_Direction != I2C_Direction_Transmitter) + { + /* Set the address bit0 for read */ + Address |= I2C_OAR1_ADD0; + } + else + { + /* Reset the address bit0 for write */ + Address &= (uint8_t)~((uint8_t)I2C_OAR1_ADD0); + } + /* Send the address */ + I2Cx->DR = Address; +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup I2C_Group2 Data transfers functions + * @brief Data transfers functions + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### Data transfers functions ##### + =============================================================================== + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Sends a data byte through the I2Cx peripheral. + * @param I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral. + * @param Data: Byte to be transmitted. + * @retval None + */ +void I2C_SendData(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, uint8_t Data) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx)); + /* Write in the DR register the data to be sent */ + I2Cx->DR = Data; +} + +/** + * @brief Returns the most recent received data by the I2Cx peripheral. + * @param I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral. + * @retval The value of the received data. + */ +uint8_t I2C_ReceiveData(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx)); + /* Return the data in the DR register */ + return (uint8_t)I2Cx->DR; +} + +/** + * @brief Selects the specified I2C NACK position in master receiver mode. + * This function is useful in I2C Master Receiver mode when the number + * of data to be received is equal to 2. In this case, this function + * should be called (with parameter I2C_NACKPosition_Next) before data + * reception starts,as described in the 2-byte reception procedure + * recommended in Reference Manual in Section: Master receiver. + * @param I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral. + * @param I2C_NACKPosition: specifies the NACK position. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg I2C_NACKPosition_Next: indicates that the next byte will be the last + * received byte. + * @arg I2C_NACKPosition_Current: indicates that current byte is the last + * received byte. + * @note This function configures the same bit (POS) as I2C_PECPositionConfig() + * but is intended to be used in I2C mode while I2C_PECPositionConfig() + * is intended to used in SMBUS mode. + * + * @retval None + */ +void I2C_NACKPositionConfig(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, uint16_t I2C_NACKPosition) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx)); + assert_param(IS_I2C_NACK_POSITION(I2C_NACKPosition)); + + /* Check the input parameter */ + if (I2C_NACKPosition == I2C_NACKPosition_Next) + { + /* Next byte in shift register is the last received byte */ + I2Cx->CR1 |= I2C_NACKPosition_Next; + } + else + { + /* Current byte in shift register is the last received byte */ + I2Cx->CR1 &= I2C_NACKPosition_Current; + } +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup I2C_Group3 PEC management functions + * @brief PEC management functions + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### PEC management functions ##### + =============================================================================== + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the specified I2C PEC transfer. + * @param I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral. + * @param NewState: new state of the I2C PEC transmission. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void I2C_TransmitPEC(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the selected I2C PEC transmission */ + I2Cx->CR1 |= I2C_CR1_PEC; + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected I2C PEC transmission */ + I2Cx->CR1 &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)I2C_CR1_PEC); + } +} + +/** + * @brief Selects the specified I2C PEC position. + * @param I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral. + * @param I2C_PECPosition: specifies the PEC position. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg I2C_PECPosition_Next: indicates that the next byte is PEC + * @arg I2C_PECPosition_Current: indicates that current byte is PEC + * @note This function configures the same bit (POS) as I2C_NACKPositionConfig() + * but is intended to be used in SMBUS mode while I2C_NACKPositionConfig() + * is intended to used in I2C mode. + * @retval None + */ +void I2C_PECPositionConfig(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, uint16_t I2C_PECPosition) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx)); + assert_param(IS_I2C_PEC_POSITION(I2C_PECPosition)); + if (I2C_PECPosition == I2C_PECPosition_Next) + { + /* Next byte in shift register is PEC */ + I2Cx->CR1 |= I2C_PECPosition_Next; + } + else + { + /* Current byte in shift register is PEC */ + I2Cx->CR1 &= I2C_PECPosition_Current; + } +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the PEC value calculation of the transferred bytes. + * @param I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral. + * @param NewState: new state of the I2Cx PEC value calculation. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void I2C_CalculatePEC(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the selected I2C PEC calculation */ + I2Cx->CR1 |= I2C_CR1_ENPEC; + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected I2C PEC calculation */ + I2Cx->CR1 &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)I2C_CR1_ENPEC); + } +} + +/** + * @brief Returns the PEC value for the specified I2C. + * @param I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral. + * @retval The PEC value. + */ +uint8_t I2C_GetPEC(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx)); + /* Return the selected I2C PEC value */ + return ((I2Cx->SR2) >> 8); +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup I2C_Group4 DMA transfers management functions + * @brief DMA transfers management functions + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### DMA transfers management functions ##### + =============================================================================== + [..] This section provides functions allowing to configure the I2C DMA channels + requests. +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the specified I2C DMA requests. + * @param I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral. + * @param NewState: new state of the I2C DMA transfer. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void I2C_DMACmd(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the selected I2C DMA requests */ + I2Cx->CR2 |= I2C_CR2_DMAEN; + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected I2C DMA requests */ + I2Cx->CR2 &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)I2C_CR2_DMAEN); + } +} + +/** + * @brief Specifies that the next DMA transfer is the last one. + * @param I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral. + * @param NewState: new state of the I2C DMA last transfer. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void I2C_DMALastTransferCmd(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Next DMA transfer is the last transfer */ + I2Cx->CR2 |= I2C_CR2_LAST; + } + else + { + /* Next DMA transfer is not the last transfer */ + I2Cx->CR2 &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)I2C_CR2_LAST); + } +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup I2C_Group5 Interrupts events and flags management functions + * @brief Interrupts, events and flags management functions + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### Interrupts, events and flags management functions ##### + =============================================================================== + [..] This section provides functions allowing to configure the I2C Interrupts + sources and check or clear the flags or pending bits status. + The user should identify which mode will be used in his application to manage + the communication: Polling mode, Interrupt mode or DMA mode. + + + ##### I2C State Monitoring Functions ##### + =============================================================================== + [..]This I2C driver provides three different ways for I2C state monitoring + depending on the application requirements and constraints: + + + ***. Basic state monitoring (Using I2C_CheckEvent() function) *** + ----------------------------------------------------------------- + [..]It compares the status registers (SR1 and SR2) content to a given event + (can be the combination of one or more flags). + It returns SUCCESS if the current status includes the given flags + and returns ERROR if one or more flags are missing in the current status. + + (+) When to use + (++) This function is suitable for most applications as well as for + startup activity since the events are fully described in the product + reference manual (RM0038). + (++) It is also suitable for users who need to define their own events. + (+) Limitations + (++) If an error occurs (ie. error flags are set besides to the monitored + flags), the I2C_CheckEvent() function may return SUCCESS despite + the communication hold or corrupted real state. + In this case, it is advised to use error interrupts to monitor + the error events and handle them in the interrupt IRQ handler. + -@@- For error management, it is advised to use the following functions: + (+@@) I2C_ITConfig() to configure and enable the error interrupts + (I2C_IT_ERR). + (+@@) I2Cx_ER_IRQHandler() which is called when the error interrupt occurs. + Where x is the peripheral instance (I2C1, I2C2 ...). + (+@@) I2C_GetFlagStatus() or I2C_GetITStatus() to be called into the + I2Cx_ER_IRQHandler() function in order to determine which error occurred. + (+@@) I2C_ClearFlag() or I2C_ClearITPendingBit() and/or I2C_SoftwareResetCmd() + and/or I2C_GenerateStop() in order to clear the error flag and source + and return to correct communication status. + + *** Advanced state monitoring (Using the function I2C_GetLastEvent()) *** + ------------------------------------------------------------------------- + [..] Using the function I2C_GetLastEvent() which returns the image of both status + registers in a single word (uint32_t) (Status Register 2 value is shifted left + by 16 bits and concatenated to Status Register 1). + + (+) When to use + (++) This function is suitable for the same applications above but it + allows to overcome the mentioned limitation of I2C_GetFlagStatus() + function. + (++) The returned value could be compared to events already defined in + the library (stm32l1xx_i2c.h) or to custom values defined by user. + This function is suitable when multiple flags are monitored at the + same time. + (++) At the opposite of I2C_CheckEvent() function, this function allows + user to choose when an event is accepted (when all events flags are + set and no other flags are set or just when the needed flags are set + like I2C_CheckEvent() function. + + (+) Limitations + (++) User may need to define his own events. + (++) Same remark concerning the error management is applicable for this + function if user decides to check only regular communication flags + (and ignores error flags). + + + *** Flag-based state monitoring (Using the function I2C_GetFlagStatus()) *** + ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + [..] Using the function I2C_GetFlagStatus() which simply returns the status of + one single flag (ie. I2C_FLAG_RXNE ...). + (+) When to use + (++) This function could be used for specific applications or in debug + phase. + (++) It is suitable when only one flag checking is needed (most I2C + events are monitored through multiple flags). + (+) Limitations: + (++) When calling this function, the Status register is accessed. + Some flags are cleared when the status register is accessed. + So checking the status of one Flag, may clear other ones. + (++) Function may need to be called twice or more in order to monitor + one single event. + + [..] For detailed description of Events, please refer to section I2C_Events in + stm32l1xx_i2c.h file. + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Reads the specified I2C register and returns its value. + * @param I2C_Register: specifies the register to read. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg I2C_Register_CR1: CR1 register. + * @arg I2C_Register_CR2: CR2 register. + * @arg I2C_Register_OAR1: OAR1 register. + * @arg I2C_Register_OAR2: OAR2 register. + * @arg I2C_Register_DR: DR register. + * @arg I2C_Register_SR1: SR1 register. + * @arg I2C_Register_SR2: SR2 register. + * @arg I2C_Register_CCR: CCR register. + * @arg I2C_Register_TRISE: TRISE register. + * @retval The value of the read register. + */ +uint16_t I2C_ReadRegister(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, uint8_t I2C_Register) +{ + __IO uint32_t tmp = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx)); + assert_param(IS_I2C_REGISTER(I2C_Register)); + + tmp = (uint32_t) I2Cx; + tmp += I2C_Register; + + /* Return the selected register value */ + return (*(__IO uint16_t *) tmp); +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the specified I2C interrupts. + * @param I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral. + * @param I2C_IT: specifies the I2C interrupts sources to be enabled or disabled. + * This parameter can be any combination of the following values: + * @arg I2C_IT_BUF: Buffer interrupt mask + * @arg I2C_IT_EVT: Event interrupt mask + * @arg I2C_IT_ERR: Error interrupt mask + * @param NewState: new state of the specified I2C interrupts. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void I2C_ITConfig(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, uint16_t I2C_IT, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + assert_param(IS_I2C_CONFIG_IT(I2C_IT)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the selected I2C interrupts */ + I2Cx->CR2 |= I2C_IT; + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected I2C interrupts */ + I2Cx->CR2 &= (uint16_t)~I2C_IT; + } +} + +/* + =============================================================================== + 1. Basic state monitoring + =============================================================================== + */ + +/** + * @brief Checks whether the last I2Cx Event is equal to the one passed + * as parameter. + * @param I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral. + * @param I2C_EVENT: specifies the event to be checked. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg I2C_EVENT_SLAVE_TRANSMITTER_ADDRESS_MATCHED: EV1 + * @arg I2C_EVENT_SLAVE_RECEIVER_ADDRESS_MATCHED: EV1 + * @arg I2C_EVENT_SLAVE_TRANSMITTER_SECONDADDRESS_MATCHED: EV1 + * @arg I2C_EVENT_SLAVE_RECEIVER_SECONDADDRESS_MATCHED: EV1 + * @arg I2C_EVENT_SLAVE_GENERALCALLADDRESS_MATCHED: EV1 + * @arg I2C_EVENT_SLAVE_BYTE_RECEIVED: EV2 + * @arg (I2C_EVENT_SLAVE_BYTE_RECEIVED | I2C_FLAG_DUALF): EV2 + * @arg (I2C_EVENT_SLAVE_BYTE_RECEIVED | I2C_FLAG_GENCALL): EV2 + * @arg I2C_EVENT_SLAVE_BYTE_TRANSMITTED: EV3 + * @arg (I2C_EVENT_SLAVE_BYTE_TRANSMITTED | I2C_FLAG_DUALF): EV3 + * @arg (I2C_EVENT_SLAVE_BYTE_TRANSMITTED | I2C_FLAG_GENCALL): EV3 + * @arg I2C_EVENT_SLAVE_ACK_FAILURE: EV3_2 + * @arg I2C_EVENT_SLAVE_STOP_DETECTED: EV4 + * @arg I2C_EVENT_MASTER_MODE_SELECT: EV5 + * @arg I2C_EVENT_MASTER_TRANSMITTER_MODE_SELECTED: EV6 + * @arg I2C_EVENT_MASTER_RECEIVER_MODE_SELECTED: EV6 + * @arg I2C_EVENT_MASTER_BYTE_RECEIVED: EV7 + * @arg I2C_EVENT_MASTER_BYTE_TRANSMITTING: EV8 + * @arg I2C_EVENT_MASTER_BYTE_TRANSMITTED: EV8_2 + * @arg I2C_EVENT_MASTER_MODE_ADDRESS10: EV9 + * @note For detailed description of Events, please refer to section + * I2C_Events in stm32l1xx_i2c.h file. + * @retval An ErrorStatus enumeration value: + * - SUCCESS: Last event is equal to the I2C_EVENT + * - ERROR: Last event is different from the I2C_EVENT + */ +ErrorStatus I2C_CheckEvent(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, uint32_t I2C_EVENT) +{ + uint32_t lastevent = 0; + uint32_t flag1 = 0, flag2 = 0; + ErrorStatus status = ERROR; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx)); + assert_param(IS_I2C_EVENT(I2C_EVENT)); + + /* Read the I2Cx status register */ + flag1 = I2Cx->SR1; + flag2 = I2Cx->SR2; + flag2 = flag2 << 16; + + /* Get the last event value from I2C status register */ + lastevent = (flag1 | flag2) & FLAG_MASK; + + /* Check whether the last event contains the I2C_EVENT */ + if ((lastevent & I2C_EVENT) == I2C_EVENT) + { + /* SUCCESS: last event is equal to I2C_EVENT */ + status = SUCCESS; + } + else + { + /* ERROR: last event is different from I2C_EVENT */ + status = ERROR; + } + /* Return status */ + return status; +} + +/* + =============================================================================== + 2. Advanced state monitoring + =============================================================================== + */ + +/** + * @brief Returns the last I2Cx Event. + * @param I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral. + * + * @note For detailed description of Events, please refer to section + * I2C_Events in stm32l1xx_i2c.h file. + * + * @retval The last event + */ +uint32_t I2C_GetLastEvent(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx) +{ + uint32_t lastevent = 0; + uint32_t flag1 = 0, flag2 = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx)); + + /* Read the I2Cx status register */ + flag1 = I2Cx->SR1; + flag2 = I2Cx->SR2; + flag2 = flag2 << 16; + + /* Get the last event value from I2C status register */ + lastevent = (flag1 | flag2) & FLAG_MASK; + + /* Return status */ + return lastevent; +} + +/* + =============================================================================== + 3. Flag-based state monitoring + =============================================================================== + */ + +/** + * @brief Checks whether the specified I2C flag is set or not. + * @param I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral. + * @param I2C_FLAG: specifies the flag to check. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg I2C_FLAG_DUALF: Dual flag (Slave mode) + * @arg I2C_FLAG_SMBHOST: SMBus host header (Slave mode) + * @arg I2C_FLAG_SMBDEFAULT: SMBus default header (Slave mode) + * @arg I2C_FLAG_GENCALL: General call header flag (Slave mode) + * @arg I2C_FLAG_TRA: Transmitter/Receiver flag + * @arg I2C_FLAG_BUSY: Bus busy flag + * @arg I2C_FLAG_MSL: Master/Slave flag + * @arg I2C_FLAG_SMBALERT: SMBus Alert flag + * @arg I2C_FLAG_TIMEOUT: Timeout or Tlow error flag + * @arg I2C_FLAG_PECERR: PEC error in reception flag + * @arg I2C_FLAG_OVR: Overrun/Underrun flag (Slave mode) + * @arg I2C_FLAG_AF: Acknowledge failure flag + * @arg I2C_FLAG_ARLO: Arbitration lost flag (Master mode) + * @arg I2C_FLAG_BERR: Bus error flag + * @arg I2C_FLAG_TXE: Data register empty flag (Transmitter) + * @arg I2C_FLAG_RXNE: Data register not empty (Receiver) flag + * @arg I2C_FLAG_STOPF: Stop detection flag (Slave mode) + * @arg I2C_FLAG_ADD10: 10-bit header sent flag (Master mode) + * @arg I2C_FLAG_BTF: Byte transfer finished flag + * @arg I2C_FLAG_ADDR: Address sent flag (Master mode) "ADSL" + * Address matched flag (Slave mode)"ENDAD" + * @arg I2C_FLAG_SB: Start bit flag (Master mode) + * @retval The new state of I2C_FLAG (SET or RESET). + */ +FlagStatus I2C_GetFlagStatus(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, uint32_t I2C_FLAG) +{ + FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET; + __IO uint32_t i2creg = 0, i2cxbase = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx)); + assert_param(IS_I2C_GET_FLAG(I2C_FLAG)); + + /* Get the I2Cx peripheral base address */ + i2cxbase = (uint32_t)I2Cx; + + /* Read flag register index */ + i2creg = I2C_FLAG >> 28; + + /* Get bit[23:0] of the flag */ + I2C_FLAG &= FLAG_MASK; + + if(i2creg != 0) + { + /* Get the I2Cx SR1 register address */ + i2cxbase += 0x14; + } + else + { + /* Flag in I2Cx SR2 Register */ + I2C_FLAG = (uint32_t)(I2C_FLAG >> 16); + /* Get the I2Cx SR2 register address */ + i2cxbase += 0x18; + } + + if(((*(__IO uint32_t *)i2cxbase) & I2C_FLAG) != (uint32_t)RESET) + { + /* I2C_FLAG is set */ + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + /* I2C_FLAG is reset */ + bitstatus = RESET; + } + + /* Return the I2C_FLAG status */ + return bitstatus; +} + +/** + * @brief Clears the I2Cx's pending flags. + * @param I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral. + * @param I2C_FLAG: specifies the flag to clear. + * This parameter can be any combination of the following values: + * @arg I2C_FLAG_SMBALERT: SMBus Alert flag + * @arg I2C_FLAG_TIMEOUT: Timeout or Tlow error flag + * @arg I2C_FLAG_PECERR: PEC error in reception flag + * @arg I2C_FLAG_OVR: Overrun/Underrun flag (Slave mode) + * @arg I2C_FLAG_AF: Acknowledge failure flag + * @arg I2C_FLAG_ARLO: Arbitration lost flag (Master mode) + * @arg I2C_FLAG_BERR: Bus error flag + * + + *@note STOPF (STOP detection) is cleared by software sequence: a read operation + * to I2C_SR1 register (I2C_GetFlagStatus()) followed by a write operation + * to I2C_CR1 register (I2C_Cmd() to re-enable the I2C peripheral). + *@note ADD10 (10-bit header sent) is cleared by software sequence: a read + * operation to I2C_SR1 (I2C_GetFlagStatus()) followed by writing the + * second byte of the address in DR register. + *@note BTF (Byte Transfer Finished) is cleared by software sequence: a read + * operation to I2C_SR1 register (I2C_GetFlagStatus()) followed by a + * read/write to I2C_DR register (I2C_SendData()). + *@note ADDR (Address sent) is cleared by software sequence: a read operation to + * I2C_SR1 register (I2C_GetFlagStatus()) followed by a read operation to + * I2C_SR2 register ((void)(I2Cx->SR2)). + *@note SB (Start Bit) is cleared software sequence: a read operation to I2C_SR1 + * register (I2C_GetFlagStatus()) followed by a write operation to I2C_DR + * register (I2C_SendData()). + * @retval None + */ +void I2C_ClearFlag(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, uint32_t I2C_FLAG) +{ + uint32_t flagpos = 0; + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx)); + assert_param(IS_I2C_CLEAR_FLAG(I2C_FLAG)); + /* Get the I2C flag position */ + flagpos = I2C_FLAG & FLAG_MASK; + /* Clear the selected I2C flag */ + I2Cx->SR1 = (uint16_t)~flagpos; +} + +/** + * @brief Checks whether the specified I2C interrupt has occurred or not. + * @param I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral. + * @param I2C_IT: specifies the interrupt source to check. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg I2C_IT_SMBALERT: SMBus Alert flag + * @arg I2C_IT_TIMEOUT: Timeout or Tlow error flag + * @arg I2C_IT_PECERR: PEC error in reception flag + * @arg I2C_IT_OVR: Overrun/Underrun flag (Slave mode) + * @arg I2C_IT_AF: Acknowledge failure flag + * @arg I2C_IT_ARLO: Arbitration lost flag (Master mode) + * @arg I2C_IT_BERR: Bus error flag + * @arg I2C_IT_TXE: Data register empty flag (Transmitter) + * @arg I2C_IT_RXNE: Data register not empty (Receiver) flag + * @arg I2C_IT_STOPF: Stop detection flag (Slave mode) + * @arg I2C_IT_ADD10: 10-bit header sent flag (Master mode) + * @arg I2C_IT_BTF: Byte transfer finished flag + * @arg I2C_IT_ADDR: Address sent flag (Master mode) "ADSL" + * Address matched flag (Slave mode)"ENDAD" + * @arg I2C_IT_SB: Start bit flag (Master mode) + * @retval The new state of I2C_IT (SET or RESET). + */ +ITStatus I2C_GetITStatus(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, uint32_t I2C_IT) +{ + ITStatus bitstatus = RESET; + uint32_t enablestatus = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx)); + assert_param(IS_I2C_GET_IT(I2C_IT)); + + /* Check if the interrupt source is enabled or not */ + enablestatus = (uint32_t)(((I2C_IT & ITEN_MASK) >> 16) & (I2Cx->CR2)) ; + + /* Get bit[23:0] of the flag */ + I2C_IT &= FLAG_MASK; + + /* Check the status of the specified I2C flag */ + if (((I2Cx->SR1 & I2C_IT) != (uint32_t)RESET) && enablestatus) + { + /* I2C_IT is set */ + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + /* I2C_IT is reset */ + bitstatus = RESET; + } + /* Return the I2C_IT status */ + return bitstatus; +} + +/** + * @brief Clears the I2Cx's interrupt pending bits. + * @param I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral. + * @param I2C_IT: specifies the interrupt pending bit to clear. + * This parameter can be any combination of the following values: + * @arg I2C_IT_SMBALERT: SMBus Alert interrupt + * @arg I2C_IT_TIMEOUT: Timeout or Tlow error interrupt + * @arg I2C_IT_PECERR: PEC error in reception interrupt + * @arg I2C_IT_OVR: Overrun/Underrun interrupt (Slave mode) + * @arg I2C_IT_AF: Acknowledge failure interrupt + * @arg I2C_IT_ARLO: Arbitration lost interrupt (Master mode) + * @arg I2C_IT_BERR: Bus error interrupt + * + + * @note STOPF (STOP detection) is cleared by software sequence: a read operation + * to I2C_SR1 register (I2C_GetITStatus()) followed by a write operation to + * I2C_CR1 register (I2C_Cmd() to re-enable the I2C peripheral). + * @note ADD10 (10-bit header sent) is cleared by software sequence: a read + * operation to I2C_SR1 (I2C_GetITStatus()) followed by writing the second + * byte of the address in I2C_DR register. + * @note BTF (Byte Transfer Finished) is cleared by software sequence: a read + * operation to I2C_SR1 register (I2C_GetITStatus()) followed by a + * read/write to I2C_DR register (I2C_SendData()). + * @note ADDR (Address sent) is cleared by software sequence: a read operation to + * I2C_SR1 register (I2C_GetITStatus()) followed by a read operation to + * I2C_SR2 register ((void)(I2Cx->SR2)). + * @note SB (Start Bit) is cleared by software sequence: a read operation to + * I2C_SR1 register (I2C_GetITStatus()) followed by a write operation to + * I2C_DR register (I2C_SendData()). + * @retval None + */ +void I2C_ClearITPendingBit(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, uint32_t I2C_IT) +{ + uint32_t flagpos = 0; + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx)); + assert_param(IS_I2C_CLEAR_IT(I2C_IT)); + /* Get the I2C flag position */ + flagpos = I2C_IT & FLAG_MASK; + /* Clear the selected I2C flag */ + I2Cx->SR1 = (uint16_t)~flagpos; +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/ + + + diff --git a/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32l1xx_iwdg.c b/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32l1xx_iwdg.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2769f2d --- /dev/null +++ b/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32l1xx_iwdg.c @@ -0,0 +1,266 @@ +/** + ****************************************************************************** + * @file stm32l1xx_iwdg.c + * @author MCD Application Team + * @version V1.1.1 + * @date 05-March-2012 + * @brief This file provides firmware functions to manage the following + * functionalities of the Independent watchdog (IWDG) peripheral: + * + Prescaler and Counter configuration + * + IWDG activation + * + Flag management + * + * @verbatim + * + ============================================================================== + ##### IWDG features ##### + ============================================================================== + [..] The IWDG can be started by either software or hardware (configurable + through option byte). + + [..] The IWDG is clocked by its own dedicated low-speed clock (LSI) and + thus stays active even if the main clock fails. + Once the IWDG is started, the LSI is forced ON and cannot be disabled + (LSI cannot be disabled too), and the counter starts counting down from + the reset value of 0xFFF. When it reaches the end of count value (0x000) + a system reset is generated. + The IWDG counter should be reloaded at regular intervals to prevent + an MCU reset. + + [..] The IWDG is implemented in the VDD voltage domain that is still functional + in STOP and STANDBY mode (IWDG reset can wake-up from STANDBY). + + [..] IWDGRST flag in RCC_CSR register can be used to inform when a IWDG + reset occurs. + + [..] Min-max timeout value @37KHz (LSI): ~108us / ~28.3s + The IWDG timeout may vary due to LSI frequency dispersion. STM32L1xx + devices provide the capability to measure the LSI frequency (LSI clock + connected internally to TIM10 CH1 input capture). The measured value + can be used to have an IWDG timeout with an acceptable accuracy. + For more information, please refer to the STM32L1xx Reference manual. + + ##### How to use this driver ##### + ============================================================================== + [..] + (#) Enable write access to IWDG_PR and IWDG_RLR registers using + IWDG_WriteAccessCmd(IWDG_WriteAccess_Enable) function. + (#) Configure the IWDG prescaler using IWDG_SetPrescaler() function. + + (#) Configure the IWDG counter value using IWDG_SetReload() function. + This value will be loaded in the IWDG counter each time the counter + is reloaded, then the IWDG will start counting down from this value. + + (#) Start the IWDG using IWDG_Enable() function, when the IWDG is used + in software mode (no need to enable the LSI, it will be enabled + by hardware). + + (#) Then the application program must reload the IWDG counter at regular + intervals during normal operation to prevent an MCU reset, using + IWDG_ReloadCounter() function. + + @endverbatim + * + ****************************************************************************** + * @attention + * + * <h2><center>© COPYRIGHT 2012 STMicroelectronics</center></h2> + * + * Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License"); + * You may not use this file except in compliance with the License. + * You may obtain a copy of the License at: + * + * http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2 + * + * Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software + * distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS, + * WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. + * See the License for the specific language governing permissions and + * limitations under the License. + * + ****************************************************************************** + */ + +/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#include "stm32l1xx_iwdg.h" + +/** @addtogroup STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver + * @{ + */ + +/** @defgroup IWDG + * @brief IWDG driver modules + * @{ + */ + +/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* ---------------------- IWDG registers bit mask ----------------------------*/ +/* KR register bit mask */ +#define KR_KEY_RELOAD ((uint16_t)0xAAAA) +#define KR_KEY_ENABLE ((uint16_t)0xCCCC) + +/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/ + +/** @defgroup IWDG_Private_Functions + * @{ + */ + +/** @defgroup IWDG_Group1 Prescaler and Counter configuration functions + * @brief Prescaler and Counter configuration functions + * +@verbatim + ============================================================================== + ##### Prescaler and Counter configuration functions ##### + ============================================================================== + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables write access to IWDG_PR and IWDG_RLR registers. + * @param IWDG_WriteAccess: new state of write access to IWDG_PR and IWDG_RLR registers. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg IWDG_WriteAccess_Enable: Enable write access to IWDG_PR and IWDG_RLR registers + * @arg IWDG_WriteAccess_Disable: Disable write access to IWDG_PR and IWDG_RLR registers + * @retval None + */ +void IWDG_WriteAccessCmd(uint16_t IWDG_WriteAccess) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_IWDG_WRITE_ACCESS(IWDG_WriteAccess)); + IWDG->KR = IWDG_WriteAccess; +} + +/** + * @brief Sets IWDG Prescaler value. + * @param IWDG_Prescaler: specifies the IWDG Prescaler value. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg IWDG_Prescaler_4: IWDG prescaler set to 4 + * @arg IWDG_Prescaler_8: IWDG prescaler set to 8 + * @arg IWDG_Prescaler_16: IWDG prescaler set to 16 + * @arg IWDG_Prescaler_32: IWDG prescaler set to 32 + * @arg IWDG_Prescaler_64: IWDG prescaler set to 64 + * @arg IWDG_Prescaler_128: IWDG prescaler set to 128 + * @arg IWDG_Prescaler_256: IWDG prescaler set to 256 + * @retval None + */ +void IWDG_SetPrescaler(uint8_t IWDG_Prescaler) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_IWDG_PRESCALER(IWDG_Prescaler)); + IWDG->PR = IWDG_Prescaler; +} + +/** + * @brief Sets IWDG Reload value. + * @param Reload: specifies the IWDG Reload value. + * This parameter must be a number between 0 and 0x0FFF. + * @retval None + */ +void IWDG_SetReload(uint16_t Reload) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_IWDG_RELOAD(Reload)); + IWDG->RLR = Reload; +} + +/** + * @brief Reloads IWDG counter with value defined in the reload register + * (write access to IWDG_PR and IWDG_RLR registers disabled). + * @param None + * @retval None + */ +void IWDG_ReloadCounter(void) +{ + IWDG->KR = KR_KEY_RELOAD; +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup IWDG_Group2 IWDG activation function + * @brief IWDG activation function + * +@verbatim + ============================================================================== + ##### IWDG activation function ##### + ============================================================================== + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Enables IWDG (write access to IWDG_PR and IWDG_RLR registers disabled). + * @param None. + * @retval None. + */ +void IWDG_Enable(void) +{ + IWDG->KR = KR_KEY_ENABLE; +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup IWDG_Group3 Flag management function + * @brief Flag management function + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### Flag management function ##### + =============================================================================== + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Checks whether the specified IWDG flag is set or not. + * @param IWDG_FLAG: specifies the flag to check. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg IWDG_FLAG_PVU: Prescaler Value Update on going + * @arg IWDG_FLAG_RVU: Reload Value Update on going + * @retval The new state of IWDG_FLAG (SET or RESET). + */ +FlagStatus IWDG_GetFlagStatus(uint16_t IWDG_FLAG) +{ + FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET; + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_IWDG_FLAG(IWDG_FLAG)); + if ((IWDG->SR & IWDG_FLAG) != (uint32_t)RESET) + { + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + bitstatus = RESET; + } + /* Return the flag status */ + return bitstatus; +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/ diff --git a/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32l1xx_lcd.c b/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32l1xx_lcd.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ab7702b --- /dev/null +++ b/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32l1xx_lcd.c @@ -0,0 +1,640 @@ +/** + ****************************************************************************** + * @file stm32l1xx_lcd.c + * @author MCD Application Team + * @version V1.1.1 + * @date 05-March-2012 + * @brief This file provides firmware functions to manage the following + * functionalities of the LCD controller (LCD) peripheral: + * + Initialization and configuration + * + LCD RAM memory write + * + Interrupts and flags management + * + * @verbatim + + =============================================================================== + ##### LCD Clock ##### + =============================================================================== + [..] LCDCLK is the same as RTCCLK. + [..] To configure the RTCCLK/LCDCLK, proceed as follows: + (+) Enable the Power Controller (PWR) APB1 interface clock using the + RCC_APB1PeriphClockCmd() function. + (+) Enable access to RTC domain using the PWR_RTCAccessCmd() function. + (+) Select the RTC clock source using the RCC_RTCCLKConfig() function. + + [..] The frequency generator allows you to achieve various LCD frame rates + starting from an LCD input clock frequency (LCDCLK) which can vary + from 32 kHz up to 1 MHz. + + ##### LCD and low power modes ##### + =============================================================================== + [..] The LCD still active during STOP mode. + + ##### How to use this driver ##### + =============================================================================== + [..] + (#) Enable LCD clock using + RCC_APB1PeriphClockCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_LCD, ENABLE) function. + (#) Configure the LCD prescaler, divider, duty, bias and voltage source + using LCD_Init() function. + (#) Optionally you can enable/configure: + (++) LCD High Drive using the LCD_HighDriveCmd() function. + (++) LCD COM/SEG Mux using the LCD_MuxSegmentCmd() function. + (++) LCD Pulse ON Duration using the LCD_PulseOnDurationConfig() function. + (++) LCD Dead Time using the LCD_DeadTimeConfig() function + (++) The LCD Blink mode and frequency using the LCD_BlinkConfig() function. + (++) The LCD Contrast using the LCD_ContrastConfig() function. + (#) Call the LCD_WaitForSynchro() function to wait for LCD_FCR register + synchronization. + (#) Call the LCD_Cmd() to enable the LCD controller. + (#) Wait until the LCD Controller status is enabled and the step-up + converter is ready using the LCD_GetFlagStatus() and + LCD_FLAG_ENS and LCD_FLAG_RDY flags. + (#) Write to the LCD RAM memory using the LCD_Write() function. + (#) Request an update display using the LCD_UpdateDisplayRequest() + function. + (#) Wait until the update display is finished by checking the UDD + flag status using the LCD_GetFlagStatus(LCD_FLAG_UDD). + + @endverbatim + + ****************************************************************************** + * @attention + * + * <h2><center>© COPYRIGHT 2012 STMicroelectronics</center></h2> + * + * Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License"); + * You may not use this file except in compliance with the License. + * You may obtain a copy of the License at: + * + * http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2 + * + * Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software + * distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS, + * WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. + * See the License for the specific language governing permissions and + * limitations under the License. + * + ****************************************************************************** + */ + +/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#include "stm32l1xx_lcd.h" +#include "stm32l1xx_rcc.h" + +/** @addtogroup STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver + * @{ + */ + +/** @defgroup LCD + * @brief LCD driver modules + * @{ + */ + +/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* ------------ LCD registers bit address in the alias region --------------- */ +#define LCD_OFFSET (LCD_BASE - PERIPH_BASE) + +/* --- CR Register ---*/ + +/* Alias word address of LCDEN bit */ +#define CR_OFFSET (LCD_OFFSET + 0x00) +#define LCDEN_BitNumber 0x00 +#define CR_LCDEN_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (CR_OFFSET * 32) + (LCDEN_BitNumber * 4)) + +/* Alias word address of MUX_SEG bit */ +#define MUX_SEG_BitNumber 0x07 +#define CR_MUX_SEG_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (CR_OFFSET * 32) + (MUX_SEG_BitNumber * 4)) + + +/* --- FCR Register ---*/ + +/* Alias word address of HD bit */ +#define FCR_OFFSET (LCD_OFFSET + 0x04) +#define HD_BitNumber 0x00 +#define FCR_HD_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (FCR_OFFSET * 32) + (HD_BitNumber * 4)) + +/* --- SR Register ---*/ + +/* Alias word address of UDR bit */ +#define SR_OFFSET (LCD_OFFSET + 0x08) +#define UDR_BitNumber 0x02 +#define SR_UDR_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (SR_OFFSET * 32) + (UDR_BitNumber * 4)) + +#define FCR_MASK ((uint32_t)0xFC03FFFF) /* LCD FCR Mask */ +#define CR_MASK ((uint32_t)0xFFFFFF81) /* LCD CR Mask */ +#define PON_MASK ((uint32_t)0xFFFFFF8F) /* LCD PON Mask */ +#define DEAD_MASK ((uint32_t)0xFFFFFC7F) /* LCD DEAD Mask */ +#define BLINK_MASK ((uint32_t)0xFFFC1FFF) /* LCD BLINK Mask */ +#define CONTRAST_MASK ((uint32_t)0xFFFFE3FF) /* LCD CONTRAST Mask */ + +/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/ + +/** @defgroup LCD_Private_Functions + * @{ + */ + +/** @defgroup LCD_Group1 Initialization and Configuration functions + * @brief Initialization and Configuration functions + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### Initialization and Configuration functions ##### + =============================================================================== + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Deinitializes the LCD peripheral registers to their default reset + * values. + * @param None + * @retval None + */ +void LCD_DeInit(void) +{ + /* Enable LCD reset state */ + RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_LCD, ENABLE); + /* Release LCD from reset state */ + RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_LCD, DISABLE); +} + +/** + * @brief Initializes the LCD peripheral according to the specified parameters + * in the LCD_InitStruct. + * @note This function can be used only when the LCD is disabled. + * @param LCD_InitStruct: pointer to a LCD_InitTypeDef structure that contains + * the configuration information for the specified LCD peripheral. + * @retval None + */ +void LCD_Init(LCD_InitTypeDef* LCD_InitStruct) +{ + /* Check function parameters */ + assert_param(IS_LCD_PRESCALER(LCD_InitStruct->LCD_Prescaler)); + assert_param(IS_LCD_DIVIDER(LCD_InitStruct->LCD_Divider)); + assert_param(IS_LCD_DUTY(LCD_InitStruct->LCD_Duty)); + assert_param(IS_LCD_BIAS(LCD_InitStruct->LCD_Bias)); + assert_param(IS_LCD_VOLTAGE_SOURCE(LCD_InitStruct->LCD_VoltageSource)); + + LCD->FCR &= (uint32_t)FCR_MASK; + LCD->FCR |= (uint32_t)(LCD_InitStruct->LCD_Prescaler | LCD_InitStruct->LCD_Divider); + + LCD_WaitForSynchro(); + + LCD->CR &= (uint32_t)CR_MASK; + LCD->CR |= (uint32_t)(LCD_InitStruct->LCD_Duty | LCD_InitStruct->LCD_Bias | \ + LCD_InitStruct->LCD_VoltageSource); + +} + +/** + * @brief Fills each LCD_InitStruct member with its default value. + * @param LCD_InitStruct: pointer to a LCD_InitTypeDef structure which will + * be initialized. + * @retval None + */ +void LCD_StructInit(LCD_InitTypeDef* LCD_InitStruct) +{ +/*--------------- Reset LCD init structure parameters values -----------------*/ + LCD_InitStruct->LCD_Prescaler = LCD_Prescaler_1; /*!< Initialize the LCD_Prescaler member */ + + LCD_InitStruct->LCD_Divider = LCD_Divider_16; /*!< Initialize the LCD_Divider member */ + + LCD_InitStruct->LCD_Duty = LCD_Duty_Static; /*!< Initialize the LCD_Duty member */ + + LCD_InitStruct->LCD_Bias = LCD_Bias_1_4; /*!< Initialize the LCD_Bias member */ + + LCD_InitStruct->LCD_VoltageSource = LCD_VoltageSource_Internal; /*!< Initialize the LCD_VoltageSource member */ +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the LCD Controller. + * @param NewState: new state of the LCD peripheral. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void LCD_Cmd(FunctionalState NewState) +{ + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + *(__IO uint32_t *) CR_LCDEN_BB = (uint32_t)NewState; +} + +/** + * @brief Waits until the LCD FCR register is synchronized in the LCDCLK domain. + * This function must be called after any write operation to LCD_FCR register. + * @param None + * @retval None + */ +void LCD_WaitForSynchro(void) +{ + /* Loop until FCRSF flag is set */ + while ((LCD->SR & LCD_FLAG_FCRSF) == (uint32_t)RESET) + { + } +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the low resistance divider. Displays with high + * internal resistance may need a longer drive time to achieve + * satisfactory contrast. This function is useful in this case if some + * additional power consumption can be tolerated. + * @note When this mode is enabled, the PulseOn Duration (PON) have to be + * programmed to 1/CK_PS (LCD_PulseOnDuration_1). + * @param NewState: new state of the low resistance divider. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void LCD_HighDriveCmd(FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + *(__IO uint32_t *) FCR_HD_BB = (uint32_t)NewState; +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the Mux Segment. + * @note This function can be used only when the LCD is disabled. + * @param NewState: new state of the Mux Segment. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void LCD_MuxSegmentCmd(FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + *(__IO uint32_t *) CR_MUX_SEG_BB = (uint32_t)NewState; +} + +/** + * @brief Configures the LCD pulses on duration. + * @param LCD_PulseOnDuration: specifies the LCD pulse on duration in terms of + * CK_PS (prescaled LCD clock period) pulses. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg LCD_PulseOnDuration_0: 0 pulse + * @arg LCD_PulseOnDuration_1: Pulse ON duration = 1/CK_PS + * @arg LCD_PulseOnDuration_2: Pulse ON duration = 2/CK_PS + * @arg LCD_PulseOnDuration_3: Pulse ON duration = 3/CK_PS + * @arg LCD_PulseOnDuration_4: Pulse ON duration = 4/CK_PS + * @arg LCD_PulseOnDuration_5: Pulse ON duration = 5/CK_PS + * @arg LCD_PulseOnDuration_6: Pulse ON duration = 6/CK_PS + * @arg LCD_PulseOnDuration_7: Pulse ON duration = 7/CK_PS + * @retval None + */ +void LCD_PulseOnDurationConfig(uint32_t LCD_PulseOnDuration) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_LCD_PULSE_ON_DURATION(LCD_PulseOnDuration)); + + LCD->FCR &= (uint32_t)PON_MASK; + LCD->FCR |= (uint32_t)(LCD_PulseOnDuration); +} + +/** + * @brief Configures the LCD dead time. + * @param LCD_DeadTime: specifies the LCD dead time. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg LCD_DeadTime_0: No dead Time + * @arg LCD_DeadTime_1: One Phase between different couple of Frame + * @arg LCD_DeadTime_2: Two Phase between different couple of Frame + * @arg LCD_DeadTime_3: Three Phase between different couple of Frame + * @arg LCD_DeadTime_4: Four Phase between different couple of Frame + * @arg LCD_DeadTime_5: Five Phase between different couple of Frame + * @arg LCD_DeadTime_6: Six Phase between different couple of Frame + * @arg LCD_DeadTime_7: Seven Phase between different couple of Frame + * @retval None + */ +void LCD_DeadTimeConfig(uint32_t LCD_DeadTime) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_LCD_DEAD_TIME(LCD_DeadTime)); + + LCD->FCR &= (uint32_t)DEAD_MASK; + LCD->FCR |= (uint32_t)(LCD_DeadTime); +} + +/** + * @brief Configures the LCD Blink mode and Blink frequency. + * @param LCD_BlinkMode: specifies the LCD blink mode. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg LCD_BlinkMode_Off: Blink disabled + * @arg LCD_BlinkMode_SEG0_COM0: Blink enabled on SEG[0], COM[0] (1 pixel) + * @arg LCD_BlinkMode_SEG0_AllCOM: Blink enabled on SEG[0], all COM (up to 8 + * pixels according to the programmed duty) + * @arg LCD_BlinkMode_AllSEG_AllCOM: Blink enabled on all SEG and all COM + * (all pixels) + * @param LCD_BlinkFrequency: specifies the LCD blink frequency. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg LCD_BlinkFrequency_Div8: The Blink frequency = fLcd/8 + * @arg LCD_BlinkFrequency_Div16: The Blink frequency = fLcd/16 + * @arg LCD_BlinkFrequency_Div32: The Blink frequency = fLcd/32 + * @arg LCD_BlinkFrequency_Div64: The Blink frequency = fLcd/64 + * @arg LCD_BlinkFrequency_Div128: The Blink frequency = fLcd/128 + * @arg LCD_BlinkFrequency_Div256: The Blink frequency = fLcd/256 + * @arg LCD_BlinkFrequency_Div512: The Blink frequency = fLcd/512 + * @arg LCD_BlinkFrequency_Div1024: The Blink frequency = fLcd/1024 + * @retval None + */ +void LCD_BlinkConfig(uint32_t LCD_BlinkMode, uint32_t LCD_BlinkFrequency) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_LCD_BLINK_MODE(LCD_BlinkMode)); + assert_param(IS_LCD_BLINK_FREQUENCY(LCD_BlinkFrequency)); + + LCD->FCR &= (uint32_t)BLINK_MASK; + LCD->FCR |= (uint32_t)(LCD_BlinkMode | LCD_BlinkFrequency); +} + +/** + * @brief Configures the LCD Contrast. + * @param LCD_Contrast: specifies the LCD Contrast. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg LCD_Contrast_Level_0: Maximum Voltage = 2.60V + * @arg LCD_Contrast_Level_1: Maximum Voltage = 2.73V + * @arg LCD_Contrast_Level_2: Maximum Voltage = 2.86V + * @arg LCD_Contrast_Level_3: Maximum Voltage = 2.99V + * @arg LCD_Contrast_Level_4: Maximum Voltage = 3.12V + * @arg LCD_Contrast_Level_5: Maximum Voltage = 3.25V + * @arg LCD_Contrast_Level_6: Maximum Voltage = 3.38V + * @arg LCD_Contrast_Level_7: Maximum Voltage = 3.51V + * @retval None + */ +void LCD_ContrastConfig(uint32_t LCD_Contrast) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_LCD_CONTRAST(LCD_Contrast)); + + LCD->FCR &= (uint32_t)CONTRAST_MASK; + LCD->FCR |= (uint32_t)(LCD_Contrast); +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup LCD_Group2 LCD RAM memory write functions + * @brief LCD RAM memory write functions + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### LCD RAM memory write functions ##### + =============================================================================== + [..] Using its double buffer memory the LCD controller ensures the coherency + of the displayed information without having to use interrupts to control + LCD_RAM modification. + + [..] The application software can access the first buffer level (LCD_RAM) through + the APB interface. Once it has modified the LCD_RAM, it sets the UDR flag + in the LCD_SR register using the LCD_UpdateDisplayRequest() function. + + [..] This UDR flag (update display request) requests the updated information + to be moved into the second buffer level (LCD_DISPLAY). + + [..] This operation is done synchronously with the frame (at the beginning of + the next frame), until the update is completed, the LCD_RAM is write + protected and the UDR flag stays high. + + [..] Once the update is completed another flag (UDD - Update Display Done) is + set and generates an interrupt if the UDDIE bit in the LCD_FCR register + is set. + + [..] The time it takes to update LCD_DISPLAY is, in the worst case, one odd + and one even frame. + + [..] The update will not occur (UDR = 1 and UDD = 0) until the display is + enabled (LCDEN = 1). + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Writes a word in the specific LCD RAM. + * @param LCD_RAMRegister: specifies the LCD Contrast. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg LCD_RAMRegister_0: LCD RAM Register 0 + * @arg LCD_RAMRegister_1: LCD RAM Register 1 + * @arg LCD_RAMRegister_2: LCD RAM Register 2 + * @arg LCD_RAMRegister_3: LCD RAM Register 3 + * @arg LCD_RAMRegister_4: LCD RAM Register 4 + * @arg LCD_RAMRegister_5: LCD RAM Register 5 + * @arg LCD_RAMRegister_6: LCD RAM Register 6 + * @arg LCD_RAMRegister_7: LCD RAM Register 7 + * @arg LCD_RAMRegister_8: LCD RAM Register 8 + * @arg LCD_RAMRegister_9: LCD RAM Register 9 + * @arg LCD_RAMRegister_10: LCD RAM Register 10 + * @arg LCD_RAMRegister_11: LCD RAM Register 11 + * @arg LCD_RAMRegister_12: LCD RAM Register 12 + * @arg LCD_RAMRegister_13: LCD RAM Register 13 + * @arg LCD_RAMRegister_14: LCD RAM Register 14 + * @arg LCD_RAMRegister_15: LCD RAM Register 15 + * @param LCD_Data: specifies LCD Data Value to be written. + * @retval None + */ +void LCD_Write(uint32_t LCD_RAMRegister, uint32_t LCD_Data) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_LCD_RAM_REGISTER(LCD_RAMRegister)); + + /* Copy data bytes to RAM register */ + LCD->RAM[LCD_RAMRegister] = (uint32_t)LCD_Data; +} + +/** + * @brief Enables the Update Display Request. + * @note Each time software modifies the LCD_RAM it must set the UDR bit to + * transfer the updated data to the second level buffer. + * The UDR bit stays set until the end of the update and during this + * time the LCD_RAM is write protected. + * @note When the display is disabled, the update is performed for all + * LCD_DISPLAY locations. + * When the display is enabled, the update is performed only for locations + * for which commons are active (depending on DUTY). For example if + * DUTY = 1/2, only the LCD_DISPLAY of COM0 and COM1 will be updated. + * @param None + * @retval None + */ +void LCD_UpdateDisplayRequest(void) +{ + *(__IO uint32_t *) SR_UDR_BB = (uint32_t)0x01; +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup LCD_Group3 Interrupts and flags management functions + * @brief Interrupts and flags management functions + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### Interrupts and flags management functions ##### + =============================================================================== + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the specified LCD interrupts. + * @param LCD_IT: specifies the LCD interrupts sources to be enabled or disabled. + * This parameter can be any combination of the following values: + * @arg LCD_IT_SOF: Start of Frame Interrupt + * @arg LCD_IT_UDD: Update Display Done Interrupt + * @param NewState: new state of the specified LCD interrupts. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void LCD_ITConfig(uint32_t LCD_IT, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_LCD_IT(LCD_IT)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + LCD->FCR |= LCD_IT; + } + else + { + LCD->FCR &= (uint32_t)~LCD_IT; + } +} + +/** + * @brief Checks whether the specified LCD flag is set or not. + * @param LCD_FLAG: specifies the flag to check. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg LCD_FLAG_ENS: LCD Enabled flag. It indicates the LCD controller status. + * @note The ENS bit is set immediately when the LCDEN bit in the LCD_CR + * goes from 0 to 1. On deactivation it reflects the real status of + * LCD so it becomes 0 at the end of the last displayed frame. + * @arg LCD_FLAG_SOF: Start of Frame flag. This flag is set by hardware at + * the beginning of a new frame, at the same time as the display data is + * updated. + * @arg LCD_FLAG_UDR: Update Display Request flag. + * @arg LCD_FLAG_UDD: Update Display Done flag. + * @arg LCD_FLAG_RDY: Step_up converter Ready flag. It indicates the status + * of the step-up converter. + * @arg LCD_FLAG_FCRSF: LCD Frame Control Register Synchronization Flag. + * This flag is set by hardware each time the LCD_FCR register is updated + * in the LCDCLK domain. + * @retval The new state of LCD_FLAG (SET or RESET). + */ +FlagStatus LCD_GetFlagStatus(uint32_t LCD_FLAG) +{ + FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_LCD_GET_FLAG(LCD_FLAG)); + + if ((LCD->SR & LCD_FLAG) != (uint32_t)RESET) + { + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + bitstatus = RESET; + } + return bitstatus; +} + +/** + * @brief Clears the LCD's pending flags. + * @param LCD_FLAG: specifies the flag to clear. + * This parameter can be any combination of the following values: + * @arg LCD_FLAG_SOF: Start of Frame Interrupt + * @arg LCD_FLAG_UDD: Update Display Done Interrupt + * @retval None + */ +void LCD_ClearFlag(uint32_t LCD_FLAG) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_LCD_CLEAR_FLAG(LCD_FLAG)); + + /* Clear the corresponding LCD flag */ + LCD->CLR = (uint32_t)LCD_FLAG; +} + +/** + * @brief Checks whether the specified RTC interrupt has occurred or not. + * @param LCD_IT: specifies the LCD interrupts sources to check. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg LCD_IT_SOF: Start of Frame Interrupt + * @arg LCD_IT_UDD: Update Display Done Interrupt. + * @note If the device is in STOP mode (PCLK not provided) UDD will not + * generate an interrupt even if UDDIE = 1. + * If the display is not enabled the UDD interrupt will never occur. + * @retval The new state of the LCD_IT (SET or RESET). + */ +ITStatus LCD_GetITStatus(uint32_t LCD_IT) +{ + ITStatus bitstatus = RESET; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_LCD_GET_IT(LCD_IT)); + + if ((LCD->SR & LCD_IT) != (uint16_t)RESET) + { + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + bitstatus = RESET; + } + + if (((LCD->FCR & LCD_IT) != (uint16_t)RESET) && (bitstatus != (uint32_t)RESET)) + { + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + bitstatus = RESET; + } + return bitstatus; +} + +/** + * @brief Clears the LCD's interrupt pending bits. + * @param LCD_IT: specifies the interrupt pending bit to clear. + * This parameter can be any combination of the following values: + * @arg LCD_IT_SOF: Start of Frame Interrupt + * @arg LCD_IT_UDD: Update Display Done Interrupt + * @retval None + */ +void LCD_ClearITPendingBit(uint32_t LCD_IT) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_LCD_IT(LCD_IT)); + + /* Clear the corresponding LCD pending bit */ + LCD->CLR = (uint32_t)LCD_IT; +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/ diff --git a/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32l1xx_opamp.c b/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32l1xx_opamp.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5483560 --- /dev/null +++ b/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32l1xx_opamp.c @@ -0,0 +1,557 @@ +/** + ****************************************************************************** + * @file stm32l1xx_opamp.c + * @author MCD Application Team + * @version V1.1.1 + * @date 05-March-2012 + * @brief This file provides firmware functions to manage the following + * functionalities of the operational amplifiers (opamp) peripheral: + * + Initialization and configuration + * + Calibration management + * + * @verbatim + ============================================================================== + ##### How to use this driver ##### + ============================================================================== + [..] The device integrates three independent rail-to-rail operational amplifiers + OPAMP1, OPAMP2 and OPAMP3: + (+) Internal connections to the ADC. + (+) Internal connections to the DAC. + (+) Internal connection to COMP1 (only OPAMP3). + (+) Internal connection for unity gain (voltage follower) configuration. + (+) Calibration capability. + (+) Selectable gain-bandwidth (2MHz in normal mode, 500KHz in low power mode). + [..] + (#) COMP AHB clock must be enabled to get write access + to OPAMP registers using + (#) RCC_APB1PeriphClockCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_COMP, ENABLE) + + (#) Configure the corresponding GPIO to OPAMPx INP, OPAMPx_INN (if used) + and OPAMPx_OUT in analog mode. + + (#) Configure (close/open) the OPAMP switches using OPAMP_SwitchCmd() + + (#) Enable the OPAMP peripheral using OPAMP_Cmd() + + -@- In order to use OPAMP outputs as ADC inputs, the opamps must be enabled + and the ADC must use the OPAMP output channel number: + (+@) OPAMP1 output is connected to ADC channel 3. + (+@) OPAMP2 output is connected to ADC channel 8. + (+@) OPAMP3 output is connected to ADC channel 13 (SW1 switch must be closed). + + * @endverbatim + * + ****************************************************************************** + * @attention + * + * <h2><center>© COPYRIGHT 2012 STMicroelectronics</center></h2> + * + * Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License"); + * You may not use this file except in compliance with the License. + * You may obtain a copy of the License at: + * + * http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2 + * + * Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software + * distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS, + * WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. + * See the License for the specific language governing permissions and + * limitations under the License. + * + ****************************************************************************** + */ + +/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#include "stm32l1xx_opamp.h" + + +/** @addtogroup STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver + * @{ + */ + +/** @defgroup OPAMP + * @brief OPAMP driver modules + * @{ + */ + +/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/ + +/** @defgroup OPAMP_Private_Functions + * @{ + */ + +/** @defgroup OPAMP_Group1 Initialization and configuration + * @brief Initialization and configuration + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### Initialization and configuration ##### + =============================================================================== + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Deinitialize the OPAMPs register to its default reset value. + * @note At startup, OTR and LPOTR registers are set to factory programmed values. + * @param None. + * @retval None. + */ +void OPAMP_DeInit(void) +{ + /*!< Set OPAMP_CSR register to reset value */ + OPAMP->CSR = 0x00010101; + /*!< Set OPAMP_OTR register to reset value */ + OPAMP->OTR = (uint32_t)(* (uint32_t*)FLASH_R_BASE + 0x00000038); + /*!< Set OPAMP_LPOTR register to reset value */ + OPAMP->LPOTR = (uint32_t)(* (uint32_t*)FLASH_R_BASE + 0x0000003C); +} + +/** + * @brief Close or Open the OPAMP switches. + * @param OPAMP_OPAMPxSwitchy: selects the OPAMPx switch. + * This parameter can be any combinations of the following values: + * @arg OPAMP_OPAMP1Switch3: used to connect internally OPAMP1 output to + * OPAMP1 negative input (internal follower) + * @arg OPAMP_OPAMP1Switch4: used to connect PA2 to OPAMP1 negative input + * @arg OPAMP_OPAMP1Switch5: used to connect PA1 to OPAMP1 positive input + * @arg OPAMP_OPAMP1Switch6: used to connect DAC_OUT1 to OPAMP1 positive input + * @arg OPAMP_OPAMP1SwitchANA: used to meet 1 nA input leakage + * @arg OPAMP_OPAMP2Switch3: used to connect internally OPAMP2 output to + * OPAMP2 negative input (internal follower) + * @arg OPAMP_OPAMP2Switch4: used to connect PA7 to OPAMP2 negative input + * @arg OPAMP_OPAMP2Switch5: used to connect PA6 to OPAMP2 positive input + * @arg OPAMP_OPAMP2Switch6: used to connect DAC_OUT1 to OPAMP2 positive input + * @arg OPAMP_OPAMP2Switch7: used to connect DAC_OUT2 to OPAMP2 positive input + * @arg OPAMP_OPAMP2SwitchANA: used to meet 1 nA input leakage + * @arg OPAMP_OPAMP3Switch3: used to connect internally OPAMP3 output to + * OPAMP3 negative input (internal follower) + * @arg OPAMP_OPAMP3Switch4: used to connect PC2 to OPAMP3 negative input + * @arg OPAMP_OPAMP3Switch5: used to connect PC1 to OPAMP3 positive input + * @arg OPAMP_OPAMP3Switch6: used to connect DAC_OUT1 to OPAMP3 positive input + * @arg OPAMP_OPAMP3SwitchANA: used to meet 1 nA input leakage on negative input + * + * @param NewState: New state of the OPAMP switch. + * This parameter can be: + * ENABLE to close the OPAMP switch + * or DISABLE to open the OPAMP switch + * @note OPAMP_OPAMP2Switch6 and OPAMP_OPAMP2Switch7 mustn't be closed together. + * @retval None + */ +void OPAMP_SwitchCmd(uint32_t OPAMP_OPAMPxSwitchy, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameter */ + assert_param(IS_OPAMP_SWITCH(OPAMP_OPAMPxSwitchy)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Close the selected switches */ + OPAMP->CSR |= (uint32_t) OPAMP_OPAMPxSwitchy; + } + else + { + /* Open the selected switches */ + OPAMP->CSR &= (~(uint32_t)OPAMP_OPAMPxSwitchy); + } +} + +/** + * @brief Enable or disable the OPAMP peripheral. + * @param OPAMP_Selection: the selected OPAMP. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg OPAMP_Selection_OPAMP1: OPAMP1 is selected + * @arg OPAMP_Selection_OPAMP2: OPAMP2 is selected + * @arg OPAMP_Selection_OPAMP3: OPAMP3 is selected + * @param NewState: new state of the selected OPAMP peripheral. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void OPAMP_Cmd(uint32_t OPAMP_Selection, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameter */ + assert_param(IS_OPAMP_ALL_PERIPH(OPAMP_Selection)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the selected OPAMP */ + OPAMP->CSR &= (~(uint32_t) OPAMP_Selection); + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected OPAMP */ + OPAMP->CSR |= (uint32_t) OPAMP_Selection; + } +} + +/** + * @brief Enable or disable the low power mode for OPAMP peripheral. + * @param OPAMP_Selection: the selected OPAMP. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg OPAMP_Selection_OPAMP1: OPAMP1 selected + * @arg OPAMP_Selection_OPAMP2: OPAMP2 selected + * @arg OPAMP_Selection_OPAMP3: OPAMP3 selected + * @param NewState: new low power state of the selected OPAMP peripheral. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void OPAMP_LowPowerCmd(uint32_t OPAMP_Selection, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameter */ + assert_param(IS_OPAMP_ALL_PERIPH(OPAMP_Selection)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Set the selected OPAMP in low power mode */ + OPAMP->CSR |= (uint32_t) (OPAMP_Selection << 7); + } + else + { + /* Disable the low power mode for the selected OPAMP */ + OPAMP->CSR &= (~(uint32_t) (OPAMP_Selection << 7)); + } +} + +/** + * @brief Select the OPAMP power range. + * @note The OPAMP power range selection must be performed while OPAMPs are powered down. + * @param OPAMP_Range: the selected OPAMP power range. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg OPAMP_PowerRange_Low: Low power range is selected (VDDA is lower than 2.4V). + * @arg OPAMP_PowerRange_High: High power range is selected (VDDA is higher than 2.4V). + * @retval None + */ +void OPAMP_PowerRangeSelect(uint32_t OPAMP_PowerRange) +{ + /* Check the parameter */ + assert_param(IS_OPAMP_RANGE(OPAMP_PowerRange)); + + /* Reset the OPAMP range bit */ + OPAMP->CSR &= (~(uint32_t) (OPAMP_CSR_AOP_RANGE)); + + /* Select the OPAMP power range */ + OPAMP->CSR |= OPAMP_PowerRange; +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup OPAMP_Group2 Calibration functions + * @brief Calibration functions + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### Calibration functions ##### + =============================================================================== + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Select the trimming mode. + * @param OffsetTrimming: the selected offset trimming mode. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg OffsetTrimming_Factory: factory trimming values are used for offset + * calibration. + * @arg OffsetTrimming_User: user trimming values are used for offset + * calibration. + * @note When OffsetTrimming_User is selected, use OPAMP_OffsetTrimConfig() + * function or OPAMP_OffsetTrimLowPowerConfig() function to adjust + * trimming value. + * @retval None + */ +void OPAMP_OffsetTrimmingModeSelect(uint32_t OPAMP_Trimming) +{ + /* Check the parameter */ + assert_param(IS_OPAMP_TRIMMING(OPAMP_Trimming)); + + /* Reset the OPAMP_OTR range bit */ + OPAMP->CSR &= (~(uint32_t) (OPAMP_OTR_OT_USER)); + + /* Select the OPAMP offset trimming */ + OPAMP->CSR |= OPAMP_Trimming; + +} + +/** + * @brief Configure the trimming value of OPAMPs in normal mode. + * @param OPAMP_Selection: the selected OPAMP. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg OPAMP_Selection_OPAMP1: OPAMP1 is selected to configure the trimming value. + * @arg OPAMP_Selection_OPAMP2: OPAMP2 is selected to configure the trimming value. + * @arg OPAMP_Selection_OPAMP3: OPAMP3 is selected to configure the trimming value. + * @param OPAMP_Input: the selected OPAMP input. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg OPAMP_Input_NMOS: NMOS input is selected to configure the trimming value. + * @arg OPAMP_Input_PMOS: PMOS input is selected to configure the trimming value. + * @param OPAMP_TrimValue: the trimming value. This parameter can be any value lower + * or equal to 0x0000001F. + * @retval None + */ +void OPAMP_OffsetTrimConfig(uint32_t OPAMP_Selection, uint32_t OPAMP_Input, uint32_t OPAMP_TrimValue) +{ + uint32_t tmpreg = 0; + + /* Check the parameter */ + assert_param(IS_OPAMP_ALL_PERIPH(OPAMP_Selection)); + assert_param(IS_OPAMP_INPUT(OPAMP_Input)); + assert_param(IS_OPAMP_TRIMMINGVALUE(OPAMP_TrimValue)); + + /* Get the OPAMP_OTR value */ + tmpreg = OPAMP->OTR; + + if(OPAMP_Selection == OPAMP_Selection_OPAMP1) + { + /* Reset the OPAMP inputs selection */ + tmpreg &= (uint32_t)~(OPAMP_CSR_OPA1CAL_L | OPAMP_CSR_OPA1CAL_H); + /* Select the OPAMP input */ + tmpreg |= OPAMP_Input; + + if(OPAMP_Input == OPAMP_Input_PMOS) + { + /* Reset the trimming value corresponding to OPAMP1 PMOS input */ + tmpreg &= (0xFFFFFFE0); + /* Set the new trimming value corresponding to OPAMP1 PMOS input */ + tmpreg |= (OPAMP_TrimValue); + } + else + { + /* Reset the trimming value corresponding to OPAMP1 NMOS input */ + tmpreg &= (0xFFFFFC1F); + /* Set the new trimming value corresponding to OPAMP1 NMOS input */ + tmpreg |= (OPAMP_TrimValue<<5); + } + } + else if (OPAMP_Selection == OPAMP_Selection_OPAMP2) + { + /* Reset the OPAMP inputs selection */ + tmpreg &= (uint32_t)~(OPAMP_CSR_OPA2CAL_L | OPAMP_CSR_OPA2CAL_H); + /* Select the OPAMP input */ + tmpreg |= (uint32_t)(OPAMP_Input<<8); + + if(OPAMP_Input == OPAMP_Input_PMOS) + { + /* Reset the trimming value corresponding to OPAMP2 PMOS input */ + tmpreg &= (0xFFFF83FF); + /* Set the new trimming value corresponding to OPAMP2 PMOS input */ + tmpreg |= (OPAMP_TrimValue<<10); + } + else + { + /* Reset the trimming value corresponding to OPAMP2 NMOS input */ + tmpreg &= (0xFFF07FFF); + /* Set the new trimming value corresponding to OPAMP2 NMOS input */ + tmpreg |= (OPAMP_TrimValue<<15); + } + } + else + { + /* Reset the OPAMP inputs selection */ + tmpreg &= (uint32_t)~(OPAMP_CSR_OPA3CAL_L | OPAMP_CSR_OPA3CAL_H); + /* Select the OPAMP input */ + tmpreg |= (uint32_t)(OPAMP_Input<<16); + + if(OPAMP_Input == OPAMP_Input_PMOS) + { + /* Reset the trimming value corresponding to OPAMP3 PMOS input */ + tmpreg &= (0xFE0FFFFF); + /* Set the new trimming value corresponding to OPAMP3 PMOS input */ + tmpreg |= (OPAMP_TrimValue<<20); + } + else + { + /* Reset the trimming value corresponding to OPAMP3 NMOS input */ + tmpreg &= (0xC1FFFFFF); + /* Set the new trimming value corresponding to OPAMP3 NMOS input */ + tmpreg |= (OPAMP_TrimValue<<25); + } + } + + /* Set the OPAMP_OTR register */ + OPAMP->OTR = tmpreg; +} + +/** + * @brief Configure the trimming value of OPAMPs in low power mode. + * @param OPAMP_Selection: the selected OPAMP. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg OPAMP_Selection_OPAMP1: OPAMP1 is selected to configure the trimming value. + * @arg OPAMP_Selection_OPAMP2: OPAMP2 is selected to configure the trimming value. + * @arg OPAMP_Selection_OPAMP3: OPAMP3 is selected to configure the trimming value. + * @param OPAMP_Input: the selected OPAMP input. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg OPAMP_Input_NMOS: NMOS input is selected to configure the trimming value. + * @arg OPAMP_Input_PMOS: PMOS input is selected to configure the trimming value. + * @param OPAMP_TrimValue: the trimming value. + * This parameter can be any value lower or equal to 0x0000001F. + * @retval None + */ +void OPAMP_OffsetTrimLowPowerConfig(uint32_t OPAMP_Selection, uint32_t OPAMP_Input, uint32_t OPAMP_TrimValue) +{ + uint32_t tmpreg = 0; + + /* Check the parameter */ + assert_param(IS_OPAMP_ALL_PERIPH(OPAMP_Selection)); + assert_param(IS_OPAMP_INPUT(OPAMP_Input)); + assert_param(IS_OPAMP_TRIMMINGVALUE(OPAMP_TrimValue)); + + /* Get the OPAMP_LPOTR value */ + tmpreg = OPAMP->LPOTR; + + if(OPAMP_Selection == OPAMP_Selection_OPAMP1) + { + /* Reset the OPAMP inputs selection */ + tmpreg &= (uint32_t)~(OPAMP_CSR_OPA1CAL_L | OPAMP_CSR_OPA1CAL_H); + /* Select the OPAMP input */ + tmpreg |= OPAMP_Input; + + if(OPAMP_Input == OPAMP_Input_PMOS) + { + /* Reset the trimming value corresponding to OPAMP1 PMOS input */ + tmpreg &= (0xFFFFFFE0); + /* Set the new trimming value corresponding to OPAMP1 PMOS input */ + tmpreg |= (OPAMP_TrimValue); + } + else + { + /* Reset the trimming value corresponding to OPAMP1 NMOS input */ + tmpreg &= (0xFFFFFC1F); + /* Set the new trimming value corresponding to OPAMP1 NMOS input */ + tmpreg |= (OPAMP_TrimValue<<5); + } + } + else if (OPAMP_Selection == OPAMP_Selection_OPAMP2) + { + /* Reset the OPAMP inputs selection */ + tmpreg &= (uint32_t)~(OPAMP_CSR_OPA2CAL_L | OPAMP_CSR_OPA2CAL_H); + /* Select the OPAMP input */ + tmpreg |= (uint32_t)(OPAMP_Input<<8); + + if(OPAMP_Input == OPAMP_Input_PMOS) + { + /* Reset the trimming value corresponding to OPAMP2 PMOS input */ + tmpreg &= (0xFFFF83FF); + /* Set the new trimming value corresponding to OPAMP2 PMOS input */ + tmpreg |= (OPAMP_TrimValue<<10); + } + else + { + /* Reset the trimming value corresponding to OPAMP2 NMOS input */ + tmpreg &= (0xFFF07FFF); + /* Set the new trimming value corresponding to OPAMP2 NMOS input */ + tmpreg |= (OPAMP_TrimValue<<15); + } + } + else + { + /* Reset the OPAMP inputs selection */ + tmpreg &= (uint32_t)~(OPAMP_CSR_OPA3CAL_L | OPAMP_CSR_OPA3CAL_H); + /* Select the OPAMP input */ + tmpreg |= (uint32_t)(OPAMP_Input<<16); + + if(OPAMP_Input == OPAMP_Input_PMOS) + { + /* Reset the trimming value corresponding to OPAMP3 PMOS input */ + tmpreg &= (0xFE0FFFFF); + /* Set the new trimming value corresponding to OPAMP3 PMOS input */ + tmpreg |= (OPAMP_TrimValue<<20); + } + else + { + /* Reset the trimming value corresponding to OPAMP3 NMOS input */ + tmpreg &= (0xC1FFFFFF); + /* Set the new trimming value corresponding to OPAMP3 NMOS input */ + tmpreg |= (OPAMP_TrimValue<<25); + } + } + + /* Set the OPAMP_LPOTR register */ + OPAMP->LPOTR = tmpreg; +} + +/** + * @brief Checks whether the specified OPAMP calibration flag is set or not. + * @note User should wait until calibration flag change the value when changing + * the trimming value. + * @param OPAMP_Selection: the selected OPAMP. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg OPAMP_Selection_OPAMP1: OPAMP1 is selected. + * @arg OPAMP_Selection_OPAMP2: OPAMP2 is selected. + * @arg OPAMP_Selection_OPAMP3: OPAMP3 is selected. + * @retval The new state of the OPAMP calibration flag (SET or RESET). + */ +FlagStatus OPAMP_GetFlagStatus(uint32_t OPAMP_Selection) +{ + FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET; + uint32_t tmpreg = 0; + + /* Check the parameter */ + assert_param(IS_OPAMP_ALL_PERIPH(OPAMP_Selection)); + + /* Get the CSR register value */ + tmpreg = OPAMP->CSR; + + /* Check if OPAMP1 is selected */ + if(OPAMP_Selection == OPAMP_Selection_OPAMP1) + { + /* Check OPAMP1 CAL bit status */ + if ((tmpreg & OPAMP_CSR_OPA1CALOUT) != (uint32_t)RESET) + { + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + bitstatus = RESET; + } + } + /* Check if OPAMP2 is selected */ + else if(OPAMP_Selection == OPAMP_Selection_OPAMP2) + { + /* Check OPAMP2 CAL bit status */ + if ((tmpreg & OPAMP_CSR_OPA2CALOUT) != (uint32_t)RESET) + { + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + bitstatus = RESET; + } + } + else + { + /* Check OPAMP3 CAL bit status */ + if ((tmpreg & OPAMP_CSR_OPA3CALOUT) != (uint32_t)RESET) + { + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + bitstatus = RESET; + } + } + return bitstatus; +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/ diff --git a/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32l1xx_pwr.c b/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32l1xx_pwr.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..15b4788 --- /dev/null +++ b/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32l1xx_pwr.c @@ -0,0 +1,833 @@ +/** + ****************************************************************************** + * @file stm32l1xx_pwr.c + * @author MCD Application Team + * @version V1.1.1 + * @date 05-March-2012 + * @brief This file provides firmware functions to manage the following + * functionalities of the Power Controller (PWR) peripheral: + * + RTC Domain Access + * + PVD configuration + * + WakeUp pins configuration + * + Ultra Low Power mode configuration + * + Voltage Scaling configuration + * + Low Power modes configuration + * + Flags management + * + ****************************************************************************** + * @attention + * + * <h2><center>© COPYRIGHT 2012 STMicroelectronics</center></h2> + * + * Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License"); + * You may not use this file except in compliance with the License. + * You may obtain a copy of the License at: + * + * http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2 + * + * Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software + * distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS, + * WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. + * See the License for the specific language governing permissions and + * limitations under the License. + * + ****************************************************************************** + */ + +/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#include "stm32l1xx_pwr.h" +#include "stm32l1xx_rcc.h" + +/** @addtogroup STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver + * @{ + */ + +/** @defgroup PWR + * @brief PWR driver modules + * @{ + */ + +/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* --------- PWR registers bit address in the alias region ---------- */ +#define PWR_OFFSET (PWR_BASE - PERIPH_BASE) + +/* --- CR Register ---*/ + +/* Alias word address of DBP bit */ +#define CR_OFFSET (PWR_OFFSET + 0x00) +#define DBP_BitNumber 0x08 +#define CR_DBP_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (CR_OFFSET * 32) + (DBP_BitNumber * 4)) + +/* Alias word address of PVDE bit */ +#define PVDE_BitNumber 0x04 +#define CR_PVDE_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (CR_OFFSET * 32) + (PVDE_BitNumber * 4)) + +/* Alias word address of ULP bit */ +#define ULP_BitNumber 0x09 +#define CR_ULP_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (CR_OFFSET * 32) + (ULP_BitNumber * 4)) + +/* Alias word address of FWU bit */ +#define FWU_BitNumber 0x0A +#define CR_FWU_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (CR_OFFSET * 32) + (FWU_BitNumber * 4)) + +/* --- CSR Register ---*/ + +/* Alias word address of EWUP bit */ +#define CSR_OFFSET (PWR_OFFSET + 0x04) +#define EWUP_BitNumber 0x08 +#define CSR_EWUP_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (CSR_OFFSET * 32) + (EWUP_BitNumber * 4)) + +/* ------------------ PWR registers bit mask ------------------------ */ + +/* CR register bit mask */ +#define CR_DS_MASK ((uint32_t)0xFFFFFFFC) +#define CR_PLS_MASK ((uint32_t)0xFFFFFF1F) +#define CR_VOS_MASK ((uint32_t)0xFFFFE7FF) + +/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/ + +/** @defgroup PWR_Private_Functions + * @{ + */ + +/** @defgroup PWR_Group1 RTC Domain Access function + * @brief RTC Domain Access function + * +@verbatim + ============================================================================== + ##### RTC Domain Access function ##### + ============================================================================== + + [..] After reset, the RTC Registers (RCC CSR Register, RTC registers and RTC backup + registers) are protected against possible stray write accesses. + [..] To enable access to RTC domain use the PWR_RTCAccessCmd(ENABLE) function. + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Deinitializes the PWR peripheral registers to their default reset values. + * @note Before calling this function, the VOS[1:0] bits should be configured + * to "10" and the system frequency has to be configured accordingly. + * To configure the VOS[1:0] bits, use the PWR_VoltageScalingConfig() + * function. + * @note ULP and FWU bits are not reset by this function. + * @param None + * @retval None + */ +void PWR_DeInit(void) +{ + RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_PWR, ENABLE); + RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_PWR, DISABLE); +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables access to the RTC and backup registers. + * @note If the HSE divided by 2, 4, 8 or 16 is used as the RTC clock, the + * RTC Domain Access should be kept enabled. + * @param NewState: new state of the access to the RTC and backup registers. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void PWR_RTCAccessCmd(FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + *(__IO uint32_t *) CR_DBP_BB = (uint32_t)NewState; +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup PWR_Group2 PVD configuration functions + * @brief PVD configuration functions + * +@verbatim + ============================================================================== + ##### PVD configuration functions ##### + ============================================================================== + [..] + (+) The PVD is used to monitor the VDD power supply by comparing it to a threshold + selected by the PVD Level (PLS[2:0] bits in the PWR_CR). + (+) The PVD can use an external input analog voltage (PVD_IN) which is compared + internally to VREFINT. The PVD_IN (PB7) has to be configured in Analog mode + when PWR_PVDLevel_7 is selected (PLS[2:0] = 111). + (+) A PVDO flag is available to indicate if VDD/VDDA is higher or lower than the + PVD threshold. This event is internally connected to the EXTI line16 + and can generate an interrupt if enabled through the EXTI registers. + (+) The PVD is stopped in Standby mode. + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Configures the voltage threshold detected by the Power Voltage Detector(PVD). + * @param PWR_PVDLevel: specifies the PVD detection level. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg PWR_PVDLevel_0: PVD detection level set to 1.9V. + * @arg PWR_PVDLevel_1: PVD detection level set to 2.1V. + * @arg PWR_PVDLevel_2: PVD detection level set to 2.3V. + * @arg PWR_PVDLevel_3: PVD detection level set to 2.5V. + * @arg PWR_PVDLevel_4: PVD detection level set to 2.7V. + * @arg PWR_PVDLevel_5: PVD detection level set to 2.9V. + * @arg PWR_PVDLevel_6: PVD detection level set to 3.1V. + * @arg PWR_PVDLevel_7: External input analog voltage (Compare internally to VREFINT). + * @retval None + */ +void PWR_PVDLevelConfig(uint32_t PWR_PVDLevel) +{ + uint32_t tmpreg = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_PWR_PVD_LEVEL(PWR_PVDLevel)); + + tmpreg = PWR->CR; + + /* Clear PLS[7:5] bits */ + tmpreg &= CR_PLS_MASK; + + /* Set PLS[7:5] bits according to PWR_PVDLevel value */ + tmpreg |= PWR_PVDLevel; + + /* Store the new value */ + PWR->CR = tmpreg; +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the Power Voltage Detector(PVD). + * @param NewState: new state of the PVD. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void PWR_PVDCmd(FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + *(__IO uint32_t *) CR_PVDE_BB = (uint32_t)NewState; +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup PWR_Group3 WakeUp pins configuration functions + * @brief WakeUp pins configuration functions + * +@verbatim + ============================================================================== + ##### WakeUp pin configuration functions ##### + ============================================================================== + + (+) WakeUp pins are used to wakeup the system from Standby mode. These pins are + forced in input pull down configuration and are active on rising edges. + (+) There are three WakeUp pins: WakeUp Pin 1 on PA.00, WakeUp Pin 2 on PC.13 and + WakeUp Pin 3 on PE.06. + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the WakeUp Pin functionality. + * @param PWR_WakeUpPin: specifies the WakeUpPin. + * This parameter can be: PWR_WakeUpPin_1, PWR_WakeUpPin_2 or PWR_WakeUpPin_3. + * @param NewState: new state of the WakeUp Pin functionality. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void PWR_WakeUpPinCmd(uint32_t PWR_WakeUpPin, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + __IO uint32_t tmp = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_PWR_WAKEUP_PIN(PWR_WakeUpPin)); + + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + tmp = CSR_EWUP_BB + PWR_WakeUpPin; + + *(__IO uint32_t *) (tmp) = (uint32_t)NewState; +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup PWR_Group4 Ultra Low Power mode configuration functions + * @brief Ultra Low Power mode configuration functions + * +@verbatim + ============================================================================== + ##### Ultra Low Power mode configuration functions ##### + ============================================================================== + [..] + (+) The internal voltage reference consumption is not negligible, in particular + in Stop and Standby mode. To reduce power consumption, use the PWR_UltraLowPowerCmd() + function (ULP bit (Ultra low power) in the PWR_CR register) to disable the + internal voltage reference. However, in this case, when exiting from the + Stop/Standby mode, the functions managed through the internal voltage reference + are not reliable during the internal voltage reference startup time (up to 3 ms). + To reduce the wakeup time, the device can exit from Stop/Standby mode without + waiting for the internal voltage reference startup time. This is performed + by using the PWR_FastWakeUpCmd() function (setting the FWU bit (Fast + wakeup) in the PWR_CR register) before entering Stop/Standby mode. + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the Fast WakeUp from Ultra Low Power mode. + * @param NewState: new state of the Fast WakeUp functionality. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void PWR_FastWakeUpCmd(FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + *(__IO uint32_t *) CR_FWU_BB = (uint32_t)NewState; +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the Ultra Low Power mode. + * @param NewState: new state of the Ultra Low Power mode. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void PWR_UltraLowPowerCmd(FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + *(__IO uint32_t *) CR_ULP_BB = (uint32_t)NewState; +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup PWR_Group5 Voltage Scaling configuration functions + * @brief Voltage Scaling configuration functions + * +@verbatim + ============================================================================== + ##### Voltage Scaling configuration functions ##### + ============================================================================== + + (+) The dynamic voltage scaling is a power management technique which consists in + increasing or decreasing the voltage used for the digital peripherals (VCORE), + according to the circumstances. + + [..] Depending on the device voltage range, the maximum frequency and FLASH wait + state should be adapted accordingly: + [..] + +------------------------------------------------------------------+ + | Wait states | HCLK clock frequency (MHz) | + | |------------------------------------------------| + | (Latency) | voltage range | voltage range | + | | 1.65 V - 3.6 V | 2.0 V - 3.6 V | + | |----------------|---------------|---------------| + | | Range 3 | Range 2 | Range 1 | + | | VCORE = 1.2 V | VCORE = 1.5 V | VCORE = 1.8 V | + |---------------- |----------------|---------------|---------------| + | 0WS(1CPU cycle) |0 < HCLK <= 2 |0 < HCLK <= 8 |0 < HCLK <= 16 | + |-----------------|----------------|---------------|---------------| + | 1WS(2CPU cycle) |2 < HCLK <= 4 |8 < HCLK <= 16 |16 < HCLK <= 32| + |-----------------|----------------|---------------|---------------| + | CPU Performance | Low | Medium | High | + |-----__----------|----------------|---------------|---------------| + |Power Performance| High | Medium | Low | + +------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + (+) To modify the Product voltage range, user application has to: + (++) Check VDD to identify which ranges are allowed (see table above). + (++) Check the PWR_FLAG_VOSF (Voltage Scaling update ongoing) using the PWR_GetFlagStatus() + function and wait until it is reset. + (++) Configure the Voltage range using the PWR_VoltageScalingConfig() function. + + (+) When VCORE range 1 is selected and VDD drops below 2.0 V, the application must + reconfigure the system: + (++) Detect that VDD drops below 2.0 V using the PVD Level 1. + (++) Adapt the clock frequency to the voltage range that will be selected at next step. + (++) Select the required voltage range. + (++) When VCORE range 2 or range 3 is selected and VDD drops below 2.0 V, no system + reconfiguration is required. + + (+) When VDD is above 2.0 V, any of the 3 voltage ranges can be selected. + (++) When the voltage range is above the targeted voltage range (e.g. from range + 1 to 2). + (++) Adapt the clock frequency to the lower voltage range that will be selected + at next step. + (++) Select the required voltage range. + (++) When the voltage range is below the targeted voltage range (e.g. from range + 3 to 1). + (++) Select the required voltage range. + (++) Tune the clock frequency if needed. + + (+) When VDD is below 2.0 V, only range 2 and 3 can be selected: + (++) From range 2 to range 3. + (+++) Adapt the clock frequency to voltage range 3. + (+++) Select voltage range 3. + (++) From range 3 to range 2. + (+++) Select the voltage range 2. + (+++) Tune the clock frequency if needed. + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Configures the voltage scaling range. + * @note During voltage scaling configuration, the system clock is stopped + * until the regulator is stabilized (VOSF = 0). This must be taken + * into account during application developement, in case a critical + * reaction time to interrupt is needed, and depending on peripheral + * used (timer, communication,...). + * + * @param PWR_VoltageScaling: specifies the voltage scaling range. + * This parameter can be: + * @arg PWR_VoltageScaling_Range1: Voltage Scaling Range 1 (VCORE = 1.8V). + * @arg PWR_VoltageScaling_Range2: Voltage Scaling Range 2 (VCORE = 1.5V). + * @arg PWR_VoltageScaling_Range3: Voltage Scaling Range 3 (VCORE = 1.2V) + * @retval None + */ +void PWR_VoltageScalingConfig(uint32_t PWR_VoltageScaling) +{ + uint32_t tmp = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_PWR_VOLTAGE_SCALING_RANGE(PWR_VoltageScaling)); + + tmp = PWR->CR; + + tmp &= CR_VOS_MASK; + tmp |= PWR_VoltageScaling; + + PWR->CR = tmp & 0xFFFFFFF3; + +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup PWR_Group6 Low Power modes configuration functions + * @brief Low Power modes configuration functions + * +@verbatim + ============================================================================== + ##### Low Power modes configuration functions ##### + ============================================================================== + + [..] The devices feature five low-power modes: + (+) Low power run mode: regulator in low power mode, limited clock frequency, + limited number of peripherals running. + (+) Sleep mode: Cortex-M3 core stopped, peripherals kept running. + (+) Low power sleep mode: Cortex-M3 core stopped, limited clock frequency, + limited number of peripherals running, regulator in low power mode. + (+) Stop mode: all clocks are stopped, regulator running, regulator in low power mode. + (+) Standby mode: VCORE domain powered off. + + *** Low power run mode (LP run) *** + =================================== + [..] + (+) Entry: + (++) Decrease the system frequency. + (++) The regulator is forced in low power mode using the PWR_EnterLowPowerRunMode() + function. + (+) Exit: + (++) The regulator is forced in Main regulator mode sing the PWR_EnterLowPowerRunMode() + function. + (++) Increase the system frequency if needed. + + *** Sleep mode *** + ================== + [..] + (+) Entry: + (++) The Sleep mode is entered by using the PWR_EnterSleepMode(PWR_Regulator_ON,) + function with regulator ON. + (+) Exit: + (++) Any peripheral interrupt acknowledged by the nested vectored interrupt + controller (NVIC) can wake up the device from Sleep mode. + + *** Low power sleep mode (LP sleep) *** + ======================================= + [..] + (+) Entry: + (++) The Flash memory must be switched off by using the FLASH_SLEEPPowerDownCmd() + function. + (++) Decrease the system frequency. + (++) The regulator is forced in low power mode and the WFI or WFE instructions + are executed using the PWR_EnterSleepMode(PWR_Regulator_LowPower,) function + with regulator in LowPower. + (+) Exit: + (++) Any peripheral interrupt acknowledged by the nested vectored interrupt + controller (NVIC) can wake up the device from Sleep LP mode. + + *** Stop mode *** + ================= + [..] In Stop mode, all clocks in the VCORE domain are stopped, the PLL, the MSI, + the HSI and the HSE RC oscillators are disabled. Internal SRAM and register + contents are preserved. + The voltage regulator can be configured either in normal or low-power mode. + To minimize the consumption In Stop mode, VREFINT, the BOR, PVD, and temperature + sensor can be switched off before entering the Stop mode. They can be switched + on again by software after exiting the Stop mode using the PWR_UltraLowPowerCmd() + function. + + (+) Entry: + (++) The Stop mode is entered using the PWR_EnterSTOPMode(PWR_Regulator_LowPower,) + function with regulator in LowPower or with Regulator ON. + (+) Exit: + (++) Any EXTI Line (Internal or External) configured in Interrupt/Event mode. + + *** Standby mode *** + ==================== + [..] The Standby mode allows to achieve the lowest power consumption. It is based + on the Cortex-M3 deepsleep mode, with the voltage regulator disabled. + The VCORE domain is consequently powered off. The PLL, the MSI, the HSI + oscillator and the HSE oscillator are also switched off. SRAM and register + contents are lost except for the RTC registers, RTC backup registers and + Standby circuitry. + + [..] The voltage regulator is OFF. + + [..] To minimize the consumption In Standby mode, VREFINT, the BOR, PVD, and temperature + sensor can be switched off before entering the Standby mode. They can be switched + on again by software after exiting the Standby mode using the PWR_UltraLowPowerCmd() + function. + + (+) Entry: + (++) The Standby mode is entered using the PWR_EnterSTANDBYMode() function. + (+) Exit: + (++) WKUP pin rising edge, RTC alarm (Alarm A and Alarm B), RTC wakeup, + tamper event, time-stamp event, external reset in NRST pin, IWDG reset. + + *** Auto-wakeup (AWU) from low-power mode *** + ============================================= + [..]The MCU can be woken up from low-power mode by an RTC Alarm event, an RTC + Wakeup event, a tamper event, a time-stamp event, or a comparator event, + without depending on an external interrupt (Auto-wakeup mode). + + (+) RTC auto-wakeup (AWU) from the Stop mode + (++) To wake up from the Stop mode with an RTC alarm event, it is necessary to: + (+++) Configure the EXTI Line 17 to be sensitive to rising edges (Interrupt + or Event modes) using the EXTI_Init() function. + (+++) Enable the RTC Alarm Interrupt using the RTC_ITConfig() function + (+++) Configure the RTC to generate the RTC alarm using the RTC_SetAlarm() + and RTC_AlarmCmd() functions. + (++) To wake up from the Stop mode with an RTC Tamper or time stamp event, it + is necessary to: + (+++) Configure the EXTI Line 19 to be sensitive to rising edges (Interrupt + or Event modes) using the EXTI_Init() function. + (+++) Enable the RTC Tamper or time stamp Interrupt using the RTC_ITConfig() + function. + (+++) Configure the RTC to detect the tamper or time stamp event using the + RTC_TimeStampConfig(), RTC_TamperTriggerConfig() and RTC_TamperCmd() + functions. + (++) To wake up from the Stop mode with an RTC WakeUp event, it is necessary to: + (+++) Configure the EXTI Line 20 to be sensitive to rising edges (Interrupt + or Event modes) using the EXTI_Init() function. + (+++) Enable the RTC WakeUp Interrupt using the RTC_ITConfig() function. + (+++) Configure the RTC to generate the RTC WakeUp event using the RTC_WakeUpClockConfig(), + RTC_SetWakeUpCounter() and RTC_WakeUpCmd() functions. + + (+) RTC auto-wakeup (AWU) from the Standby mode + (++) To wake up from the Standby mode with an RTC alarm event, it is necessary to: + (+++) Enable the RTC Alarm Interrupt using the RTC_ITConfig() function. + (+++) Configure the RTC to generate the RTC alarm using the RTC_SetAlarm() + and RTC_AlarmCmd() functions. + (++) To wake up from the Standby mode with an RTC Tamper or time stamp event, it + is necessary to: + (+++) Enable the RTC Tamper or time stamp Interrupt using the RTC_ITConfig() + function. + (+++) Configure the RTC to detect the tamper or time stamp event using the + RTC_TimeStampConfig(), RTC_TamperTriggerConfig() and RTC_TamperCmd() + functions. + (++) To wake up from the Standby mode with an RTC WakeUp event, it is necessary to: + (+++) Enable the RTC WakeUp Interrupt using the RTC_ITConfig() function + (+++) Configure the RTC to generate the RTC WakeUp event using the RTC_WakeUpClockConfig(), + RTC_SetWakeUpCounter() and RTC_WakeUpCmd() functions. + + (+) Comparator auto-wakeup (AWU) from the Stop mode + (++) To wake up from the Stop mode with an comparator 1 or comparator 2 wakeup + event, it is necessary to: + (+++) Configure the EXTI Line 21 for comparator 1 or EXTI Line 22 for comparator 2 + to be sensitive to to the selected edges (falling, rising or falling + and rising) (Interrupt or Event modes) using the EXTI_Init() function. + (+++) Configure the comparator to generate the event. + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Enters/Exits the Low Power Run mode. + * @note Low power run mode can only be entered when VCORE is in range 2. + * In addition, the dynamic voltage scaling must not be used when Low + * power run mode is selected. Only Stop and Sleep modes with regulator + * configured in Low power mode is allowed when Low power run mode is + * selected. + * @note In Low power run mode, all I/O pins keep the same state as in Run mode. + * @param NewState: new state of the Low Power Run mode. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void PWR_EnterLowPowerRunMode(FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + PWR->CR |= PWR_CR_LPSDSR; + PWR->CR |= PWR_CR_LPRUN; + } + else + { + PWR->CR &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)PWR_CR_LPRUN); + PWR->CR &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)PWR_CR_LPSDSR); + } +} + +/** + * @brief Enters Sleep mode. + * @note In Sleep mode, all I/O pins keep the same state as in Run mode. + * @param PWR_Regulator: specifies the regulator state in Sleep mode. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg PWR_Regulator_ON: Sleep mode with regulator ON + * @arg PWR_Regulator_LowPower: Sleep mode with regulator in low power mode + * @note Low power sleep mode can only be entered when VCORE is in range 2. + * @note When the voltage regulator operates in low power mode, an additional + * startup delay is incurred when waking up from Low power sleep mode. + * @param PWR_SLEEPEntry: specifies if SLEEP mode in entered with WFI or WFE instruction. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg PWR_SLEEPEntry_WFI: enter SLEEP mode with WFI instruction + * @arg PWR_SLEEPEntry_WFE: enter SLEEP mode with WFE instruction + * @retval None + */ +void PWR_EnterSleepMode(uint32_t PWR_Regulator, uint8_t PWR_SLEEPEntry) +{ + uint32_t tmpreg = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_PWR_REGULATOR(PWR_Regulator)); + + assert_param(IS_PWR_SLEEP_ENTRY(PWR_SLEEPEntry)); + + /* Select the regulator state in Sleep mode ---------------------------------*/ + tmpreg = PWR->CR; + + /* Clear PDDS and LPDSR bits */ + tmpreg &= CR_DS_MASK; + + /* Set LPDSR bit according to PWR_Regulator value */ + tmpreg |= PWR_Regulator; + + /* Store the new value */ + PWR->CR = tmpreg; + + /* Clear SLEEPDEEP bit of Cortex System Control Register */ + SCB->SCR &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)SCB_SCR_SLEEPDEEP); + + /* Select SLEEP mode entry -------------------------------------------------*/ + if(PWR_SLEEPEntry == PWR_SLEEPEntry_WFI) + { + /* Request Wait For Interrupt */ + __WFI(); + } + else + { + /* Request Wait For Event */ + __WFE(); + } +} + +/** + * @brief Enters STOP mode. + * @note In Stop mode, all I/O pins keep the same state as in Run mode. + * @note When exiting Stop mode by issuing an interrupt or a wakeup event, + * the MSI RC oscillator is selected as system clock. + * @note When the voltage regulator operates in low power mode, an additional + * startup delay is incurred when waking up from Stop mode. + * By keeping the internal regulator ON during Stop mode, the consumption + * is higher although the startup time is reduced. + * @param PWR_Regulator: specifies the regulator state in STOP mode. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg PWR_Regulator_ON: STOP mode with regulator ON. + * @arg PWR_Regulator_LowPower: STOP mode with regulator in low power mode. + * @param PWR_STOPEntry: specifies if STOP mode in entered with WFI or WFE instruction. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg PWR_STOPEntry_WFI: enter STOP mode with WFI instruction. + * @arg PWR_STOPEntry_WFE: enter STOP mode with WFE instruction. + * @retval None + */ +void PWR_EnterSTOPMode(uint32_t PWR_Regulator, uint8_t PWR_STOPEntry) +{ + uint32_t tmpreg = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_PWR_REGULATOR(PWR_Regulator)); + assert_param(IS_PWR_STOP_ENTRY(PWR_STOPEntry)); + + /* Select the regulator state in STOP mode ---------------------------------*/ + tmpreg = PWR->CR; + /* Clear PDDS and LPDSR bits */ + tmpreg &= CR_DS_MASK; + + /* Set LPDSR bit according to PWR_Regulator value */ + tmpreg |= PWR_Regulator; + + /* Store the new value */ + PWR->CR = tmpreg; + + /* Set SLEEPDEEP bit of Cortex System Control Register */ + SCB->SCR |= SCB_SCR_SLEEPDEEP; + + /* Select STOP mode entry --------------------------------------------------*/ + if(PWR_STOPEntry == PWR_STOPEntry_WFI) + { + /* Request Wait For Interrupt */ + __WFI(); + } + else + { + /* Request Wait For Event */ + __WFE(); + } + /* Reset SLEEPDEEP bit of Cortex System Control Register */ + SCB->SCR &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)SCB_SCR_SLEEPDEEP); +} + +/** + * @brief Enters STANDBY mode. + * @note In Standby mode, all I/O pins are high impedance except for: + * Reset pad (still available) + * RTC_AF1 pin (PC13) if configured for Wakeup pin 2 (WKUP2), tamper, + * time-stamp, RTC Alarm out, or RTC clock calibration out. + * WKUP pin 1 (PA0) and WKUP pin 3 (PE6), if enabled. + * @param None + * @retval None + */ +void PWR_EnterSTANDBYMode(void) +{ + /* Clear Wakeup flag */ + PWR->CR |= PWR_CR_CWUF; + + /* Select STANDBY mode */ + PWR->CR |= PWR_CR_PDDS; + + /* Set SLEEPDEEP bit of Cortex System Control Register */ + SCB->SCR |= SCB_SCR_SLEEPDEEP; + +/* This option is used to ensure that store operations are completed */ +#if defined ( __CC_ARM ) + __force_stores(); +#endif + /* Request Wait For Interrupt */ + __WFI(); +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup PWR_Group7 Flags management functions + * @brief Flags management functions + * +@verbatim + ============================================================================== + ##### Flags management functions ##### + ============================================================================== + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Checks whether the specified PWR flag is set or not. + * @param PWR_FLAG: specifies the flag to check. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg PWR_FLAG_WU: Wake Up flag. This flag indicates that a wakeup event + * was received from the WKUP pin or from the RTC alarm (Alarm A or Alarm B), + * RTC Tamper event, RTC TimeStamp event or RTC Wakeup. + * @arg PWR_FLAG_SB: StandBy flag. This flag indicates that the system was + * resumed from StandBy mode. + * @arg PWR_FLAG_PVDO: PVD Output. This flag is valid only if PVD is enabled + * by the PWR_PVDCmd() function. + * @arg PWR_FLAG_VREFINTRDY: Internal Voltage Reference Ready flag. This + * flag indicates the state of the internal voltage reference, VREFINT. + * @arg PWR_FLAG_VOS: Voltage Scaling select flag. A delay is required for + * the internal regulator to be ready after the voltage range is changed. + * The VOSF flag indicates that the regulator has reached the voltage level + * defined with bits VOS[1:0] of PWR_CR register. + * @arg PWR_FLAG_REGLP: Regulator LP flag. This flag is set by hardware + * when the MCU is in Low power run mode. + * When the MCU exits from Low power run mode, this flag stays SET until + * the regulator is ready in main mode. A polling on this flag is + * recommended to wait for the regulator main mode. + * This flag is RESET by hardware when the regulator is ready. + * @retval The new state of PWR_FLAG (SET or RESET). + */ +FlagStatus PWR_GetFlagStatus(uint32_t PWR_FLAG) +{ + FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET; + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_PWR_GET_FLAG(PWR_FLAG)); + + if ((PWR->CSR & PWR_FLAG) != (uint32_t)RESET) + { + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + bitstatus = RESET; + } + /* Return the flag status */ + return bitstatus; +} + +/** + * @brief Clears the PWR's pending flags. + * @param PWR_FLAG: specifies the flag to clear. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg PWR_FLAG_WU: Wake Up flag + * @arg PWR_FLAG_SB: StandBy flag + * @retval None + */ +void PWR_ClearFlag(uint32_t PWR_FLAG) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_PWR_CLEAR_FLAG(PWR_FLAG)); + + PWR->CR |= PWR_FLAG << 2; +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/ diff --git a/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32l1xx_rtc.c b/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32l1xx_rtc.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0cd7c5c --- /dev/null +++ b/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32l1xx_rtc.c @@ -0,0 +1,2675 @@ +/** + ****************************************************************************** + * @file stm32l1xx_rtc.c + * @author MCD Application Team + * @version V1.1.1 + * @date 05-March-2012 + * @brief This file provides firmware functions to manage the following + * functionalities of the Real-Time Clock (RTC) peripheral: + * + Initialization + * + Calendar (Time and Date) configuration + * + Alarms (Alarm A and Alarm B) configuration + * + WakeUp Timer configuration + * + Daylight Saving configuration + * + Output pin Configuration + * + Coarse digital Calibration configuration + * + Smooth digital Calibration configuration + * + TimeStamp configuration + * + Tampers configuration + * + Backup Data Registers configuration + * + Output Type Config configuration + * + Shift control synchronisation + * + Interrupts and flags management + * + @verbatim + + =============================================================================== + ##### RTC Domain Reset ##### + =============================================================================== + [..] After power-on reset, the RTC domain (RTC clock source configuration, + RTC registers and RTC Backup data registers) is reset. You can also + reset this domain by software using the RCC_RTCResetCmd() function. + + ##### RTC Operating Condition ##### + =============================================================================== + [..] As long as the supply voltage remains in the operating range, + the RTC never stops, regardless of the device status (Run mode, + low power modes or under reset). + + ##### RTC Domain Access ##### + =============================================================================== + [..] After reset, the RTC domain (RTC clock source configuration, + RTC registers and RTC Backup data registers) are protected against + possible stray write accesses. + [..] To enable access to the RTC Domain and RTC registers, proceed as follows: + (+) Enable the Power Controller (PWR) APB1 interface clock using the + RCC_APB1PeriphClockCmd() function. + (+) Enable access to RTC domain using the PWR_RTCAccessCmd() function. + (+) Select the RTC clock source using the RCC_RTCCLKConfig() function. + (+) Enable RTC Clock using the RCC_RTCCLKCmd() function. + + ##### How to use this driver ##### + =============================================================================== + [..] + (+) Enable the RTC domain access (see description in the section above) + (+) Configure the RTC Prescaler (Asynchronous and Synchronous) and + RTC hour format using the RTC_Init() function. + ***Time and Date configuration *** + ================================== + [..] + (+) To configure the RTC Calendar (Time and Date) use the RTC_SetTime() + and RTC_SetDate() functions. + (+) To read the RTC Calendar, use the RTC_GetTime() and RTC_GetDate() + functions. + (+) To read the RTC subsecond, use the RTC_GetSubSecond() function. + (+) Use the RTC_DayLightSavingConfig() function to add or sub one + hour to the RTC Calendar. + + ***Alarm configuration *** + ========================== + [..] + (+) To configure the RTC Alarm use the RTC_SetAlarm() function. + (+) Enable the selected RTC Alarm using the RTC_AlarmCmd() function + (+) To read the RTC Alarm, use the RTC_GetAlarm() function. + (+) To read the RTC alarm SubSecond, use the RTC_GetAlarmSubSecond() function. + + ***RTC Wakeup configuration *** + =============================== + [..] + (+) Configure the RTC Wakeup Clock source use the RTC_WakeUpClockConfig() + function. + (+) Configure the RTC WakeUp Counter using the RTC_SetWakeUpCounter() + function. + (+) Enable the RTC WakeUp using the RTC_WakeUpCmd() function + (+) To read the RTC WakeUp Counter register, use the RTC_GetWakeUpCounter() + function. + + ***Outputs configuration *** + ============================ + [..] The RTC has 2 different outputs: + (+) AFO_ALARM: this output is used to manage the RTC Alarm A, Alarm B + and WaKeUp signals. + To output the selected RTC signal on RTC_AF1 pin, use the + RTC_OutputConfig() function. + (+) AFO_CALIB: this output is 512Hz signal or 1Hz. + To output the RTC Clock on RTC_AF1 pin, use the RTC_CalibOutputCmd() + function. + + ***Smooth digital Calibration configuration *** + =============================================== + [..] + (+) Configure the RTC Original Digital Calibration Value and the corresponding + calibration cycle period (32s,16s and 8s) using the RTC_SmoothCalibConfig() + function. + + ***Coarse digital Calibration configuration *** + =============================================== + [..] + (+) Configure the RTC Coarse Calibration Value and the corresponding + sign using the RTC_CoarseCalibConfig() function. + (+) Enable the RTC Coarse Calibration using the RTC_CoarseCalibCmd() + function. + + ***TimeStamp configuration *** + ============================== + [..] + (+) Configure the RTC_AF1 trigger and enables the RTC TimeStamp + using the RTC_TimeStampCmd() function. + (+) To read the RTC TimeStamp Time and Date register, use the + RTC_GetTimeStamp() function. + (+) To read the RTC TimeStamp SubSecond register, use the + RTC_GetTimeStampSubSecond() function. + + ***Tamper configuration *** + =========================== + [..] + (+) Configure the Tamper filter count using RTC_TamperFilterConfig() + function. + (+) Configure the RTC Tamper trigger Edge or Level according to the Tamper + filter (if equal to 0 Edge else Level) value using the RTC_TamperConfig() + function. + (+) Configure the Tamper sampling frequency using RTC_TamperSamplingFreqConfig() + function. + (+) Configure the Tamper precharge or discharge duration using + RTC_TamperPinsPrechargeDuration() function. + (+) Enable the Tamper Pull-UP using RTC_TamperPullUpDisableCmd() function. + (+) Enable the RTC Tamper using the RTC_TamperCmd() function. + (+) Enable the Time stamp on Tamper detection event using + RTC_TSOnTamperDetecCmd() function. + + ***Backup Data Registers configuration *** + ========================================== + [..] + (+) To write to the RTC Backup Data registers, use the RTC_WriteBackupRegister() + function. + (+) To read the RTC Backup Data registers, use the RTC_ReadBackupRegister() + function. + + ##### RTC and low power modes ##### + =============================================================================== + [..] The MCU can be woken up from a low power mode by an RTC alternate + function. + [..] The RTC alternate functions are the RTC alarms (Alarm A and Alarm B), + RTC wakeup, RTC tamper event detection and RTC time stamp event detection. + These RTC alternate functions can wake up the system from the Stop + and Standby lowpower modes. + The system can also wake up from low power modes without depending + on an external interrupt (Auto-wakeup mode), by using the RTC alarm + or the RTC wakeup events. + [..] The RTC provides a programmable time base for waking up from the + Stop or Standby mode at regular intervals. + Wakeup from STOP and Standby modes is possible only when the RTC + clock source is LSE or LSI. + + ##### Selection of RTC_AF1 alternate functions ##### + =============================================================================== + [..] The RTC_AF1 pin (PC13) can be used for the following purposes: + (+) Wakeup pin 2 (WKUP2) using the PWR_WakeUpPinCmd() function. + (+) AFO_ALARM output. + (+) AFO_CALIB output. + (+) AFI_TAMPER. + (+) AFI_TIMESTAMP. + + +------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + | Pin |AFO_ALARM |AFO_CALIB |AFI_TAMPER |AFI_TIMESTAMP | WKUP2 |ALARMOUTTYPE | + | configuration | ENABLED | ENABLED | ENABLED | ENABLED |ENABLED | AFO_ALARM | + | and function | | | | | |Configuration | + |-----------------|----------|----------|-----------|--------------|--------|--------------| + | Alarm out | | | | | Don't | | + | output OD | 1 | 0 |Don't care | Don't care | care | 0 | + |-----------------|----------|----------|-----------|--------------|--------|--------------| + | Alarm out | | | | | Don't | | + | output PP | 1 | 0 |Don't care | Don't care | care | 1 | + |-----------------|----------|----------|-----------|--------------|--------|--------------| + | Calibration out | | | | | Don't | | + | output PP | 0 | 1 |Don't care | Don't care | care | Don't care | + |-----------------|----------|----------|-----------|--------------|--------|--------------| + | TAMPER input | | | | | Don't | | + | floating | 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 | care | Don't care | + |-----------------|----------|----------|-----------|--------------|--------|--------------| + | TIMESTAMP and | | | | | Don't | | + | TAMPER input | 0 | 0 | 1 | 1 | care | Don't care | + | floating | | | | | | | + |-----------------|----------|----------|-----------|--------------|--------|--------------| + | TIMESTAMP input | | | | | Don't | | + | floating | 0 | 0 | 0 | 1 | care | Don't care | + |-----------------|----------|----------|-----------|--------------|--------|--------------| + | Wakeup Pin 2 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 1 | Don't care | + |-----------------|----------|----------|-----------|--------------|--------|--------------| + | Standard GPIO | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | Don't care | + +------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + @endverbatim + + ****************************************************************************** + * @attention + * + * <h2><center>© COPYRIGHT 2012 STMicroelectronics</center></h2> + * + * Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License"); + * You may not use this file except in compliance with the License. + * You may obtain a copy of the License at: + * + * http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2 + * + * Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software + * distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS, + * WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. + * See the License for the specific language governing permissions and + * limitations under the License. + * + ****************************************************************************** + */ + +/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#include "stm32l1xx_rtc.h" +#include "stm32l1xx_rcc.h" + +/** @addtogroup STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver + * @{ + */ + +/** @defgroup RTC + * @brief RTC driver modules + * @{ + */ + +/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +/* Masks Definition */ +#define RTC_TR_RESERVED_MASK ((uint32_t)0x007F7F7F) +#define RTC_DR_RESERVED_MASK ((uint32_t)0x00FFFF3F) +#define RTC_INIT_MASK ((uint32_t)0xFFFFFFFF) +#define RTC_RSF_MASK ((uint32_t)0xFFFFFF5F) +#define RTC_FLAGS_MASK ((uint32_t)(RTC_FLAG_TSOVF | RTC_FLAG_TSF | RTC_FLAG_WUTF | \ + RTC_FLAG_ALRBF | RTC_FLAG_ALRAF | RTC_FLAG_INITF | \ + RTC_FLAG_RSF | RTC_FLAG_INITS | RTC_FLAG_WUTWF | \ + RTC_FLAG_ALRBWF | RTC_FLAG_ALRAWF | RTC_FLAG_TAMP1F | \ + RTC_FLAG_TAMP2F | RTC_FLAG_TAMP3F | RTC_FLAG_RECALPF | \ + RTC_FLAG_SHPF)) + +#define INITMODE_TIMEOUT ((uint32_t) 0x00002000) +#define SYNCHRO_TIMEOUT ((uint32_t) 0x00008000) +#define RECALPF_TIMEOUT ((uint32_t) 0x00001000) +#define SHPF_TIMEOUT ((uint32_t) 0x00002000) + +/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/ +static uint8_t RTC_ByteToBcd2(uint8_t Value); +static uint8_t RTC_Bcd2ToByte(uint8_t Value); + +/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/ + +/** @defgroup RTC_Private_Functions + * @{ + */ + +/** @defgroup RTC_Group1 Initialization and Configuration functions + * @brief Initialization and Configuration functions + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### Initialization and Configuration functions ##### + =============================================================================== + [..] This section provide functions allowing to initialize and configure the + RTC Prescaler (Synchronous and Asynchronous), RTC Hour format, disable + RTC registers Write protection, enter and exit the RTC initialization mode, + RTC registers synchronization check and reference clock detection enable. + (#) The RTC Prescaler is programmed to generate the RTC 1Hz time base. + It is split into 2 programmable prescalers to minimize power consumption. + (++) A 7-bit asynchronous prescaler and A 13-bit synchronous prescaler. + (++) When both prescalers are used, it is recommended to configure the + asynchronous prescaler to a high value to minimize consumption. + (#) All RTC registers are Write protected. Writing to the RTC registers + is enabled by writing a key into the Write Protection register, RTC_WPR. + (#) To Configure the RTC Calendar, user application should enter + initialization mode. In this mode, the calendar counter is stopped + and its value can be updated. When the initialization sequence is + complete, the calendar restarts counting after 4 RTCCLK cycles. + (#) To read the calendar through the shadow registers after Calendar + initialization, calendar update or after wakeup from low power modes + the software must first clear the RSF flag. The software must then + wait until it is set again before reading the calendar, which means + that the calendar registers have been correctly copied into the + RTC_TR and RTC_DR shadow registers.The RTC_WaitForSynchro() function + implements the above software sequence (RSF clear and RSF check). + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Deinitializes the RTC registers to their default reset values. + * @note This function doesn't reset the RTC Clock source and RTC Backup Data + * registers. + * @param None + * @retval An ErrorStatus enumeration value: + * - SUCCESS: RTC registers are deinitialized + * - ERROR: RTC registers are not deinitialized + */ +ErrorStatus RTC_DeInit(void) +{ + __IO uint32_t wutcounter = 0x00; + uint32_t wutwfstatus = 0x00; + ErrorStatus status = ERROR; + + /* Disable the write protection for RTC registers */ + RTC->WPR = 0xCA; + RTC->WPR = 0x53; + + /* Set Initialization mode */ + if (RTC_EnterInitMode() == ERROR) + { + status = ERROR; + } + else + { + /* Reset TR, DR and CR registers */ + RTC->TR = (uint32_t)0x00000000; + RTC->DR = (uint32_t)0x00002101; + + /* Reset All CR bits except CR[2:0] */ + RTC->CR &= (uint32_t)0x00000007; + + /* Wait till RTC WUTWF flag is set and if Time out is reached exit */ + do + { + wutwfstatus = RTC->ISR & RTC_ISR_WUTWF; + wutcounter++; + } while((wutcounter != INITMODE_TIMEOUT) && (wutwfstatus == 0x00)); + + if ((RTC->ISR & RTC_ISR_WUTWF) == RESET) + { + status = ERROR; + } + else + { + /* Reset all RTC CR register bits */ + RTC->CR &= (uint32_t)0x00000000; + RTC->WUTR = (uint32_t)0x0000FFFF; + RTC->PRER = (uint32_t)0x007F00FF; + RTC->CALIBR = (uint32_t)0x00000000; + RTC->ALRMAR = (uint32_t)0x00000000; + RTC->ALRMBR = (uint32_t)0x00000000; + RTC->SHIFTR = (uint32_t)0x00000000; + RTC->CALR = (uint32_t)0x00000000; + RTC->ALRMASSR = (uint32_t)0x00000000; + RTC->ALRMBSSR = (uint32_t)0x00000000; + + /* Reset ISR register and exit initialization mode */ + RTC->ISR = (uint32_t)0x00000000; + + /* Reset Tamper and alternate functions configuration register */ + RTC->TAFCR = 0x00000000; + + /* Wait till the RTC RSF flag is set */ + if (RTC_WaitForSynchro() == ERROR) + { + status = ERROR; + } + else + { + status = SUCCESS; + } + } + } + + /* Enable the write protection for RTC registers */ + RTC->WPR = 0xFF; + + return status; +} + +/** + * @brief Initializes the RTC registers according to the specified parameters + * in RTC_InitStruct. + * @param RTC_InitStruct: pointer to a RTC_InitTypeDef structure that contains + * the configuration information for the RTC peripheral. + * @note The RTC Prescaler register is write protected and can be written in + * initialization mode only. + * @retval An ErrorStatus enumeration value: + * - SUCCESS: RTC registers are initialized + * - ERROR: RTC registers are not initialized + */ +ErrorStatus RTC_Init(RTC_InitTypeDef* RTC_InitStruct) +{ + ErrorStatus status = ERROR; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RTC_HOUR_FORMAT(RTC_InitStruct->RTC_HourFormat)); + assert_param(IS_RTC_ASYNCH_PREDIV(RTC_InitStruct->RTC_AsynchPrediv)); + assert_param(IS_RTC_SYNCH_PREDIV(RTC_InitStruct->RTC_SynchPrediv)); + + /* Disable the write protection for RTC registers */ + RTC->WPR = 0xCA; + RTC->WPR = 0x53; + + /* Set Initialization mode */ + if (RTC_EnterInitMode() == ERROR) + { + status = ERROR; + } + else + { + /* Clear RTC CR FMT Bit */ + RTC->CR &= ((uint32_t)~(RTC_CR_FMT)); + /* Set RTC_CR register */ + RTC->CR |= ((uint32_t)(RTC_InitStruct->RTC_HourFormat)); + + /* Configure the RTC PRER */ + RTC->PRER = (uint32_t)(RTC_InitStruct->RTC_SynchPrediv); + RTC->PRER |= (uint32_t)(RTC_InitStruct->RTC_AsynchPrediv << 16); + + /* Exit Initialization mode */ + RTC_ExitInitMode(); + + status = SUCCESS; + } + /* Enable the write protection for RTC registers */ + RTC->WPR = 0xFF; + + return status; +} + +/** + * @brief Fills each RTC_InitStruct member with its default value. + * @param RTC_InitStruct: pointer to a RTC_InitTypeDef structure which will be + * initialized. + * @retval None + */ +void RTC_StructInit(RTC_InitTypeDef* RTC_InitStruct) +{ + /* Initialize the RTC_HourFormat member */ + RTC_InitStruct->RTC_HourFormat = RTC_HourFormat_24; + + /* Initialize the RTC_AsynchPrediv member */ + RTC_InitStruct->RTC_AsynchPrediv = (uint32_t)0x7F; + + /* Initialize the RTC_SynchPrediv member */ + RTC_InitStruct->RTC_SynchPrediv = (uint32_t)0xFF; +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the RTC registers write protection. + * @note All the RTC registers are write protected except for RTC_ISR[13:8], + * RTC_TAFCR and RTC_BKPxR. + * @note Writing a wrong key reactivates the write protection. + * @note The protection mechanism is not affected by system reset. + * @param NewState: new state of the write protection. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void RTC_WriteProtectionCmd(FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the write protection for RTC registers */ + RTC->WPR = 0xFF; + } + else + { + /* Disable the write protection for RTC registers */ + RTC->WPR = 0xCA; + RTC->WPR = 0x53; + } +} + +/** + * @brief Enters the RTC Initialization mode. + * @note The RTC Initialization mode is write protected, use the + * RTC_WriteProtectionCmd(DISABLE) before calling this function. + * @param None + * @retval An ErrorStatus enumeration value: + * - SUCCESS: RTC is in Init mode + * - ERROR: RTC is not in Init mode + */ +ErrorStatus RTC_EnterInitMode(void) +{ + __IO uint32_t initcounter = 0x00; + ErrorStatus status = ERROR; + uint32_t initstatus = 0x00; + + /* Check if the Initialization mode is set */ + if ((RTC->ISR & RTC_ISR_INITF) == (uint32_t)RESET) + { + /* Set the Initialization mode */ + RTC->ISR = (uint32_t)RTC_INIT_MASK; + + /* Wait till RTC is in INIT state and if Time out is reached exit */ + do + { + initstatus = RTC->ISR & RTC_ISR_INITF; + initcounter++; + } while((initcounter != INITMODE_TIMEOUT) && (initstatus == 0x00)); + + if ((RTC->ISR & RTC_ISR_INITF) != RESET) + { + status = SUCCESS; + } + else + { + status = ERROR; + } + } + else + { + status = SUCCESS; + } + + return (status); +} + +/** + * @brief Exits the RTC Initialization mode. + * @note When the initialization sequence is complete, the calendar restarts + * counting after 4 RTCCLK cycles. + * @note The RTC Initialization mode is write protected, use the + * RTC_WriteProtectionCmd(DISABLE) before calling this function. + * @param None + * @retval None + */ +void RTC_ExitInitMode(void) +{ + /* Exit Initialization mode */ + RTC->ISR &= (uint32_t)~RTC_ISR_INIT; +} + +/** + * @brief Waits until the RTC Time and Date registers (RTC_TR and RTC_DR) are + * synchronized with RTC APB clock. + * @note The RTC Resynchronization mode is write protected, use the + * RTC_WriteProtectionCmd(DISABLE) before calling this function. + * @note To read the calendar through the shadow registers after Calendar + * initialization, calendar update or after wakeup from low power modes + * the software must first clear the RSF flag. + * The software must then wait until it is set again before reading + * the calendar, which means that the calendar registers have been + * correctly copied into the RTC_TR and RTC_DR shadow registers. + * @param None + * @retval An ErrorStatus enumeration value: + * - SUCCESS: RTC registers are synchronised + * - ERROR: RTC registers are not synchronised + */ +ErrorStatus RTC_WaitForSynchro(void) +{ + __IO uint32_t synchrocounter = 0; + ErrorStatus status = ERROR; + uint32_t synchrostatus = 0x00; + + /* Disable the write protection for RTC registers */ + RTC->WPR = 0xCA; + RTC->WPR = 0x53; + + /* Clear RSF flag */ + RTC->ISR &= (uint32_t)RTC_RSF_MASK; + + /* Wait the registers to be synchronised */ + do + { + synchrostatus = RTC->ISR & RTC_ISR_RSF; + synchrocounter++; + } while((synchrocounter != SYNCHRO_TIMEOUT) && (synchrostatus == 0x00)); + + if ((RTC->ISR & RTC_ISR_RSF) != RESET) + { + status = SUCCESS; + } + else + { + status = ERROR; + } + + /* Enable the write protection for RTC registers */ + RTC->WPR = 0xFF; + + return (status); +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the RTC reference clock detection. + * @param NewState: new state of the RTC reference clock. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval An ErrorStatus enumeration value: + * - SUCCESS: RTC reference clock detection is enabled + * - ERROR: RTC reference clock detection is disabled + */ +ErrorStatus RTC_RefClockCmd(FunctionalState NewState) +{ + ErrorStatus status = ERROR; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + /* Disable the write protection for RTC registers */ + RTC->WPR = 0xCA; + RTC->WPR = 0x53; + + /* Set Initialization mode */ + if (RTC_EnterInitMode() == ERROR) + { + status = ERROR; + } + else + { + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the RTC reference clock detection */ + RTC->CR |= RTC_CR_REFCKON; + } + else + { + /* Disable the RTC reference clock detection */ + RTC->CR &= ~RTC_CR_REFCKON; + } + /* Exit Initialization mode */ + RTC_ExitInitMode(); + + status = SUCCESS; + } + + /* Enable the write protection for RTC registers */ + RTC->WPR = 0xFF; + + return status; +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or Disables the Bypass Shadow feature. + * @note When the Bypass Shadow is enabled the calendar value are taken + * directly from the Calendar counter. + * @param NewState: new state of the Bypass Shadow feature. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None +*/ +void RTC_BypassShadowCmd(FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + /* Disable the write protection for RTC registers */ + RTC->WPR = 0xCA; + RTC->WPR = 0x53; + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Set the BYPSHAD bit */ + RTC->CR |= (uint8_t)RTC_CR_BYPSHAD; + } + else + { + /* Reset the BYPSHAD bit */ + RTC->CR &= (uint8_t)~RTC_CR_BYPSHAD; + } + + /* Enable the write protection for RTC registers */ + RTC->WPR = 0xFF; +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup RTC_Group2 Time and Date configuration functions + * @brief Time and Date configuration functions + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### Time and Date configuration functions ##### + =============================================================================== + [..] This section provide functions allowing to program and read the RTC + Calendar (Time and Date). + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Set the RTC current time. + * @param RTC_Format: specifies the format of the entered parameters. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg RTC_Format_BIN: Binary data format. + * @arg RTC_Format_BCD: BCD data format. + * @param RTC_TimeStruct: pointer to a RTC_TimeTypeDef structure that contains + * the time configuration information for the RTC. + * @retval An ErrorStatus enumeration value: + * - SUCCESS: RTC Time register is configured + * - ERROR: RTC Time register is not configured + */ +ErrorStatus RTC_SetTime(uint32_t RTC_Format, RTC_TimeTypeDef* RTC_TimeStruct) +{ + uint32_t tmpreg = 0; + ErrorStatus status = ERROR; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RTC_FORMAT(RTC_Format)); + + if (RTC_Format == RTC_Format_BIN) + { + if ((RTC->CR & RTC_CR_FMT) != (uint32_t)RESET) + { + assert_param(IS_RTC_HOUR12(RTC_TimeStruct->RTC_Hours)); + assert_param(IS_RTC_H12(RTC_TimeStruct->RTC_H12)); + } + else + { + RTC_TimeStruct->RTC_H12 = 0x00; + assert_param(IS_RTC_HOUR24(RTC_TimeStruct->RTC_Hours)); + } + assert_param(IS_RTC_MINUTES(RTC_TimeStruct->RTC_Minutes)); + assert_param(IS_RTC_SECONDS(RTC_TimeStruct->RTC_Seconds)); + } + else + { + if ((RTC->CR & RTC_CR_FMT) != (uint32_t)RESET) + { + tmpreg = RTC_Bcd2ToByte(RTC_TimeStruct->RTC_Hours); + assert_param(IS_RTC_HOUR12(tmpreg)); + assert_param(IS_RTC_H12(RTC_TimeStruct->RTC_H12)); + } + else + { + RTC_TimeStruct->RTC_H12 = 0x00; + assert_param(IS_RTC_HOUR24(RTC_Bcd2ToByte(RTC_TimeStruct->RTC_Hours))); + } + assert_param(IS_RTC_MINUTES(RTC_Bcd2ToByte(RTC_TimeStruct->RTC_Minutes))); + assert_param(IS_RTC_SECONDS(RTC_Bcd2ToByte(RTC_TimeStruct->RTC_Seconds))); + } + + /* Check the input parameters format */ + if (RTC_Format != RTC_Format_BIN) + { + tmpreg = (((uint32_t)(RTC_TimeStruct->RTC_Hours) << 16) | \ + ((uint32_t)(RTC_TimeStruct->RTC_Minutes) << 8) | \ + ((uint32_t)RTC_TimeStruct->RTC_Seconds) | \ + ((uint32_t)(RTC_TimeStruct->RTC_H12) << 16)); + } + else + { + tmpreg = (uint32_t)(((uint32_t)RTC_ByteToBcd2(RTC_TimeStruct->RTC_Hours) << 16) | \ + ((uint32_t)RTC_ByteToBcd2(RTC_TimeStruct->RTC_Minutes) << 8) | \ + ((uint32_t)RTC_ByteToBcd2(RTC_TimeStruct->RTC_Seconds)) | \ + (((uint32_t)RTC_TimeStruct->RTC_H12) << 16)); + } + + /* Disable the write protection for RTC registers */ + RTC->WPR = 0xCA; + RTC->WPR = 0x53; + + /* Set Initialization mode */ + if (RTC_EnterInitMode() == ERROR) + { + status = ERROR; + } + else + { + /* Set the RTC_TR register */ + RTC->TR = (uint32_t)(tmpreg & RTC_TR_RESERVED_MASK); + + /* Exit Initialization mode */ + RTC_ExitInitMode(); + + /* If RTC_CR_BYPSHAD bit = 0, wait for synchro else this check is not needed */ + if ((RTC->CR & RTC_CR_BYPSHAD) == RESET) + { + if (RTC_WaitForSynchro() == ERROR) + { + status = ERROR; + } + else + { + status = SUCCESS; + } + } + else + { + status = SUCCESS; + } + + } + /* Enable the write protection for RTC registers */ + RTC->WPR = 0xFF; + + return status; +} + +/** + * @brief Fills each RTC_TimeStruct member with its default value + * (Time = 00h:00min:00sec). + * @param RTC_TimeStruct: pointer to a RTC_TimeTypeDef structure which will be + * initialized. + * @retval None + */ +void RTC_TimeStructInit(RTC_TimeTypeDef* RTC_TimeStruct) +{ + /* Time = 00h:00min:00sec */ + RTC_TimeStruct->RTC_H12 = RTC_H12_AM; + RTC_TimeStruct->RTC_Hours = 0; + RTC_TimeStruct->RTC_Minutes = 0; + RTC_TimeStruct->RTC_Seconds = 0; +} + +/** + * @brief Get the RTC current Time. + * @param RTC_Format: specifies the format of the returned parameters. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg RTC_Format_BIN: Binary data format. + * @arg RTC_Format_BCD: BCD data format. + * @param RTC_TimeStruct: pointer to a RTC_TimeTypeDef structure that will + * contain the returned current time configuration. + * @retval None + */ +void RTC_GetTime(uint32_t RTC_Format, RTC_TimeTypeDef* RTC_TimeStruct) +{ + uint32_t tmpreg = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RTC_FORMAT(RTC_Format)); + + /* Get the RTC_TR register */ + tmpreg = (uint32_t)(RTC->TR & RTC_TR_RESERVED_MASK); + + /* Fill the structure fields with the read parameters */ + RTC_TimeStruct->RTC_Hours = (uint8_t)((tmpreg & (RTC_TR_HT | RTC_TR_HU)) >> 16); + RTC_TimeStruct->RTC_Minutes = (uint8_t)((tmpreg & (RTC_TR_MNT | RTC_TR_MNU)) >>8); + RTC_TimeStruct->RTC_Seconds = (uint8_t)(tmpreg & (RTC_TR_ST | RTC_TR_SU)); + RTC_TimeStruct->RTC_H12 = (uint8_t)((tmpreg & (RTC_TR_PM)) >> 16); + + /* Check the input parameters format */ + if (RTC_Format == RTC_Format_BIN) + { + /* Convert the structure parameters to Binary format */ + RTC_TimeStruct->RTC_Hours = (uint8_t)RTC_Bcd2ToByte(RTC_TimeStruct->RTC_Hours); + RTC_TimeStruct->RTC_Minutes = (uint8_t)RTC_Bcd2ToByte(RTC_TimeStruct->RTC_Minutes); + RTC_TimeStruct->RTC_Seconds = (uint8_t)RTC_Bcd2ToByte(RTC_TimeStruct->RTC_Seconds); + } +} + +/** + * @brief Gets the RTC current Calendar Subseconds value. + * @note This function freeze the Time and Date registers after reading the + * SSR register. + * @param None + * @retval RTC current Calendar Subseconds value. + */ +uint32_t RTC_GetSubSecond(void) +{ + uint32_t tmpreg = 0; + + /* Get subseconds values from the correspondent registers*/ + tmpreg = (uint32_t)(RTC->SSR); + + /* Read DR register to unfroze calendar registers */ + (void) (RTC->DR); + + return (tmpreg); +} + +/** + * @brief Set the RTC current date. + * @param RTC_Format: specifies the format of the entered parameters. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg RTC_Format_BIN: Binary data format. + * @arg RTC_Format_BCD: BCD data format. + * @param RTC_DateStruct: pointer to a RTC_DateTypeDef structure that contains + * the date configuration information for the RTC. + * @retval An ErrorStatus enumeration value: + * - SUCCESS: RTC Date register is configured + * - ERROR: RTC Date register is not configured + */ +ErrorStatus RTC_SetDate(uint32_t RTC_Format, RTC_DateTypeDef* RTC_DateStruct) +{ + uint32_t tmpreg = 0; + ErrorStatus status = ERROR; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RTC_FORMAT(RTC_Format)); + + if ((RTC_Format == RTC_Format_BIN) && ((RTC_DateStruct->RTC_Month & 0x10) == 0x10)) + { + RTC_DateStruct->RTC_Month = (RTC_DateStruct->RTC_Month & (uint32_t)~(0x10)) + 0x0A; + } + if (RTC_Format == RTC_Format_BIN) + { + assert_param(IS_RTC_YEAR(RTC_DateStruct->RTC_Year)); + assert_param(IS_RTC_MONTH(RTC_DateStruct->RTC_Month)); + assert_param(IS_RTC_DATE(RTC_DateStruct->RTC_Date)); + } + else + { + assert_param(IS_RTC_YEAR(RTC_Bcd2ToByte(RTC_DateStruct->RTC_Year))); + tmpreg = RTC_Bcd2ToByte(RTC_DateStruct->RTC_Month); + assert_param(IS_RTC_MONTH(tmpreg)); + tmpreg = RTC_Bcd2ToByte(RTC_DateStruct->RTC_Date); + assert_param(IS_RTC_DATE(tmpreg)); + } + assert_param(IS_RTC_WEEKDAY(RTC_DateStruct->RTC_WeekDay)); + + /* Check the input parameters format */ + if (RTC_Format != RTC_Format_BIN) + { + tmpreg = ((((uint32_t)RTC_DateStruct->RTC_Year) << 16) | \ + (((uint32_t)RTC_DateStruct->RTC_Month) << 8) | \ + ((uint32_t)RTC_DateStruct->RTC_Date) | \ + (((uint32_t)RTC_DateStruct->RTC_WeekDay) << 13)); + } + else + { + tmpreg = (((uint32_t)RTC_ByteToBcd2(RTC_DateStruct->RTC_Year) << 16) | \ + ((uint32_t)RTC_ByteToBcd2(RTC_DateStruct->RTC_Month) << 8) | \ + ((uint32_t)RTC_ByteToBcd2(RTC_DateStruct->RTC_Date)) | \ + ((uint32_t)RTC_DateStruct->RTC_WeekDay << 13)); + } + + /* Disable the write protection for RTC registers */ + RTC->WPR = 0xCA; + RTC->WPR = 0x53; + + /* Set Initialization mode */ + if (RTC_EnterInitMode() == ERROR) + { + status = ERROR; + } + else + { + /* Set the RTC_DR register */ + RTC->DR = (uint32_t)(tmpreg & RTC_DR_RESERVED_MASK); + + /* Exit Initialization mode */ + RTC_ExitInitMode(); + + /* If RTC_CR_BYPSHAD bit = 0, wait for synchro else this check is not needed */ + if ((RTC->CR & RTC_CR_BYPSHAD) == RESET) + { + if (RTC_WaitForSynchro() == ERROR) + { + status = ERROR; + } + else + { + status = SUCCESS; + } + } + else + { + status = SUCCESS; + } + } + /* Enable the write protection for RTC registers */ + RTC->WPR = 0xFF; + + return status; +} + +/** + * @brief Fills each RTC_DateStruct member with its default value + * (Monday, January 01 xx00). + * @param RTC_DateStruct: pointer to a RTC_DateTypeDef structure which will be + * initialized. + * @retval None + */ +void RTC_DateStructInit(RTC_DateTypeDef* RTC_DateStruct) +{ + /* Monday, January 01 xx00 */ + RTC_DateStruct->RTC_WeekDay = RTC_Weekday_Monday; + RTC_DateStruct->RTC_Date = 1; + RTC_DateStruct->RTC_Month = RTC_Month_January; + RTC_DateStruct->RTC_Year = 0; +} + +/** + * @brief Get the RTC current date. + * @param RTC_Format: specifies the format of the returned parameters. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg RTC_Format_BIN: Binary data format. + * @arg RTC_Format_BCD: BCD data format. + * @param RTC_DateStruct: pointer to a RTC_DateTypeDef structure that will + * contain the returned current date configuration. + * @retval None + */ +void RTC_GetDate(uint32_t RTC_Format, RTC_DateTypeDef* RTC_DateStruct) +{ + uint32_t tmpreg = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RTC_FORMAT(RTC_Format)); + + /* Get the RTC_TR register */ + tmpreg = (uint32_t)(RTC->DR & RTC_DR_RESERVED_MASK); + + /* Fill the structure fields with the read parameters */ + RTC_DateStruct->RTC_Year = (uint8_t)((tmpreg & (RTC_DR_YT | RTC_DR_YU)) >> 16); + RTC_DateStruct->RTC_Month = (uint8_t)((tmpreg & (RTC_DR_MT | RTC_DR_MU)) >> 8); + RTC_DateStruct->RTC_Date = (uint8_t)(tmpreg & (RTC_DR_DT | RTC_DR_DU)); + RTC_DateStruct->RTC_WeekDay = (uint8_t)((tmpreg & (RTC_DR_WDU)) >> 13); + + /* Check the input parameters format */ + if (RTC_Format == RTC_Format_BIN) + { + /* Convert the structure parameters to Binary format */ + RTC_DateStruct->RTC_Year = (uint8_t)RTC_Bcd2ToByte(RTC_DateStruct->RTC_Year); + RTC_DateStruct->RTC_Month = (uint8_t)RTC_Bcd2ToByte(RTC_DateStruct->RTC_Month); + RTC_DateStruct->RTC_Date = (uint8_t)RTC_Bcd2ToByte(RTC_DateStruct->RTC_Date); + } +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup RTC_Group3 Alarms configuration functions + * @brief Alarms (Alarm A and Alarm B) configuration functions + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### Alarms (Alarm A and Alarm B) configuration functions ##### + =============================================================================== + [..] This section provide functions allowing to program and read the RTC + Alarms. + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Set the specified RTC Alarm. + * @note The Alarm register can only be written when the corresponding Alarm + * is disabled (Use the RTC_AlarmCmd(DISABLE)). + * @param RTC_Format: specifies the format of the returned parameters. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg RTC_Format_BIN: Binary data format. + * @arg RTC_Format_BCD: BCD data format. + * @param RTC_Alarm: specifies the alarm to be configured. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg RTC_Alarm_A: to select Alarm A. + * @arg RTC_Alarm_B: to select Alarm B. + * @param RTC_AlarmStruct: pointer to a RTC_AlarmTypeDef structure that + * contains the alarm configuration parameters. + * @retval None + */ +void RTC_SetAlarm(uint32_t RTC_Format, uint32_t RTC_Alarm, RTC_AlarmTypeDef* RTC_AlarmStruct) +{ + uint32_t tmpreg = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RTC_FORMAT(RTC_Format)); + assert_param(IS_RTC_ALARM(RTC_Alarm)); + assert_param(IS_ALARM_MASK(RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmMask)); + assert_param(IS_RTC_ALARM_DATE_WEEKDAY_SEL(RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmDateWeekDaySel)); + + if (RTC_Format == RTC_Format_BIN) + { + if ((RTC->CR & RTC_CR_FMT) != (uint32_t)RESET) + { + assert_param(IS_RTC_HOUR12(RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmTime.RTC_Hours)); + assert_param(IS_RTC_H12(RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmTime.RTC_H12)); + } + else + { + RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmTime.RTC_H12 = 0x00; + assert_param(IS_RTC_HOUR24(RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmTime.RTC_Hours)); + } + assert_param(IS_RTC_MINUTES(RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmTime.RTC_Minutes)); + assert_param(IS_RTC_SECONDS(RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmTime.RTC_Seconds)); + + if(RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmDateWeekDaySel == RTC_AlarmDateWeekDaySel_Date) + { + assert_param(IS_RTC_ALARM_DATE_WEEKDAY_DATE(RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmDateWeekDay)); + } + else + { + assert_param(IS_RTC_ALARM_DATE_WEEKDAY_WEEKDAY(RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmDateWeekDay)); + } + } + else + { + if ((RTC->CR & RTC_CR_FMT) != (uint32_t)RESET) + { + tmpreg = RTC_Bcd2ToByte(RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmTime.RTC_Hours); + assert_param(IS_RTC_HOUR12(tmpreg)); + assert_param(IS_RTC_H12(RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmTime.RTC_H12)); + } + else + { + RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmTime.RTC_H12 = 0x00; + assert_param(IS_RTC_HOUR24(RTC_Bcd2ToByte(RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmTime.RTC_Hours))); + } + + assert_param(IS_RTC_MINUTES(RTC_Bcd2ToByte(RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmTime.RTC_Minutes))); + assert_param(IS_RTC_SECONDS(RTC_Bcd2ToByte(RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmTime.RTC_Seconds))); + + if(RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmDateWeekDaySel == RTC_AlarmDateWeekDaySel_Date) + { + tmpreg = RTC_Bcd2ToByte(RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmDateWeekDay); + assert_param(IS_RTC_ALARM_DATE_WEEKDAY_DATE(tmpreg)); + } + else + { + tmpreg = RTC_Bcd2ToByte(RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmDateWeekDay); + assert_param(IS_RTC_ALARM_DATE_WEEKDAY_WEEKDAY(tmpreg)); + } + } + + /* Check the input parameters format */ + if (RTC_Format != RTC_Format_BIN) + { + tmpreg = (((uint32_t)(RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmTime.RTC_Hours) << 16) | \ + ((uint32_t)(RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmTime.RTC_Minutes) << 8) | \ + ((uint32_t)RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmTime.RTC_Seconds) | \ + ((uint32_t)(RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmTime.RTC_H12) << 16) | \ + ((uint32_t)(RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmDateWeekDay) << 24) | \ + ((uint32_t)RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmDateWeekDaySel) | \ + ((uint32_t)RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmMask)); + } + else + { + tmpreg = (((uint32_t)RTC_ByteToBcd2(RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmTime.RTC_Hours) << 16) | \ + ((uint32_t)RTC_ByteToBcd2(RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmTime.RTC_Minutes) << 8) | \ + ((uint32_t)RTC_ByteToBcd2(RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmTime.RTC_Seconds)) | \ + ((uint32_t)(RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmTime.RTC_H12) << 16) | \ + ((uint32_t)RTC_ByteToBcd2(RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmDateWeekDay) << 24) | \ + ((uint32_t)RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmDateWeekDaySel) | \ + ((uint32_t)RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmMask)); + } + + /* Disable the write protection for RTC registers */ + RTC->WPR = 0xCA; + RTC->WPR = 0x53; + + /* Configure the Alarm register */ + if (RTC_Alarm == RTC_Alarm_A) + { + RTC->ALRMAR = (uint32_t)tmpreg; + } + else + { + RTC->ALRMBR = (uint32_t)tmpreg; + } + + /* Enable the write protection for RTC registers */ + RTC->WPR = 0xFF; +} + +/** + * @brief Fills each RTC_AlarmStruct member with its default value + * (Time = 00h:00mn:00sec / Date = 1st day of the month/Mask = + * all fields are masked). + * @param RTC_AlarmStruct: pointer to a @ref RTC_AlarmTypeDef structure which + * will be initialized. + * @retval None + */ +void RTC_AlarmStructInit(RTC_AlarmTypeDef* RTC_AlarmStruct) +{ + /* Alarm Time Settings : Time = 00h:00mn:00sec */ + RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmTime.RTC_H12 = RTC_H12_AM; + RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmTime.RTC_Hours = 0; + RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmTime.RTC_Minutes = 0; + RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmTime.RTC_Seconds = 0; + + /* Alarm Date Settings : Date = 1st day of the month */ + RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmDateWeekDaySel = RTC_AlarmDateWeekDaySel_Date; + RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmDateWeekDay = 1; + + /* Alarm Masks Settings : Mask = all fields are not masked */ + RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmMask = RTC_AlarmMask_None; +} + +/** + * @brief Get the RTC Alarm value and masks. + * @param RTC_Format: specifies the format of the output parameters. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg RTC_Format_BIN: Binary data format. + * @arg RTC_Format_BCD: BCD data format. + * @param RTC_Alarm: specifies the alarm to be read. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg RTC_Alarm_A: to select Alarm A. + * @arg RTC_Alarm_B: to select Alarm B. + * @param RTC_AlarmStruct: pointer to a RTC_AlarmTypeDef structure that will + * contains the output alarm configuration values. + * @retval None + */ +void RTC_GetAlarm(uint32_t RTC_Format, uint32_t RTC_Alarm, RTC_AlarmTypeDef* RTC_AlarmStruct) +{ + uint32_t tmpreg = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RTC_FORMAT(RTC_Format)); + assert_param(IS_RTC_ALARM(RTC_Alarm)); + + /* Get the RTC_ALRMxR register */ + if (RTC_Alarm == RTC_Alarm_A) + { + tmpreg = (uint32_t)(RTC->ALRMAR); + } + else + { + tmpreg = (uint32_t)(RTC->ALRMBR); + } + + /* Fill the structure with the read parameters */ + RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmTime.RTC_Hours = (uint32_t)((tmpreg & (RTC_ALRMAR_HT | \ + RTC_ALRMAR_HU)) >> 16); + RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmTime.RTC_Minutes = (uint32_t)((tmpreg & (RTC_ALRMAR_MNT | \ + RTC_ALRMAR_MNU)) >> 8); + RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmTime.RTC_Seconds = (uint32_t)(tmpreg & (RTC_ALRMAR_ST | \ + RTC_ALRMAR_SU)); + RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmTime.RTC_H12 = (uint32_t)((tmpreg & RTC_ALRMAR_PM) >> 16); + RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmDateWeekDay = (uint32_t)((tmpreg & (RTC_ALRMAR_DT | RTC_ALRMAR_DU)) >> 24); + RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmDateWeekDaySel = (uint32_t)(tmpreg & RTC_ALRMAR_WDSEL); + RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmMask = (uint32_t)(tmpreg & RTC_AlarmMask_All); + + if (RTC_Format == RTC_Format_BIN) + { + RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmTime.RTC_Hours = RTC_Bcd2ToByte(RTC_AlarmStruct-> \ + RTC_AlarmTime.RTC_Hours); + RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmTime.RTC_Minutes = RTC_Bcd2ToByte(RTC_AlarmStruct-> \ + RTC_AlarmTime.RTC_Minutes); + RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmTime.RTC_Seconds = RTC_Bcd2ToByte(RTC_AlarmStruct-> \ + RTC_AlarmTime.RTC_Seconds); + RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmDateWeekDay = RTC_Bcd2ToByte(RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmDateWeekDay); + } +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the specified RTC Alarm. + * @param RTC_Alarm: specifies the alarm to be configured. + * This parameter can be any combination of the following values: + * @arg RTC_Alarm_A: to select Alarm A. + * @arg RTC_Alarm_B: to select Alarm B. + * @param NewState: new state of the specified alarm. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval An ErrorStatus enumeration value: + * - SUCCESS: RTC Alarm is enabled/disabled + * - ERROR: RTC Alarm is not enabled/disabled + */ +ErrorStatus RTC_AlarmCmd(uint32_t RTC_Alarm, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + __IO uint32_t alarmcounter = 0x00; + uint32_t alarmstatus = 0x00; + ErrorStatus status = ERROR; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RTC_CMD_ALARM(RTC_Alarm)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + /* Disable the write protection for RTC registers */ + RTC->WPR = 0xCA; + RTC->WPR = 0x53; + + /* Configure the Alarm state */ + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + RTC->CR |= (uint32_t)RTC_Alarm; + + status = SUCCESS; + } + else + { + /* Disable the Alarm in RTC_CR register */ + RTC->CR &= (uint32_t)~RTC_Alarm; + + /* Wait till RTC ALRxWF flag is set and if Time out is reached exit */ + do + { + alarmstatus = RTC->ISR & (RTC_Alarm >> 8); + alarmcounter++; + } while((alarmcounter != INITMODE_TIMEOUT) && (alarmstatus == 0x00)); + + if ((RTC->ISR & (RTC_Alarm >> 8)) == RESET) + { + status = ERROR; + } + else + { + status = SUCCESS; + } + } + + /* Enable the write protection for RTC registers */ + RTC->WPR = 0xFF; + + return status; +} + +/** + * @brief Configure the RTC AlarmA/B Subseconds value and mask.* + * @note This function is performed only when the Alarm is disabled. + * @param RTC_Alarm: specifies the alarm to be configured. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg RTC_Alarm_A: to select Alarm A. + * @arg RTC_Alarm_B: to select Alarm B. + * @param RTC_AlarmSubSecondValue: specifies the Subseconds value. + * This parameter can be a value from 0 to 0x00007FFF. + * @param RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask: specifies the Subseconds Mask. + * This parameter can be any combination of the following values: + * @arg RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask_All: All Alarm SS fields are masked. + * There is no comparison on sub seconds for Alarm. + * @arg RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask_SS14_1: SS[14:1] are don't care in Alarm comparison. + * Only SS[0] is compared + * @arg RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask_SS14_2: SS[14:2] are don't care in Alarm comparison. + * Only SS[1:0] are compared + * @arg RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask_SS14_3: SS[14:3] are don't care in Alarm comparison. + * Only SS[2:0] are compared + * @arg RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask_SS14_4: SS[14:4] are don't care in Alarm comparison. + * Only SS[3:0] are compared + * @arg RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask_SS14_5: SS[14:5] are don't care in Alarm comparison. + * Only SS[4:0] are compared. + * @arg RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask_SS14_6: SS[14:6] are don't care in Alarm comparison. + * Only SS[5:0] are compared. + * @arg RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask_SS14_7: SS[14:7] are don't care in Alarm comparison. + * Only SS[6:0] are compared. + * @arg RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask_SS14_8: SS[14:8] are don't care in Alarm comparison. + * Only SS[7:0] are compared. + * @arg RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask_SS14_9: SS[14:9] are don't care in Alarm comparison. + * Only SS[8:0] are compared. + * @arg RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask_SS14_10: SS[14:10] are don't care in Alarm comparison. + * Only SS[9:0] are compared. + * @arg RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask_SS14_11: SS[14:11] are don't care in Alarm comparison. + * Only SS[10:0] are compared. + * @arg RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask_SS14_12: SS[14:12] are don't care in Alarm comparison. + * Only SS[11:0] are compared. + * @arg RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask_SS14_13: SS[14:13] are don't care in Alarm comparison. + * Only SS[12:0] are compared. + * @arg RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask_SS14: SS[14] is don't care in Alarm comparison. + * Only SS[13:0] are compared. + * @arg RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask_None: SS[14:0] are compared and must match + * to activate alarm. + * @retval None + */ +void RTC_AlarmSubSecondConfig(uint32_t RTC_Alarm, uint32_t RTC_AlarmSubSecondValue, uint32_t RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask) +{ + uint32_t tmpreg = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RTC_ALARM(RTC_Alarm)); + assert_param(IS_RTC_ALARM_SUB_SECOND_VALUE(RTC_AlarmSubSecondValue)); + assert_param(IS_RTC_ALARM_SUB_SECOND_MASK(RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask)); + + /* Disable the write protection for RTC registers */ + RTC->WPR = 0xCA; + RTC->WPR = 0x53; + + /* Configure the Alarm A or Alarm B SubSecond registers */ + tmpreg = (uint32_t) (uint32_t)(RTC_AlarmSubSecondValue) | (uint32_t)(RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask); + + if (RTC_Alarm == RTC_Alarm_A) + { + /* Configure the AlarmA SubSecond register */ + RTC->ALRMASSR = tmpreg; + } + else + { + /* Configure the Alarm B SubSecond register */ + RTC->ALRMBSSR = tmpreg; + } + + /* Enable the write protection for RTC registers */ + RTC->WPR = 0xFF; + +} + +/** + * @brief Gets the RTC Alarm Subseconds value. + * @param RTC_Alarm: specifies the alarm to be read. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg RTC_Alarm_A: to select Alarm A. + * @arg RTC_Alarm_B: to select Alarm B. + * @param None + * @retval RTC Alarm Subseconds value. + */ +uint32_t RTC_GetAlarmSubSecond(uint32_t RTC_Alarm) +{ + uint32_t tmpreg = 0; + + /* Get the RTC_ALRMxR register */ + if (RTC_Alarm == RTC_Alarm_A) + { + tmpreg = (uint32_t)((RTC->ALRMASSR) & RTC_ALRMASSR_SS); + } + else + { + tmpreg = (uint32_t)((RTC->ALRMBSSR) & RTC_ALRMBSSR_SS); + } + + return (tmpreg); +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup RTC_Group4 WakeUp Timer configuration functions + * @brief WakeUp Timer configuration functions + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### WakeUp Timer configuration functions ##### + =============================================================================== + [..] This section provide functions allowing to program and read the RTC WakeUp. + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Configures the RTC Wakeup clock source. + * @note The WakeUp Clock source can only be changed when the RTC WakeUp + * is disabled (Use the RTC_WakeUpCmd(DISABLE)). + * @param RTC_WakeUpClock: Wakeup Clock source. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg RTC_WakeUpClock_RTCCLK_Div16: RTC Wakeup Counter Clock = RTCCLK/16. + * @arg RTC_WakeUpClock_RTCCLK_Div8: RTC Wakeup Counter Clock = RTCCLK/8. + * @arg RTC_WakeUpClock_RTCCLK_Div4: RTC Wakeup Counter Clock = RTCCLK/4. + * @arg RTC_WakeUpClock_RTCCLK_Div2: RTC Wakeup Counter Clock = RTCCLK/2. + * @arg RTC_WakeUpClock_CK_SPRE_16bits: RTC Wakeup Counter Clock = CK_SPRE. + * @arg RTC_WakeUpClock_CK_SPRE_17bits: RTC Wakeup Counter Clock = CK_SPRE. + * @retval None + */ +void RTC_WakeUpClockConfig(uint32_t RTC_WakeUpClock) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RTC_WAKEUP_CLOCK(RTC_WakeUpClock)); + + /* Disable the write protection for RTC registers */ + RTC->WPR = 0xCA; + RTC->WPR = 0x53; + + /* Clear the Wakeup Timer clock source bits in CR register */ + RTC->CR &= (uint32_t)~RTC_CR_WUCKSEL; + + /* Configure the clock source */ + RTC->CR |= (uint32_t)RTC_WakeUpClock; + + /* Enable the write protection for RTC registers */ + RTC->WPR = 0xFF; +} + +/** + * @brief Configures the RTC Wakeup counter. + * @note The RTC WakeUp counter can only be written when the RTC WakeUp. + * is disabled (Use the RTC_WakeUpCmd(DISABLE)). + * @param RTC_WakeUpCounter: specifies the WakeUp counter. + * This parameter can be a value from 0x0000 to 0xFFFF. + * @retval None + */ +void RTC_SetWakeUpCounter(uint32_t RTC_WakeUpCounter) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RTC_WAKEUP_COUNTER(RTC_WakeUpCounter)); + + /* Disable the write protection for RTC registers */ + RTC->WPR = 0xCA; + RTC->WPR = 0x53; + + /* Configure the Wakeup Timer counter */ + RTC->WUTR = (uint32_t)RTC_WakeUpCounter; + + /* Enable the write protection for RTC registers */ + RTC->WPR = 0xFF; +} + +/** + * @brief Returns the RTC WakeUp timer counter value. + * @param None + * @retval The RTC WakeUp Counter value. + */ +uint32_t RTC_GetWakeUpCounter(void) +{ + /* Get the counter value */ + return ((uint32_t)(RTC->WUTR & RTC_WUTR_WUT)); +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or Disables the RTC WakeUp timer. + * @param NewState: new state of the WakeUp timer. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +ErrorStatus RTC_WakeUpCmd(FunctionalState NewState) +{ + __IO uint32_t wutcounter = 0x00; + uint32_t wutwfstatus = 0x00; + ErrorStatus status = ERROR; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + /* Disable the write protection for RTC registers */ + RTC->WPR = 0xCA; + RTC->WPR = 0x53; + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the Wakeup Timer */ + RTC->CR |= (uint32_t)RTC_CR_WUTE; + status = SUCCESS; + } + else + { + /* Disable the Wakeup Timer */ + RTC->CR &= (uint32_t)~RTC_CR_WUTE; + /* Wait till RTC WUTWF flag is set and if Time out is reached exit */ + do + { + wutwfstatus = RTC->ISR & RTC_ISR_WUTWF; + wutcounter++; + } while((wutcounter != INITMODE_TIMEOUT) && (wutwfstatus == 0x00)); + + if ((RTC->ISR & RTC_ISR_WUTWF) == RESET) + { + status = ERROR; + } + else + { + status = SUCCESS; + } + } + + /* Enable the write protection for RTC registers */ + RTC->WPR = 0xFF; + + return status; +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup RTC_Group5 Daylight Saving configuration functions + * @brief Daylight Saving configuration functions + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### Daylight Saving configuration functions ##### + =============================================================================== + [..] This section provide functions allowing to configure the RTC DayLight Saving. + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Adds or substract one hour from the current time. + * @param RTC_DayLightSaveOperation: the value of hour adjustment. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg RTC_DayLightSaving_SUB1H: Substract one hour (winter time). + * @arg RTC_DayLightSaving_ADD1H: Add one hour (summer time). + * @param RTC_StoreOperation: Specifies the value to be written in the BCK bit + * in CR register to store the operation. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg RTC_StoreOperation_Reset: BCK Bit Reset. + * @arg RTC_StoreOperation_Set: BCK Bit Set. + * @retval None + */ +void RTC_DayLightSavingConfig(uint32_t RTC_DayLightSaving, uint32_t RTC_StoreOperation) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RTC_DAYLIGHT_SAVING(RTC_DayLightSaving)); + assert_param(IS_RTC_STORE_OPERATION(RTC_StoreOperation)); + + /* Disable the write protection for RTC registers */ + RTC->WPR = 0xCA; + RTC->WPR = 0x53; + + /* Clear the bits to be configured */ + RTC->CR &= (uint32_t)~(RTC_CR_BCK); + + /* Configure the RTC_CR register */ + RTC->CR |= (uint32_t)(RTC_DayLightSaving | RTC_StoreOperation); + + /* Enable the write protection for RTC registers */ + RTC->WPR = 0xFF; +} + +/** + * @brief Returns the RTC Day Light Saving stored operation. + * @param None + * @retval RTC Day Light Saving stored operation. + * - RTC_StoreOperation_Reset + * - RTC_StoreOperation_Set + */ +uint32_t RTC_GetStoreOperation(void) +{ + return (RTC->CR & RTC_CR_BCK); +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup RTC_Group6 Output pin Configuration function + * @brief Output pin Configuration function + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### Output pin Configuration function ##### + =============================================================================== + [..] This section provide functions allowing to configure the RTC Output source. + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Configures the RTC output source (AFO_ALARM). + * @param RTC_Output: Specifies which signal will be routed to the RTC output. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg RTC_Output_Disable: No output selected + * @arg RTC_Output_AlarmA: signal of AlarmA mapped to output. + * @arg RTC_Output_AlarmB: signal of AlarmB mapped to output. + * @arg RTC_Output_WakeUp: signal of WakeUp mapped to output. + * @param RTC_OutputPolarity: Specifies the polarity of the output signal. + * This parameter can be one of the following: + * @arg RTC_OutputPolarity_High: The output pin is high when the + * ALRAF/ALRBF/WUTF is high (depending on OSEL). + * @arg RTC_OutputPolarity_Low: The output pin is low when the + * ALRAF/ALRBF/WUTF is high (depending on OSEL). + * @retval None + */ +void RTC_OutputConfig(uint32_t RTC_Output, uint32_t RTC_OutputPolarity) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RTC_OUTPUT(RTC_Output)); + assert_param(IS_RTC_OUTPUT_POL(RTC_OutputPolarity)); + + /* Disable the write protection for RTC registers */ + RTC->WPR = 0xCA; + RTC->WPR = 0x53; + + /* Clear the bits to be configured */ + RTC->CR &= (uint32_t)~(RTC_CR_OSEL | RTC_CR_POL); + + /* Configure the output selection and polarity */ + RTC->CR |= (uint32_t)(RTC_Output | RTC_OutputPolarity); + + /* Enable the write protection for RTC registers */ + RTC->WPR = 0xFF; +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup RTC_Group7 Coarse and Smooth Calibrations configuration functions + * @brief Coarse and Smooth Calibrations configuration functions + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### Coarse and Smooth Calibrations configuration functions ##### + =============================================================================== + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Configures the Coarse Calibration parameters. + * @param RTC_CalibSign: specifies the sign of the calibration value. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg RTC_CalibSign_Positive: The value sign is positive. + * @arg RTC_CalibSign_Negative: The value sign is negative. + * @param Value: value of calibration expressed in ppm (coded on 5 bits) + * This value should be between 0 and 63 when using negative sign + * with a 2-ppm step. + * This value should be between 0 and 126 when using positive sign + * with a 4-ppm step. + * @retval An ErrorStatus enumeration value: + * - SUCCESS: RTC Coarse calibration are initialized + * - ERROR: RTC Coarse calibration are not initialized + */ +ErrorStatus RTC_CoarseCalibConfig(uint32_t RTC_CalibSign, uint32_t Value) +{ + ErrorStatus status = ERROR; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RTC_CALIB_SIGN(RTC_CalibSign)); + assert_param(IS_RTC_CALIB_VALUE(Value)); + + /* Disable the write protection for RTC registers */ + RTC->WPR = 0xCA; + RTC->WPR = 0x53; + + /* Set Initialization mode */ + if (RTC_EnterInitMode() == ERROR) + { + status = ERROR; + } + else + { + /* Set the coarse calibration value */ + RTC->CALIBR = (uint32_t)(RTC_CalibSign | Value); + /* Exit Initialization mode */ + RTC_ExitInitMode(); + + status = SUCCESS; + } + + /* Enable the write protection for RTC registers */ + RTC->WPR = 0xFF; + + return status; +} + +/** +* @brief Enables or disables the Coarse calibration process. + * @param NewState: new state of the Coarse calibration. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval An ErrorStatus enumeration value: + * - SUCCESS: RTC Coarse calibration are enabled/disabled + * - ERROR: RTC Coarse calibration are not enabled/disabled + */ +ErrorStatus RTC_CoarseCalibCmd(FunctionalState NewState) +{ + ErrorStatus status = ERROR; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + /* Disable the write protection for RTC registers */ + RTC->WPR = 0xCA; + RTC->WPR = 0x53; + + /* Set Initialization mode */ + if (RTC_EnterInitMode() == ERROR) + { + status = ERROR; + } + else + { + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the Coarse Calibration */ + RTC->CR |= (uint32_t)RTC_CR_DCE; + } + else + { + /* Disable the Coarse Calibration */ + RTC->CR &= (uint32_t)~RTC_CR_DCE; + } + /* Exit Initialization mode */ + RTC_ExitInitMode(); + + status = SUCCESS; + } + + /* Enable the write protection for RTC registers */ + RTC->WPR = 0xFF; + + return status; +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the RTC clock to be output through the relative + * pin. + * @param NewState: new state of the coarse calibration Output. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void RTC_CalibOutputCmd(FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + /* Disable the write protection for RTC registers */ + RTC->WPR = 0xCA; + RTC->WPR = 0x53; + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the RTC clock output */ + RTC->CR |= (uint32_t)RTC_CR_COE; + } + else + { + /* Disable the RTC clock output */ + RTC->CR &= (uint32_t)~RTC_CR_COE; + } + + /* Enable the write protection for RTC registers */ + RTC->WPR = 0xFF; +} + +/** + * @brief Configure the Calibration Pinout (RTC_CALIB) Selection (1Hz or 512Hz). + * @param RTC_CalibOutput : Select the Calibration output Selection . + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg RTC_CalibOutput_512Hz: A signal has a regular waveform at 512Hz. + * @arg RTC_CalibOutput_1Hz: A signal has a regular waveform at 1Hz. + * @retval None +*/ +void RTC_CalibOutputConfig(uint32_t RTC_CalibOutput) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RTC_CALIB_OUTPUT(RTC_CalibOutput)); + + /* Disable the write protection for RTC registers */ + RTC->WPR = 0xCA; + RTC->WPR = 0x53; + + /*clear flags before config*/ + RTC->CR &= (uint32_t)~(RTC_CR_COSEL); + + /* Configure the RTC_CR register */ + RTC->CR |= (uint32_t)RTC_CalibOutput; + + /* Enable the write protection for RTC registers */ + RTC->WPR = 0xFF; +} + +/** + * @brief Configures the Smooth Calibration Settings. + * @param RTC_SmoothCalibPeriod: Select the Smooth Calibration Period. + * This parameter can be can be one of the following values: + * @arg RTC_SmoothCalibPeriod_32sec: The smooth calibration periode is 32s. + * @arg RTC_SmoothCalibPeriod_16sec: The smooth calibration periode is 16s. + * @arg RTC_SmoothCalibPeriod_8sec: The smooth calibartion periode is 8s. + * @param RTC_SmoothCalibPlusPulses: Select to Set or reset the CALP bit. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg RTC_SmoothCalibPlusPulses_Set: Add one RTCCLK puls every 2**11 pulses. + * @arg RTC_SmoothCalibPlusPulses_Reset: No RTCCLK pulses are added. + * @param RTC_SmouthCalibMinusPulsesValue: Select the value of CALM[8:0] bits. + * This parameter can be one any value from 0 to 0x000001FF. + * @retval An ErrorStatus enumeration value: + * - SUCCESS: RTC Calib registers are configured + * - ERROR: RTC Calib registers are not configured +*/ +ErrorStatus RTC_SmoothCalibConfig(uint32_t RTC_SmoothCalibPeriod, + uint32_t RTC_SmoothCalibPlusPulses, + uint32_t RTC_SmouthCalibMinusPulsesValue) +{ + ErrorStatus status = ERROR; + uint32_t recalpfcount = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RTC_SMOOTH_CALIB_PERIOD(RTC_SmoothCalibPeriod)); + assert_param(IS_RTC_SMOOTH_CALIB_PLUS(RTC_SmoothCalibPlusPulses)); + assert_param(IS_RTC_SMOOTH_CALIB_MINUS(RTC_SmouthCalibMinusPulsesValue)); + + /* Disable the write protection for RTC registers */ + RTC->WPR = 0xCA; + RTC->WPR = 0x53; + + /* check if a calibration is pending*/ + if ((RTC->ISR & RTC_ISR_RECALPF) != RESET) + { + /* wait until the Calibration is completed*/ + while (((RTC->ISR & RTC_ISR_RECALPF) != RESET) && (recalpfcount != RECALPF_TIMEOUT)) + { + recalpfcount++; + } + } + + /* check if the calibration pending is completed or if there is no calibration operation at all*/ + if ((RTC->ISR & RTC_ISR_RECALPF) == RESET) + { + /* Configure the Smooth calibration settings */ + RTC->CALR = (uint32_t)((uint32_t)RTC_SmoothCalibPeriod | (uint32_t)RTC_SmoothCalibPlusPulses | (uint32_t)RTC_SmouthCalibMinusPulsesValue); + + status = SUCCESS; + } + else + { + status = ERROR; + } + + /* Enable the write protection for RTC registers */ + RTC->WPR = 0xFF; + + return (ErrorStatus)(status); +} + +/** + * @} + */ + + +/** @defgroup RTC_Group8 TimeStamp configuration functions + * @brief TimeStamp configuration functions + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### TimeStamp configuration functions ##### + =============================================================================== + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Enables or Disables the RTC TimeStamp functionality with the + * specified time stamp pin stimulating edge. + * @param RTC_TimeStampEdge: Specifies the pin edge on which the TimeStamp is + * activated. + * This parameter can be one of the following: + * @arg RTC_TimeStampEdge_Rising: the Time stamp event occurs on the rising + * edge of the related pin. + * @arg RTC_TimeStampEdge_Falling: the Time stamp event occurs on the + * falling edge of the related pin. + * @param NewState: new state of the TimeStamp. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void RTC_TimeStampCmd(uint32_t RTC_TimeStampEdge, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + uint32_t tmpreg = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RTC_TIMESTAMP_EDGE(RTC_TimeStampEdge)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + /* Get the RTC_CR register and clear the bits to be configured */ + tmpreg = (uint32_t)(RTC->CR & (uint32_t)~(RTC_CR_TSEDGE | RTC_CR_TSE)); + + /* Get the new configuration */ + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + tmpreg |= (uint32_t)(RTC_TimeStampEdge | RTC_CR_TSE); + } + else + { + tmpreg |= (uint32_t)(RTC_TimeStampEdge); + } + + /* Disable the write protection for RTC registers */ + RTC->WPR = 0xCA; + RTC->WPR = 0x53; + + /* Configure the Time Stamp TSEDGE and Enable bits */ + RTC->CR = (uint32_t)tmpreg; + + /* Enable the write protection for RTC registers */ + RTC->WPR = 0xFF; +} + +/** + * @brief Get the RTC TimeStamp value and masks. + * @param RTC_Format: specifies the format of the output parameters. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg RTC_Format_BIN: Binary data format + * @arg RTC_Format_BCD: BCD data format + * @param RTC_StampTimeStruct: pointer to a RTC_TimeTypeDef structure that will + * contains the TimeStamp time values. + * @param RTC_StampDateStruct: pointer to a RTC_DateTypeDef structure that will + * contains the TimeStamp date values. + * @retval None + */ +void RTC_GetTimeStamp(uint32_t RTC_Format, RTC_TimeTypeDef* RTC_StampTimeStruct, + RTC_DateTypeDef* RTC_StampDateStruct) +{ + uint32_t tmptime = 0, tmpdate = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RTC_FORMAT(RTC_Format)); + + /* Get the TimeStamp time and date registers values */ + tmptime = (uint32_t)(RTC->TSTR & RTC_TR_RESERVED_MASK); + tmpdate = (uint32_t)(RTC->TSDR & RTC_DR_RESERVED_MASK); + + /* Fill the Time structure fields with the read parameters */ + RTC_StampTimeStruct->RTC_Hours = (uint8_t)((tmptime & (RTC_TR_HT | RTC_TR_HU)) >> 16); + RTC_StampTimeStruct->RTC_Minutes = (uint8_t)((tmptime & (RTC_TR_MNT | RTC_TR_MNU)) >> 8); + RTC_StampTimeStruct->RTC_Seconds = (uint8_t)(tmptime & (RTC_TR_ST | RTC_TR_SU)); + RTC_StampTimeStruct->RTC_H12 = (uint8_t)((tmptime & (RTC_TR_PM)) >> 16); + + /* Fill the Date structure fields with the read parameters */ + RTC_StampDateStruct->RTC_Year = 0; + RTC_StampDateStruct->RTC_Month = (uint8_t)((tmpdate & (RTC_DR_MT | RTC_DR_MU)) >> 8); + RTC_StampDateStruct->RTC_Date = (uint8_t)(tmpdate & (RTC_DR_DT | RTC_DR_DU)); + RTC_StampDateStruct->RTC_WeekDay = (uint8_t)((tmpdate & (RTC_DR_WDU)) >> 13); + + /* Check the input parameters format */ + if (RTC_Format == RTC_Format_BIN) + { + /* Convert the Time structure parameters to Binary format */ + RTC_StampTimeStruct->RTC_Hours = (uint8_t)RTC_Bcd2ToByte(RTC_StampTimeStruct->RTC_Hours); + RTC_StampTimeStruct->RTC_Minutes = (uint8_t)RTC_Bcd2ToByte(RTC_StampTimeStruct->RTC_Minutes); + RTC_StampTimeStruct->RTC_Seconds = (uint8_t)RTC_Bcd2ToByte(RTC_StampTimeStruct->RTC_Seconds); + + /* Convert the Date structure parameters to Binary format */ + RTC_StampDateStruct->RTC_Month = (uint8_t)RTC_Bcd2ToByte(RTC_StampDateStruct->RTC_Month); + RTC_StampDateStruct->RTC_Date = (uint8_t)RTC_Bcd2ToByte(RTC_StampDateStruct->RTC_Date); + RTC_StampDateStruct->RTC_WeekDay = (uint8_t)RTC_Bcd2ToByte(RTC_StampDateStruct->RTC_WeekDay); + } +} + +/** + * @brief Get the RTC timestamp Subseconds value. + * @param None + * @retval RTC current timestamp Subseconds value. + */ +uint32_t RTC_GetTimeStampSubSecond(void) +{ + /* Get timestamp subseconds values from the correspondent registers */ + return (uint32_t)(RTC->TSSSR); +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup RTC_Group9 Tampers configuration functions + * @brief Tampers configuration functions + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### Tampers configuration functions ##### + =============================================================================== + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Configures the select Tamper pin edge. + * @param RTC_Tamper: Selected tamper pin. + * This parameter can be any combination of the following values: + * @arg RTC_Tamper_1: Select Tamper 1. + * @arg RTC_Tamper_2: Select Tamper 2. + * @arg RTC_Tamper_3: Select Tamper 3. + * @param RTC_TamperTrigger: Specifies the trigger on the tamper pin that + * stimulates tamper event. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg RTC_TamperTrigger_RisingEdge: Rising Edge of the tamper pin causes tamper event. + * @arg RTC_TamperTrigger_FallingEdge: Falling Edge of the tamper pin causes tamper event. + * @arg RTC_TamperTrigger_LowLevel: Low Level of the tamper pin causes tamper event. + * @arg RTC_TamperTrigger_HighLevel: High Level of the tamper pin causes tamper event. + * @retval None + */ +void RTC_TamperTriggerConfig(uint32_t RTC_Tamper, uint32_t RTC_TamperTrigger) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RTC_TAMPER(RTC_Tamper)); + assert_param(IS_RTC_TAMPER_TRIGGER(RTC_TamperTrigger)); + + /* Check if the active level for Tamper is rising edge (Low level)*/ + if (RTC_TamperTrigger == RTC_TamperTrigger_RisingEdge) + { + /* Configure the RTC_TAFCR register */ + RTC->TAFCR &= (uint32_t)((uint32_t)~(RTC_Tamper << 1)); + } + else + { + /* Configure the RTC_TAFCR register */ + RTC->TAFCR |= (uint32_t)(RTC_Tamper << 1); + } +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or Disables the Tamper detection. + * @param RTC_Tamper: Selected tamper pin. + * This parameter can be any combination of the following values: + * @arg RTC_Tamper_1: Select Tamper 1. + * @arg RTC_Tamper_2: Select Tamper 2. + * @arg RTC_Tamper_3: Select Tamper 3. + * @param NewState: new state of the tamper pin. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void RTC_TamperCmd(uint32_t RTC_Tamper, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RTC_TAMPER(RTC_Tamper)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the selected Tamper pin */ + RTC->TAFCR |= (uint32_t)RTC_Tamper; + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected Tamper pin */ + RTC->TAFCR &= (uint32_t)~RTC_Tamper; + } +} + +/** + * @brief Configures the Tampers Filter. + * @param RTC_TamperFilter: Specifies the tampers filter. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg RTC_TamperFilter_Disable: Tamper filter is disabled. + * @arg RTC_TamperFilter_2Sample: Tamper is activated after 2 consecutive + * samples at the active level. + * @arg RTC_TamperFilter_4Sample: Tamper is activated after 4 consecutive + * samples at the active level. + * @arg RTC_TamperFilter_8Sample: Tamper is activated after 8 consecutive + * samples at the active level. + * @retval None + */ +void RTC_TamperFilterConfig(uint32_t RTC_TamperFilter) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RTC_TAMPER_FILTER(RTC_TamperFilter)); + + /* Clear TAMPFLT[1:0] bits in the RTC_TAFCR register */ + RTC->TAFCR &= (uint32_t)~(RTC_TAFCR_TAMPFLT); + + /* Configure the RTC_TAFCR register */ + RTC->TAFCR |= (uint32_t)RTC_TamperFilter; +} + +/** + * @brief Configures the Tampers Sampling Frequency. + * @param RTC_TamperSamplingFreq: Specifies the tampers Sampling Frequency. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg RTC_TamperSamplingFreq_RTCCLK_Div32768: Each of the tamper inputs are sampled + * with a frequency = RTCCLK / 32768 + * @arg RTC_TamperSamplingFreq_RTCCLK_Div16384: Each of the tamper inputs are sampled + * with a frequency = RTCCLK / 16384 + * @arg RTC_TamperSamplingFreq_RTCCLK_Div8192: Each of the tamper inputs are sampled + * with a frequency = RTCCLK / 8192 + * @arg RTC_TamperSamplingFreq_RTCCLK_Div4096: Each of the tamper inputs are sampled + * with a frequency = RTCCLK / 4096 + * @arg RTC_TamperSamplingFreq_RTCCLK_Div2048: Each of the tamper inputs are sampled + * with a frequency = RTCCLK / 2048 + * @arg RTC_TamperSamplingFreq_RTCCLK_Div1024: Each of the tamper inputs are sampled + * with a frequency = RTCCLK / 1024 + * @arg RTC_TamperSamplingFreq_RTCCLK_Div512: Each of the tamper inputs are sampled + * with a frequency = RTCCLK / 512 + * @arg RTC_TamperSamplingFreq_RTCCLK_Div256: Each of the tamper inputs are sampled + * with a frequency = RTCCLK / 256 + * @retval None + */ +void RTC_TamperSamplingFreqConfig(uint32_t RTC_TamperSamplingFreq) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RTC_TAMPER_SAMPLING_FREQ(RTC_TamperSamplingFreq)); + + /* Clear TAMPFREQ[2:0] bits in the RTC_TAFCR register */ + RTC->TAFCR &= (uint32_t)~(RTC_TAFCR_TAMPFREQ); + + /* Configure the RTC_TAFCR register */ + RTC->TAFCR |= (uint32_t)RTC_TamperSamplingFreq; +} + +/** + * @brief Configures the Tampers Pins input Precharge Duration. + * @param RTC_TamperPrechargeDuration: Specifies the Tampers Pins input + * Precharge Duration. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg RTC_TamperPrechargeDuration_1RTCCLK: Tamper pins are pre-charged before sampling during 1 RTCCLK cycle. + * @arg RTC_TamperPrechargeDuration_2RTCCLK: Tamper pins are pre-charged before sampling during 2 RTCCLK cycle. + * @arg RTC_TamperPrechargeDuration_4RTCCLK: Tamper pins are pre-charged before sampling during 4 RTCCLK cycle. + * @arg RTC_TamperPrechargeDuration_8RTCCLK: Tamper pins are pre-charged before sampling during 8 RTCCLK cycle. + * @retval None + */ +void RTC_TamperPinsPrechargeDuration(uint32_t RTC_TamperPrechargeDuration) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RTC_TAMPER_PRECHARGE_DURATION(RTC_TamperPrechargeDuration)); + + /* Clear TAMPPRCH[1:0] bits in the RTC_TAFCR register */ + RTC->TAFCR &= (uint32_t)~(RTC_TAFCR_TAMPPRCH); + + /* Configure the RTC_TAFCR register */ + RTC->TAFCR |= (uint32_t)RTC_TamperPrechargeDuration; +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or Disables the TimeStamp on Tamper Detection Event. + * @note The timestamp is valid even the TSE bit in tamper control register + * is reset. + * @param NewState: new state of the timestamp on tamper event. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void RTC_TimeStampOnTamperDetectionCmd(FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Save timestamp on tamper detection event */ + RTC->TAFCR |= (uint32_t)RTC_TAFCR_TAMPTS; + } + else + { + /* Tamper detection does not cause a timestamp to be saved */ + RTC->TAFCR &= (uint32_t)~RTC_TAFCR_TAMPTS; + } +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or Disables the Precharge of Tamper pin. + * @param NewState: new state of tamper pull up. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void RTC_TamperPullUpCmd(FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable precharge of the selected Tamper pin */ + RTC->TAFCR &= (uint32_t)~RTC_TAFCR_TAMPPUDIS; + } + else + { + /* Disable precharge of the selected Tamper pin */ + RTC->TAFCR |= (uint32_t)RTC_TAFCR_TAMPPUDIS; + } +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup RTC_Group10 Backup Data Registers configuration functions + * @brief Backup Data Registers configuration functions + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### Backup Data Registers configuration functions ##### + =============================================================================== + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Writes a data in a specified RTC Backup data register. + * @param RTC_BKP_DR: RTC Backup data Register number. + * This parameter can be: RTC_BKP_DRx where x can be from 0 to 19 to + * specify the register. + * @param Data: Data to be written in the specified RTC Backup data register. + * @retval None + */ +void RTC_WriteBackupRegister(uint32_t RTC_BKP_DR, uint32_t Data) +{ + __IO uint32_t tmp = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RTC_BKP(RTC_BKP_DR)); + + tmp = RTC_BASE + 0x50; + tmp += (RTC_BKP_DR * 4); + + /* Write the specified register */ + *(__IO uint32_t *)tmp = (uint32_t)Data; +} + +/** + * @brief Reads data from the specified RTC Backup data Register. + * @param RTC_BKP_DR: RTC Backup data Register number. + * This parameter can be: RTC_BKP_DRx where x can be from 0 to 19 to + * specify the register. + * @retval None + */ +uint32_t RTC_ReadBackupRegister(uint32_t RTC_BKP_DR) +{ + __IO uint32_t tmp = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RTC_BKP(RTC_BKP_DR)); + + tmp = RTC_BASE + 0x50; + tmp += (RTC_BKP_DR * 4); + + /* Read the specified register */ + return (*(__IO uint32_t *)tmp); +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup RTC_Group11 Output Type Config configuration functions + * @brief Output Type Config configuration functions + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### Output Type Config configuration functions ##### + =============================================================================== + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Configures the RTC Output Pin mode. + * @param RTC_OutputType: specifies the RTC Output (PC13) pin mode. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg RTC_OutputType_OpenDrain: RTC Output (PC13) is configured in + * Open Drain mode. + * @arg RTC_OutputType_PushPull: RTC Output (PC13) is configured in + * Push Pull mode. + * @retval None + */ +void RTC_OutputTypeConfig(uint32_t RTC_OutputType) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RTC_OUTPUT_TYPE(RTC_OutputType)); + + RTC->TAFCR &= (uint32_t)~(RTC_TAFCR_ALARMOUTTYPE); + RTC->TAFCR |= (uint32_t)(RTC_OutputType); +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup RTC_Group12 Shift control synchronisation functions + * @brief Shift control synchronisation functions + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### Shift control synchronisation functions ##### + =============================================================================== + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Configures the Synchronization Shift Control Settings. + * @note When REFCKON is set, firmware must not write to Shift control register + * @param RTC_ShiftAdd1S : Select to add or not 1 second to the time Calendar. + * This parameter can be one of the following values : + * @arg RTC_ShiftAdd1S_Set: Add one second to the clock calendar. + * @arg RTC_ShiftAdd1S_Reset: No effect. + * @param RTC_ShiftSubFS: Select the number of Second Fractions to Substitute. + * This parameter can be one any value from 0 to 0x7FFF. + * @retval An ErrorStatus enumeration value: + * - SUCCESS: RTC Shift registers are configured + * - ERROR: RTC Shift registers are not configured +*/ +ErrorStatus RTC_SynchroShiftConfig(uint32_t RTC_ShiftAdd1S, uint32_t RTC_ShiftSubFS) +{ + ErrorStatus status = ERROR; + uint32_t shpfcount = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RTC_SHIFT_ADD1S(RTC_ShiftAdd1S)); + assert_param(IS_RTC_SHIFT_SUBFS(RTC_ShiftSubFS)); + + /* Disable the write protection for RTC registers */ + RTC->WPR = 0xCA; + RTC->WPR = 0x53; + + /* Check if a Shift is pending*/ + if ((RTC->ISR & RTC_ISR_SHPF) != RESET) + { + /* Wait until the shift is completed*/ + while (((RTC->ISR & RTC_ISR_SHPF) != RESET) && (shpfcount != SHPF_TIMEOUT)) + { + shpfcount++; + } + } + + /* Check if the Shift pending is completed or if there is no Shift operation at all*/ + if ((RTC->ISR & RTC_ISR_SHPF) == RESET) + { + /* check if the reference clock detection is disabled */ + if((RTC->CR & RTC_CR_REFCKON) == RESET) + { + /* Configure the Shift settings */ + RTC->SHIFTR = (uint32_t)(uint32_t)(RTC_ShiftSubFS) | (uint32_t)(RTC_ShiftAdd1S); + + if(RTC_WaitForSynchro() == ERROR) + { + status = ERROR; + } + else + { + status = SUCCESS; + } + } + else + { + status = ERROR; + } + } + else + { + status = ERROR; + } + + /* Enable the write protection for RTC registers */ + RTC->WPR = 0xFF; + + return (ErrorStatus)(status); +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup RTC_Group13 Interrupts and flags management functions + * @brief Interrupts and flags management functions + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### Interrupts and flags management functions ##### + =============================================================================== + [..] All RTC interrupts are connected to the EXTI controller. + (+) To enable the RTC Alarm interrupt, the following sequence is required: + (+) Configure and enable the EXTI Line 17 in interrupt mode and select + the rising edge sensitivity using the EXTI_Init() function. + (+) Configure and enable the RTC_Alarm IRQ channel in the NVIC using + the NVIC_Init() function. + (+) Configure the RTC to generate RTC alarms (Alarm A and/or Alarm B) + using the RTC_SetAlarm() and RTC_AlarmCmd() functions. + + (+) To enable the RTC Wakeup interrupt, the following sequence is required: + (+) Configure and enable the EXTI Line 20 in interrupt mode and select + the rising edge sensitivity using the EXTI_Init() function. + (+) Configure and enable the RTC_WKUP IRQ channel in the NVIC using the + NVIC_Init() function. + (+) Configure the RTC to generate the RTC wakeup timer event using the + RTC_WakeUpClockConfig(), RTC_SetWakeUpCounter() and RTC_WakeUpCmd() + functions. + + (+) To enable the RTC Tamper interrupt, the following sequence is required: + (+) Configure and enable the EXTI Line 19 in interrupt mode and select + the rising edge sensitivity using the EXTI_Init() function. + (+) Configure and enable the TAMP_STAMP IRQ channel in the NVIC using + the NVIC_Init() function. + (+) Configure the RTC to detect the RTC tamper event using the + RTC_TamperTriggerConfig() and RTC_TamperCmd() functions. + + (+) To enable the RTC TimeStamp interrupt, the following sequence is + required: + (+) Configure and enable the EXTI Line 19 in interrupt mode and select + the rising edge sensitivity using the EXTI_Init() function. + (+) Configure and enable the TAMP_STAMP IRQ channel in the NVIC using + the NVIC_Init() function. + (+) Configure the RTC to detect the RTC time-stamp event using the + RTC_TimeStampCmd() functions. + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the specified RTC interrupts. + * @param RTC_IT: specifies the RTC interrupt sources to be enabled or disabled. + * This parameter can be any combination of the following values: + * @arg RTC_IT_TS: Time Stamp interrupt mask. + * @arg RTC_IT_WUT: WakeUp Timer interrupt mask. + * @arg RTC_IT_ALRB: Alarm B interrupt mask. + * @arg RTC_IT_ALRA: Alarm A interrupt mask. + * @arg RTC_IT_TAMP: Tamper event interrupt mask. + * @param NewState: new state of the specified RTC interrupts. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void RTC_ITConfig(uint32_t RTC_IT, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RTC_CONFIG_IT(RTC_IT)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + /* Disable the write protection for RTC registers */ + RTC->WPR = 0xCA; + RTC->WPR = 0x53; + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Configure the Interrupts in the RTC_CR register */ + RTC->CR |= (uint32_t)(RTC_IT & ~RTC_TAFCR_TAMPIE); + /* Configure the Tamper Interrupt in the RTC_TAFCR */ + RTC->TAFCR |= (uint32_t)(RTC_IT & RTC_TAFCR_TAMPIE); + } + else + { + /* Configure the Interrupts in the RTC_CR register */ + RTC->CR &= (uint32_t)~(RTC_IT & (uint32_t)~RTC_TAFCR_TAMPIE); + /* Configure the Tamper Interrupt in the RTC_TAFCR */ + RTC->TAFCR &= (uint32_t)~(RTC_IT & RTC_TAFCR_TAMPIE); + } + /* Enable the write protection for RTC registers */ + RTC->WPR = 0xFF; +} + +/** + * @brief Checks whether the specified RTC flag is set or not. + * @param RTC_FLAG: specifies the flag to check. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg RTC_FLAG_RECALPF: RECALPF event flag. + * @arg RTC_FLAG_TAMP3F: Tamper 3 event flag. + * @arg RTC_FLAG_TAMP2F: Tamper 2 event flag. + * @arg RTC_FLAG_TAMP1F: Tamper 1 event flag. + * @arg RTC_FLAG_TSOVF: Time Stamp OverFlow flag. + * @arg RTC_FLAG_TSF: Time Stamp event flag. + * @arg RTC_FLAG_WUTF: WakeUp Timer flag. + * @arg RTC_FLAG_ALRBF: Alarm B flag. + * @arg RTC_FLAG_ALRAF: Alarm A flag. + * @arg RTC_FLAG_INITF: Initialization mode flag. + * @arg RTC_FLAG_RSF: Registers Synchronized flag. + * @arg RTC_FLAG_INITS: Registers Configured flag. + * @argRTC_FLAG_SHPF: Shift operation pending flag. + * @arg RTC_FLAG_WUTWF: WakeUp Timer Write flag. + * @arg RTC_FLAG_ALRBWF: Alarm B Write flag. + * @arg RTC_FLAG_ALRAWF: Alarm A write flag. + * @retval The new state of RTC_FLAG (SET or RESET). + */ +FlagStatus RTC_GetFlagStatus(uint32_t RTC_FLAG) +{ + FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET; + uint32_t tmpreg = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RTC_GET_FLAG(RTC_FLAG)); + + /* Get all the flags */ + tmpreg = (uint32_t)(RTC->ISR & RTC_FLAGS_MASK); + + /* Return the status of the flag */ + if ((tmpreg & RTC_FLAG) != (uint32_t)RESET) + { + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + bitstatus = RESET; + } + return bitstatus; +} + +/** + * @brief Clears the RTC's pending flags. + * @param RTC_FLAG: specifies the RTC flag to clear. + * This parameter can be any combination of the following values: + * @arg RTC_FLAG_TAMP3F: Tamper 3 event flag. + * @arg RTC_FLAG_TAMP2F: Tamper 2 event flag. + * @arg RTC_FLAG_TAMP1F: Tamper 1 event flag. + * @arg RTC_FLAG_TSOVF: Time Stamp Overflow flag. + * @arg RTC_FLAG_TSF: Time Stamp event flag. + * @arg RTC_FLAG_WUTF: WakeUp Timer flag. + * @arg RTC_FLAG_ALRBF: Alarm B flag. + * @arg RTC_FLAG_ALRAF: Alarm A flag. + * @arg RTC_FLAG_RSF: Registers Synchronized flag. + * @retval None + */ +void RTC_ClearFlag(uint32_t RTC_FLAG) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RTC_CLEAR_FLAG(RTC_FLAG)); + + /* Clear the Flags in the RTC_ISR register */ + RTC->ISR = (uint32_t)((uint32_t)(~((RTC_FLAG | RTC_ISR_INIT)& 0x0001FFFF) | (uint32_t)(RTC->ISR & RTC_ISR_INIT))); +} + +/** + * @brief Checks whether the specified RTC interrupt has occurred or not. + * @param RTC_IT: specifies the RTC interrupt source to check. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg RTC_IT_TS: Time Stamp interrupt. + * @arg RTC_IT_WUT: WakeUp Timer interrupt. + * @arg RTC_IT_ALRB: Alarm B interrupt. + * @arg RTC_IT_ALRA: Alarm A interrupt. + * @arg RTC_IT_TAMP1: Tamper1 event interrupt. + * @arg RTC_IT_TAMP2: Tamper2 event interrupt. + * @arg RTC_IT_TAMP3: Tamper3 event interrupt. + * @retval The new state of RTC_IT (SET or RESET). + */ +ITStatus RTC_GetITStatus(uint32_t RTC_IT) +{ + ITStatus bitstatus = RESET; + uint32_t tmpreg = 0, enablestatus = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RTC_GET_IT(RTC_IT)); + + /* Get the TAMPER Interrupt enable bit and pending bit */ + tmpreg = (uint32_t)(RTC->TAFCR & (RTC_TAFCR_TAMPIE)); + + /* Get the Interrupt enable Status */ + enablestatus = (uint32_t)((RTC->CR & RTC_IT) | (tmpreg & ((RTC_IT >> (RTC_IT >> 18)) >> 15))); + + /* Get the Interrupt pending bit */ + tmpreg = (uint32_t)((RTC->ISR & (uint32_t)(RTC_IT >> 4))); + + /* Get the status of the Interrupt */ + if ((enablestatus != (uint32_t)RESET) && ((tmpreg & 0x0000FFFF) != (uint32_t)RESET)) + { + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + bitstatus = RESET; + } + return bitstatus; +} + +/** + * @brief Clears the RTC's interrupt pending bits. + * @param RTC_IT: specifies the RTC interrupt pending bit to clear. + * This parameter can be any combination of the following values: + * @arg RTC_IT_TS: Time Stamp interrupt + * @arg RTC_IT_WUT: WakeUp Timer interrupt + * @arg RTC_IT_ALRB: Alarm B interrupt + * @arg RTC_IT_ALRA: Alarm A interrupt + * @arg RTC_IT_TAMP1: Tamper1 event interrupt + * @arg RTC_IT_TAMP2: Tamper2 event interrupt + * @arg RTC_IT_TAMP3: Tamper3 event interrupt + * @retval None + */ +void RTC_ClearITPendingBit(uint32_t RTC_IT) +{ + uint32_t tmpreg = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RTC_CLEAR_IT(RTC_IT)); + + /* Get the RTC_ISR Interrupt pending bits mask */ + tmpreg = (uint32_t)(RTC_IT >> 4); + + /* Clear the interrupt pending bits in the RTC_ISR register */ + RTC->ISR = (uint32_t)((uint32_t)(~((tmpreg | RTC_ISR_INIT)& 0x0000FFFF) | (uint32_t)(RTC->ISR & RTC_ISR_INIT))); +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @brief Converts a 2 digit decimal to BCD format. + * @param Value: Byte to be converted. + * @retval Converted byte + */ +static uint8_t RTC_ByteToBcd2(uint8_t Value) +{ + uint8_t bcdhigh = 0; + + while (Value >= 10) + { + bcdhigh++; + Value -= 10; + } + + return ((uint8_t)(bcdhigh << 4) | Value); +} + +/** + * @brief Convert from 2 digit BCD to Binary. + * @param Value: BCD value to be converted. + * @retval Converted word + */ +static uint8_t RTC_Bcd2ToByte(uint8_t Value) +{ + uint8_t tmp = 0; + tmp = ((uint8_t)(Value & (uint8_t)0xF0) >> (uint8_t)0x4) * 10; + return (tmp + (Value & (uint8_t)0x0F)); +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/ diff --git a/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32l1xx_spi.c b/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32l1xx_spi.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e866dbc --- /dev/null +++ b/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32l1xx_spi.c @@ -0,0 +1,1076 @@ +/** + ****************************************************************************** + * @file stm32l1xx_spi.c + * @author MCD Application Team + * @version V1.1.1 + * @date 05-March-2012 + * @brief This file provides firmware functions to manage the following + * functionalities of the Serial peripheral interface (SPI): + * + Initialization and Configuration + * + Data transfers functions + * + Hardware CRC Calculation + * + DMA transfers management + * + Interrupts and flags management + * + * @verbatim + [..] The I2S feature is not implemented in STM32L1xx Ultra Low Power + Medium-density devices and it's supported only STM32L1xx Ultra Low Power + Medium-density Plus and High-density devices. + + =============================================================================== + ##### How to use this driver ##### + =============================================================================== + [..] + (#) Enable peripheral clock using RCC_APB2PeriphClockCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_SPI1, ENABLE) + function for SPI1 or using RCC_APB1PeriphClockCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_SPI2, ENABLE) + function for SPI2 or using RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_SPI3, ENABLE) + for SPI3. + + (#) Enable SCK, MOSI, MISO and NSS GPIO clocks using + RCC_AHBPeriphClockCmd() function. + + (#) Peripherals alternate function: + (++) Connect the pin to the desired peripherals' Alternate + Function (AF) using GPIO_PinAFConfig() function. + (++) Configure the desired pin in alternate function by: + GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Mode = GPIO_Mode_AF. + (++) Select the type, pull-up/pull-down and output speed via + GPIO_PuPd, GPIO_OType and GPIO_Speed members. + (++) Call GPIO_Init() function. + + (#) Program the Polarity, Phase, First Data, Baud Rate Prescaler, Slave + Management, Peripheral Mode and CRC Polynomial values using the SPI_Init() + function.In I2S mode, program the Mode, Standard, Data Format, MCLK + Output, Audio frequency and Polarity using I2S_Init() function. + + (#) Enable the NVIC and the corresponding interrupt using the function + SPI_ITConfig() if you need to use interrupt mode. + + (#) When using the DMA mode + (++) Configure the DMA using DMA_Init() function. + (++) Active the needed channel Request using SPI_I2S_DMACmd() function. + + (#) Enable the SPI using the SPI_Cmd() function or enable the I2S using + I2S_Cmd(). + + (#) Enable the DMA using the DMA_Cmd() function when using DMA mode. + + (#) Optionally, you can enable/configure the following parameters without + re-initialization (i.e there is no need to call again SPI_Init() function): + (++) When bidirectional mode (SPI_Direction_1Line_Rx or SPI_Direction_1Line_Tx) + is programmed as Data direction parameter using the SPI_Init() + function it can be possible to switch between SPI_Direction_Tx + or SPI_Direction_Rx using the SPI_BiDirectionalLineConfig() function. + (++) When SPI_NSS_Soft is selected as Slave Select Management parameter + using the SPI_Init() function it can be possible to manage the + NSS internal signal using the SPI_NSSInternalSoftwareConfig() function. + (++) Reconfigure the data size using the SPI_DataSizeConfig() function. + (++) Enable or disable the SS output using the SPI_SSOutputCmd() function. + + (#) To use the CRC Hardware calculation feature refer to the Peripheral + CRC hardware Calculation subsection. + + @endverbatim + + ****************************************************************************** + * @attention + * + * <h2><center>© COPYRIGHT 2012 STMicroelectronics</center></h2> + * + * Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License"); + * You may not use this file except in compliance with the License. + * You may obtain a copy of the License at: + * + * http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2 + * + * Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software + * distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS, + * WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. + * See the License for the specific language governing permissions and + * limitations under the License. + * + ****************************************************************************** + */ + +/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#include "stm32l1xx_spi.h" +#include "stm32l1xx_rcc.h" + +/** @addtogroup STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver + * @{ + */ + +/** @defgroup SPI + * @brief SPI driver modules + * @{ + */ + +/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* SPI registers Masks */ +#define CR1_CLEAR_MASK ((uint16_t)0x3040) +#define I2SCFGR_CLEAR_Mask ((uint16_t)0xF040) + +/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/ + +/** @defgroup SPI_Private_Functions + * @{ + */ + +/** @defgroup SPI_Group1 Initialization and Configuration functions + * @brief Initialization and Configuration functions + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### Initialization and Configuration functions ##### + =============================================================================== + [..] This section provides a set of functions allowing to initialize the SPI + Direction, SPI Mode, SPI Data Size, SPI Polarity, SPI Phase, SPI NSS + Management, SPI Baud Rate Prescaler, SPI First Bit and SPI CRC Polynomial. + [..] The SPI_Init() function follows the SPI configuration procedures for + Master mode and Slave mode (details for these procedures are available + in reference manual (RM0038)). + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Deinitializes the SPIx peripheral registers to their default + * reset values. + * @param SPIx: To select the SPIx/I2Sx peripheral, where x can be: 1, 2 or 3 + * in SPI mode or 2 or 3 in I2S mode. + * @retval None + */ +void SPI_I2S_DeInit(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx)); + + if (SPIx == SPI1) + { + /* Enable SPI1 reset state */ + RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_SPI1, ENABLE); + /* Release SPI1 from reset state */ + RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_SPI1, DISABLE); + } + else if (SPIx == SPI2) + { + /* Enable SPI2 reset state */ + RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_SPI2, ENABLE); + /* Release SPI2 from reset state */ + RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_SPI2, DISABLE); + } + else + { + if (SPIx == SPI3) + { + /* Enable SPI3 reset state */ + RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_SPI3, ENABLE); + /* Release SPI3 from reset state */ + RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_SPI3, DISABLE); + } + } +} + +/** + * @brief Initializes the SPIx peripheral according to the specified + * parameters in the SPI_InitStruct. + * @param SPIx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the SPI peripheral. + * @param SPI_InitStruct: pointer to a SPI_InitTypeDef structure that + * contains the configuration information for the specified SPI peripheral. + * @retval None + */ +void SPI_Init(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, SPI_InitTypeDef* SPI_InitStruct) +{ + uint16_t tmpreg = 0; + + /* check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx)); + + /* Check the SPI parameters */ + assert_param(IS_SPI_DIRECTION_MODE(SPI_InitStruct->SPI_Direction)); + assert_param(IS_SPI_MODE(SPI_InitStruct->SPI_Mode)); + assert_param(IS_SPI_DATASIZE(SPI_InitStruct->SPI_DataSize)); + assert_param(IS_SPI_CPOL(SPI_InitStruct->SPI_CPOL)); + assert_param(IS_SPI_CPHA(SPI_InitStruct->SPI_CPHA)); + assert_param(IS_SPI_NSS(SPI_InitStruct->SPI_NSS)); + assert_param(IS_SPI_BAUDRATE_PRESCALER(SPI_InitStruct->SPI_BaudRatePrescaler)); + assert_param(IS_SPI_FIRST_BIT(SPI_InitStruct->SPI_FirstBit)); + assert_param(IS_SPI_CRC_POLYNOMIAL(SPI_InitStruct->SPI_CRCPolynomial)); + +/*---------------------------- SPIx CR1 Configuration ------------------------*/ + /* Get the SPIx CR1 value */ + tmpreg = SPIx->CR1; + /* Clear BIDIMode, BIDIOE, RxONLY, SSM, SSI, LSBFirst, BR, MSTR, CPOL and CPHA bits */ + tmpreg &= CR1_CLEAR_MASK; + /* Configure SPIx: direction, NSS management, first transmitted bit, BaudRate prescaler + master/salve mode, CPOL and CPHA */ + /* Set BIDImode, BIDIOE and RxONLY bits according to SPI_Direction value */ + /* Set SSM, SSI and MSTR bits according to SPI_Mode and SPI_NSS values */ + /* Set LSBFirst bit according to SPI_FirstBit value */ + /* Set BR bits according to SPI_BaudRatePrescaler value */ + /* Set CPOL bit according to SPI_CPOL value */ + /* Set CPHA bit according to SPI_CPHA value */ + tmpreg |= (uint16_t)((uint32_t)SPI_InitStruct->SPI_Direction | SPI_InitStruct->SPI_Mode | + SPI_InitStruct->SPI_DataSize | SPI_InitStruct->SPI_CPOL | + SPI_InitStruct->SPI_CPHA | SPI_InitStruct->SPI_NSS | + SPI_InitStruct->SPI_BaudRatePrescaler | SPI_InitStruct->SPI_FirstBit); + /* Write to SPIx CR1 */ + SPIx->CR1 = tmpreg; + + /* Activate the SPI mode (Reset I2SMOD bit in I2SCFGR register) */ + SPIx->I2SCFGR &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)SPI_I2SCFGR_I2SMOD); +/*---------------------------- SPIx CRCPOLY Configuration --------------------*/ + /* Write to SPIx CRCPOLY */ + SPIx->CRCPR = SPI_InitStruct->SPI_CRCPolynomial; +} + +/** + * @brief Initializes the SPIx peripheral according to the specified + * parameters in the I2S_InitStruct. + * @param SPIx: where x can be 2 or 3 to select the SPI peripheral + * (configured in I2S mode). + * @param I2S_InitStruct: pointer to an I2S_InitTypeDef structure that + * contains the configuration information for the specified SPI peripheral + * configured in I2S mode. + * @note + * The function calculates the optimal prescaler needed to obtain the most + * accurate audio frequency (depending on the I2S clock source, the PLL values + * and the product configuration). But in case the prescaler value is greater + * than 511, the default value (0x02) will be configured instead. + * @retval None + */ +void I2S_Init(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, I2S_InitTypeDef* I2S_InitStruct) +{ + uint16_t tmpreg = 0, i2sdiv = 2, i2sodd = 0, packetlength = 1; + uint32_t tmp = 0; + RCC_ClocksTypeDef RCC_Clocks; + uint32_t sourceclock = 0; + + /* Check the I2S parameters */ + assert_param(IS_SPI_23_PERIPH(SPIx)); + assert_param(IS_I2S_MODE(I2S_InitStruct->I2S_Mode)); + assert_param(IS_I2S_STANDARD(I2S_InitStruct->I2S_Standard)); + assert_param(IS_I2S_DATA_FORMAT(I2S_InitStruct->I2S_DataFormat)); + assert_param(IS_I2S_MCLK_OUTPUT(I2S_InitStruct->I2S_MCLKOutput)); + assert_param(IS_I2S_AUDIO_FREQ(I2S_InitStruct->I2S_AudioFreq)); + assert_param(IS_I2S_CPOL(I2S_InitStruct->I2S_CPOL)); + +/*----------------------- SPIx I2SCFGR & I2SPR Configuration -----------------*/ + /* Clear I2SMOD, I2SE, I2SCFG, PCMSYNC, I2SSTD, CKPOL, DATLEN and CHLEN bits */ + SPIx->I2SCFGR &= I2SCFGR_CLEAR_Mask; + SPIx->I2SPR = 0x0002; + + /* Get the I2SCFGR register value */ + tmpreg = SPIx->I2SCFGR; + + /* If the default value has to be written, reinitialize i2sdiv and i2sodd*/ + if(I2S_InitStruct->I2S_AudioFreq == I2S_AudioFreq_Default) + { + i2sodd = (uint16_t)0; + i2sdiv = (uint16_t)2; + } + /* If the requested audio frequency is not the default, compute the prescaler */ + else + { + /* Check the frame length (For the Prescaler computing) */ + if(I2S_InitStruct->I2S_DataFormat == I2S_DataFormat_16b) + { + /* Packet length is 16 bits */ + packetlength = 1; + } + else + { + /* Packet length is 32 bits */ + packetlength = 2; + } + + /* I2S Clock source is System clock: Get System Clock frequency */ + RCC_GetClocksFreq(&RCC_Clocks); + + /* Get the source clock value: based on System Clock value */ + sourceclock = RCC_Clocks.SYSCLK_Frequency; + + /* Compute the Real divider depending on the MCLK output state with a flaoting point */ + if(I2S_InitStruct->I2S_MCLKOutput == I2S_MCLKOutput_Enable) + { + /* MCLK output is enabled */ + tmp = (uint16_t)(((((sourceclock / 256) * 10) / I2S_InitStruct->I2S_AudioFreq)) + 5); + } + else + { + /* MCLK output is disabled */ + tmp = (uint16_t)(((((sourceclock / (32 * packetlength)) *10 ) / I2S_InitStruct->I2S_AudioFreq)) + 5); + } + + /* Remove the flaoting point */ + tmp = tmp / 10; + + /* Check the parity of the divider */ + i2sodd = (uint16_t)(tmp & (uint16_t)0x0001); + + /* Compute the i2sdiv prescaler */ + i2sdiv = (uint16_t)((tmp - i2sodd) / 2); + + /* Get the Mask for the Odd bit (SPI_I2SPR[8]) register */ + i2sodd = (uint16_t) (i2sodd << 8); + } + + /* Test if the divider is 1 or 0 or greater than 0xFF */ + if ((i2sdiv < 2) || (i2sdiv > 0xFF)) + { + /* Set the default values */ + i2sdiv = 2; + i2sodd = 0; + } + + /* Write to SPIx I2SPR register the computed value */ + SPIx->I2SPR = (uint16_t)(i2sdiv | (uint16_t)(i2sodd | (uint16_t)I2S_InitStruct->I2S_MCLKOutput)); + + /* Configure the I2S with the SPI_InitStruct values */ + tmpreg |= (uint16_t)(SPI_I2SCFGR_I2SMOD | (uint16_t)(I2S_InitStruct->I2S_Mode | \ + (uint16_t)(I2S_InitStruct->I2S_Standard | (uint16_t)(I2S_InitStruct->I2S_DataFormat | \ + (uint16_t)I2S_InitStruct->I2S_CPOL)))); + + /* Write to SPIx I2SCFGR */ + SPIx->I2SCFGR = tmpreg; +} + +/** + * @brief Fills each SPI_InitStruct member with its default value. + * @param SPI_InitStruct: pointer to a SPI_InitTypeDef structure which will be initialized. + * @retval None + */ +void SPI_StructInit(SPI_InitTypeDef* SPI_InitStruct) +{ +/*--------------- Reset SPI init structure parameters values -----------------*/ + /* Initialize the SPI_Direction member */ + SPI_InitStruct->SPI_Direction = SPI_Direction_2Lines_FullDuplex; + /* initialize the SPI_Mode member */ + SPI_InitStruct->SPI_Mode = SPI_Mode_Slave; + /* initialize the SPI_DataSize member */ + SPI_InitStruct->SPI_DataSize = SPI_DataSize_8b; + /* Initialize the SPI_CPOL member */ + SPI_InitStruct->SPI_CPOL = SPI_CPOL_Low; + /* Initialize the SPI_CPHA member */ + SPI_InitStruct->SPI_CPHA = SPI_CPHA_1Edge; + /* Initialize the SPI_NSS member */ + SPI_InitStruct->SPI_NSS = SPI_NSS_Hard; + /* Initialize the SPI_BaudRatePrescaler member */ + SPI_InitStruct->SPI_BaudRatePrescaler = SPI_BaudRatePrescaler_2; + /* Initialize the SPI_FirstBit member */ + SPI_InitStruct->SPI_FirstBit = SPI_FirstBit_MSB; + /* Initialize the SPI_CRCPolynomial member */ + SPI_InitStruct->SPI_CRCPolynomial = 7; +} + +/** + * @brief Fills each I2S_InitStruct member with its default value. + * @param I2S_InitStruct: pointer to a I2S_InitTypeDef structure which will be initialized. + * @retval None + */ +void I2S_StructInit(I2S_InitTypeDef* I2S_InitStruct) +{ +/*--------------- Reset I2S init structure parameters values -----------------*/ + /* Initialize the I2S_Mode member */ + I2S_InitStruct->I2S_Mode = I2S_Mode_SlaveTx; + + /* Initialize the I2S_Standard member */ + I2S_InitStruct->I2S_Standard = I2S_Standard_Phillips; + + /* Initialize the I2S_DataFormat member */ + I2S_InitStruct->I2S_DataFormat = I2S_DataFormat_16b; + + /* Initialize the I2S_MCLKOutput member */ + I2S_InitStruct->I2S_MCLKOutput = I2S_MCLKOutput_Disable; + + /* Initialize the I2S_AudioFreq member */ + I2S_InitStruct->I2S_AudioFreq = I2S_AudioFreq_Default; + + /* Initialize the I2S_CPOL member */ + I2S_InitStruct->I2S_CPOL = I2S_CPOL_Low; +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the specified SPI peripheral. + * @param SPIx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the SPI peripheral. + * @param NewState: new state of the SPIx peripheral. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void SPI_Cmd(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the selected SPI peripheral */ + SPIx->CR1 |= SPI_CR1_SPE; + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected SPI peripheral */ + SPIx->CR1 &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)SPI_CR1_SPE); + } +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the specified SPI peripheral (in I2S mode). + * @param SPIx: where x can be 2 or 3 to select the SPI peripheral. + * @param NewState: new state of the SPIx peripheral. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void I2S_Cmd(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_SPI_23_PERIPH(SPIx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the selected SPI peripheral (in I2S mode) */ + SPIx->I2SCFGR |= SPI_I2SCFGR_I2SE; + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected SPI peripheral in I2S mode */ + SPIx->I2SCFGR &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)SPI_I2SCFGR_I2SE); + } +} + +/** + * @brief Configures the data size for the selected SPI. + * @param SPIx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the SPI peripheral. + * @param SPI_DataSize: specifies the SPI data size. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg SPI_DataSize_16b: Set data frame format to 16bit. + * @arg SPI_DataSize_8b: Set data frame format to 8bit. + * @retval None. + */ +void SPI_DataSizeConfig(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, uint16_t SPI_DataSize) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx)); + assert_param(IS_SPI_DATASIZE(SPI_DataSize)); + /* Clear DFF bit */ + SPIx->CR1 &= (uint16_t)~SPI_DataSize_16b; + /* Set new DFF bit value */ + SPIx->CR1 |= SPI_DataSize; +} + +/** + * @brief Selects the data transfer direction in bidirectional mode for the specified SPI. + * @param SPIx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the SPI peripheral. + * @param SPI_Direction: specifies the data transfer direction in bidirectional mode. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg SPI_Direction_Tx: Selects Tx transmission direction. + * @arg SPI_Direction_Rx: Selects Rx receive direction. + * @retval None + */ +void SPI_BiDirectionalLineConfig(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, uint16_t SPI_Direction) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx)); + assert_param(IS_SPI_DIRECTION(SPI_Direction)); + if (SPI_Direction == SPI_Direction_Tx) + { + /* Set the Tx only mode */ + SPIx->CR1 |= SPI_Direction_Tx; + } + else + { + /* Set the Rx only mode */ + SPIx->CR1 &= SPI_Direction_Rx; + } +} + +/** + * @brief Configures internally by software the NSS pin for the selected SPI. + * @param SPIx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the SPI peripheral. + * @param SPI_NSSInternalSoft: specifies the SPI NSS internal state. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg SPI_NSSInternalSoft_Set: Set NSS pin internally. + * @arg SPI_NSSInternalSoft_Reset: Reset NSS pin internally. + * @retval None + */ +void SPI_NSSInternalSoftwareConfig(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, uint16_t SPI_NSSInternalSoft) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx)); + assert_param(IS_SPI_NSS_INTERNAL(SPI_NSSInternalSoft)); + if (SPI_NSSInternalSoft != SPI_NSSInternalSoft_Reset) + { + /* Set NSS pin internally by software */ + SPIx->CR1 |= SPI_NSSInternalSoft_Set; + } + else + { + /* Reset NSS pin internally by software */ + SPIx->CR1 &= SPI_NSSInternalSoft_Reset; + } +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the SS output for the selected SPI. + * @param SPIx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the SPI peripheral. + * @param NewState: new state of the SPIx SS output. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void SPI_SSOutputCmd(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the selected SPI SS output */ + SPIx->CR2 |= (uint16_t)SPI_CR2_SSOE; + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected SPI SS output */ + SPIx->CR2 &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)SPI_CR2_SSOE); + } +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup SPI_Group2 Data transfers functions + * @brief Data transfers functions + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### Data transfers functions ##### + =============================================================================== +....[..] This section provides a set of functions allowing to manage the SPI data + transfers. +....[..] In reception, data are received and then stored into an internal Rx buffer + while In transmission, data are first stored into an internal Tx buffer + before being transmitted. +....[..] The read access of the SPI_DR register can be done using the + SPI_I2S_ReceiveData() function and returns the Rx buffered value. + Whereas a write access to the SPI_DR can be done using SPI_I2S_SendData() + function and stores the written data into Tx buffer. + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Returns the most recent received data by the SPIx/I2Sx peripheral. + * @param SPIx: To select the SPIx/I2Sx peripheral, where x can be: 1, 2 or 3 + * in SPI mode or 2 or 3 in I2S mode. + * @retval The value of the received data. + */ +uint16_t SPI_I2S_ReceiveData(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx)); + + /* Return the data in the DR register */ + return SPIx->DR; +} + +/** + * @brief Transmits a Data through the SPIx/I2Sx peripheral. + * @param SPIx: To select the SPIx/I2Sx peripheral, where x can be: 1, 2 or 3 + * in SPI mode or 2 or 3 in I2S mode. + * @param Data: Data to be transmitted. + * @retval None + */ +void SPI_I2S_SendData(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, uint16_t Data) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx)); + + /* Write in the DR register the data to be sent */ + SPIx->DR = Data; +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup SPI_Group3 Hardware CRC Calculation functions + * @brief Hardware CRC Calculation functions + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### Hardware CRC Calculation functions ##### + =============================================================================== + [..] This section provides a set of functions allowing to manage the SPI CRC + hardware calculation SPI communication using CRC is possible through + the following procedure: + (#) Program the Data direction, Polarity, Phase, First Data, Baud Rate + Prescaler, Slave Management, Peripheral Mode and CRC Polynomial + values using the SPI_Init() function. + (#) Enable the CRC calculation using the SPI_CalculateCRC() function. + (#) Enable the SPI using the SPI_Cmd() function. + (#) Before writing the last data to the TX buffer, set the CRCNext bit + using the SPI_TransmitCRC() function to indicate that after + transmission of the last data, the CRC should be transmitted. + (#) After transmitting the last data, the SPI transmits the CRC. + The SPI_CR1_CRCNEXT bit is reset. The CRC is also received and + compared against the SPI_RXCRCR value. + If the value does not match, the SPI_FLAG_CRCERR flag is set and an + interrupt can be generated when the SPI_I2S_IT_ERR interrupt is enabled. + -@- + (+@) It is advised to don't read the calculate CRC values during the communication. + (+@) When the SPI is in slave mode, be careful to enable CRC calculation only + when the clock is stable, that is, when the clock is in the steady state. + If not, a wrong CRC calculation may be done. In fact, the CRC is sensitive + to the SCK slave input clock as soon as CRCEN is set, and this, whatever + the value of the SPE bit. + (+@) With high bitrate frequencies, be careful when transmitting the CRC. + As the number of used CPU cycles has to be as low as possible in the CRC + transfer phase, it is forbidden to call software functions in the CRC + transmission sequence to avoid errors in the last data and CRC reception. + In fact, CRCNEXT bit has to be written before the end of the transmission/ + reception of the last data. + (+@) For high bit rate frequencies, it is advised to use the DMA mode to avoid the + degradation of the SPI speed performance due to CPU accesses impacting the + SPI bandwidth. + (+@) When the STM32L15xxx are configured as slaves and the NSS hardware mode is + used, the NSS pin needs to be kept low between the data phase and the CRC + phase. + (+@) When the SPI is configured in slave mode with the CRC feature enabled, CRC + calculation takes place even if a high level is applied on the NSS pin. + This may happen for example in case of a multislave environment where the + communication master addresses slaves alternately. + (+@) Between a slave deselection (high level on NSS) and a new slave selection + (low level on NSS), the CRC value should be cleared on both master and slave + sides in order to resynchronize the master and slave for their respective + CRC calculation. + -@- To clear the CRC, follow the procedure below: + (#@) Disable SPI using the SPI_Cmd() function + (#@) Disable the CRC calculation using the SPI_CalculateCRC() function. + (#@) Enable the CRC calculation using the SPI_CalculateCRC() function. + (#@) Enable SPI using the SPI_Cmd() function. + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the CRC value calculation of the transferred bytes. + * @param SPIx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the SPI peripheral. + * @param NewState: new state of the SPIx CRC value calculation. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void SPI_CalculateCRC(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the selected SPI CRC calculation */ + SPIx->CR1 |= SPI_CR1_CRCEN; + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected SPI CRC calculation */ + SPIx->CR1 &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)SPI_CR1_CRCEN); + } +} + +/** + * @brief Transmit the SPIx CRC value. + * @param SPIx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the SPI peripheral. + * @retval None + */ +void SPI_TransmitCRC(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx)); + + /* Enable the selected SPI CRC transmission */ + SPIx->CR1 |= SPI_CR1_CRCNEXT; +} + +/** + * @brief Returns the transmit or the receive CRC register value for the specified SPI. + * @param SPIx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the SPI peripheral. + * @param SPI_CRC: specifies the CRC register to be read. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg SPI_CRC_Tx: Selects Tx CRC register. + * @arg SPI_CRC_Rx: Selects Rx CRC register. + * @retval The selected CRC register value. + */ +uint16_t SPI_GetCRC(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, uint8_t SPI_CRC) +{ + uint16_t crcreg = 0; + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx)); + assert_param(IS_SPI_CRC(SPI_CRC)); + if (SPI_CRC != SPI_CRC_Rx) + { + /* Get the Tx CRC register */ + crcreg = SPIx->TXCRCR; + } + else + { + /* Get the Rx CRC register */ + crcreg = SPIx->RXCRCR; + } + /* Return the selected CRC register */ + return crcreg; +} + +/** + * @brief Returns the CRC Polynomial register value for the specified SPI. + * @param SPIx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the SPI peripheral. + * @retval The CRC Polynomial register value. + */ +uint16_t SPI_GetCRCPolynomial(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx)); + + /* Return the CRC polynomial register */ + return SPIx->CRCPR; +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup SPI_Group4 DMA transfers management functions + * @brief DMA transfers management functions + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### DMA transfers management functions ##### + =============================================================================== + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the SPIx/I2Sx DMA interface. + * @param SPIx: To select the SPIx/I2Sx peripheral, where x can be: 1, 2 or 3 + * in SPI mode or 2 or 3 in I2S mode. + * @param SPI_I2S_DMAReq: specifies the SPI DMA transfer request to be enabled or disabled. + * This parameter can be any combination of the following values: + * @arg SPI_I2S_DMAReq_Tx: Tx buffer DMA transfer request. + * @arg SPI_I2S_DMAReq_Rx: Rx buffer DMA transfer request. + * @param NewState: new state of the selected SPI DMA transfer request. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void SPI_I2S_DMACmd(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, uint16_t SPI_I2S_DMAReq, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + assert_param(IS_SPI_I2S_DMAREQ(SPI_I2S_DMAReq)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the selected SPI DMA requests */ + SPIx->CR2 |= SPI_I2S_DMAReq; + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected SPI DMA requests */ + SPIx->CR2 &= (uint16_t)~SPI_I2S_DMAReq; + } +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup SPI_Group5 Interrupts and flags management functions + * @brief Interrupts and flags management functions + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### Interrupts and flags management functions ##### + =============================================================================== + [..] This section provides a set of functions allowing to configure the SPI + Interrupts sources and check or clear the flags or pending bits status. + The user should identify which mode will be used in his application to + manage the communication: Polling mode, Interrupt mode or DMA mode. + *** Polling Mode *** + ==================== + [..] In Polling Mode, the SPI/I2S communication can be managed by 9 flags: + (#) SPI_I2S_FLAG_TXE : to indicate the status of the transmit buffer + register. + (#) SPI_I2S_FLAG_RXNE : to indicate the status of the receive buffer + register. + (#) SPI_I2S_FLAG_BSY : to indicate the state of the communication layer + of the SPI. + (#) SPI_FLAG_CRCERR : to indicate if a CRC Calculation error occur. + (#) SPI_FLAG_MODF : to indicate if a Mode Fault error occur. + (#) SPI_I2S_FLAG_OVR : to indicate if an Overrun error occur. + (#) SPI_I2S_FLAG_FRE: to indicate a Frame Format error occurs. + (#) I2S_FLAG_UDR: to indicate an Underrun error occurs. + (#) I2S_FLAG_CHSIDE: to indicate Channel Side. + -@- Do not use the BSY flag to handle each data transmission or reception. + It is better to use the TXE and RXNE flags instead. + [..] In this Mode it is advised to use the following functions: + (+) FlagStatus SPI_I2S_GetFlagStatus(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, uint16_t SPI_I2S_FLAG). + (+) void SPI_I2S_ClearFlag(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, uint16_t SPI_I2S_FLAG). + + *** Interrupt Mode *** + ====================== + [..] In Interrupt Mode, the SPI communication can be managed by 3 interrupt + sources and 7 pending bits: + [..] Pending Bits: + (#) SPI_I2S_IT_TXE : to indicate the status of the transmit buffer register. + (#) SPI_I2S_IT_RXNE : to indicate the status of the receive buffer register. + (#) SPI_IT_CRCERR : to indicate if a CRC Calculation error occur. + (#) SPI_IT_MODF : to indicate if a Mode Fault error occur. + (#) SPI_I2S_IT_OVR : to indicate if an Overrun error occur. + (#) I2S_IT_UDR : to indicate an Underrun Error occurs. + (#) SPI_I2S_FLAG_FRE : to indicate a Frame Format error occurs. + [..] Interrupt Source: + (#) SPI_I2S_IT_TXE: specifies the interrupt source for the Tx buffer empty + interrupt. + (#) SPI_I2S_IT_RXNE : specifies the interrupt source for the Rx buffer not + empty interrupt. + (#) SPI_I2S_IT_ERR : specifies the interrupt source for the errors interrupt. + [..] In this Mode it is advised to use the following functions: + (+) void SPI_I2S_ITConfig(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, uint8_t SPI_I2S_IT, + FunctionalState NewState). + (+) ITStatus SPI_I2S_GetITStatus(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, uint8_t SPI_I2S_IT). + (+) void SPI_I2S_ClearITPendingBit(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, uint8_t SPI_I2S_IT). + + *** DMA Mode *** + ================ + [..] In DMA Mode, the SPI communication can be managed by 2 DMA Channel + requests: + (#) SPI_I2S_DMAReq_Tx: specifies the Tx buffer DMA transfer request. + (#) SPI_I2S_DMAReq_Rx: specifies the Rx buffer DMA transfer request. + + [..] In this Mode it is advised to use the following function: + (+) void SPI_I2S_DMACmd(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, uint16_t SPI_I2S_DMAReq, + FunctionalState NewState). + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the specified SPI/I2S interrupts. + * @param SPIx: To select the SPIx/I2Sx peripheral, where x can be: 1, 2 or 3 + * in SPI mode or 2 or 3 in I2S mode. + + * @param SPI_I2S_IT: specifies the SPI interrupt source to be enabled or disabled. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg SPI_I2S_IT_TXE: Tx buffer empty interrupt mask. + * @arg SPI_I2S_IT_RXNE: Rx buffer not empty interrupt mask. + * @arg SPI_I2S_IT_ERR: Error interrupt mask. + * @param NewState: new state of the specified SPI interrupt. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void SPI_I2S_ITConfig(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, uint8_t SPI_I2S_IT, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + uint16_t itpos = 0, itmask = 0 ; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + assert_param(IS_SPI_I2S_CONFIG_IT(SPI_I2S_IT)); + + /* Get the SPI IT index */ + itpos = SPI_I2S_IT >> 4; + + /* Set the IT mask */ + itmask = (uint16_t)1 << (uint16_t)itpos; + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the selected SPI interrupt */ + SPIx->CR2 |= itmask; + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected SPI interrupt */ + SPIx->CR2 &= (uint16_t)~itmask; + } +} + +/** + * @brief Checks whether the specified SPIx/I2Sx flag is set or not. + * @param SPIx: To select the SPIx/I2Sx peripheral, where x can be: 1, 2 or 3 + * in SPI mode or 2 or 3 in I2S mode. + + * @param SPI_I2S_FLAG: specifies the SPI flag to check. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg SPI_I2S_FLAG_TXE: Transmit buffer empty flag. + * @arg SPI_I2S_FLAG_RXNE: Receive buffer not empty flag. + * @arg SPI_I2S_FLAG_BSY: Busy flag. + * @arg SPI_I2S_FLAG_OVR: Overrun flag. + * @arg SPI_FLAG_MODF: Mode Fault flag. + * @arg SPI_FLAG_CRCERR: CRC Error flag. + * @arg SPI_I2S_FLAG_FRE: Format Error. + * @arg I2S_FLAG_UDR: Underrun Error flag. + * @arg I2S_FLAG_CHSIDE: Channel Side flag. + * @retval The new state of SPI_I2S_FLAG (SET or RESET). + */ +FlagStatus SPI_I2S_GetFlagStatus(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, uint16_t SPI_I2S_FLAG) +{ + FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET; + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx)); + assert_param(IS_SPI_I2S_GET_FLAG(SPI_I2S_FLAG)); + + /* Check the status of the specified SPI flag */ + if ((SPIx->SR & SPI_I2S_FLAG) != (uint16_t)RESET) + { + /* SPI_I2S_FLAG is set */ + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + /* SPI_I2S_FLAG is reset */ + bitstatus = RESET; + } + /* Return the SPI_I2S_FLAG status */ + return bitstatus; +} + +/** + * @brief Clears the SPIx CRC Error (CRCERR) flag. + * @param SPIx: To select the SPIx/I2Sx peripheral, where x can be: 1, 2 or 3 + * in SPI mode or 2 or 3 in I2S mode. + + * @param SPI_I2S_FLAG: specifies the SPI flag to clear. + * This function clears only CRCERR flag. + + * @note OVR (OverRun error) flag is cleared by software sequence: a read + * operation to SPI_DR register (SPI_I2S_ReceiveData()) followed by a read + * operation to SPI_SR register (SPI_I2S_GetFlagStatus()). + * @note UDR (UnderRun error) flag is cleared by a read operation to + * SPI_SR register (SPI_I2S_GetFlagStatus()). + * @note MODF (Mode Fault) flag is cleared by software sequence: a read/write + * operation to SPI_SR register (SPI_I2S_GetFlagStatus()) followed by a + * write operation to SPI_CR1 register (SPI_Cmd() to enable the SPI). + * @retval None + */ +void SPI_I2S_ClearFlag(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, uint16_t SPI_I2S_FLAG) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx)); + assert_param(IS_SPI_I2S_CLEAR_FLAG(SPI_I2S_FLAG)); + + /* Clear the selected SPI CRC Error (CRCERR) flag */ + SPIx->SR = (uint16_t)~SPI_I2S_FLAG; +} + +/** + * @brief Checks whether the specified SPIx/I2Sx interrupt has occurred or not. + * @param SPIx: To select the SPIx/I2Sx peripheral, where x can be: 1, 2 or 3 + * in SPI mode or 2 or 3 in I2S mode. + + * @param SPI_I2S_IT: specifies the SPI interrupt source to check. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg SPI_I2S_IT_TXE: Transmit buffer empty interrupt. + * @arg SPI_I2S_IT_RXNE: Receive buffer not empty interrupt. + * @arg SPI_I2S_IT_OVR: Overrun interrupt. + * @arg SPI_IT_MODF: Mode Fault interrupt. + * @arg SPI_IT_CRCERR: CRC Error interrupt. + * @arg I2S_IT_UDR: Underrun interrupt. + * @arg SPI_I2S_IT_FRE: Format Error interrupt. + * @retval The new state of SPI_I2S_IT (SET or RESET). + */ +ITStatus SPI_I2S_GetITStatus(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, uint8_t SPI_I2S_IT) +{ + ITStatus bitstatus = RESET; + uint16_t itpos = 0, itmask = 0, enablestatus = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx)); + assert_param(IS_SPI_I2S_GET_IT(SPI_I2S_IT)); + + /* Get the SPI_I2S_IT index */ + itpos = 0x01 << (SPI_I2S_IT & 0x0F); + + /* Get the SPI_I2S_IT IT mask */ + itmask = SPI_I2S_IT >> 4; + + /* Set the IT mask */ + itmask = 0x01 << itmask; + + /* Get the SPI_I2S_IT enable bit status */ + enablestatus = (SPIx->CR2 & itmask) ; + + /* Check the status of the specified SPI interrupt */ + if (((SPIx->SR & itpos) != (uint16_t)RESET) && enablestatus) + { + /* SPI_I2S_IT is set */ + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + /* SPI_I2S_IT is reset */ + bitstatus = RESET; + } + /* Return the SPI_I2S_IT status */ + return bitstatus; +} + +/** + * @brief Clears the SPIx CRC Error (CRCERR) interrupt pending bit. + * @param SPIx: To select the SPIx/I2Sx peripheral, where x can be: 1, 2 or 3 + * in SPI mode or 2 or 3 in I2S mode. + + * @param SPI_I2S_IT: specifies the SPI interrupt pending bit to clear. + * This function clears only CRCERR interrupt pending bit. + + * OVR (OverRun Error) interrupt pending bit is cleared by software + * sequence: a read operation to SPI_DR register (SPI_I2S_ReceiveData()) + * followed by a read operation to SPI_SR register (SPI_I2S_GetITStatus()). + * @note UDR (UnderRun Error) interrupt pending bit is cleared by a read + * operation to SPI_SR register (SPI_I2S_GetITStatus()). + * @note MODF (Mode Fault) interrupt pending bit is cleared by software sequence: + * a read/write operation to SPI_SR register (SPI_I2S_GetITStatus()) + * followed by a write operation to SPI_CR1 register (SPI_Cmd() to enable + * the SPI). + * @retval None + */ +void SPI_I2S_ClearITPendingBit(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, uint8_t SPI_I2S_IT) +{ + uint16_t itpos = 0; + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx)); + assert_param(IS_SPI_I2S_CLEAR_IT(SPI_I2S_IT)); + + /* Get the SPI_I2S IT index */ + itpos = 0x01 << (SPI_I2S_IT & 0x0F); + + /* Clear the selected SPI CRC Error (CRCERR) interrupt pending bit */ + SPIx->SR = (uint16_t)~itpos; +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/ diff --git a/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32l1xx_syscfg.c b/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32l1xx_syscfg.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e719bee --- /dev/null +++ b/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32l1xx_syscfg.c @@ -0,0 +1,652 @@ +/** + ****************************************************************************** + * @file stm32l1xx_syscfg.c + * @author MCD Application Team + * @version V1.1.1 + * @date 05-March-2012 + * @brief This file provides firmware functions to manage the following + * functionalities of the SYSCFG and RI peripherals: + * + SYSCFG Initialization and Configuration + * + RI Initialization and Configuration + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### How to use this driver ##### + =============================================================================== + [..] This driver provides functions for: + (#) Remapping the memory accessible in the code area using + SYSCFG_MemoryRemapConfig(). + (#) Manage the EXTI lines connection to the GPIOs using + SYSCFG_EXTILineConfig(). + (#) Routing of I/Os toward the input captures of timers (TIM2, TIM3 and TIM4). + (#) Input routing of COMP1 and COMP2. + (#) Routing of internal reference voltage VREFINT to PB0 and PB1. + (#) The RI registers can be accessed only when the comparator + APB interface clock is enabled. + To enable comparator clock use: + RCC_APB1PeriphClockCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_COMP, ENABLE). + Following functions uses RI registers: + (++) SYSCFG_RIDeInit() + (++) SYSCFG_RITIMSelect() + (++) SYSCFG_RITIMInputCaptureConfig() + (++) SYSCFG_RIResistorConfig() + (++) SYSCFG_RIChannelSpeedConfig() + (++) SYSCFG_RIIOSwitchConfig() + (++) SYSCFG_RISwitchControlModeCmd() + (++) SYSCFG_RIHysteresisConfig() + (#) The SYSCFG registers can be accessed only when the SYSCFG + interface APB clock is enabled. + To enable SYSCFG APB clock use: + RCC_APB2PeriphClockCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_SYSCFG, ENABLE); + Following functions uses SYSCFG registers: + (++) SYSCFG_DeInit() + (++) SYSCFG_MemoryRemapConfig() + (++) SYSCFG_GetBootMode() + (++) SYSCFG_USBPuCmd() + (++) SYSCFG_EXTILineConfig() +@endverbatim + * + ****************************************************************************** + * @attention + * + * <h2><center>© COPYRIGHT 2012 STMicroelectronics</center></h2> + * + * Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License"); + * You may not use this file except in compliance with the License. + * You may obtain a copy of the License at: + * + * http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2 + * + * Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software + * distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS, + * WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. + * See the License for the specific language governing permissions and + * limitations under the License. + * + ****************************************************************************** + */ + +/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#include "stm32l1xx_syscfg.h" +#include "stm32l1xx_rcc.h" + +/** @addtogroup STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver + * @{ + */ + +/** @defgroup SYSCFG + * @brief SYSCFG driver modules + * @{ + */ + +/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#define TIM_SELECT_MASK ((uint32_t)0xFFFCFFFF) /*!< TIM select mask */ +#define IC_ROUTING_MASK ((uint32_t)0x0000000F) /*!< Input Capture routing mask */ + +/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/ + +/** @defgroup SYSCFG_Private_Functions + * @{ + */ + +/** @defgroup SYSCFG_Group1 SYSCFG Initialization and Configuration functions + * @brief SYSCFG Initialization and Configuration functions + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### SYSCFG Initialization and Configuration functions ##### + =============================================================================== + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Deinitializes the SYSCFG registers to their default reset values. + * @param None. + * @retval None. + * @Note: MEMRMP bits are not reset by APB2 reset. + */ +void SYSCFG_DeInit(void) +{ + RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_SYSCFG, ENABLE); + RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_SYSCFG, DISABLE); +} + +/** + * @brief Deinitializes the RI registers to their default reset values. + * @param None. + * @retval None. + */ +void SYSCFG_RIDeInit(void) +{ + RI->ICR = ((uint32_t)0x00000000); /*!< Set RI->ICR to reset value */ + RI->ASCR1 = ((uint32_t)0x00000000); /*!< Set RI->ASCR1 to reset value */ + RI->ASCR2 = ((uint32_t)0x00000000); /*!< Set RI->ASCR2 to reset value */ + RI->HYSCR1 = ((uint32_t)0x00000000); /*!< Set RI->HYSCR1 to reset value */ + RI->HYSCR2 = ((uint32_t)0x00000000); /*!< Set RI->HYSCR2 to reset value */ + RI->HYSCR3 = ((uint32_t)0x00000000); /*!< Set RI->HYSCR3 to reset value */ + RI->HYSCR4 = ((uint32_t)0x00000000); /*!< Set RI->HYSCR4 to reset value */ +} + +/** + * @brief Changes the mapping of the specified memory. + * @param SYSCFG_Memory: selects the memory remapping. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg SYSCFG_MemoryRemap_Flash: Main Flash memory mapped at 0x00000000 + * @arg SYSCFG_MemoryRemap_SystemFlash: System Flash memory mapped at 0x00000000 + * @arg SYSCFG_MemoryRemap_FSMC: FSMC memory mapped at 0x00000000 + * @arg SYSCFG_MemoryRemap_SRAM: Embedded SRAM mapped at 0x00000000 + * @retval None + */ +void SYSCFG_MemoryRemapConfig(uint8_t SYSCFG_MemoryRemap) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_SYSCFG_MEMORY_REMAP_CONFING(SYSCFG_MemoryRemap)); + SYSCFG->MEMRMP = SYSCFG_MemoryRemap; +} + +/** + * @brief Returns the boot mode as configured by user. + * @param None. + * @retval The boot mode as configured by user. The returned value can be one + * of the following values: + * - 0x00000000: Boot is configured in Main Flash memory + * - 0x00000100: Boot is configured in System Flash memory + * - 0x00000200: Boot is configured in FSMC memory + * - 0x00000300: Boot is configured in Embedded SRAM memory + */ +uint32_t SYSCFG_GetBootMode(void) +{ + return (SYSCFG->MEMRMP & SYSCFG_MEMRMP_BOOT_MODE); +} + +/** + * @brief Control the internal pull-up on USB DP line. + * @param NewState: New state of the internal pull-up on USB DP line. + * This parameter can be ENABLE: Connect internal pull-up on USB DP line. + * or DISABLE: Disconnect internal pull-up on USB DP line. + * @retval None + */ +void SYSCFG_USBPuCmd(FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Connect internal pull-up on USB DP line */ + SYSCFG->PMC |= (uint32_t) SYSCFG_PMC_USB_PU; + } + else + { + /* Disconnect internal pull-up on USB DP line */ + SYSCFG->PMC &= (uint32_t)(~SYSCFG_PMC_USB_PU); + } +} + +/** + * @brief Selects the GPIO pin used as EXTI Line. + * @param EXTI_PortSourceGPIOx : selects the GPIO port to be used as source + * for EXTI lines where x can be (A, B, C, D, E, F, G or H). + * @param EXTI_PinSourcex: specifies the EXTI line to be configured. + * This parameter can be EXTI_PinSourcex where x can be (0..15). + * @retval None + */ +void SYSCFG_EXTILineConfig(uint8_t EXTI_PortSourceGPIOx, uint8_t EXTI_PinSourcex) +{ + uint32_t tmp = 0x00; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_EXTI_PORT_SOURCE(EXTI_PortSourceGPIOx)); + assert_param(IS_EXTI_PIN_SOURCE(EXTI_PinSourcex)); + + tmp = ((uint32_t)0x0F) << (0x04 * (EXTI_PinSourcex & (uint8_t)0x03)); + SYSCFG->EXTICR[EXTI_PinSourcex >> 0x02] &= ~tmp; + SYSCFG->EXTICR[EXTI_PinSourcex >> 0x02] |= (((uint32_t)EXTI_PortSourceGPIOx) << (0x04 * (EXTI_PinSourcex & (uint8_t)0x03))); +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup SYSCFG_Group2 RI Initialization and Configuration functions + * @brief RI Initialization and Configuration functions + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### RI Initialization and Configuration functions ##### + =============================================================================== + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Configures the routing interface to select which Timer to be routed. + * @note Routing capability can be applied only on one of the three timers + * (TIM2, TIM3 or TIM4) at a time. + * @param TIM_Select: Timer select. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg TIM_Select_None: No timer selected and default Timer mapping is enabled. + * @arg TIM_Select_TIM2: Timer 2 Input Captures to be routed. + * @arg TIM_Select_TIM3: Timer 3 Input Captures to be routed. + * @arg TIM_Select_TIM4: Timer 4 Input Captures to be routed. + * @retval None. + */ +void SYSCFG_RITIMSelect(uint32_t TIM_Select) +{ + uint32_t tmpreg = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RI_TIM(TIM_Select)); + + /* Get the old register value */ + tmpreg = RI->ICR; + + /* Clear the TIMx select bits */ + tmpreg &= TIM_SELECT_MASK; + + /* Select the Timer */ + tmpreg |= (TIM_Select); + + /* Write to RI->ICR register */ + RI->ICR = tmpreg; +} + +/** + * @brief Configures the routing interface to map Input Capture 1, 2, 3 or 4 + * to a selected I/O pin. + * @param RI_InputCapture selects which input capture to be routed. + * This parameter can be one (or combination) of the following parameters: + * @arg RI_InputCapture_IC1: Input capture 1 is selected. + * @arg RI_InputCapture_IC2: Input capture 2 is selected. + * @arg RI_InputCapture_IC3: Input capture 3 is selected. + * @arg RI_InputCapture_IC4: Input capture 4 is selected. + * @param RI_InputCaptureRouting: selects which pin to be routed to Input Capture. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @param RI_InputCaptureRouting_0 to RI_InputCaptureRouting_15 + * e.g. + * SYSCFG_RITIMSelect(TIM_Select_TIM2) + * SYSCFG_RITIMInputCaptureConfig(RI_InputCapture_IC1, RI_InputCaptureRouting_1) + * allows routing of Input capture IC1 of TIM2 to PA4. + * For details about correspondence between RI_InputCaptureRouting_x + * and I/O pins refer to the parameters' description in the header file + * or refer to the product reference manual. + * @note Input capture selection bits are not reset by this function. + * To reset input capture selection bits, use SYSCFG_RIDeInit() function. + * @note The I/O should be configured in alternate function mode (AF14) using + * GPIO_PinAFConfig() function. + * @retval None. + */ +void SYSCFG_RITIMInputCaptureConfig(uint32_t RI_InputCapture, uint32_t RI_InputCaptureRouting) +{ + uint32_t tmpreg = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RI_INPUTCAPTURE(RI_InputCapture)); + assert_param(IS_RI_INPUTCAPTURE_ROUTING(RI_InputCaptureRouting)); + + /* Get the old register value */ + tmpreg = RI->ICR; + + /* Select input captures to be routed */ + tmpreg |= (RI_InputCapture); + + if((RI_InputCapture & RI_InputCapture_IC1) == RI_InputCapture_IC1) + { + /* Clear the input capture select bits */ + tmpreg &= (uint32_t)(~IC_ROUTING_MASK); + + /* Set RI_InputCaptureRouting bits */ + tmpreg |= (uint32_t)( RI_InputCaptureRouting); + } + + if((RI_InputCapture & RI_InputCapture_IC2) == RI_InputCapture_IC2) + { + /* Clear the input capture select bits */ + tmpreg &= (uint32_t)(~(IC_ROUTING_MASK << 4)); + + /* Set RI_InputCaptureRouting bits */ + tmpreg |= (uint32_t)( (RI_InputCaptureRouting << 4)); + } + + if((RI_InputCapture & RI_InputCapture_IC3) == RI_InputCapture_IC3) + { + /* Clear the input capture select bits */ + tmpreg &= (uint32_t)(~(IC_ROUTING_MASK << 8)); + + /* Set RI_InputCaptureRouting bits */ + tmpreg |= (uint32_t)( (RI_InputCaptureRouting << 8)); + } + + if((RI_InputCapture & RI_InputCapture_IC4) == RI_InputCapture_IC4) + { + /* Clear the input capture select bits */ + tmpreg &= (uint32_t)(~(IC_ROUTING_MASK << 12)); + + /* Set RI_InputCaptureRouting bits */ + tmpreg |= (uint32_t)( (RI_InputCaptureRouting << 12)); + } + + /* Write to RI->ICR register */ + RI->ICR = tmpreg; +} + +/** + * @brief Configures the Pull-up and Pull-down Resistors + * @param RI_Resistor selects the resistor to connect. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg RI_Resistor_10KPU: 10K pull-up resistor. + * @arg RI_Resistor_400KPU: 400K pull-up resistor. + * @arg RI_Resistor_10KPD: 10K pull-down resistor. + * @arg RI_Resistor_400KPD: 400K pull-down resistor. + * @param NewState: New state of the analog switch associated to the selected + * resistor. + * This parameter can be: + * ENABLE so the selected resistor is connected + * or DISABLE so the selected resistor is disconnected. + * @note To avoid extra power consumption, only one resistor should be enabled + * at a time. + * @retval None + */ +void SYSCFG_RIResistorConfig(uint32_t RI_Resistor, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RI_RESISTOR(RI_Resistor)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the resistor */ + COMP->CSR |= (uint32_t) RI_Resistor; + } + else + { + /* Disable the Resistor */ + COMP->CSR &= (uint32_t) (~RI_Resistor); + } +} + +/** + * @brief Configures the ADC channels speed. + * @param RI_Channel selects the channel. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg RI_Channel_3: Channel 3 is selected. + * @arg RI_Channel_8: Channel 8 is selected. + * @arg RI_Channel_13: Channel 13 is selected. + * @param RI_ChannelSpeed: The speed of the selected ADC channel + * This parameter can be: + * RI_ChannelSpeed_Fast: The selected channel is a fast ADC channel + * or RI_ChannelSpeed_Slow: The selected channel is a slow ADC channel. + * @retval None + */ +void SYSCFG_RIChannelSpeedConfig(uint32_t RI_Channel, uint32_t RI_ChannelSpeed) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RI_CHANNEL(RI_Channel)); + assert_param(IS_RI_CHANNELSPEED(RI_ChannelSpeed)); + + if(RI_ChannelSpeed != RI_ChannelSpeed_Fast) + { + /* Set the selected channel as a slow ADC channel */ + COMP->CSR &= (uint32_t) (~RI_Channel); + } + else + { + /* Set the selected channel as a fast ADC channel */ + COMP->CSR |= (uint32_t) (RI_Channel); + } +} + +/** + * @brief Close or Open the routing interface Input Output switches. + * @param RI_IOSwitch: selects the I/O analog switch number. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @param RI_IOSwitch_CH0 --> RI_IOSwitch_CH15. + * @param RI_IOSwitch_CH18 --> RI_IOSwitch_CH25. + * @param RI_IOSwitch_GR10_1 --> RI_IOSwitch_GR10_4. + * @param RI_IOSwitch_GR6_1 --> RI_IOSwitch_GR6_2. + * @param RI_IOSwitch_GR5_1 --> RI_IOSwitch_GR5_3. + * @param RI_IOSwitch_GR4_1 --> RI_IOSwitch_GR4_3. + * @param RI_IOSwitch_VCOMP + * RI_IOSwitch_CH27 + * @param RI_IOSwitch_CH28 --> RI_IOSwitch_CH30 + * @param RI_IOSwitch_GR10_1 --> RI_IOSwitch_GR10_4 + * @param RI_IOSwitch_GR6_1 + * @param RI_IOSwitch_GR6_2 + * @param RI_IOSwitch_GR5_1 --> RI_IOSwitch_GR5_3 + * @param RI_IOSwitch_GR4_1 --> RI_IOSwitch_GR4_4 + * @param RI_IOSwitch_CH0b --> RI_IOSwitch_CH3b + * @param RI_IOSwitch_CH6b --> RI_IOSwitch_CH12b + * @param RI_IOSwitch_GR6_3 + * @param RI_IOSwitch_GR6_4 + * @param RI_IOSwitch_GR5_4 + + * @param NewState: New state of the analog switch. + * This parameter can be + * ENABLE so the Input Output switch is closed + * or DISABLE so the Input Output switch is open. + * @retval None + */ +void SYSCFG_RIIOSwitchConfig(uint32_t RI_IOSwitch, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + uint32_t ioswitchmask = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RI_IOSWITCH(RI_IOSwitch)); + + /* Read Analog switch register index */ + ioswitchmask = RI_IOSwitch >> 31; + + /* Get Bits[30:0] of the IO switch */ + RI_IOSwitch &= 0x7FFFFFFF; + + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + if (ioswitchmask != 0) + { + /* Close the analog switches */ + RI->ASCR1 |= RI_IOSwitch; + } + else + { + /* Open the analog switches */ + RI->ASCR2 |= RI_IOSwitch; + } + } + else + { + if (ioswitchmask != 0) + { + /* Close the analog switches */ + RI->ASCR1 &= (~ (uint32_t)RI_IOSwitch); + } + else + { + /* Open the analog switches */ + RI->ASCR2 &= (~ (uint32_t)RI_IOSwitch); + } + } +} + +/** + * @brief Enable or disable the switch control mode. + * @param NewState: New state of the switch control mode. This parameter can + * be ENABLE: ADC analog switches closed if the corresponding + * I/O switch is also closed. + * When using COMP1, switch control mode must be enabled. + * or DISABLE: ADC analog switches open or controlled by the ADC interface. + * When using the ADC for acquisition, switch control mode + * must be disabled. + * @note COMP1 comparator and ADC cannot be used at the same time since + * they share the ADC switch matrix. + * @retval None + */ +void SYSCFG_RISwitchControlModeCmd(FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the Switch control mode */ + RI->ASCR1 |= (uint32_t) RI_ASCR1_SCM; + } + else + { + /* Disable the Switch control mode */ + RI->ASCR1 &= (uint32_t)(~RI_ASCR1_SCM); + } +} + +/** + * @brief Enable or disable Hysteresis of the input schmitt triger of Ports A..E + * When the I/Os are programmed in input mode by standard I/O port + * registers, the Schmitt trigger and the hysteresis are enabled by default. + * When hysteresis is disabled, it is possible to read the + * corresponding port with a trigger level of VDDIO/2. + * @param RI_Port: selects the GPIO Port. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg RI_PortA: Port A is selected + * @arg RI_PortB: Port B is selected + * @arg RI_PortC: Port C is selected + * @arg RI_PortD: Port D is selected + * @arg RI_PortE: Port E is selected + * @arg RI_PortF: Port F is selected + * @arg RI_PortG: Port G is selected + * @param RI_Pin : Selects the pin(s) on which to enable or disable hysteresis. + * This parameter can any value from RI_Pin_x where x can be (0..15) or RI_Pin_All. + * @param NewState new state of the Hysteresis. + * This parameter can be: + * ENABLE so the Hysteresis is on + * or DISABLE so the Hysteresis is off + * @retval None + */ +void SYSCFG_RIHysteresisConfig(uint8_t RI_Port, uint16_t RI_Pin, + FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RI_PORT(RI_Port)); + assert_param(IS_RI_PIN(RI_Pin)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if(RI_Port == RI_PortA) + { + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Hysteresis on */ + RI->HYSCR1 &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)RI_Pin); + } + else + { + /* Hysteresis off */ + RI->HYSCR1 |= (uint32_t) RI_Pin; + } + } + + else if(RI_Port == RI_PortB) + { + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Hysteresis on */ + RI->HYSCR1 &= (uint32_t) (~((uint32_t)RI_Pin) << 16); + } + else + { + /* Hysteresis off */ + RI->HYSCR1 |= (uint32_t) ((uint32_t)(RI_Pin) << 16); + } + } + + else if(RI_Port == RI_PortC) + { + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Hysteresis on */ + RI->HYSCR2 &= (uint32_t) (~((uint32_t)RI_Pin)); + } + else + { + /* Hysteresis off */ + RI->HYSCR2 |= (uint32_t) (RI_Pin ); + } + } + else if(RI_Port == RI_PortD) + { + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Hysteresis on */ + RI->HYSCR2 &= (uint32_t) (~((uint32_t)RI_Pin) << 16); + } + else + { + /* Hysteresis off */ + RI->HYSCR2 |= (uint32_t) ((uint32_t)(RI_Pin) << 16); + + } + } + else if(RI_Port == RI_PortE) + { + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Hysteresis on */ + RI->HYSCR3 &= (uint32_t) (~((uint32_t)RI_Pin)); + } + else + { + /* Hysteresis off */ + RI->HYSCR3 |= (uint32_t) (RI_Pin ); + } + } + else if(RI_Port == RI_PortF) + { + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Hysteresis on */ + RI->HYSCR3 &= (uint32_t) (~((uint32_t)RI_Pin) << 16); + } + else + { + /* Hysteresis off */ + RI->HYSCR3 |= (uint32_t) ((uint32_t)(RI_Pin) << 16); + } + } + else /* RI_Port == RI_PortG */ + { + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Hysteresis on */ + RI->HYSCR4 &= (uint32_t) (~((uint32_t)RI_Pin)); + } + else + { + /* Hysteresis off */ + RI->HYSCR4 |= (uint32_t) (RI_Pin); + } + } +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ +/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/ diff --git a/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32l1xx_usart.c b/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32l1xx_usart.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..48c051f --- /dev/null +++ b/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32l1xx_usart.c @@ -0,0 +1,1459 @@ +/** + ****************************************************************************** + * @file stm32l1xx_usart.c + * @author MCD Application Team + * @version V1.1.1 + * @date 05-March-2012 + * @brief This file provides firmware functions to manage the following + * functionalities of the Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver + * transmitter (USART): + * + Initialization and Configuration + * + Data transfers + * + Multi-Processor Communication + * + LIN mode + * + Half-duplex mode + * + Smartcard mode + * + IrDA mode + * + DMA transfers management + * + Interrupts and flags management + * + * @verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### How to use this driver ##### + =============================================================================== + [..] + (#) Enable peripheral clock using + RCC_APB2PeriphClockCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_USART1, ENABLE) function for + USART1 or using RCC_APB1PeriphClockCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_USARTx, ENABLE) + function for USART2 and USART3. + (#) According to the USART mode, enable the GPIO clocks using + RCC_AHBPeriphClockCmd() function. (The I/O can be TX, RX, CTS, + or and SCLK). + (#) Peripheral's alternate function: + (++) Connect the pin to the desired peripherals' Alternate + Function (AF) using GPIO_PinAFConfig() function. + (++) Configure the desired pin in alternate function by: + GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Mode = GPIO_Mode_AF. + (++) Select the type, pull-up/pull-down and output speed via + GPIO_PuPd, GPIO_OType and GPIO_Speed members. + (++) Call GPIO_Init() function. + (#) Program the Baud Rate, Word Length , Stop Bit, Parity, Hardware + flow control and Mode(Receiver/Transmitter) using the SPI_Init() + function. + (#) For synchronous mode, enable the clock and program the polarity, + phase and last bit using the USART_ClockInit() function. + (#) Enable the NVIC and the corresponding interrupt using the function + USART_ITConfig() if you need to use interrupt mode. + (#) When using the DMA mode. + (++) Configure the DMA using DMA_Init() function. + (++) Active the needed channel Request using USART_DMACmd() function. + (#) Enable the USART using the USART_Cmd() function. + (#) Enable the DMA using the DMA_Cmd() function, when using DMA mode. + [..] + Refer to Multi-Processor, LIN, half-duplex, Smartcard, IrDA sub-sections + for more details. + +@endverbatim + + ****************************************************************************** + * @attention + * + * <h2><center>© COPYRIGHT 2012 STMicroelectronics</center></h2> + * + * Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License"); + * You may not use this file except in compliance with the License. + * You may obtain a copy of the License at: + * + * http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2 + * + * Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software + * distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS, + * WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. + * See the License for the specific language governing permissions and + * limitations under the License. + * + ****************************************************************************** + */ + +/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#include "stm32l1xx_usart.h" +#include "stm32l1xx_rcc.h" + +/** @addtogroup STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver + * @{ + */ + +/** @defgroup USART + * @brief USART driver modules + * @{ + */ + +/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +/*!< USART CR1 register clear Mask ((~(uint16_t)0xE9F3)) */ +#define CR1_CLEAR_MASK ((uint16_t)(USART_CR1_M | USART_CR1_PCE | \ + USART_CR1_PS | USART_CR1_TE | \ + USART_CR1_RE)) + +/*!< USART CR2 register clock bits clear Mask ((~(uint16_t)0xF0FF)) */ +#define CR2_CLOCK_CLEAR_MASK ((uint16_t)(USART_CR2_CLKEN | USART_CR2_CPOL | \ + USART_CR2_CPHA | USART_CR2_LBCL)) + +/*!< USART CR3 register clear Mask ((~(uint16_t)0xFCFF)) */ +#define CR3_CLEAR_MASK ((uint16_t)(USART_CR3_RTSE | USART_CR3_CTSE)) + +/*!< USART Interrupts mask */ +#define IT_MASK ((uint16_t)0x001F) + +/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/ + +/** @defgroup USART_Private_Functions + * @{ + */ + +/** @defgroup USART_Group1 Initialization and Configuration functions + * @brief Initialization and Configuration functions + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### Initialization and Configuration functions ##### + =============================================================================== + [..] + This subsection provides a set of functions allowing to initialize the USART + in asynchronous and in synchronous modes. + (+) For the asynchronous mode only these parameters can be configured: + (+) Baud Rate. + (+) Word Length. + (+) Stop Bit. + (+) Parity: If the parity is enabled, then the MSB bit of the data written + in the data register is transmitted but is changed by the parity bit. + Depending on the frame length defined by the M bit (8-bits or 9-bits), + the possible USART frame formats are as listed in the following table: + [..] + +-------------------------------------------------------------+ + | M bit | PCE bit | USART frame | + |---------------------|---------------------------------------| + | 0 | 0 | | SB | 8 bit data | STB | | + |---------|-----------|---------------------------------------| + | 0 | 1 | | SB | 7 bit data | PB | STB | | + |---------|-----------|---------------------------------------| + | 1 | 0 | | SB | 9 bit data | STB | | + |---------|-----------|---------------------------------------| + | 1 | 1 | | SB | 8 bit data | PB | STB | | + +-------------------------------------------------------------+ + [..] + (+) Hardware flow control. + (+) Receiver/transmitter modes. + [..] The USART_Init() function follows the USART asynchronous configuration + procedure(details for the procedure are available in reference manual + (RM0038)). + (+) For the synchronous mode in addition to the asynchronous mode parameters + these parameters should be also configured: + (++) USART Clock Enabled. + (++) USART polarity. + (++) USART phase. + (++) USART LastBit. + [..] These parameters can be configured using the USART_ClockInit() function. + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Deinitializes the USARTx peripheral registers to their default reset values. + * @param USARTx: Select the USART peripheral. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: USART1, USART2, USART3, + * UART4 or UART5. + * @retval None. + */ +void USART_DeInit(USART_TypeDef* USARTx) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx)); + + if (USARTx == USART1) + { + RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_USART1, ENABLE); + RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_USART1, DISABLE); + } + else if (USARTx == USART2) + { + RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_USART2, ENABLE); + RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_USART2, DISABLE); + } + else if (USARTx == USART3) + { + RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_USART3, ENABLE); + RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_USART3, DISABLE); + } + else if (USARTx == UART4) + { + RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_UART4, ENABLE); + RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_UART4, DISABLE); + } + else + { + if (USARTx == UART5) + { + RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_UART5, ENABLE); + RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_UART5, DISABLE); + } + } +} + +/** + * @brief Initializes the USARTx peripheral according to the specified + * parameters in the USART_InitStruct. + * @param USARTx: Select the USART peripheral. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: USART1, USART2, USART3, + * UART4 or UART5. + * @param USART_InitStruct: pointer to a USART_InitTypeDef structure that + * contains the configuration information for the specified USART peripheral. + * @retval None. + */ +void USART_Init(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, USART_InitTypeDef* USART_InitStruct) +{ + uint32_t tmpreg = 0x00, apbclock = 0x00; + uint32_t integerdivider = 0x00; + uint32_t fractionaldivider = 0x00; + RCC_ClocksTypeDef RCC_ClocksStatus; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx)); + assert_param(IS_USART_BAUDRATE(USART_InitStruct->USART_BaudRate)); + assert_param(IS_USART_WORD_LENGTH(USART_InitStruct->USART_WordLength)); + assert_param(IS_USART_STOPBITS(USART_InitStruct->USART_StopBits)); + assert_param(IS_USART_PARITY(USART_InitStruct->USART_Parity)); + assert_param(IS_USART_MODE(USART_InitStruct->USART_Mode)); + assert_param(IS_USART_HARDWARE_FLOW_CONTROL(USART_InitStruct->USART_HardwareFlowControl)); + + /* The hardware flow control is available only for USART1, USART2 and USART3 */ + if (USART_InitStruct->USART_HardwareFlowControl != USART_HardwareFlowControl_None) + { + assert_param(IS_USART_123_PERIPH(USARTx)); + } + +/*---------------------------- USART CR2 Configuration -----------------------*/ + tmpreg = USARTx->CR2; + /* Clear STOP[13:12] bits */ + tmpreg &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)USART_CR2_STOP); + + /* Configure the USART Stop Bits, Clock, CPOL, CPHA and LastBit ------------*/ + /* Set STOP[13:12] bits according to USART_StopBits value */ + tmpreg |= (uint32_t)USART_InitStruct->USART_StopBits; + + /* Write to USART CR2 */ + USARTx->CR2 = (uint16_t)tmpreg; + +/*---------------------------- USART CR1 Configuration -----------------------*/ + tmpreg = USARTx->CR1; + /* Clear M, PCE, PS, TE and RE bits */ + tmpreg &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)CR1_CLEAR_MASK); + + /* Configure the USART Word Length, Parity and mode ----------------------- */ + /* Set the M bits according to USART_WordLength value */ + /* Set PCE and PS bits according to USART_Parity value */ + /* Set TE and RE bits according to USART_Mode value */ + tmpreg |= (uint32_t)USART_InitStruct->USART_WordLength | USART_InitStruct->USART_Parity | + USART_InitStruct->USART_Mode; + + /* Write to USART CR1 */ + USARTx->CR1 = (uint16_t)tmpreg; + +/*---------------------------- USART CR3 Configuration -----------------------*/ + tmpreg = USARTx->CR3; + /* Clear CTSE and RTSE bits */ + tmpreg &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)CR3_CLEAR_MASK); + + /* Configure the USART HFC -------------------------------------------------*/ + /* Set CTSE and RTSE bits according to USART_HardwareFlowControl value */ + tmpreg |= USART_InitStruct->USART_HardwareFlowControl; + + /* Write to USART CR3 */ + USARTx->CR3 = (uint16_t)tmpreg; + +/*---------------------------- USART BRR Configuration -----------------------*/ + /* Configure the USART Baud Rate -------------------------------------------*/ + RCC_GetClocksFreq(&RCC_ClocksStatus); + if (USARTx == USART1) + { + apbclock = RCC_ClocksStatus.PCLK2_Frequency; + } + else + { + apbclock = RCC_ClocksStatus.PCLK1_Frequency; + } + + /* Determine the integer part */ + if ((USARTx->CR1 & USART_CR1_OVER8) != 0) + { + /* Integer part computing in case Oversampling mode is 8 Samples */ + integerdivider = ((25 * apbclock) / (2 * (USART_InitStruct->USART_BaudRate))); + } + else /* if ((USARTx->CR1 & CR1_OVER8_Set) == 0) */ + { + /* Integer part computing in case Oversampling mode is 16 Samples */ + integerdivider = ((25 * apbclock) / (4 * (USART_InitStruct->USART_BaudRate))); + } + tmpreg = (integerdivider / 100) << 4; + + /* Determine the fractional part */ + fractionaldivider = integerdivider - (100 * (tmpreg >> 4)); + + /* Implement the fractional part in the register */ + if ((USARTx->CR1 & USART_CR1_OVER8) != 0) + { + tmpreg |= ((((fractionaldivider * 8) + 50) / 100)) & ((uint8_t)0x07); + } + else /* if ((USARTx->CR1 & CR1_OVER8_Set) == 0) */ + { + tmpreg |= ((((fractionaldivider * 16) + 50) / 100)) & ((uint8_t)0x0F); + } + + /* Write to USART BRR */ + USARTx->BRR = (uint16_t)tmpreg; +} + +/** + * @brief Fills each USART_InitStruct member with its default value. + * @param USART_InitStruct: pointer to a USART_InitTypeDef structure + * which will be initialized. + * @retval None + */ +void USART_StructInit(USART_InitTypeDef* USART_InitStruct) +{ + /* USART_InitStruct members default value */ + USART_InitStruct->USART_BaudRate = 9600; + USART_InitStruct->USART_WordLength = USART_WordLength_8b; + USART_InitStruct->USART_StopBits = USART_StopBits_1; + USART_InitStruct->USART_Parity = USART_Parity_No ; + USART_InitStruct->USART_Mode = USART_Mode_Rx | USART_Mode_Tx; + USART_InitStruct->USART_HardwareFlowControl = USART_HardwareFlowControl_None; +} + +/** + * @brief Initializes the USARTx peripheral Clock according to the + * specified parameters in the USART_ClockInitStruct. + * @param USARTx: where x can be 1, 2, 3 to select the USART peripheral. + * @param USART_ClockInitStruct: pointer to a USART_ClockInitTypeDef + * structure that contains the configuration information for the specified + * USART peripheral. + * @note The Smart Card and Synchronous modes are not available for UART4 and UART5. + * @retval None. + */ +void USART_ClockInit(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, USART_ClockInitTypeDef* USART_ClockInitStruct) +{ + uint32_t tmpreg = 0x00; + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_USART_123_PERIPH(USARTx)); + assert_param(IS_USART_CLOCK(USART_ClockInitStruct->USART_Clock)); + assert_param(IS_USART_CPOL(USART_ClockInitStruct->USART_CPOL)); + assert_param(IS_USART_CPHA(USART_ClockInitStruct->USART_CPHA)); + assert_param(IS_USART_LASTBIT(USART_ClockInitStruct->USART_LastBit)); + +/*---------------------------- USART CR2 Configuration -----------------------*/ + tmpreg = USARTx->CR2; + /* Clear CLKEN, CPOL, CPHA and LBCL bits */ + tmpreg &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)CR2_CLOCK_CLEAR_MASK); + /* Configure the USART Clock, CPOL, CPHA and LastBit ------------*/ + /* Set CLKEN bit according to USART_Clock value */ + /* Set CPOL bit according to USART_CPOL value */ + /* Set CPHA bit according to USART_CPHA value */ + /* Set LBCL bit according to USART_LastBit value */ + tmpreg |= (uint32_t)USART_ClockInitStruct->USART_Clock | USART_ClockInitStruct->USART_CPOL | + USART_ClockInitStruct->USART_CPHA | USART_ClockInitStruct->USART_LastBit; + /* Write to USART CR2 */ + USARTx->CR2 = (uint16_t)tmpreg; +} + +/** + * @brief Fills each USART_ClockInitStruct member with its default value. + * @param USART_ClockInitStruct: pointer to a USART_ClockInitTypeDef + * structure which will be initialized. + * @retval None + */ +void USART_ClockStructInit(USART_ClockInitTypeDef* USART_ClockInitStruct) +{ + /* USART_ClockInitStruct members default value */ + USART_ClockInitStruct->USART_Clock = USART_Clock_Disable; + USART_ClockInitStruct->USART_CPOL = USART_CPOL_Low; + USART_ClockInitStruct->USART_CPHA = USART_CPHA_1Edge; + USART_ClockInitStruct->USART_LastBit = USART_LastBit_Disable; +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the specified USART peripheral. + * @param USARTx: Select the USART peripheral. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * USART1, USART2, USART3, UART4 or UART5. + * @param NewState: new state of the USARTx peripheral. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None. + */ +void USART_Cmd(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the selected USART by setting the UE bit in the CR1 register */ + USARTx->CR1 |= USART_CR1_UE; + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected USART by clearing the UE bit in the CR1 register */ + USARTx->CR1 &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)USART_CR1_UE); + } +} + +/** + * @brief Sets the system clock prescaler. + * @param USARTx: Select the USART peripheral. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * USART1, USART2, USART3, UART4 or UART5. + * @param USART_Prescaler: specifies the prescaler clock. + * @note The function is used for IrDA mode with UART4 and UART5. + * @retval None. + */ +void USART_SetPrescaler(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint8_t USART_Prescaler) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx)); + + /* Clear the USART prescaler */ + USARTx->GTPR &= USART_GTPR_GT; + /* Set the USART prescaler */ + USARTx->GTPR |= USART_Prescaler; +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the USART's 8x oversampling mode. + * @param USARTx: Select the USART peripheral. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * USART1, USART2, USART3, UART4 or UART5. + * @param NewState: new state of the USART 8x oversampling mode. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * + * @note + * This function has to be called before calling USART_Init() + * function in order to have correct baudrate Divider value. + * @retval None + */ +void USART_OverSampling8Cmd(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the 8x Oversampling mode by setting the OVER8 bit in the CR1 register */ + USARTx->CR1 |= USART_CR1_OVER8; + } + else + { + /* Disable the 8x Oversampling mode by clearing the OVER8 bit in the CR1 register */ + USARTx->CR1 &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)USART_CR1_OVER8); + } +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the USART's one bit sampling method. + * @param USARTx: Select the USART peripheral. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * USART1, USART2, USART3, UART4 or UART5. + * @param NewState: new state of the USART one bit sampling method. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None. + */ +void USART_OneBitMethodCmd(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the one bit method by setting the ONEBITE bit in the CR3 register */ + USARTx->CR3 |= USART_CR3_ONEBIT; + } + else + { + /* Disable the one bit method by clearing the ONEBITE bit in the CR3 register */ + USARTx->CR3 &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)USART_CR3_ONEBIT); + } +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup USART_Group2 Data transfers functions + * @brief Data transfers functions + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### Data transfers functions ##### + =============================================================================== + [..] This subsection provides a set of functions allowing to manage + the USART data transfers. + [..] During an USART reception, data shifts in least significant bit first + through the RX pin. In this mode, the USART_DR register consists of + a buffer (RDR) between the internal bus and the received shift register. + When a transmission is taking place, a write instruction to + the USART_DR register stores the data in the TDR register and which is + copied in the shift register at the end of the current transmission. + [..] The read access of the USART_DR register can be done using + the USART_ReceiveData() function and returns the RDR buffered value. + Whereas a write access to the USART_DR can be done using USART_SendData() + function and stores the written data into TDR buffer. + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Transmits single data through the USARTx peripheral. + * @param USARTx: Select the USART peripheral. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * USART1, USART2, USART3, UART4 or UART5. + * @param Data: the data to transmit. + * @retval None. + */ +void USART_SendData(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint16_t Data) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx)); + assert_param(IS_USART_DATA(Data)); + + /* Transmit Data */ + USARTx->DR = (Data & (uint16_t)0x01FF); +} + +/** + * @brief Returns the most recent received data by the USARTx peripheral. + * @param USARTx: Select the USART peripheral. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * USART1, USART2, USART3, UART4 or UART5. + * @retval The received data. + */ +uint16_t USART_ReceiveData(USART_TypeDef* USARTx) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx)); + + /* Receive Data */ + return (uint16_t)(USARTx->DR & (uint16_t)0x01FF); +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup USART_Group3 MultiProcessor Communication functions + * @brief Multi-Processor Communication functions + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### Multi-Processor Communication functions ##### + =============================================================================== + [..] This subsection provides a set of functions allowing to manage the USART + multiprocessor communication. + [..] For instance one of the USARTs can be the master, its TX output is + connected to the RX input of the other USART. The others are slaves, + their respective TX outputs are logically ANDed together and connected + to the RX input of the master. USART multiprocessor communication is + possible through the following procedure: + (#) Program the Baud rate, Word length = 9 bits, Stop bits, Parity, + Mode transmitter or Mode receiver and hardware flow control values + using the USART_Init() function. + (#) Configures the USART address using the USART_SetAddress() function. + (#) Configures the wake up methode (USART_WakeUp_IdleLine or + USART_WakeUp_AddressMark) using USART_WakeUpConfig() function only + for the slaves. + (#) Enable the USART using the USART_Cmd() function. + (#) Enter the USART slaves in mute mode using USART_ReceiverWakeUpCmd() + function. + + [..] The USART Slave exit from mute mode when receive the wake up condition. + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Sets the address of the USART node. + * @param USARTx: Select the USART peripheral. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * USART1, USART2, USART3, UART4 or UART5. + * @param USART_Address: Indicates the address of the USART node. + * @retval None + */ +void USART_SetAddress(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint8_t USART_Address) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx)); + assert_param(IS_USART_ADDRESS(USART_Address)); + + /* Clear the USART address */ + USARTx->CR2 &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)USART_CR2_ADD); + /* Set the USART address node */ + USARTx->CR2 |= USART_Address; +} + +/** + * @brief Determines if the USART is in mute mode or not. + * @param USARTx: Select the USART peripheral. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * USART1, USART2, USART3, UART4 or UART5. + * @param NewState: new state of the USART mute mode. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void USART_ReceiverWakeUpCmd(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the USART mute mode by setting the RWU bit in the CR1 register */ + USARTx->CR1 |= USART_CR1_RWU; + } + else + { + /* Disable the USART mute mode by clearing the RWU bit in the CR1 register */ + USARTx->CR1 &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)USART_CR1_RWU); + } +} +/** + * @brief Selects the USART WakeUp method. + * @param USARTx: Select the USART peripheral. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * USART1, USART2, USART3, UART4 or UART5. + * @param USART_WakeUp: specifies the USART wakeup method. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg USART_WakeUp_IdleLine: WakeUp by an idle line detection. + * @arg USART_WakeUp_AddressMark: WakeUp by an address mark. + * @retval None. + */ +void USART_WakeUpConfig(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint16_t USART_WakeUp) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx)); + assert_param(IS_USART_WAKEUP(USART_WakeUp)); + + USARTx->CR1 &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)USART_CR1_WAKE); + USARTx->CR1 |= USART_WakeUp; +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup USART_Group4 LIN mode functions + * @brief LIN mode functions + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### LIN mode functions ##### + =============================================================================== + [..] This subsection provides a set of functions allowing to manage the USART + LIN Mode communication. + [..] In LIN mode, 8-bit data format with 1 stop bit is required in accordance + with the LIN standard. + [..] Only this LIN Feature is supported by the USART IP: + (+) LIN Master Synchronous Break send capability and LIN slave break + detection capability : 13-bit break generation and 10/11 bit break + detection. + [..] USART LIN Master transmitter communication is possible through the + following procedure: + (#) Program the Baud rate, Word length = 8bits, Stop bits = 1bit, Parity, + Mode transmitter or Mode receiver and hardware flow control values + using the USART_Init() function. + (#) Enable the USART using the USART_Cmd() function. + (#) Enable the LIN mode using the USART_LINCmd() function. + (#) Send the break character using USART_SendBreak() function. + [..] USART LIN Master receiver communication is possible through the + following procedure: + (#) Program the Baud rate, Word length = 8bits, Stop bits = 1bit, Parity, + Mode transmitter or Mode receiver and hardware flow control values + using the USART_Init() function. + (#) Enable the USART using the USART_Cmd() function. + (#) Configures the break detection length + using the USART_LINBreakDetectLengthConfig() function. + (#) Enable the LIN mode using the USART_LINCmd() function. + -@- In LIN mode, the following bits must be kept cleared: + (+@) CLKEN in the USART_CR2 register. + (+@) STOP[1:0], SCEN, HDSEL and IREN in the USART_CR3 register. + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Sets the USART LIN Break detection length. + * @param USARTx: Select the USART peripheral. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * USART1, USART2, USART3, UART4 or UART5. + * @param USART_LINBreakDetectLength: specifies the LIN break detection length. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg USART_LINBreakDetectLength_10b: 10-bit break detection. + * @arg USART_LINBreakDetectLength_11b: 11-bit break detection. + * @retval None. + */ +void USART_LINBreakDetectLengthConfig(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint16_t USART_LINBreakDetectLength) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx)); + assert_param(IS_USART_LIN_BREAK_DETECT_LENGTH(USART_LINBreakDetectLength)); + + USARTx->CR2 &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)USART_CR2_LBDL); + USARTx->CR2 |= USART_LINBreakDetectLength; +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the USART's LIN mode. + * @param USARTx: Select the USART peripheral. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * USART1, USART2, USART3, UART4 or UART5. + * @param NewState: new state of the USART LIN mode. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None. + */ +void USART_LINCmd(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the LIN mode by setting the LINEN bit in the CR2 register */ + USARTx->CR2 |= USART_CR2_LINEN; + } + else + { + /* Disable the LIN mode by clearing the LINEN bit in the CR2 register */ + USARTx->CR2 &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)USART_CR2_LINEN); + } +} + +/** + * @brief Transmits break characters. + * @param USARTx: Select the USART peripheral. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * USART1, USART2, USART3, UART4 or UART5. + * @retval None. + */ +void USART_SendBreak(USART_TypeDef* USARTx) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx)); + + /* Send break characters */ + USARTx->CR1 |= USART_CR1_SBK; +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup USART_Group5 Halfduplex mode function + * @brief Half-duplex mode function + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### Half-duplex mode function ##### + =============================================================================== + [..] This subsection provides a set of functions allowing to manage the USART + Half-duplex communication. + [..] The USART can be configured to follow a single-wire half-duplex protocol + where the TX and RX lines are internally connected. + [..] USART Half duplex communication is possible through the following procedure: + (#) Program the Baud rate, Word length, Stop bits, Parity, Mode transmitter + or Mode receiver and hardware flow control values using the USART_Init() + function. + (#) Configures the USART address using the USART_SetAddress() function. + (#) Enable the USART using the USART_Cmd() function. + (#) Enable the half duplex mode using USART_HalfDuplexCmd() function. + -@- The RX pin is no longer used. + -@- In Half-duplex mode the following bits must be kept cleared: + (+@) LINEN and CLKEN bits in the USART_CR2 register. + (+@) SCEN and IREN bits in the USART_CR3 register. + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the USART's Half Duplex communication. + * @param USARTx: Select the USART peripheral. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * USART1, USART2, USART3, UART4 or UART5. + * @param NewState: new state of the USART Communication. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void USART_HalfDuplexCmd(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the Half-Duplex mode by setting the HDSEL bit in the CR3 register */ + USARTx->CR3 |= USART_CR3_HDSEL; + } + else + { + /* Disable the Half-Duplex mode by clearing the HDSEL bit in the CR3 register */ + USARTx->CR3 &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)USART_CR3_HDSEL); + } +} + +/** + * @} + */ + + +/** @defgroup USART_Group6 Smartcard mode functions + * @brief Smartcard mode functions + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### Smartcard mode functions ##### + =============================================================================== + [..] This subsection provides a set of functions allowing to manage the USART + Smartcard communication. + [..] The Smartcard interface is designed to support asynchronous protocol + Smartcards as defined in the ISO 7816-3 standard. The USART can provide + a clock to the smartcard through the SCLK output. In smartcard mode, + SCLK is not associated to the communication but is simply derived from + the internal peripheral input clock through a 5-bit prescaler. + [..] Smartcard communication is possible through the following procedure: + (#) Configures the Smartcard Prsecaler using the USART_SetPrescaler() + function. + (#) Configures the Smartcard Guard Time using the USART_SetGuardTime() + function. + (#) Program the USART clock using the USART_ClockInit() function as following: + (++) USART Clock enabled. + (++) USART CPOL Low. + (++) USART CPHA on first edge. + (++) USART Last Bit Clock Enabled. + (#) Program the Smartcard interface using the USART_Init() function as + following: + (++) Word Length = 9 Bits. + (++) 1.5 Stop Bit. + (++) Even parity. + (++) BaudRate = 12096 baud. + (++) Hardware flow control disabled (RTS and CTS signals). + (++) Tx and Rx enabled + (#) Optionally you can enable the parity error interrupt using + the USART_ITConfig() function. + (#) Enable the USART using the USART_Cmd() function. + (#) Enable the Smartcard NACK using the USART_SmartCardNACKCmd() function. + (#) Enable the Smartcard interface using the USART_SmartCardCmd() function. + [..] + Please refer to the ISO 7816-3 specification for more details. + [..] + (@) It is also possible to choose 0.5 stop bit for receiving but it is + recommended to use 1.5 stop bits for both transmitting and receiving + to avoid switching between the two configurations. + (@) In smartcard mode, the following bits must be kept cleared: + (+@) LINEN bit in the USART_CR2 register. + (+@) HDSEL and IREN bits in the USART_CR3 register. + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Sets the specified USART guard time. + * @param USARTx: Select the USART peripheral. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * USART1, USART2 or USART3. + * @param USART_GuardTime: specifies the guard time. + * @retval None. + */ +void USART_SetGuardTime(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint8_t USART_GuardTime) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_USART_123_PERIPH(USARTx)); + + /* Clear the USART Guard time */ + USARTx->GTPR &= USART_GTPR_PSC; + /* Set the USART guard time */ + USARTx->GTPR |= (uint16_t)((uint16_t)USART_GuardTime << 0x08); +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the USART's Smart Card mode. + * @param USARTx: Select the USART peripheral. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * USART1, USART2 or USART3. + * @param NewState: new state of the Smart Card mode. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void USART_SmartCardCmd(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_USART_123_PERIPH(USARTx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the SC mode by setting the SCEN bit in the CR3 register */ + USARTx->CR3 |= USART_CR3_SCEN; + } + else + { + /* Disable the SC mode by clearing the SCEN bit in the CR3 register */ + USARTx->CR3 &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)USART_CR3_SCEN); + } +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables NACK transmission. + * @param USARTx: Select the USART peripheral. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * USART1, USART2 or USART3. + * @param NewState: new state of the NACK transmission. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None. + */ +void USART_SmartCardNACKCmd(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_USART_123_PERIPH(USARTx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the NACK transmission by setting the NACK bit in the CR3 register */ + USARTx->CR3 |= USART_CR3_NACK; + } + else + { + /* Disable the NACK transmission by clearing the NACK bit in the CR3 register */ + USARTx->CR3 &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)USART_CR3_NACK); + } +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup USART_Group7 IrDA mode functions + * @brief IrDA mode functions + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### IrDA mode functions ##### + =============================================================================== + [..] This subsection provides a set of functions allowing to manage the USART + IrDA communication. + [..] IrDA is a half duplex communication protocol. If the Transmitter is busy, + any data on the IrDA receive line will be ignored by the IrDA decoder + and if the Receiver is busy, data on the TX from the USART to IrDA will + not be encoded by IrDA. While receiving data, transmission should be + avoided as the data to be transmitted could be corrupted. + + [..] IrDA communication is possible through the following procedure: + (#) Program the Baud rate, Word length = 8 bits, Stop bits, Parity, + Transmitter/Receiver modes and hardware flow control values using + the USART_Init() function. + (#) Enable the USART using the USART_Cmd() function. + (#) Configures the IrDA pulse width by configuring the prescaler using + the USART_SetPrescaler() function. + (#) Configures the IrDA USART_IrDAMode_LowPower or USART_IrDAMode_Normal + mode using the USART_IrDAConfig() function. + (#) Enable the IrDA using the USART_IrDACmd() function. + + [..] + (@) A pulse of width less than two and greater than one PSC period(s) may or + may not be rejected. + (@) The receiver set up time should be managed by software. The IrDA physical + layer specification specifies a minimum of 10 ms delay between + transmission and reception (IrDA is a half duplex protocol). + (@) In IrDA mode, the following bits must be kept cleared: + (+@) LINEN, STOP and CLKEN bits in the USART_CR2 register. + (+@) SCEN and HDSEL bits in the USART_CR3 register. + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Configures the USART's IrDA interface. + * @param USARTx: Select the USART peripheral. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * USART1, USART2, USART3, UART4 or UART5. + * @param USART_IrDAMode: specifies the IrDA mode. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg USART_IrDAMode_LowPower: USART IrDA Low Power mode selected. + * @arg USART_IrDAMode_Normal: USART IrDA Normal mode selected. + * @retval None + */ +void USART_IrDAConfig(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint16_t USART_IrDAMode) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx)); + assert_param(IS_USART_IRDA_MODE(USART_IrDAMode)); + + USARTx->CR3 &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)USART_CR3_IRLP); + USARTx->CR3 |= USART_IrDAMode; +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the USART's IrDA interface. + * @param USARTx: Select the USART peripheral. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * USART1, USART2, USART3, UART4 or UART5. + * @param NewState: new state of the IrDA mode. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void USART_IrDACmd(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the IrDA mode by setting the IREN bit in the CR3 register */ + USARTx->CR3 |= USART_CR3_IREN; + } + else + { + /* Disable the IrDA mode by clearing the IREN bit in the CR3 register */ + USARTx->CR3 &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)USART_CR3_IREN); + } +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup USART_Group8 DMA transfers management functions + * @brief DMA transfers management functions + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### DMA transfers management functions ##### + =============================================================================== + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the USART's DMA interface. + * @param USARTx: Select the USART peripheral. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * USART1, USART2, USART3, UART4 or UART5. + * @param USART_DMAReq: specifies the DMA request. + * This parameter can be any combination of the following values: + * @arg USART_DMAReq_Tx: USART DMA transmit request. + * @arg USART_DMAReq_Rx: USART DMA receive request. + * @param NewState: new state of the DMA Request sources. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void USART_DMACmd(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint16_t USART_DMAReq, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx)); + assert_param(IS_USART_DMAREQ(USART_DMAReq)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the DMA transfer for selected requests by setting the DMAT and/or + DMAR bits in the USART CR3 register */ + USARTx->CR3 |= USART_DMAReq; + } + else + { + /* Disable the DMA transfer for selected requests by clearing the DMAT and/or + DMAR bits in the USART CR3 register */ + USARTx->CR3 &= (uint16_t)~USART_DMAReq; + } +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup USART_Group9 Interrupts and flags management functions + * @brief Interrupts and flags management functions + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### Interrupts and flags management functions ##### + =============================================================================== + [..] This subsection provides a set of functions allowing to configure the + USART Interrupts sources, DMA channels requests and check or clear the + flags or pending bits status. The user should identify which mode will + be used in his application to manage the communication: Polling mode, + Interrupt mode or DMA mode. + *** Polling Mode *** + ==================== + [..] In Polling Mode, the SPI communication can be managed by 10 flags: + (#) USART_FLAG_TXE: to indicate the status of the transmit buffer register. + (#) USART_FLAG_RXNE: to indicate the status of the receive buffer register. + (#) USART_FLAG_TC: to indicate the status of the transmit operation. + (#) USART_FLAG_IDLE: to indicate the status of the Idle Line. + (#) USART_FLAG_CTS: to indicate the status of the nCTS input. + (#) USART_FLAG_LBD: to indicate the status of the LIN break detection. + (#) USART_FLAG_NE: to indicate if a noise error occur. + (#) USART_FLAG_FE: to indicate if a frame error occur. + (#) USART_FLAG_PE: to indicate if a parity error occur. + (#) USART_FLAG_ORE: to indicate if an Overrun error occur. + [..] In this Mode it is advised to use the following functions: + (+) FlagStatus USART_GetFlagStatus(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint16_t USART_FLAG). + (+) void USART_ClearFlag(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint16_t USART_FLAG). + + *** Interrupt Mode *** + ====================== + [..] In Interrupt Mode, the USART communication can be managed by 8 interrupt + sources and 10 pending bits: + (+) Pending Bits: + (##) USART_IT_TXE: to indicate the status of the transmit buffer + register. + (##) USART_IT_RXNE: to indicate the status of the receive buffer + register. + (##) USART_IT_TC: to indicate the status of the transmit operation. + (##) USART_IT_IDLE: to indicate the status of the Idle Line. + (##) USART_IT_CTS: to indicate the status of the nCTS input. + (##) USART_IT_LBD: to indicate the status of the LIN break detection. + (##) USART_IT_NE: to indicate if a noise error occur. + (##) USART_IT_FE: to indicate if a frame error occur. + (##) USART_IT_PE: to indicate if a parity error occur. + (##) USART_IT_ORE: to indicate if an Overrun error occur + (if the RXNEIE or EIE bits are set). + + (+) Interrupt Source: + (##) USART_IT_TXE: specifies the interrupt source for the Tx buffer + empty interrupt. + (##) USART_IT_RXNE: specifies the interrupt source for the Rx buffer + not empty interrupt. + (##) USART_IT_TC: specifies the interrupt source for the Transmit + complete interrupt. + (##) USART_IT_IDLE: specifies the interrupt source for the Idle Line + interrupt. + (##) USART_IT_CTS: specifies the interrupt source for the CTS interrupt. + (##) USART_IT_LBD: specifies the interrupt source for the LIN break + detection interrupt. + (##) USART_IT_PE: specifies the interrupt source for theparity error + interrupt. + (##) USART_IT_ERR: specifies the interrupt source for the errors + interrupt. + -@@- Some parameters are coded in order to use them as interrupt + source or as pending bits. + [..] In this Mode it is advised to use the following functions: + (+) void USART_ITConfig(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint16_t USART_IT, + FunctionalState NewState). + (+) ITStatus USART_GetITStatus(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint16_t USART_IT). + (+) void USART_ClearITPendingBit(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint16_t USART_IT). + + *** DMA Mode *** + ================ + [..] In DMA Mode, the USART communication can be managed by 2 DMA Channel + requests: + (#) USART_DMAReq_Tx: specifies the Tx buffer DMA transfer request. + (#) USART_DMAReq_Rx: specifies the Rx buffer DMA transfer request. + [..] In this Mode it is advised to use the following function: + (+) void USART_DMACmd(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint16_t USART_DMAReq, + FunctionalState NewState). +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the specified USART interrupts. + * @param USARTx: Select the USART peripheral. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * USART1, USART2, USART3, UART4 or UART5. + * @param USART_IT: specifies the USART interrupt sources to be enabled or disabled. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg USART_IT_CTS: CTS change interrupt. + * @arg USART_IT_LBD: LIN Break detection interrupt. + * @arg USART_IT_TXE: Tansmit Data Register empty interrupt. + * @arg USART_IT_TC: Transmission complete interrupt. + * @arg USART_IT_RXNE: Receive Data register not empty interrupt. + * @arg USART_IT_IDLE: Idle line detection interrupt. + * @arg USART_IT_PE: Parity Error interrupt. + * @arg USART_IT_ERR: Error interrupt(Frame error, noise error, overrun error). + * @param NewState: new state of the specified USARTx interrupts. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None. + */ +void USART_ITConfig(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint16_t USART_IT, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + uint32_t usartreg = 0x00, itpos = 0x00, itmask = 0x00; + uint32_t usartxbase = 0x00; + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx)); + assert_param(IS_USART_CONFIG_IT(USART_IT)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + /* The CTS interrupt is not available for UART4 and UART5 */ + if (USART_IT == USART_IT_CTS) + { + assert_param(IS_USART_123_PERIPH(USARTx)); + } + + usartxbase = (uint32_t)USARTx; + + /* Get the USART register index */ + usartreg = (((uint8_t)USART_IT) >> 0x05); + + /* Get the interrupt position */ + itpos = USART_IT & IT_MASK; + itmask = (((uint32_t)0x01) << itpos); + + if (usartreg == 0x01) /* The IT is in CR1 register */ + { + usartxbase += 0x0C; + } + else if (usartreg == 0x02) /* The IT is in CR2 register */ + { + usartxbase += 0x10; + } + else /* The IT is in CR3 register */ + { + usartxbase += 0x14; + } + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + *(__IO uint32_t*)usartxbase |= itmask; + } + else + { + *(__IO uint32_t*)usartxbase &= ~itmask; + } +} + +/** + * @brief Checks whether the specified USART flag is set or not. + * @param USARTx: Select the USART peripheral. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * USART1, USART2, USART3, UART4 or UART5. + * @param USART_FLAG: specifies the flag to check. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg USART_FLAG_CTS: CTS Change flag (not available for UART4 and UART5). + * @arg USART_FLAG_LBD: LIN Break detection flag. + * @arg USART_FLAG_TXE: Transmit data register empty flag. + * @arg USART_FLAG_TC: Transmission Complete flag. + * @arg USART_FLAG_RXNE: Receive data register not empty flag. + * @arg USART_FLAG_IDLE: Idle Line detection flag. + * @arg USART_FLAG_ORE: OverRun Error flag. + * @arg USART_FLAG_NE: Noise Error flag. + * @arg USART_FLAG_FE: Framing Error flag. + * @arg USART_FLAG_PE: Parity Error flag. + * @retval The new state of USART_FLAG (SET or RESET). + */ +FlagStatus USART_GetFlagStatus(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint16_t USART_FLAG) +{ + FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET; + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx)); + assert_param(IS_USART_FLAG(USART_FLAG)); + + /* The CTS flag is not available for UART4 and UART5 */ + if (USART_FLAG == USART_FLAG_CTS) + { + assert_param(IS_USART_123_PERIPH(USARTx)); + } + + if ((USARTx->SR & USART_FLAG) != (uint16_t)RESET) + { + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + bitstatus = RESET; + } + return bitstatus; +} + +/** + * @brief Clears the USARTx's pending flags. + * @param USARTx: Select the USART peripheral. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * USART1, USART2, USART3, UART4 or UART5. + * @param USART_FLAG: specifies the flag to clear. + * This parameter can be any combination of the following values: + * @arg USART_FLAG_CTS: CTS Change flag (not available for UART4 and UART5). + * @arg USART_FLAG_LBD: LIN Break detection flag. + * @arg USART_FLAG_TC: Transmission Complete flag. + * @arg USART_FLAG_RXNE: Receive data register not empty flag. + * + * + * @note PE (Parity error), FE (Framing error), NE (Noise error), ORE (OverRun + * error) and IDLE (Idle line detected) flags are cleared by software + * sequence: a read operation to USART_SR register (USART_GetFlagStatus()) + * followed by a read operation to USART_DR register (USART_ReceiveData()). + * @note RXNE flag can be also cleared by a read to the USART_DR register + * (USART_ReceiveData()). + * @note TC flag can be also cleared by software sequence: a read operation to + * USART_SR register (USART_GetFlagStatus()) followed by a write operation + * to USART_DR register (USART_SendData()). + * @note TXE flag is cleared only by a write to the USART_DR register + * (USART_SendData()). + * @retval None + */ +void USART_ClearFlag(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint16_t USART_FLAG) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx)); + assert_param(IS_USART_CLEAR_FLAG(USART_FLAG)); + + /* The CTS flag is not available for UART4 and UART5 */ + if ((USART_FLAG & USART_FLAG_CTS) == USART_FLAG_CTS) + { + assert_param(IS_USART_123_PERIPH(USARTx)); + } + + USARTx->SR = (uint16_t)~USART_FLAG; +} + +/** + * @brief Checks whether the specified USART interrupt has occurred or not. + * @param USARTx: Select the USART peripheral. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * USART1, USART2, USART3, UART4 or UART5. + * @param USART_IT: specifies the USART interrupt source to check. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg USART_IT_CTS: CTS change interrupt (not available for UART4 and UART5) + * @arg USART_IT_LBD: LIN Break detection interrupt + * @arg USART_IT_TXE: Tansmit Data Register empty interrupt + * @arg USART_IT_TC: Transmission complete interrupt + * @arg USART_IT_RXNE: Receive Data register not empty interrupt + * @arg USART_IT_IDLE: Idle line detection interrupt + * @arg USART_IT_ORE_RX: OverRun Error interrupt if the RXNEIE bit is set. + * @arg USART_IT_ORE_ER: OverRun Error interrupt if the EIE bit is set. + * @arg USART_IT_NE: Noise Error interrupt + * @arg USART_IT_FE: Framing Error interrupt + * @arg USART_IT_PE: Parity Error interrupt + * @retval The new state of USART_IT (SET or RESET). + */ +ITStatus USART_GetITStatus(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint16_t USART_IT) +{ + uint32_t bitpos = 0x00, itmask = 0x00, usartreg = 0x00; + ITStatus bitstatus = RESET; + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx)); + assert_param(IS_USART_GET_IT(USART_IT)); + + /* The CTS interrupt is not available for UART4 and UART5 */ + if (USART_IT == USART_IT_CTS) + { + assert_param(IS_USART_123_PERIPH(USARTx)); + } + + /* Get the USART register index */ + usartreg = (((uint8_t)USART_IT) >> 0x05); + /* Get the interrupt position */ + itmask = USART_IT & IT_MASK; + itmask = (uint32_t)0x01 << itmask; + + if (usartreg == 0x01) /* The IT is in CR1 register */ + { + itmask &= USARTx->CR1; + } + else if (usartreg == 0x02) /* The IT is in CR2 register */ + { + itmask &= USARTx->CR2; + } + else /* The IT is in CR3 register */ + { + itmask &= USARTx->CR3; + } + + bitpos = USART_IT >> 0x08; + bitpos = (uint32_t)0x01 << bitpos; + bitpos &= USARTx->SR; + if ((itmask != (uint16_t)RESET)&&(bitpos != (uint16_t)RESET)) + { + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + bitstatus = RESET; + } + + return bitstatus; +} + +/** + * @brief Clears the USARTx's interrupt pending bits. + * @param USARTx: Select the USART peripheral. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * USART1, USART2, USART3, UART4 or UART5. + * @param USART_IT: specifies the interrupt pending bit to clear. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg USART_IT_CTS: CTS change interrupt (not available for UART4 and UART5) + * @arg USART_IT_LBD: LIN Break detection interrupt + * @arg USART_IT_TC: Transmission complete interrupt. + * @arg USART_IT_RXNE: Receive Data register not empty interrupt. + * + + * @note PE (Parity error), FE (Framing error), NE (Noise error), ORE (OverRun + * error) and IDLE (Idle line detected) pending bits are cleared by + * software sequence: a read operation to USART_SR register + * (USART_GetITStatus()) followed by a read operation to USART_DR register + * (USART_ReceiveData()). + * @note RXNE pending bit can be also cleared by a read to the USART_DR register + * (USART_ReceiveData()). + * @note TC pending bit can be also cleared by software sequence: a read + * operation to USART_SR register (USART_GetITStatus()) followed by a write + * operation to USART_DR register (USART_SendData()). + * @note TXE pending bit is cleared only by a write to the USART_DR register + * (USART_SendData()). + * @retval None + */ +void USART_ClearITPendingBit(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint16_t USART_IT) +{ + uint16_t bitpos = 0x00, itmask = 0x00; + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx)); + assert_param(IS_USART_CLEAR_IT(USART_IT)); + + /* The CTS interrupt is not available for UART4 and UART5 */ + if (USART_IT == USART_IT_CTS) + { + assert_param(IS_USART_123_PERIPH(USARTx)); + } + + bitpos = USART_IT >> 0x08; + itmask = ((uint16_t)0x01 << (uint16_t)bitpos); + USARTx->SR = (uint16_t)~itmask; +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/ diff --git a/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32l1xx_wwdg.c b/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32l1xx_wwdg.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ad49a04 --- /dev/null +++ b/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32l1xx_wwdg.c @@ -0,0 +1,313 @@ +/** + ****************************************************************************** + * @file stm32l1xx_wwdg.c + * @author MCD Application Team + * @version V1.1.1 + * @date 05-March-2012 + * @brief This file provides firmware functions to manage the following + * functionalities of the Window watchdog (WWDG) peripheral: + * + Prescaler, Refresh window and Counter configuration + * + WWDG activation + * + Interrupts and flags management + * + * @verbatim + * + ============================================================================== + ##### WWDG features ##### + ============================================================================== + [..] Once enabled the WWDG generates a system reset on expiry of a programmed + time period, unless the program refreshes the counter (downcounter) + before to reach 0x3F value (i.e. a reset is generated when the counter + value rolls over from 0x40 to 0x3F). + [..] An MCU reset is also generated if the counter value is refreshed + before the counter has reached the refresh window value. This + implies that the counter must be refreshed in a limited window. + + [..] Once enabled the WWDG cannot be disabled except by a system reset. + + [..] WWDGRST flag in RCC_CSR register can be used to inform when a WWDG + reset occurs. + + [..] The WWDG counter input clock is derived from the APB clock divided + by a programmable prescaler. + + [..] WWDG counter clock = PCLK1 / Prescaler. + [..] WWDG timeout = (WWDG counter clock) * (counter value). + + [..] Min-max timeout value @32MHz (PCLK1): ~128us / ~65.6ms. + + ##### How to use this driver ##### + ============================================================================== + [..] + (#) Enable WWDG clock using RCC_APB1PeriphClockCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_WWDG, ENABLE) + function. + + (#) Configure the WWDG prescaler using WWDG_SetPrescaler() function. + + (#) Configure the WWDG refresh window using WWDG_SetWindowValue() function. + + (#) Set the WWDG counter value and start it using WWDG_Enable() function. + When the WWDG is enabled the counter value should be configured to + a value greater than 0x40 to prevent generating an immediate reset. + + (#) Optionally you can enable the Early wakeup interrupt which is + generated when the counter reach 0x40. + Once enabled this interrupt cannot be disabled except by a system reset. + + (#) Then the application program must refresh the WWDG counter at regular + intervals during normal operation to prevent an MCU reset, using + WWDG_SetCounter() function. This operation must occur only when + the counter value is lower than the refresh window value, + programmed using WWDG_SetWindowValue(). + + * @endverbatim + * + ****************************************************************************** + * @attention + * + * <h2><center>© COPYRIGHT 2012 STMicroelectronics</center></h2> + * + * Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License"); + * You may not use this file except in compliance with the License. + * You may obtain a copy of the License at: + * + * http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2 + * + * Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software + * distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS, + * WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. + * See the License for the specific language governing permissions and + * limitations under the License. + * + ****************************************************************************** + */ + +/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#include "stm32l1xx_wwdg.h" +#include "stm32l1xx_rcc.h" + +/** @addtogroup STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver + * @{ + */ + +/** @defgroup WWDG + * @brief WWDG driver modules + * @{ + */ + +/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +/* ----------- WWDG registers bit address in the alias region ----------- */ +#define WWDG_OFFSET (WWDG_BASE - PERIPH_BASE) + +/* Alias word address of EWI bit */ +#define CFR_OFFSET (WWDG_OFFSET + 0x04) +#define EWI_BitNumber 0x09 +#define CFR_EWI_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (CFR_OFFSET * 32) + (EWI_BitNumber * 4)) + +/* --------------------- WWDG registers bit mask ------------------------ */ + +/* CFR register bit mask */ +#define CFR_WDGTB_MASK ((uint32_t)0xFFFFFE7F) +#define CFR_W_MASK ((uint32_t)0xFFFFFF80) +#define BIT_MASK ((uint8_t)0x7F) + +/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/ + +/** @defgroup WWDG_Private_Functions + * @{ + */ + +/** @defgroup WWDG_Group1 Prescaler, Refresh window and Counter configuration functions + * @brief Prescaler, Refresh window and Counter configuration functions + * +@verbatim + ============================================================================== + ##### Prescaler, Refresh window and Counter configuration functions ##### + ============================================================================== + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Deinitializes the WWDG peripheral registers to their default reset values. + * @param None + * @retval None + */ +void WWDG_DeInit(void) +{ + RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_WWDG, ENABLE); + RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_WWDG, DISABLE); +} + +/** + * @brief Sets the WWDG Prescaler. + * @param WWDG_Prescaler: specifies the WWDG Prescaler. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg WWDG_Prescaler_1: WWDG counter clock = (PCLK1/4096)/1 + * @arg WWDG_Prescaler_2: WWDG counter clock = (PCLK1/4096)/2 + * @arg WWDG_Prescaler_4: WWDG counter clock = (PCLK1/4096)/4 + * @arg WWDG_Prescaler_8: WWDG counter clock = (PCLK1/4096)/8 + * @retval None + */ +void WWDG_SetPrescaler(uint32_t WWDG_Prescaler) +{ + uint32_t tmpreg = 0; + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_WWDG_PRESCALER(WWDG_Prescaler)); + /* Clear WDGTB[1:0] bits */ + tmpreg = WWDG->CFR & CFR_WDGTB_MASK; + /* Set WDGTB[1:0] bits according to WWDG_Prescaler value */ + tmpreg |= WWDG_Prescaler; + /* Store the new value */ + WWDG->CFR = tmpreg; +} + +/** + * @brief Sets the WWDG window value. + * @param WindowValue: specifies the window value to be compared to the downcounter. + * This parameter value must be lower than 0x80. + * @retval None + */ +void WWDG_SetWindowValue(uint8_t WindowValue) +{ + __IO uint32_t tmpreg = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_WWDG_WINDOW_VALUE(WindowValue)); + /* Clear W[6:0] bits */ + + tmpreg = WWDG->CFR & CFR_W_MASK; + + /* Set W[6:0] bits according to WindowValue value */ + tmpreg |= WindowValue & (uint32_t) BIT_MASK; + + /* Store the new value */ + WWDG->CFR = tmpreg; +} + +/** + * @brief Enables the WWDG Early Wakeup interrupt(EWI). + * @note Once enabled this interrupt cannot be disabled except by a system reset. + * @param None + * @retval None + */ +void WWDG_EnableIT(void) +{ + *(__IO uint32_t *) CFR_EWI_BB = (uint32_t)ENABLE; +} + +/** + * @brief Sets the WWDG counter value. + * @param Counter: specifies the watchdog counter value. + * This parameter must be a number between 0x40 and 0x7F (to prevent generating + * an immediate reset). + * @retval None + */ +void WWDG_SetCounter(uint8_t Counter) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_WWDG_COUNTER(Counter)); + /* Write to T[6:0] bits to configure the counter value, no need to do + a read-modify-write; writing a 0 to WDGA bit does nothing */ + WWDG->CR = Counter & BIT_MASK; +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup WWDG_Group2 WWDG activation functions + * @brief WWDG activation functions + * +@verbatim + ============================================================================== + ##### WWDG activation function ##### + ============================================================================== + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Enables WWDG and load the counter value. + * @param Counter: specifies the watchdog counter value. + * This parameter must be a number between 0x40 and 0x7F (to prevent generating + * an immediate reset). + * @retval None + */ +void WWDG_Enable(uint8_t Counter) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_WWDG_COUNTER(Counter)); + WWDG->CR = WWDG_CR_WDGA | Counter; +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup WWDG_Group3 Interrupts and flags management functions + * @brief Interrupts and flags management functions + * +@verbatim + ============================================================================== + ##### Interrupts and flags management functions ##### + ============================================================================== + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Checks whether the Early Wakeup interrupt flag is set or not. + * @param None + * @retval The new state of the Early Wakeup interrupt flag (SET or RESET). + */ +FlagStatus WWDG_GetFlagStatus(void) +{ + FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET; + + if ((WWDG->SR) != (uint32_t)RESET) + { + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + bitstatus = RESET; + } + return bitstatus; +} + +/** + * @brief Clears Early Wakeup interrupt flag. + * @param None + * @retval None + */ +void WWDG_ClearFlag(void) +{ + WWDG->SR = (uint32_t)RESET; +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/ |